dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

A Few Words About Safety
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Service Information
The service and repair information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified, professional technicians. Attempting
service or repairs without the proper training, tools, and equipment could cause injury to you or others. It could also damage the
vehicle or create an unsafe condition.
This manual describes the proper methods and procedures for performing service, maintenance and repairs. Some procedures
require the use of specially designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person who intends to use a replacement part, service
procedure or a tool that is not recommended by Honda, must determine the risks to their personal safety and the safe operation of
the vehicle.
If you need to replace a part, use genuine Honda parts with the correct part number or an equivalent part. We strongly recommend
that you do not use replacement parts of inferior quality.
For Your Customer’s Safety
Proper service and maintenance are essential to the customer’s safety and the reliability of the vehicle. Any error or oversight while
servicing a vehicle can result in faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to others.

Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe

condition that can cause your customer or others to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this
manual and other service materials carefully.

For Your Safety

Because this manual is intended for the professional service technician, we do not provide warnings about many basic shop safety
practices (e.g., Hot parts–wear gloves). If you have not received shop safety training or do not feel confident about your knowledge
of safe servicing practice, we recommend that you do not attempt to perform the procedures described in this manual.
Some of the most important general service safety precautions are given below. However, we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in performing service and repair procedures. Only you can decide whether or not you should
perform a given task.

Failure to properly follow instructions and

precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or
killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this
manual carefully.

Important Safety Precautions

Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic shop safety practices and that you are wearing appropriate clothing and
using safety equipment. When performing any service task, be especially careful of the following:
• Read all of the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools, the replacement or repair parts, and the skills
required to perform the tasks safely and completely.
• Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses, goggles or face shields any time you hammer, drill, grind, pry or work around
pressurized air or liquids, and springs or other stored-energy components. If there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
• Use other protective wear when necessary, for example gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or sharp parts can cause severe
burns or cuts. Before you grab something that looks like it can hurt you, stop and put on gloves.
• Protect yourself and others whenever you have the vehicle up in the air. Any time you lift the vehicle, either with a hoist or a jack,
make sure that it is always securely supported. Use jack stands.
Make sure the engine is off before you begin any servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you to do otherwise. This will
help eliminate several potential hazards:
• Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you run the engine
• Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
• Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers and clothing are out of the way.
Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or explosion, be careful when
working around gasoline or batteries.
• Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.
• Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
• Keep all cigarettes, sparks and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

0-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

How To Use This Manual
This manual describes the service procedures for the NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD-C.
Sections 1, 2 and 3 apply to the whole motorcycle. Section 2 illustrates procedures for removal/installation of components that may
be required to perform service described in the following sections.
Section 4 through 23 describe parts of the motorcycle, grouped according to location.
If you are not familiar with this motorcycle, read Technical Feature in Section 1.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule recommendations to ensure that the motorcycle is in peak operating condition.
Performing the first scheduled maintenance is very important. It compensates for the initial wear that occurs during the break-in
period.
Find the section you want on this page, then turn to the table of contents on the first page of the section.
Most sections start with an assembly or system illustration, service information and troubleshooting for the section. The subsequent
pages give detailed procedure.
Refer to the troubleshooting in each section according to the malfunction or symptom. In case of an engine trouble, refer to PGM-FI
section troubleshooting first.

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help you make informed decisions we have provided safety
messages and other information throughout this manual. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle.
You must use your own good judgement.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms including:
• Safety Labels – on the vehicle
• Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

• Instructions – how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is to help
prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
ALL INFORMATION, ILLUSTRATIONS, DIRECTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS INCLUDED IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE
BASED ON THE LATEST PRODUCT INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF APPROVAL FOR PRINTING. Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE AND WITHOUT
INCURRING ANY OBLIGATION WHATSOEVER. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT
WRITTEN PERMISSION. THIS MANUAL IS WRITTEN FOR PERSONS WHO HAVE ACQUIRED BASIC KNOWLEDGE OF
MAINTENANCE ON Honda MOTORCYCLES, MOTOR SCOOTERS OR ATVS.

© Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

SERVICE PUBLICATION OFFICE
Date of Issue: February 2012

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

0-2
 dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

SYMBOLS
The symbols used throughout this manual show specific service procedures. If supplementary information is required pertaining to
these symbols, it would be explained specifically in the text without the use of the symbols.

Replace the part(s) with new one(s) before assembly.

Use the recommended engine oil, unless otherwise specified.

Use molybdenum oil solution (mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum grease in a ratio of 1:1).

Use multi-purpose grease (lithium based multi-purpose grease NLGI #2 or equivalent).

Use molybdenum disulfide grease (containing more than 3% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example:
• Molykote® BR-2 plus manufactured by Dow Corning U.S.A.
• Multi-purpose M-2 manufactured by Mitsubishi Oil, Japan
Use molybdenum disulfide paste (containing more than 40% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example:
• Molykote® G-n Paste manufactured by Dow Corning U.S.A.
• Honda Moly 60 (U.S.A. only)
• Rocol ASP manufactured by Rocol Limited, U.K.
• Rocol Paste manufactured by Sumico Lubricant, Japan

Use silicone grease.

Apply locking agent. Use a medium strength locking agent unless otherwise specified.

Apply sealant.

Use DOT 4 brake fluid. Use the recommended brake fluid unless otherwise specified.

Use fork or suspension fluid.

0-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM 2
MAINTENANCE 3
PGM-FI SYSTEM 4
IGNITION SYSTEM 5
ENGINE/DRIVE TRAIN ELECTRICAL
ELECTRIC STARTER 6
FUEL SYSTEM 7
COOLING SYSTEM 8
LUBRICATION SYSTEM 9
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES 10
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA) 11
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD) 12
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH 13
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER 14
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER 15
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 16
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING 17
CHASSIS

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION 18
HYDRAULIC BRAKE 19
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) 20
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM 21
ELECTRICAL

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
FRAME

22
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) 23
WIRING DIAGRAM 24
INDEX

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

SERVICE RULES ··········································1-2 LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS ··············· 1-23

MODEL IDENTIFICATION ····························1-3 CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING················· 1-25

SPECIFICATIONS ·········································1-6 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ·············· 1-86

TORQUE VALUES ······································1-15 TECHNICAL FEATURES···························· 1-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-1
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
SERVICE RULES
GENERAL INFORMATION

1. Use genuine Honda or Honda-recommended parts and lubricants or their equivalents. Parts that don't meet Honda's design
specifications may cause damage to the motorcycle.
2. Use the special tools designed for this product to avoid damage and incorrect assembly.
3. Use only metric tools when servicing the motorcycle. Metric bolts, nuts and screws are not interchangeable with English
fasteners.
4. Install new gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates when reassembling.
5. When tightening bolts or nuts, begin with the larger diameter or inner bolt first. Then tighten to the specified torque diagonally in
incremental steps unless a particular sequence is specified.
6. Clean parts in cleaning solvent upon disassembly. Lubricate any sliding surfaces before reassembly.
7. After reassembly, check all parts for proper installation and operation.
8. Route all electrical wires as show in the Cable and Harness Routing (page 1-25).
9. Do not bend or twist control cables. Damaged control cables will not operate smoothly and may stick or bind.

ABBREVIATION
Throughout this manual, the following abbreviations are used to identify the respective parts or systems.
Abbrev. term Full term
ABS (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) Anti-lock Brake System
CKP sensor Crankshaft Position sensor
DCT (NC700XD/SD) Dual Clutch Transmission
DLC Data Link Connector
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA) Engine Control Module
ECT sensor Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EOP sensor (NC700XD/SD) Engine Oil Pressure sensor
EOP switch Engine Oil Pressure switch
EOT sensor (NC700XD/SD) Engine Oil Temperature sensor
HDS Honda Diagnostic System
HISS Honda Ignition Security System
IACV Idle Air Control Valve
IAT sensor Intake Air Temperature sensor
MAP sensor Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
O2 sensor Oxygen sensor
PCM (NC700XD/SD) Power Control Module
PCV Proportional Control Valve
PGM-FI Programmed Fuel Injection
SCS connector Service Check Short connector
TP sensor Throttle Position sensor
TR sensor (NC700XD/SD) Transmission Range Sensor
VS sensor Vehicle Speed sensor

DESTINATION CODE
Throughout this manual, the following codes are used to identify individual types for each region.
DESTINATION CODE REGION
E U.K.
III E U.K. type III
ED EUROPEAN DIRECT SALES
II ED EUROPEAN DIRECT SALES type II
F France
II F France type II
KO Korea
RU Russia
U Australia, New Zealand

1-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
MODEL IDENTIFICATION
NC700XA shown:

NC700SA shown:

This manual covers following types of NC700 models:

NC700X NC700S
TYPE
NC700X NC700XA NC700XD NC700S NC700SA NC700SD
Standard brake – – – –
ABS – –
DCT – – – –
Be sure to refer to the procedure for the appropriate version of the NC700.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-3
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
SERIAL NUMBERS
The Vehicle Identification Number (V.I.N) [1] is stamped on the right side of
the steering head.

[1]
The registered number plate (E, F, ED, RU types) [1] and compliance plate
(U type only) is attached on the left side of the steering head.

[1]
The engine serial number [1] is stamped on the lower right side of the
crankcase. [1]

The throttle body identification number [1] is stamped on the lower left side
of the throttle body as shown.

[1]

1-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LABELS
The color label [1] is attached on the right side of the rear frame. When
ordering color-coded parts, always specify the designated color code. [1]

The Safety Certification Label (KO type) [1] is located on the left side of the
rear frame. [1]

The Emission Control Information Label (KO type) [2] is located on the left
side of the rear frame. [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-5
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS Overall length NC700X/XA/XD 2,210 mm (87.0 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 2,195 mm (86.4 in)
Overall width E, ED, F, NC700X/XA/XD 830 mm (32.7 in)
RU, U type NC700S/SA/SD 760 mm (29.9 in)
KO type NC700XA 825 mm (32.5 in)
Overall height NC700X/XA/XD 1,285 mm (50.6 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 1,130 mm (44.5 in)
Wheelbase NC700X/XA/XD 1,540 mm (60.6 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 1,525 mm (60.0 in)
Seat height NC700X/XA/XD 830 mm (32.7 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 790 mm (31.1 in)
Footpeg height NC700X/XA/XD 341 mm (13.4 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 310 mm (12.2 in)
Ground clearance NC700X/XA/XD 165 mm (6.5 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 140 mm (5.5 in)
Curb weight E, ED, F, NC700X 214 kg (472 lbs)
RU, U type NC700XA 218 kg (481 lbs)
NC700XD 228 kg (503 lbs)
NC700S 211 kg (465 lbs)
NC700SA 215 kg (474 lbs)
NC700SD 225 kg (496 lbs)
KO type NC700XA 220 kg (485 lbs)
Maximum weight capacity E, ED, F, RU, U type 209 kg (461 lbs)
KO type 189 kg (417 lbs)
FRAME Frame type Diamond
Front suspension Telescopic fork
Front axle travel NC700X/XA/XD 137 mm (5.4 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 107 mm (4.2 in)
Rear suspension Swingarm
Rear axle travel NC700X/XA/XD 150 mm (5.9 in)
NC700S/SA/SD 120 mm (4.7 in)
Front tire size 120/70ZR17M/C (58W)
Rear tire size 160/60ZR17M/C (69W)
Front tire brand BRIDGESTONE BT023F G
METZELER ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT E
Rear tire brand BRIDGESTONE BT023R G
METZELER ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT
Front brake Hydraulic single disc
Rear brake Hydraulic single disc
Caster angle 27°
Trail length 110 mm (4.3 in)
Fuel tank capacity 14.1 liters (3.73 US gal, 3.1 Imp gal)

1-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE Cylinder arrangement 2 cylinders in-line, slant angle 55°
Bore and stroke 73.0 x 80.0 mm (2.87 x 3.15 in)
Displacement 670 cm3 (40.9 cu-in)
Compression ratio 10.7:1
Valve train Chain driven, OHC with rocker arm
Intake valve opens at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift No.1: – 20° BTDC
No.2: – 25° BTDC
closes at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift 27° ABDC
Exhaust valve opens at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift 30° BBDC
closes at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift No.1: – 15° ATDC
No.2: – 20° ATDC
Lubrication system Forced pressure and wet sump
Oil pump type Trochoid
Cooling system Liquid cooled
Air filtration Paper element
Engine dry weight NC700X/XA/S/SA 60.5 kg (133.4 lbs)
NC700XD/SD 67.3 kg (148.4 lbs)
Firing order 1-2
FUEL DELIVERY Type PGM-FI (Programmed Fuel Injection)
SYSTEM Throttle bore 36 mm (1.4 in)
DRIVE TRAIN Clutch system NC700X/XA/S/SA Multi-plate, wet
NC700XD/SD 2 Multi-plate wet clutches
Clutch operation system NC700X/XA/S/SA Cable operating
NC700XD/SD Automatic
Transmission Constant mesh, 6-speeds
Primary reduction NC700X/XA/S/SA 1.731 (71/41)
NC700XD/SD 1.921 (73/38)
Final reduction NC700X/XA/S/SA 2.687 (43/16)
NC700XD/SD 2.437 (39/16)
Gear ratio NC700X/XA/S/SA 1st 2.812 (45/16)
2nd 1.894 (36/19)
3rd 1.454 (32/22)
4th 1.200 (30/25)
5th 1.033 (31/30)
6th 0.837 (31/37)
NC700XD/SD 1st 2.666 (40/15)
2nd 1.904 (40/21)
3rd 1.454 (32/22)
4th 1.200 (30/25)
5th 1.033 (31/30)
6th 0.837 (31/37)
Gearshift pattern NC700X/XA/S/SA Left foot operated return system,
1-N-2-3-4-5-6
NC700XD/SD Automatic and electric shift (left hand
operated) return system,
N-1-2-3-4-5-6
ELECTRICAL Ignition system Computer-controlled digital
transistorized with electric advance
Starting system Electric starter motor
Charging system Triple phase output alternator
Regulator/rectifier FET shorted/triple phase full wave
rectification
Lighting system Battery

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-7
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
PGM-FI SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
IAT sensor resistance (at 20°C/68°F) 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ
ECT sensor resistance (at 40°C/104°F) 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
Injector resistance (at 20°C/68°F) 11 – 13 Ω

IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Spark plug (Iridium) IFR6G-11K (NGK)
Spark plug gap 1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in)
Ignition coil peak voltage 100 V minimum
CKP sensor peak voltage (at 20°C/68°F) 0.7 V minimum
Ignition timing ("F" mark) 12° BTDC at idle

ELECTRIC STARTER SPECIFICATION

Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Starter motor brush length 12.0 – 13.0 (0.47 – 0.51) 6.5 (0.26)

FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Throttle body identification number GQ3UA
Idle speed 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
Throttle grip freeplay 2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)
Fuel pressure at idle 343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
Fuel pump flow (at 12 V) 230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/10 seconds

COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant capacity Radiator and engine 1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
At draining 1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
Reserve tank 0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)
Radiator cap relief pressure 108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
Thermostat Begin to open 80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
Fully open 95°C (203°F)
Valve lift 8 mm (0.3 in) minimum
Recommended antifreeze High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing silicate-free
corrosion inhibitors
Standard coolant concentration 1:1 (mixture with distilled water)

1-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LUBRICATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Engine oil NC700X/XA/S/SA After draining 3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt) –
capacity After draining/
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) –
filter change
After
3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt) –
disassembly
NC700XD/SD After draining 3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt) –
After draining/
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) –
filter change
After
4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt) –
disassembly
Recommended engine oil Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an
equivalent
API service classification: SG or higher
(except oils labeled as energy conserving –
on the circular API service label)
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
JASO T 903 standard: MA
Oil pressure at engine oil filter 470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi)
–
at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/(80°C/176°F)
Oil pump rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008)
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.35 (0.014)
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.12 (0.005)
Engine oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008)
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.35 (0.014)
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.12 (0.005)
Clutch oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) –
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) –
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) –

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES SPECIFICATIONS

Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Cylinder compression at 470 min-1(rpm) 1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi) –
Valve clearance IN 0.17 ± 0.02 (0.007 ± 0.001) –
EX 0.28 ± 0.02 (0.011 ± 0.001) –
Rocker arm, Rocker arm I.D. 20.012 – 20.030 (0.7879 – 0.7886) 20.041 (0.7890)
rocker arm Rocker arm shaft O.D. 19.972 – 19.993 (0.7863 – 0.7871) 19.961 (0.7859)
shaft Rocker arm-to-shaft clearance 0.019 – 0.058 (0.0007 – 0.0023) 0.08 (0.003)
Cam chain tensioner wedge B length – 6.0 (0.24)
Camshaft Cam lobe height 34.7697
IN 34.7897 – 35.0297 (1.36967 – 1.37912)
(1.36888)
34.9027
EX 34.9227 – 35.1627 (1.37491 – 1.38436)
(1.37412)
Runout – 0.04 (0.002)
Camshaft journal O.D. 41.935 – 41.950 (1.6510 – 1.6516) 41.927 (1.6507)
Valve, valve Valve stem O.D. IN 4.975 – 4.990 (0.1959 – 0.1965) 4.965 (0.1955)
guide EX 4.965 – 4.980 (0.1955 – 0.1961) 4.955 (0.1951)
Valve guide I.D. IN/EX 5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973) 5.04 (0.198)
Stem-to-guide IN 0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.075 (0.0030)
clearance EX 0.020 – 0.047 (0.0008 – 0.0019) 0.085 (0.0033)
Valve guide IN 17.7 – 18.0 (0.70 – 0.71) –
projection above
EX 19.6 – 19.9 (0.77 – 0.78) –
cylinder head
Valve seat width IN 0.90 – 1.10 (0.035 – 0.043) 1.5 (0.06)
EX 1.30 – 1.50 (0.051 – 0.059) 1.9 (0.07)
Valve spring free length 49.07 (1.932) 48.1 (1.89)
Cylinder head warpage – 0.10 (0.004)
Cylinder head camshaft journal I.D. 41.995 – 42.019 (1.6533 – 1.6543) 42.027 (1.6546)
Cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance 0.045 – 0.084 (0.0018 – 0.0033) 0.10 (0.004)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-9
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE SPECIFICATIONS (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Clutch lever freeplay 10 – 20 (3/8 – 13/16) –
Clutch Spring free length 43.2 (1.70) 41.7 (1.64)
Disc thickness 2.62 – 2.78 (0.103 – 0.109) 2.3 (0.09)
Plate warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Clutch outer guide I.D. 21.991 – 22.016 (0.8658 – 0.8668) 22.03 (0.867)
O.D. 31.959 – 31.975 (1.2582 – 1.2589) 31.92 (1.257)
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide 21.967 – 21.980 (0.8648 – 0.8654) 21.95 (0.864)
Clutch outer guide-to-mainshaft clearance 0.011 – 0.049 (0.0004 – 0.0019) 0.08 (0.003)
Primary driven gear I.D. 32.000 – 32.025 (1.2598 – 1.2608) 32.09 (1.263)
Primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide clearance 0.025 – 0.066 (0.0010 – 0.0026) 0.10 (0.004)

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS (NC700XD/SD)

Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Clutch clearance 0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043) 2.0 (0.08)
EOT sensor resistance (20°C/68°F) 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ –

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH SPECIFICATIONS

Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Starter driven gear boss O.D. 57.749 – 57.768 (2.2736 – 2.2743) 57.73 (2.273)
Starter clutch outer I.D. 74.412 – 74.442 (2.9296 – 2.9308) 74.46 (2.931)

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER SPECIFICATIONS
NC700X/XA/S/SA
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Transmission Gear I.D. M5, M6, C1 28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032) 28.04 (1.104)
C2, C3, C4 31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215) 31.04 (1.222)
Gear bushing M5, M6 27.959 – 27.980 (1.1007 – 1.1016) 27.94 (1.100)
O.D. C2 30.955 – 30.980 (1.2187 – 1.2197) 30.93 (1.218)
C3, C4 30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195) 30.93 (1.218)
Gear-to-bushing M5, M6 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.08 (0.003)
clearance C2 0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028) 0.10 (0.004)
C3, C4 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
Gear bushing I.D. M5 25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851) 25.04 (0.986)
C2 27.985 – 28.006 (1.1018 – 1.1026) 28.02 (1.103)
Mainshaft O.D. At M5 bushing 24.972 – 24.993 (0.9831 – 0.9840) 24.95 (0.982)
Countershaft O.D. At C2 bushing 27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016) 27.95 (1.100)
Bushing-to-shaft M5 0.007 – 0.049 (0.0003 – 0.0020) 0.09 (0.004)
clearance C2 0.005 – 0.039 (0.0002 – 0.0015) 0.06 (0.002)
Shift fork, Fork I.D. 12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731) 12.03 (0.474)
fork shaft Claw thickness 5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236) 5.9 (0.23)
Shift fork shaft O.D. 11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712) 11.95 (0.470)

1-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Transmission Gear I.D. M5 33.000 – 33.025 (1.2992 – 1.3002) 33.04 (1.301)
M6 43.000 – 43.025 (1.6929 – 1.6939) 43.04 (1.694)
C1 31.010 – 31.035 (1.2209 – 1.2218) 31.06 (1.223)
C2 25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851) 25.03 (0.985)
C3, C4 31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215) 31.04 (1.222)
Gear bushing M5 32.955 – 32.980 (1.2974 – 1.2984) 32.93 (1.296)
O.D. M6 42.950 – 42.975 (1.6909 – 1.6919) 42.93 (1.690)
C1 30.970 – 30.995 (1.2193 – 1.2203) 30.94 (1.218)
C2 24.959 – 24.980 (0.9826 – 0.9835) 24.94 (0.982)
C3, C4 30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195) 30.93 (1.218)
Gear-to-bushing M5 0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028) 0.10 (0.004)
clearance M6 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
C1 0.015 – 0.065 (0.0006 – 0.0026) 0.10 (0.004)
C2 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.09 (0.004)
C3, C4 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
Gear bushing I.D. M5 29.985 – 30.006 (1.1805 – 1.1813) 30.03 (1.182)
M6 40.007 – 40.028 (1.5751 – 1.5759) 40.038 (1.5763)
C1 28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032) 28.04 (1.104)
C2 21.985 – 22.006 (0.8655 – 0.8664) 22.02 (0.867)
Inner mainshaft
At M5 bushing 29.957 – 29.970 (1.1794 – 1.1799) 29.93 (1.178)
O.D.
Outer mainshaft
At M6 bushing 39.975 – 39.991 (1.5738 – 1.5744) 39.965 (1.5734)
O.D.
Countershaft O.D. At C1 bushing 27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016) 27.95 (1.100)
At C2 bushing 21.952 – 21.965 (0.8643 – 0.8648) 21.94 (0.864)
Bushing-to-shaft M5 0.015 – 0.049 (0.0006 – 0.0019) 0.09 (0.004)
clearance M6 0.016 – 0.053 (0.0006 – 0.0021) 0.10 (0.004)
C1 0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021) 0.08 (0.003)
C2 0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021) 0.08 (0.003)
Shift fork, Fork I.D. 12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731) 12.03 (0.474)
fork shaft Claw thickness 5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236) 5.9 (0.23)
Shift fork shaft O.D. 11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712) 11.95 (0.470)

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Crankshaft Connecting rod side clearance 0.15 – 0.35 (0.006 – 0.014) 0.45 (0.018)
Runout Right side – 0.03 (0.001)
Left side – 0.03 (0.001)
Main journal bearing oil clearance 0.019 – 0.037 (0.0007 – 0.0015) 0.05 (0.002)
Cylinder I.D. 73.000 – 73.015 (2.8740 – 2.8746) 73.07 (2.877)
Out-of-round – 0.10 (0.004)
Taper – 0.10 (0.004)
Warpage – 0.10 (0.004)
Piston, piston Piston O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
72.976 – 72.990 (2.8731 – 2.8736) 72.970 (2.8728)
rings bottom
Piston pin bore I.D. 18.010 – 18.013 (0.7091 – 0.7092) 18.023 (0.7096)
Piston pin O.D. 17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087) 17.988 (0.7082)
Piston-to-piston pin clearance 0.010 – 0.017 (0.0004 – 0.0007) 0.035 (0.0014)
Piston ring end Top 0.15 – 0.30 (0.006 – 0.012) 0.6 (0.02)
gap Second 0.30 – 0.42 (0.012 – 0.017) 0.6 (0.02)
Oil (side rail) 0.20 – 0.70 (0.008 – 0.028) 0.8 (0.03)
Piston ring-to-ring Top 0.035 – 0.080 (0.0014 – 0.0032) 0.15 (0.006)
groove clearance Second 0.030 – 0.055 (0.0012 – 0.0022) 0.13 (0.005)
Cylinder-to-piston clearance 0.010 – 0.039 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.05 (0.002)
Connecting rod small end I.D. 17.964 – 17.977 (0.7072 – 0.7078) 17.985 (0.7081)
Crankpin bearing oil clearance 0.026 – 0.044 (0.0010 – 0.0017) 0.05 (0.002)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-11
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Minimum tire tread depth – 1.5 (0.06)
Cold tire Driver only 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) –
pressure Driver and passenger 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) –
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01)
Wheel rim runout Radial – 2.0 (0.08)
Axial – 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel balance weight 60 g (2.1 oz)
–
max.
Fork Spring free NC700X/XA/XD 394.9 (15.55) 387.0 (15.24)
length NC700S/SA/SD 357.0 (14.06) 349.9 (13.78)
Tube runout – 0.20 (0.008)
Recommended fork fluid Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL SS-47
–
(10W) or equivalent
Fluid level NC700X/XA/XD 104 (4.1) –
NC700S/SA/SD 103 (4.1) –
Fluid capacity 514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.1 ±
NC700X/XA/XD –
0.09 Imp oz)
518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.2 ±
NC700S/SA/SD –
0.09 Imp oz)

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS

Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Minimum tire tread depth – 2.0 (0.08)
Cold tire pressure Driver only 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) –
Driver and passenger 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) –
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01)
Wheel rim runout Radial – 2.0 (0.08)
Axial – 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel balance weight 60 g (2.1 oz)
–
max.
Drive Size/link NC700X/ DID DID520V0-114LE –
chain XA/S/SA RK RK520MKO-114LE –
NC700XD DID DID520V0-112LE –
/SD RK RK520MKO-112LE –
Slack NC700X/XA/XD 30 – 40 (1.2 – 1.6) –
NC700S/SA/SD 25 – 35 (1.0 – 1.4) –

1-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Front Specified brake fluid DOT 4 –
Brake disc thickness 4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20) 4.0 (0.16)
Brake disc warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Master cylinder I.D. 11.000 – 11.043 (0.4331 – 0.4348) 11.055 (0.4352)
Master piston O.D. 10.957 – 10.984 (0.4314 – 0.4324) 10.945 (0.4309)
Caliper cylinder I.D. (NC700X/S) 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650) 27.060 (1.0654)
Caliper piston O.D. (NC700X/S) 26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617) 26.91 (1.059)
Caliper cylinder I.D. Cylinder A 22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937) 22.712 (0.8941)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) Cylinder B 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650) 27.060 (1.0654)
Caliper piston O.D. Piston A 22.585 – 22.618 (0.8892 – 0.8905) 22.56 (0.888)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) Piston B 26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617) 26.91 (1.059)
Rear Specified brake fluid DOT 4 –
Brake disc thickness 4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20) 4.0 (0.16)
Brake disc warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Master cylinder I.D. 14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529) 14.055 (0.5533)
Master piston O.D. 13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506) 13.945 (0.5490)
Caliper cylinder I.D. 38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505) 38.24 (1.506)
Caliper piston O.D. 38.098 – 38.148 (1.4999 – 1.5019) 38.09 (1.500)
Brake pedal height 85.0 – 87.0 (3.35 – 3.43) –

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Type YTZ12S
Capacity 12 V – 11 Ah
Current leakage 1.2 mA maximum
Voltage Fully charged 13.0 – 13.2 V
(20°C/68°F) Needs
Below 12.4 V
charging
Charging current Normal 1.1 A/5 – 10 h
Quick 5.5 A/1 h
Alternator Capacity 0.42 kW/5,000 min-1 (rpm)
Charging coil resistance (20°C/68°F) 0.1 – 0.5 Ω

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-13
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Bulbs Headlight 12 V – 60/55 W
Position light 12 V – 5 W
Brake/tail/license light 12 V – 21/5 W
Turn signal light 12 V – 21 W x 4
Instrument light LED
Turn signal indicator LED
High beam indicator LED
Neutral indicator LED
Engine oil pressure indicator LED
High coolant temperature indicator LED
MIL LED
HISS indicator LED
ABS indicator (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) LED
Parking brake indicator (NC700XD/SD) LED
Fuse Main fuse 30 A
PGM-FI fuse 15 A
Sub fuse 15 A x 2, 7.5 A x 4
ABS fuse (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) 30 A x 2, 7.5 A
DCT fuse (NC700XD/SD) 30 A, 7.5 A
ECT sensor resistance 40°C (104°F) 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.1 – 0.2 kΩ
Fuel level sensor resistance Full 4–6Ω
Empty 80 – 83 Ω

1-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
TORQUE VALUES
STANDARD TORQUE VALUES
TORQUE TORQUE
FASTENER TYPE FASTENER TYPE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
5 mm bolt and nut 5.2 (0.5, 3.8) 5 mm screw 4.2 (0.4, 3.1)
6 mm bolt (Include SH flange bolt) 10 (1.0, 7) 6 mm screw 9.0 (0.9, 6.6)
and nut 6 mm flange bolt (Include NSHF) and 12 (1.2, 9)
8 mm bolt and nut 22 (2.2, 16) nut
10 mm bolt and nut 34 (3.5, 25) 8 mm flange bolt and nut 27 (2.8, 20)
12 mm bolt and nut 54 (5.5, 40) 10 mm flange bolt and nut 39 (4.0, 29)

ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES

FRAME BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Seat cowl assembly screw 2 4 0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
Brake/tail/license light mounting 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
socket bolt
Reflector mounting nut 1 5 1.7 (0.2, 1.3)
Turn signal light mounting screw 4 6 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Luggage box lid assembly screw 9 4 0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
Luggage box lid lock plate 2 6 4.0 (0.4, 3.0)
mounting screw
Luggage box lid mounting socket 3 6 12 (1.2, 9)
bolt
Luggage box lid hinge nut 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) U-nut
Gearshift arm pinch bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Muffler cover socket bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Muffler band bolt 1 8 17.5 (1.8, 13)
Exhaust pipe joint nut 3 8 28 (2.9, 21) See page 2-34
Exhaust pipe stud bolt 3 8 – See page 2-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-15
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Air cleaner housing cover screw 6 5 1.1 (0.1, 0.8)
Spark plug 2 14 22 (2.2, 16)
Valve adjusting screw lock nut 8 7 14 (1.4, 10) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Camshaft maintenance cap 1 36 4.0 (0.4, 3.0) See page 3-12
Timing hole cap 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Apply grease to the threads.
Crankshaft hole cap 1 30 15 (1.5, 11) Apply grease to the threads.
Engine oil drain bolt 1 12 30 (3.1, 22)
Engine oil filter cartridge 1 20 26 (2.7, 19) Apply engine oil to the threads.
Oil filter boss 1 20 – See page 3-14
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Rear axle nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Drive chain adjuster lock nut 2 8 21 (2.1, 15)
Drive sprocket bolt 1 10 54 (5.5, 40)
Driven sprocket nut 5 12 108 (11.0, 80) U-nut
Master cylinder reservoir cover 4 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Rear master cylinder push rod lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Sidestand pivot bolt 1 10 – See page 3-27
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Sidestand pivot nut 1 10 39 (4.0, 29) U-nut
Sidestand switch bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

PGM-FI SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
ECT sensor 1 10 12 (1.2, 9)
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt 2 6 10 (1.0, 7)
O2 sensor 1 12 24.5 (2.5, 18)

IGNITION SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Timing hole cap 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Apply grease to the threads.
Right crankcase cover wire clamp 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt (NC700XD/SD) Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

ELECTRIC STARTER
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Starter motor terminal nut 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)

FUEL SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Fuel pump mounting nut 6 6 12 (1.2, 9) For tightening sequence (page 7-14)
Air cleaner connecting hose band 1 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Insulator band screw 2 5 – See page 7-18

1-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
COOLING SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Water hose band screw 6 – – See page 8-9
See page 8-10
See page 8-14
Fan motor shroud mounting bolt 3 6 8.4 (0.9, 6.2)
Fan motor mounting screw 3 4 2.7 (0.3, 2.0)
Cooling fan mounting nut 1 3 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply locking agent to the threads.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Engine oil filter cartridge 1 20 26 (2.7, 19) Apply engine oil to the threads.

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Cylinder head cover socket bolt 3 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Breather plate mounting bolt 8 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Rocker arm shaft bolt 3 8 29 (3.0, 21) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Camshaft maintenance cap 1 36 4.0 (0.4, 3.0) See page 10-11
See page 10-28
Cam chain tensioner bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Cam sprocket bolt 1 10 56 (5.7, 41) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Water hose band screw 6 – – See page 10-16
Insulator band screw 1 5 – See page 10-25
Cylinder head special bolt 6 9 44 (4.5, 32) Apply molybdenum oil solution to the
threads and seating surface.

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Clutch center lock nut 1 18 128 (13.1, 94) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Lock nut; replace with a new one and
stake.
Clutch lifter plate bolt 4 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Primary drive gear mounting bolt 1 10 93 (9.5, 69) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Shift drum center socket bolt 1 8 23 (2.3, 17) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Gearshift pedal adjuster lock nut 2 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt 1 8 27 (2.8, 20)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-17
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Solenoid valve stopper plate bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Right crankcase cover wire clamp 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Linear solenoid valve body 6 6 – For tightening sequence (page 12-
mounting bolt 101)
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Primary drive gear mounting bolt 1 10 93 (9.5, 69) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Reduction gear cover bolt 3 6 14 (1.4, 10)
TR sensor bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Shift control motor bolt 3 6 14 (1.4, 10)
Shift drum center bolt 1 8 23 (2.3, 17) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Drum shifter guide plate bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Clutch line EOP sensor 3 10 19.6 (2.0, 14)
EOT sensor 1 10 14 (1.4, 10) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Flywheel mounting bolt 1 12 157 (16.0, 116) Left hand thread
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Starter clutch socket bolt 6 8 30 (3.1, 22) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Alternator stator mounting bolt 4 6 10 (1.0, 7) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Alternator wire clamp bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

1-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Mainshaft bearing set plate bolt 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Shift drum bearing set plate bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Balancer shaft bearing set plate 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Crankcase main journal bolt (new) 6 9 20 (2.0, 15) + 150° See page 14-30
Replace with a new one.
Crankcase 10 mm bolt 1 10 39 (4.0, 29)
Crankcase 8 mm bolt 3 8 24 (2.4, 18)
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt 1 8 24 (2.4, 18) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Crankcase 6 mm bolt 8 6 12 (1.2, 9)

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Crankpin bearing cap bolt 4 6 10 (1.0, 7) + 90° See page 15-7
See page 15-12
Replace with a new one.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Crankcase main journal bolt 6 9 20 (2.0, 15) + 120° See page 15-9
(retightening) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Rear lower engine hunger nut 1 12 59 (6.0, 44)
Front lower engine hunger bolt 2 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Upper engine hunger bolt 2 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Rear upper engine hunger nut 1 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Drive sprocket bolt 1 10 54 (5.5, 40)
Starter motor terminal nut 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Water hose band screw 2 – – See page 16-18
See page 16-19
See page 16-24
See page 16-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-19
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Handlebar holder bolt 4 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Handlebar switch housing screw 4 5 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Front master cylinder holder bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Handlebar weight mounting screw 2 6 10 (1.0, 7) ALOC screw; replace with a new
one.
Front brake disc mounting bolt 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Front axle 1 18 74 (7.5, 55) Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Front axle pinch bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Fork socket bolt 2 8 20 (2.0, 15) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Bottom bridge pinch bolt 2 10 39 (4.0, 29)
Fork cap 2 37 22 (2.2, 16)
Top bridge pinch bolt 2 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 2 8 30 (3.1, 22) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Steering stem adjusting nut 1 26 23 (2.3, 17) See page 17-38
Apply engine oil to the threads.
Steering stem adjusting lock nut 1 26 – See page 17-38
Steering stem nut 1 24 103 (10.5, 76) See page 17-38
Clutch lever pivot bolt 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply grease to the sliding surface.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lever pivot nut 1 6 6.0 (0.6, 4.4)
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Driven sprocket nut 5 12 108 (11.0, 80) U-nut
Rear brake disc mounting bolt 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Rear axle nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Shock absorber mounting nut 2 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Shock arm nut 1 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Shock link nut 2 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Drive chain slider mounting screw 2 5 5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
Swingarm pivot nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Gearshift arm pinch bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

1-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Brake caliper bleed valve 2 8 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(NC700X/S)
Brake caliper bleed valve 3 8 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Master cylinder reservoir cover 4 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Brake pad pin 2 10 17 (1.7, 13)
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Front master cylinder holder bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Brake hose oil bolt 4 10 34 (3.5, 25)
(NC700X/S)
Brake hose oil bolt 5 10 34 (3.5, 25)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Front brake light switch screw 1 4 1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
Front brake lever pivot bolt 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) silicone
grease to the sliding surface.
Front brake lever pivot nut 1 6 5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
Rear master cylinder mounting 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
bolt
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Rear master cylinder hose joint 1 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1) Apply locking agent to the threads.
screw
Rear master cylinder push rod lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut
Front brake caliper pin 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Front brake caliper bracket pin 1 8 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 2 8 30 (3.1, 22) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Rear brake caliper pin 1 12 27 (2.8, 20) Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Parking brake caliper mounting 2 8 31 (3.2, 23) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
bolt (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake caliper pin bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Apply locking agent to the threads.
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake pad pin 2 8 17 (1.7, 13) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake cable mounting nut 1 10 10 (1.0, 7)
(NC700XD/SD)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Brake pipe joint nut 14 10 14 (1.4, 10) Apply brake fluid to the threads and
sliding surface.
PCV mounting bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Delay valve mounting bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-21
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Turn signal light mounting screw 4 6 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Combination meter mounting 3 5 1.0 (0.1, 0.7)
screw
Combination meter back cover 4 3 0.3 (0.03, 0.2)
mounting screw (NC700S/SA/SD)
EOP switch 1 PT 1/8 18 (1.8, 13) Apply sealant to the threads.
Ignition switch mounting bolt 2 8 25 (2.5, 18) One way bolt; replace with a new
one.
Neutral switch 1 10 12 (1.2, 9)
Parking brake switch screw 1 4 1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
(NC700XD/SD)

OTHERS
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Cam chain tensioner set plate bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Camshaft cap 1 20 30 (3.1, 22)
Gearshift spindle return spring pin 1 8 23 (2.3, 17)
Main step rubber mounting bolt 2 5 5.1 (0.5, 3.8) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Main step cap bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)

1-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS
ENGINE
MATERIAL LOCATION REMARKS
Liquid sealant Oil pan mating surface See page 9-12
(Three Bond 1207B or Right crankcase cover mating surface See page 11-6
equivalent) CKP sensor wire grommet
Linear solenoid valve wire grommet (NC700XD/SD)
Alternator wire grommet
Alternator cover mating surface See page 13-7
Crankcase mating surface See page 14-28
Molybdenum oil solution Rocker arm sliding surface
(a mixture of 1/2 engine oil Rocker arm shaft outer surface
and 1/2 molybdenum Camshaft lobes, journals and thrust surface
disulfide grease) Valve stem (valve guide sliding surface) and stem end
Clutch outer guide sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Starter reduction and idle gear shaft outer surface
M3/4, C5, C6 gear (shift fork grooves) (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
M3, M4, C5, C6 gear (shift fork grooves) (NC700XD/SD)
Each transmission spline collar outer surface
Each transmission collar inner and outer surface
Shift fork guide area and guide pin
Shift fork shaft outer surface
Main journal bearing sliding surface
Crankpin bearing sliding surface
Crankshaft thrust surface
Engine oil Oil filter cartridge O-ring
Oil filler cap O-ring
Timing hole cap O-ring
Crankshaft hole cap O-ring
Clutch oil filter cover O-ring (NC700XD/SD)
Oil joint pipe O-ring (NC700XD/SD)
Clutch oil guide collar O-rings (NC700XD/SD)
Oil strainer seal ring
Starter motor O-ring
Injector seal ring
Water pump large O-ring
Valve stem seal
Clutch disc entire surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lifter rod A sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lifter rod B sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Mainshaft seal rings (NC700XD/SD)
Starter one-way clutch
Piston sliding surface
Piston ring sliding surface
Piston pin outer surface
Each bearing
Each gear teeth and rotating surface
Each O-ring (except water sealing)
Other rotating area and sliding surface
Multi-purpose grease Each oil seal lips
Locking agent CKP sensor mounting bolt threads Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0
mm (0.26 ± 0.04 in)
except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08
± 0.04 in) from tip
Templex N3 grease (ESSO) Electric shift reduction gear teeth and journal (NC700XD/SD) 2 – 4 g (0.07 – 0.14 oz)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-23
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRAME
MATERIAL LOCATION REMARKS
Urea based multi-purpose Steering head bearing sliding surface 3 – 5 g (0.1 – 0.2 oz)
grease with extreme Steering head dust seal lips
pressure
(example: Kyodo Yushi
EXCELITE EP2, Shell
Stamina EP2 or equivalent)
Molybdenum disulfide grease Shock arm needle bearings
Rear shock absorber needle bearing
Rear shock absorber dust seal lips
Swingarm pivot needle bearings
Swingarm pivot ball bearing
Swingarm pivot dust seal lips
Multi-purpose grease Seat catch hook sliding area
Luggage box lid catch sliding area
Gearshift pedal pivot and dust seal lips (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Gearshift pedal tie-rod ball joint area (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Throttle cable end and throttle grip pipe flange groove
Front wheel dust seal lips
Rear wheel hub O-ring
Rear wheel dust seal lips
Rear axle sliding surface
Swingarm pivot sliding surface
Rear brake pedal pivot sliding area
Parking brake ratchet A, B teeth and sliding surface
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake lever, washer sliding surface (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake switch spring sliding surface (NC700XD/SD)
Main step sliding area
Pillion step sliding area
Cable lubricant Seat lock cable inside
Luggage box lid lock cable inside
Throttle cable A, B inside
Clutch cable inside (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Parking brake cable inside (NC700XD/SD)
Honda bond A, Cemedine Handlebar grip rubber inside
#540 or equivalent Brake pad retainer mating surface
Silicone grease Front brake lever sliding surface and lever-to-master piston 0.10 g (0.004 oz)
contacting area
Rear brake master cylinder push rod sliding surface and boot
fitting area
Brake caliper dust seals
Rear brake caliper boot inside 0.4 g (0.01 oz)
Brake pad pin stopper ring
Parking brake shaft outer surface (NC700XD/SD) 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
Parking brake adjuster bolt threads and caliper piston sliding 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
surface (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake shaft boot lips (NC700XD/SD) 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
Parking brake caliper bracket pin sliding surface (NC700XD/ 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
SD)
Parking brake caliper sleeve sliding surface (NC700XD/SD) 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
DOT 4 brake fluid Brake caliper piston and piston seals
Brake master piston and cups
Brake master cylinder inside
Rear master cylinder reservoir hose joint O-ring
Fork fluid Fork cap O-ring
Fork dust seal and oil seal lips
Drive chain lubricant Drive chain whole surface
designed specifically for use
with O-ring chains, #80 – 90
gear oil or equivalent

1-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING
NC700X/XA:

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE

NC700XD:

THROTTLE CABLE A
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

THROTTLE CABLE B
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-25
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE

NC700SD:

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD:

POSITION
FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
LIGHT WIRE
3P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

NC700S/SA/SD:

FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

3P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
POSITION
LIGHT WIRES

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

3P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-27
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

BRAKE HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

IMMOBILIZER 10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

1-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

CLUTCH CABLE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

IMMOBILIZER 10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-29
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR) Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side

HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

1-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR 2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR 10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR BRAKE HOSE

NC700SA:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR 2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER 10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

FRONT WHEEL SPEED BRAKE SUB HOSE C

SENSOR WIRE (from DELAY VALVE)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-31
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR 2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER 10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

HEADLIGHT
7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
FRONT WHEEL SPEED BRAKE SUB HOSE C FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
SENSOR WIRE (from DELAY VALVE) (from ABS MODULATOR)

NC700S:

CLUTCH SWITCH
THROTTLE CABLE A
CONNECTORS

FRONT BRAKE HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

1-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

THROTTLE CABLE A CLUTCH SWITCH

CONNECTORS
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

CLUTCH CABLE

THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

NC700SD:

THROTTLE CABLE B

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

THROTTLE CABLE A
PARKING BRAKE CABLE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
IGNITION SWITCH WIRE
SWITCH WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-33
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

CLUTCH CABLE
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.1 IGNITION COIL

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR PARKING BRAKE CABLE

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.1 IGNITION COIL

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-35
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

CLUTCH CABLE

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.1 IGNITION COIL

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

1-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.1 IGNITION COIL

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-37
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

THROTTLE CABLE A

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
THROTTLE CABLE B SWITCH WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH BRAKE HOSE

8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE B

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE HOSE
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE
CLUTCH CABLE

1-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

THROTTLE CABLE B

THROTTLE CABLE A
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (to ABS MODULATOR)
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

THROTTLE CABLE B

THROTTLE CABLE A
THROTTLE
CABLE A
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

THROTTLE
CABLE B
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

CLUTCH CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D

(from ABS MODULATOR)

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SENSOR WIRE
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR IMMOBILIZER

SWITCH WIRE RECEIVER WIRE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-39
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

THROTTLE CABLE A

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
(to ABS MODULATOR)
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE B

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH SWITCH WIRE
6P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)
THROTTLE CABLE B

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A
THROTTLE
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
CABLE A
SENSOR WIRE
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

THROTTLE
CABLE B

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D

(from ABS MODULATOR)

PARKING BRAKE CABLE FRONT BRAKE HOSE D

(from ABS MODULATOR)

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR FRONT WHEEL SPEED

2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR SENSOR WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
RECEIVER WIRE
SWITCH WIRE
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

1-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

CLUTCH CABLE

BRAKE HOSE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-41
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

CLUTCH CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

Parallel

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR WIRE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

1-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

Parallel

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR WIRE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-43
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

THROTTLE CABLE A
CLUTCH CABLE

THROTTLE CABLE B

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

BRAKE HOSE

No.2 IGNITION COIL

SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

HORN WIRES

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

1-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

THROTTLE CABLE A
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

THROTTLE CABLE B
CLUTCH CABLE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D

(from ABS MODULATOR)

No.2 IGNITION COIL

SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

Parallel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-45
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

THROTTLE CABLE B

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D

(from ABS MODULATOR)

No.2 IGNITION COIL

SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C

(from DELAY VALVE)

Parallel

1-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD:

SEAT LOCK CABLE

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

NC700X/XA/XD:

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

4P CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRE

No.1 IGNITION COIL SEAT LOCK CABLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-47
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA/SD:

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

No.2 IGNITION COIL

NC700S/SA/SD:
SIDESTAND SWITCH
LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE 3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

1-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA/SD:

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL No.1 IGNITION COIL

DLC

JUNCTION B
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-49
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

DLC

JUNCTION B
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY 14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

No.2 IGNITION COIL

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

STARTER RELAY
SWITCH

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES FUEL FEED HOSE

No.1 IGNITION COIL

GROUND CABLE
FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR CABLE
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
CKP SENSOR
2P (RED) CONNECTOR

1-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

DLC

JUNCTION B
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY 14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

No.2 IGNITION COIL

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

STARTER RELAY
SWITCH

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES
FUEL FEED HOSE
No.1 IGNITION COIL

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
GROUND CABLE
FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR CABLE
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

CKP SENSOR
2P (RED) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-51
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

FAN MOTOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

DRAIN HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

RADIATOR LOWER
WATER HOSE

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

1-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:

FAN MOTOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

DRAIN HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

RADIATOR LOWER
WATER HOSE

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (Optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-53
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE O2 SENSOR WIRE

HORN WIRES

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE O2 SENSOR WIRE

HORN WIRES

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-55
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

Upper
side
RADIATOR UPPER
CLUTCH CABLE WATER HOSE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE O2 SENSOR WIRE

HORN WIRES

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

Upper
side
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE O2 SENSOR WIRE

HORN WIRES

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-57
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.2 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR

3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR WIRE 3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.1 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE

ALTERNATOR WIRE
SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR

SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE
BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE
NEUTRAL FUEL TANK
SWITCH WIRE DRAIN HOSE B

SIDESTAND SWITCH WIRE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-59
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

SIDESTAND SWITCH WIRE

MAIN WIRE HARNESS TR SENSOR WIRE

SIDESTAND MAIN WIRE HARNESS

SWITCH WIRE
TR SENSOR WIRE

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (Optional)

NEUTRAL SWITCH

TR SENSOR

SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

Upper
side
SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

1-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE

THROTTLE CABLES
No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

Upper
Upper
side
side

Right
Left
side
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
FUEL FEED HOSE 2P CONNECTOR

WATER BYPASS HOSE

GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-61
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA/XD:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE

THROTTLE CABLES No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

Upper
Upper
side
side

Right
Left
side
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
FUEL FEED HOSE 2P CONNECTOR

WATER BYPASS HOSE

GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE

MAIN WIRE THROTTLE CABLES

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
HARNESS
IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
Upper SENSOR UNIT
side 5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

CLUTCH CABLE

Upper
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE side
Upper
side

Right
side

Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
FUEL FEED HOSE 2P CONNECTOR

WATER BYPASS HOSE

GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-63
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE

MAIN WIRE THROTTLE CABLES No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

HARNESS
IACV
Upper 4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SENSOR UNIT
side 5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

CLUTCH CABLE

Upper
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE side
Upper
side

Right
side
Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
FUEL FEED HOSE 2P CONNECTOR

WATER BYPASS HOSE

GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE

MAIN WIRE THROTTLE CABLES No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

HARNESS
IACV
Upper 4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SENSOR UNIT
side 5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Upper
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE side
Upper
side

Right
side
Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
FUEL FEED HOSE 2P CONNECTOR

WATER BYPASS HOSE

GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-65
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

NC700S:
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

1-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B

(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

DELAY VALVE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

GROUND TERMINALS

REAR BRAKE PIPE C

(to PCV)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-67
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

BRAKE SUB PIPE A

(to DELAY VALVE)
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER) SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

DELAY VALVE
GROUND TERMINALS

OPTION
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
6P CONNECTOR
(to PCV)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B

(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

1-68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

BRAKE SUB PIPE A

OPTION (to DELAY VALVE)
6P CONNECTOR

BRAKE SUB PIPE B

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION WIRE SIDESTAND SWITCH

3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

GROUND TERMINALS

REAR BRAKE PIPE C

(to PCV)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

DELAY VALVE

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B

(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-69
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION WIRE SIDESTAND SWITCH

3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

GROUND TERMINALS

REAR BRAKE PIPE C

(to PCV)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER) (from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B

(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

DELAY VALVE

1-70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:
ECM OPTION
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR 6P CONNECTOR

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

GROUND TERMINALS CLUTCH CABLE

NC700S:
ECM VS SENSOR OPTION WIRE
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR 3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR OPTION WIRE
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR CLUTCH CABLE
GROUND TERMINALS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-71
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

ECM
REAR BRAKE PIPE B 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE D

(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE C

(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

GROUND TERMINAL

DELAY VALVE
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
GROUND TERMINAL
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
Upper (from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
side
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

PCM
33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PCM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE B REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR) 3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

JUNCTION D
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 24P CONNECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

DELAY VALVE

GROUND TERMINAL

BRAKE SUB PIPE B

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
Upper FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
GROUND TERMINAL side (from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-73
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

ECM
REAR BRAKE PIPE B 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE D

(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE C

(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

GROUND TERMINAL

DELAY VALVE
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
GROUND TERMINAL

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B

Upper (from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
side
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PCM
33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PCM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE B REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR) 3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
JUNCTION D
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 24P CONNECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

DELAY VALVE

GROUND TERMINAL

BRAKE SUB PIPE B

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
Upper
GROUND TERMINAL FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
side
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C

(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE B

(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-75
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

GROUND TERMINALS

FUEL PUMP UNIT

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

ALTERNATOR WIRE

NC700XA/SA:

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
FUEL PUMP
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

GROUND TERMINALS

FUEL PUMP UNIT

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

ALTERNATOR WIRE

1-76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
FUEL PUMP
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

GROUND TERMINALS JUNCTION D

24P CONNECTOR

TR SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS FUEL PUMP UNIT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
ALTERNATOR WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-77
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-79
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-81
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:

ALTERNATOR
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE HOSE

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

ALTERNATOR
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR REAR BRAKE HOSE E
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

1-82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE

NC700XA/SA:

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

REAR BRAKE HOSE E

(from PCV)

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-83
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE
REAR BRAKE HOSE E
(from PCV)

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE A

(to ABS MODULATOR)

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD:

REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

2P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

2P (LIGHT BLUE) CONNECTOR

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT
3P CONNECTOR

1-84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD:

Upper
side

Right Upper
side side

Front
side
Right
side

180 ± 22.5°

Lower
side
INDEX MARK

Left
side

Front
side
Front Left
side 30 ± 22.5° side
Front
side
Upper
side

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-85
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOURCE OF EMISSIONS
The combustion process produces carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOX) and hydrocarbons (HC). Control of carbon
monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons is very important because, under certain conditions, they react to form
photochemical smog when subject to sunlight. Carbon monoxide does not react in the same way, but it is toxic.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. utilizes various systems (page 1-87) to reduce carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons.

CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The engine is equipped with a closed crankcase system to prevent discharging crankcase emissions into the atmosphere.
Blow-by gas is returned to the combustion chamber through the air cleaner and throttle body.

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

THROTTLE BODY

FRESH AIR
BLOW-BY GAS

1-86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The exhaust emission control system is composed of a three-way catalytic converter and PGM-FI system.
The exhaust emission control system is separate from the crankcase emission control system.
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
This motorcycle also equipped with a three-way catalytic converter.
The three-way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the
engine's exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor.
No adjustment to these systems should be made although periodic inspection of the components is recommended.

NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

TAMPERING WITH THE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM IS PROHIBITED: Local law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for the purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate customer or while it is in use; or (2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been
removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
AMONG THOSE ACTS PRESUMED TO CONSTITUTE TAMPERING ARE THE ACTS LISTED BELOW:
1. Removal of or puncturing of the muffler, baffles, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.
2. Removal of or puncturing of any part of the intake system.
3. Lack of proper maintenance.
4. Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the
manufacturer.

TECHNICAL FEATURES
CRACKING CONNECTING ROD
This motorcycle provides cracking connecting rods to utilize productivity
improvement and to trim weight.
The cracking connecting rod is split from the single-piece connecting rod
assembly into connecting rod and bearing cap.
Since the connecting rod and bearing cap have complex mating surfaces to
hold them each other, the dowel pin is not required when assembling
connecting rod.

In the following case, the mating surfaces of connecting rod and bearing
cap are damaged. Replace them if false installed.
– Bearing cap is installed oppositely.
– Interchange the connecting rods or bearing caps.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-87
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
ECM-to-COMBINATION METER TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
This motorcycle is equipped with the ECM-to-combination meter two-way serial communication system.
ECM sends the following information to combination meter:
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal, MIL signal, Engine oil pressure indicator signal, High coolant temperature indicator signal
Combination meter sends the following information to the ECM.
– VS sensor signal
– EOP switch line open circuit information

• The combination meter detects a problem in the VS sensor and EOP switch line.
• The combination meter diagnosis the VS sensor failure, then send the DTC 11-1 to the ECM and ECM send the MIL signal to
the combination meter.
• The combination meter send the EOP switch line open circuit information to the ECM, then ECM diagnosis the EOP switch line
failure and send the DTC 87-1 signal to the combination meter.
These signals are forwarded to the combination meter or ECM by asynchronous communication via one wire. This wire is called the
TXD/RXD line (serial communication line).

COMBINATION
ECT SENSOR
METER

TXD/RXD LINE
VS SENSOR

To COMBINATION METER:
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal
EOP SWITCH – MIL signal
– Engine oil pressure indicator signal
– High coolant temperature indicator signal
ECM
To ECM:
– VS sensor signal
– EOP switch line open circuit information
CKP SENSOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

WHEN THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE TXD/RXD LINE

When an open or short circuit occurs in the TXD/RXD line, the combination
[1] [2]
meter indicate the following:
– MIL [1] come on.
– Engine oil pressure indicator [2] come on.
– Tachometer go off.
– High coolant temperature indicator go off.
– HISS indicator go off.
When the ECM did not receive the meter information, the ECM store the
DTC 86-1. Check the DTC 86-1 with the HDS pocket tester (page 4-12).
Check the ECM by ECM communication diagnostic mode (page 22-11).
Check the combination meter by combination meter communication
diagnostic mode (page 22-11).

1-88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
PCM-to-COMBINATION METER TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION (NC700XD/SD)
This motorcycle is equipped with the PCM-to-combination meter two-way serial communication system.
The PCM sends the following information to combination meter:
– High coolant temperature indicator signal
– Engine oil pressure indicator signal
– Engine speed signal
– MIL signal
– HISS indicator signal
– Gear position indicator signal
Combination meter sends the ignition switch OFF time information (elapsed time after the ignition switch is turned OFF) to the
PCM. The PCM uses this information for the EOP switch line open circuit detection with the VS sensor signal.
These signals are communicated between the combination meter and PCM via one wire. This wire is called the TXD/RXD line
(serial communication line).

COMBINATION
ECT SENSOR
METER

TXD/RXD LINE

To COMBINATION METER:
– High coolant temperature indicator signal
EOP SWITCH
– Engine oil pressure indicator signal
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal
– MIL signal
– Gear position indicator signal
CKP SENSOR PCM
To PCM:
– Ignition switch OFF time information

TR SENSOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

WHEN THE SERIAL COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL

If there is any problem in the TXD/RXD line, the combination meter shows
[1] [2]
following:
– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and HISS indicator do
not come on.
TXD/RXD line troubleshooting (page 22-11)
If there is any problem in the serial communication, the PCM stores the
DTC 86-1. Read the DTC (page 4-12).
DTC troubleshooting (page 4-40)
MIL troubleshooting (page 4-60)

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-89
 dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
The dual clutch transmission on this motorcycle uses new dual clutch assembly and its hydraulic system is improved.
The dual clutch assembly consists of the primary driven gear assembly, two clutch guides and hydraulic clutch assemblies.
The linear solenoid valves are located inside the right crankcase cover and inner mainshaft has to oil passages instead of the oil
feed pipes.
– For linear solenoid valve location (page 12-100)
– For clutch operating oil flow (page 9-3)
The transmission shift mechanism and electric shift control system are same as the conventional dual clutch transmission.

PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY

No.2 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

No.1 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

CLUTCH GUIDE 1

OIL PASSAGE FOR

No.1 CLUTCH

CLUTCH GUIDE 2

OIL PASSAGE FOR

No.2 CLUTCH

1-90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

2. FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ··········· 2-16 2

(NC700X/XA) ·················································2-2
LUGGAGE BOX LID ··································· 2-17
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700XD)·····················································2-3 LUGGAGE BOX LID/
HINGE ASSEMBLY ···································· 2-19
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700S/SA) ·················································2-4 LUGGAGE BOX ·········································· 2-19

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS WINDSCREEN ············································ 2-23

(NC700SD)·····················································2-5
FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD) ······ 2-24
SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························2-6
METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)················· 2-24
TROUBLESHOOTING···································2-6
FRONT UNDER COVER
PILLION SEAT ··············································2-7 (NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-25

SINGLE SEAT ···············································2-7 INNER UPPER COVER

(NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-25
GRAB RAIL ···················································2-8
HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL
CENTER SEAT COWL··································2-8 (NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-26

SEAT COWL··················································2-9 HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY

(NC700S/SA/SD) ········································· 2-27
REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type) ·····2-10
HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ····· 2-27
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT
COVER ························································2-10 FRONT FENDER········································· 2-28

MUD GUARD···············································2-11 LOWER COWL ··········································· 2-28

REAR FENDER A········································2-12 LEFT REAR COVER ··································· 2-29

REAR FENDER B········································2-12 RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER

(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 2-30
AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD) ·······················2-13
GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD) ····················· 2-30
SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD)····················2-13
BATTERY BOX ··········································· 2-31
SHROUD/SIDE COVER
(NC700X/XA/XD) ·········································2-14 CENTER CROSS PLATE ··························· 2-32

SHELTER/SIDE COVER EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER ························ 2-32

(NC700S/SA/SD) ·········································2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-1
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700X/XA)
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

[16] [13] [14] [4]

[18] [10] [8]
[1]
[20] [2]
[6]

[7]
[17]

[21]

[3]

[5]
[19]
[9]
[12]
[26]
[11] [15]
[22] [23] [24]
[25]

[1] Pillion seat page 2-7 [10] Air duct page 2-13 [19] Front under cover page 2-25
[2] Single seat page 2-7 [11] Shroud page 2-14 [20] Inner upper cover page 2-25
[3] Grab rail page 2-8 [12] Side cover page 2-14 [21] Front center cowl page 2-26
[4] Center seat cowl page 2-8 [13] Center cover page 2-16 [22] Front fender page 2-28
[5] Seat cowl page 2-9 [14] Luggage box lid page 2-17 [23] Lower cowl page 2-28
[6] Tail light cover page 2-10 [15] Luggage box page 2-19 [24] Left rear cover page 2-29
[7] Mud guard page 2-11 [16] Windscreen page 2-23 [25] Battery box page 2-31
[8] Rear fender A page 2-12 [17] Front side cowl page 2-24 [26] Center cross plate page 2-32
[9] Rear fender B page 2-12 [18] Meter stay page 2-24

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART

This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.

[1] Pillion seat [2] Single seat [3] Grab rail

[6] Tail light cover [5] Seat cowl [10] Air duct

[11] Shroud
[7] Mud guard [13] Center cover
[12] Side cover

[8] Rear fender A [15] Luggage box

[26] Center cross

[9] Rear fender B [25] Battery box
plate

[4] Center seat cowl [17] Front side cowl [16] Windscreen

[20] Inner upper

[14] Luggage box lid [22] Front fender [18] Meter stay
cover

[19] Front under [21] Front center

[23] Lower cowl [24] Left rear cover
cover cowl

2-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700XD)
[2] [14] [13] [10] [16]
[4] [1]
[15] [18]
[6]
[28] [20]

[17]

[21]

[8]
[7]
[3]

[5]
[9]
[19]
[12]
[27]
[25] [11] [22]
[24] [23] [26]

[1] Pillion seat page 2-7 [11] Shroud page 2-14 [21] Front center cowl page 2-26
[2] Single seat page 2-7 [12] Side cover page 2-14 [22] Front fender page 2-28
[3] Grab rail page 2-8 [13] Center cover page 2-16 [23] Lower cowl page 2-29
[4] Center seat cowl page 2-8 [14] Luggage box lid page 2-17 [24] Left rear cover page 2-30
[5] Seat cowl page 2-9 [15] Luggage box page 2-19 [25] Right engine side
[6] Tail light cover page 2-10 [16] Windscreen page 2-23 cover page 2-30
[7] Mud guard page 2-11 [17] Front side cowl page 2-24 [26] Guard pipe page 2-30
[8] Rear fender A page 2-12 [18] Meter stay page 2-24 [27] Battery box page 2-31
[9] Rear fender B page 2-12 [19] Front under cover page 2-25 [28] Center cross plate page 2-32
[10] Air duct page 2-13 [20] Inner upper cover page 2-25

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART

This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.

[1] Pillion seat [2] Single seat [3] Grab rail [4] Center seat cowl

[6] Tail light cover [5] Seat cowl [10] Air duct [14] Luggage box lid

[11] Shroud
[7] Mud guard [13] Center cover [22] Front fender
[12] Side cover

[8] Rear fender A [15] Luggage box

[28] Center cross

[9] Rear fender B [27] Battery box
plate

[23] Lower cowl [17] Front side cowl [16] Windscreen

[20] Inner upper

[26] Guard pipe [18] Meter stay
cover

[25] Right engine [19] Front under [21] Front center

[24] Left rear cover
side cover cover cowl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-3
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700S/SA)
E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:
[15] [10] [4]
[1] [8]
[2]
[17] [6]
[13]
[16] [7]

[18]

[3]

[5]
[9]
[11]
[12]

[22]
[21] [14] [19] [20]

[1] Pillion seat page 2-7 [9] Rear fender B page 2-12 [17] Headlight cover page 2-27
[2] Single seat page 2-7 [10] Side cowl page 2-13 [18] Front fender page 2-28
[3] Grab rail page 2-8 [11] Shelter page 2-15 [19] Lower cowl page 2-28
[4] Center seat cowl page 2-8 [12] Side cover page 2-15 [20] Left rear cover page 2-29
[5] Seat cowl page 2-9 [13] Luggage box lid page 2-18 [21] Battery box page 2-31
[6] Tail light cover page 2-10 [14] Luggage box page 2-20 [22] Center cross plate page 2-32
[7] Mud guard page 2-11 [15] Windscreen page 2-23 [23] Rear fender mud
[8] Rear fender A page 2-12 [16] Headlight stay page 2-27 guard (U type) page 2-10

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART

This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.

[23] Rear fender mud

[3] Grab rail [2] Single seat [4] Center seat cowl
guard (U type)

[1] Pillion seat [6] Tail light cover [5] Seat cowl [10] Side cowl

[11] Shelter
[7] Mud guard
[12] Side cover

[8] Rear fender A [15] Windscreen

[9] Rear fender B [14] Luggage box [16] Headlight stay

[13] Luggage box lid [19] Lower cowl [17] Headlight cover

[18] Front fender [20] Left rear cover [21] Battery box [22] Center cross plate

2-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700SD)
E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:
[1] [2] [13] [14] [15]
[4] [10]
[6] [17]
[24]
[16]

[18]
[8]
[7]
[3]

[5]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[23]
[21]
[20] [19] [22]

[1] Pillion seat page 2-7 [10] Side cowl page 2-13 [19] Lower cowl page 2-29
[2] Single seat page 2-7 [11] Shelter page 2-15 [20] Left rear cover page 2-30
[3] Grab rail page 2-8 [12] Side cover page 2-15 [21] Right engine side
[4] Center seat cowl page 2-8 [13] Luggage box lid page 2-18 cover page 2-30
[5] Seat cowl page 2-9 [14] Luggage box page 2-20 [22] Guard pipe page 2-30
[6] Tail light cover page 2-10 [15] Windscreen page 2-23 [23] Battery box page 2-31
[7] Mud guard page 2-11 [16] Headlight stay page 2-27 [24] Center cross plate page 2-32
[8] Rear fender A page 2-12 [17] Headlight cover page 2-27 [25] Rear fender mud
[9] Rear fender B page 2-12 [18] Front fender page 2-28 guard (U type) page 2-10

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART

This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.

[25] Rear fender mud

[4] Center seat cowl [13] Luggage box lid [18] Front fender
guard (U type)

[6] Tail light cover [3] Grab rail [2] Single seat

[7] Mud guard [1] Pillion seat [5] Seat cowl [10] Side cowl

[11] Shelter
[8] Rear fender A [15] Windscreen
[12] Side cover

[19] Lower cowl [9] Rear fender B [16] Headlight stay

[21] Right engine side

[14] Luggage box [17] Headlight cover
cover

[20] Left rear cover [22] Guard pipe [23] Battery box [24] Center cross plate

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-5
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers removal and installation of the body panels and exhaust system.
• Serious burns may result if the exhaust system is not allowed to cool before components are removed or serviced.
• Always replace the exhaust pipe gasket with new ones after removing the exhaust pipe from the engine.
• When installing the exhaust system, loosely install all of the exhaust pipe fasteners. Always tighten the exhaust pipe joint nuts
first, then tighten the mounting bolts.
• Always inspect the exhaust system for leaks after installation.

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Seat cowl assembly screw 2 4 0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
Brake/tail/license light mounting 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
socket bolt
Reflector mounting nut 1 5 1.7 (0.2, 1.3)
Turn signal light mounting screw 4 6 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Luggage box lid assembly screw 9 4 0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
Luggage box lid lock plate 2 6 4.0 (0.4, 3.0)
mounting screw
Luggage box lid mounting socket 3 6 12 (1.2, 9)
bolt
Luggage box lid hinge nut 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) U-nut
Gearshift arm pinch bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Muffler cover socket bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Muffler band bolt 1 8 17.5 (1.8, 13)
Exhaust pipe joint nut 3 8 28 (2.9, 21) See page 2-34
Exhaust pipe stud bolt 3 8 – See page 2-35

TROUBLESHOOTING
Excessive exhaust noise
• Broken exhaust system
• Exhaust gas leak
Poor performance
• Deformed exhaust system
• Exhaust gas leak
• Clogged muffler

2-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

PILLION SEAT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat [1] using the ignition key.
[1]
Remove the nuts [2], collars [3] and pillion seat.
Remove the grommets [4] from the pillion seat stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Apply grease to the pillion seat catch hook sliding area

if necessary.

[2]/[3] [4]

SINGLE SEAT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.
[5] [2] [1]
Remove the mounting bolts [1].
Remove the single seat [2] by pulling it rearward. [6]
Remove the collars [3] and grommets [4] from the
single seat.
Install the grommets and collars to the single seat.
Install the single seat by inserting its hook [5] into the
seat bracket [6] under the luggage box hinge bracket.
Install and tighten the mounting bolts securely.
Close the pillion seat.

[3]/[4]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.
[6] [3] [1]/[2]
Remove the mounting socket bolts [1] and washers [2].
Remove the single seat [3] by pulling it rearward.
Remove the collars [4] and grommets [5] from the [7]
single seat.
Install the grommets and collars to the single seat.
Install the single seat by inserting its hook [6] into the
seat bracket [7] under the luggage box hinge bracket.
Install and tighten the mounting socket bolts securely.
Close the pillion seat.

[4]/[5]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-7
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

GRAB RAIL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.
Right grab rail: Remove the clip [1], washer [2], spring [3] and pillion seat hinge [4] from the pillion seat stay.
Remove the caps [5] from the mounting socket bolts [6].
Remove the mounting socket bolts, washers [7] and grab rails [8] while holding the collars [9].

Be careful not to let the collars fall into the seat cowl.
Remove the collars from the grab rail.
If necessary, remove the clips [10], washers [11] and pillion seat hinge from the right grab rail.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[10] [4] [1]

[2]
[3] [5]
[6]
[7]

[11]
[8]

[9]

CENTER SEAT COWL

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.
[1] [2] [4]
Remove the socket bolts [1].
Pull up the center seat cowl rear end and release the
center seat cowl tabs [2] from the seat cowl slits [3] by
pulling the center seat cowl [4] rearward.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

2-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

SEAT COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Single seat (page 2-7)
– Grab rail (page 2-8)
Remove the socket bolts [1] and trim clips [2].
Release the seat cowl front side slits [3] and tabs [4] from the side cover tabs [5] and slits [6].
Remove the seat cowl assembly [7] by releasing the its rear side tabs [8] and slits [9] from the rear fender B slits
[10] and tabs [11].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[10] [1]

[7]
[2]

[11]

[8]

[9]

[5]
[6] [2]
[4] [3]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the center seat cowl (page 2-8).
Remove the seat cowl assembly screws [1] and separate the right and left seat cowls [2].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
TORQUE:
Seat cowl assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

[1]

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-9
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the screw [1], socket bolts [2] and rear fender
mud guard [3].

[1] [3] [2]

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT COVER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the rear fender mud guard (U type) (page 2-
E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown: [3]/[4]/[5]
10).
Remove the screw [1] and open the cover [2].
Disconnect the following:
– Rear right turn signal light 2P (Light blue) connector
[3]
– Rear left turn signal light 2P (Orange) connector [4]
– Brake/tail/license light 3P connector [5]

[2] [1]

Remove the brake/tail/license light mounting socket bolt

E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:
[1] and collar [2].
Remove the socket bolts (E, ED, F, KO, RU type) [3]
and brake/tail/license light assembly [4] and release the
wire harnesses from the rear fender A.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Brake/tail/license light mounting socket bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) [1]
[4]
[2]

[3]

2-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the reflector mounting nut [1] and reflector [2].
Remove the screw [3], nuts [4], washers [5] and socket bolts [6] and separate the tail light covers [7] and brake/
tail/license light [8].
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [9], setting plate [10] and turn signal light [11].
Remove the mounting rubber [12].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Align the tail light cover tabs with the brake/tail/license light slots.
• Align the reflector tab [13] with the left tail light cover hole [14].

TORQUE:
Reflector mounting nut:
1.7 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.3 lbf·ft)
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

[4]/[5] [7] [14]

[13]
[6] [2]
[1]
Align
[6]
[3]

[12]

[11]

[8]

[10] [7] [9]

MUD GUARD
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the brake/tail/license light assembly (page 2-
[1]
10).
Remove the socket bolts [1], nuts [2], collars [3] and
mud guard [4]. [2]
If necessary, remove the brake/tail/license light
assembly mounting collars [5] and grommets [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. [4]

[6]
[5]

[3] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-11
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REAR FENDER A
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
[7]
– Pillion seat (page 2-7)
– Mud guard (page 2-11)
[1]
Remove the clip [1], washer [2], spring [3] and pillion
seat hinge [4] from the pillion seat stay.
Remove the rubber holder [5] from the rear fender A [2]
tabs.
[3]
Remove the socket bolts [6], pillion seat stay [7] while
holding the rear fender A [8].
[4]
Remove the rear fender A and release the wire
harnesses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. [6]

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

[8]
[5]

REAR FENDER B
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Rear fender A (page 2-12)
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3].
Release the tab [4] from the frame.
Release the main wire harness [5] from guides [6] and remove the rear fender B [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

[1] [2] [4] [7]

Align

[3] [5] [6]

2-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the trim clip [1] and screw [2].
Release the air duct tabs [3] from the slits by pulling it rearward and remove the air duct [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[4]

[3] [2]

SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD)

LEFT SIDE COWL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the single seat (page 2-7).
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the trim clip [1] and socket bolts [2].
Remove the left side cowl [3] by releasing the side cowl tabs [4] from the right side cowl and side cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[4]

[1]

[2]
[4]
[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-13
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

RIGHT SIDE COWL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the left side cowl (page 2-13).
Remove the trim clip [1] and socket bolts [2].
Remove the right side cowl [3] by releasing the side cowl tabs [4] from the luggage box hinge bracket and side
cover.
Remove the screw [5] and center cover [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[4]

[5]
[2] [6]

[4] [3]

SHROUD/SIDE COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Seat cowl (page 2-9)
– Air duct (page 2-13)
Remove the trim clips [1], screw [2] and socket bolts [3].
Remove the shroud/side cover [4] by releasing the side cover tabs [5] from the grommet [6] and step holder [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3] [6]
[1] [1]

[7]
[2]

[4]

[5] [3]

2-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].
Release the shroud tabs [2] from the side cover slits [3] and remove the shroud [4] from the side cover [5].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[3] [1]

[3]

[5]

[4] [2] [2]

SHELTER/SIDE COVER (NC700S/SA/SD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Seat cowl (page 2-9)
– Side cowl (page 2-13)
Right side: Release the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue) connector (NC700SA/SD) [1] from the side cover.
Remove the trim clip [2] and socket bolts [3].
Remove the shelter/side cover [4] by releasing the side cover tabs [5] from the grommet [6] and step holder [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the seat lock cable [8] to the shelter mounting screws [9] upper side.

[6] [7] [8]

[9]

[2]
Right side:

[4]

[1] [3] [5] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-15
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].
Release the shelter tab [2] from the side cover slit [3] and remove the shelter [4] from the side cover [5].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[4]

[2]

[3]
[1] [5]

CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the air duct (page 2-13).
Remove the trim clips [1] and socket bolts [2].
Lift the center cover [3] and remove the trim clip, screws [4], right cable under cover [5] and left cable under
cover [6]

Be careful not to damage the center cover, cable under cover and cable by lifting the center cover too far.
Disconnect the seat lock cable [7] and luggage box lid lock cable [8] from the center cover and remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the cable properly (page 1-25).

[4]
[1]
[3] [2]

[8] [5]

[4]

[1]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[7]

2-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1] and seat lock assembly from the center cover [2].
Remove the screws [3] and center inner cover [4].
Remove the clip [5], cable guide [6] and seat lock [7].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Align the seat lock tab [8] with the clip and cable guide cutouts [9].

[1] [4] [2]

[6]

[3]

[3] [8] [7]

[5] [9]

LUGGAGE BOX LID

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
[7] [6] [4]
Remove the luggage box assembly screw (long) [1] and
disconnect the band [2].
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid mounting socket bolts [3]
– Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw [4]
– Luggage box lid assembly screws [5]
– Inner luggage box lid [6]
– Luggage box lid lock plate [7]
– Luggage box lid A/B [8]

[8] [5]
[2]
[1]
[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-17
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

Remove the luggage box assembly screws [1].
[1] [4]
Release the tabs [2] and remove the luggage box lids B
[3] from the luggage box lid A [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw:
4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid mounting socket bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[2] [3]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the luggage box assembly screw (long) [1] and disconnect the band [2].
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid mounting socket bolts [3]
– Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw [4]
– Luggage box lid assembly screws [5]
– Inner luggage box lid [6]
– Luggage box lid lock plate [7]
– Center luggage box lid [8]
– Left luggage box lid [9]
– Right luggage box lid [10]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw:
4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid mounting socket bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[10] [8] [9] [7] [6] [4]

[5]

[3] [3]
[2]
[1]

2-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

LUGGAGE BOX LID/HINGE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
[5]
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the screw [1] and disconnect the band [2]. [2]
Remove the socket bolts [3] and bolts [4] and luggage
box lid/hinge assembly [5].
[4]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

[3]

LUGGAGE BOX
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the following:
[6] [5]
– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
– Center cover (page 2-16)
Release the following:
– Turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the luggage box [1]
tab
– Seat lock cable [2] from the luggage box cable
guides
– Option 6P connector [3] from the luggage box
Remove the bolts [4], socket bolts [5] and luggage box
[4]
[6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• For luggage box lid removal/installation (page 2-17).

• Route the cable properly (page 1-25). [2]

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-19
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the shelter/side cover (page 2-15).
Remove the socket bolts [1], cable guide [2] and seat lock assembly [3].
Release the luggage box lid lock cable [4].
Release the following:
– Turn signal/hazard relay [5] from the luggage box tab
– Option 6P connector [6] from the luggage box
Remove the bolts [7], socket bolts [8] and luggage box [9].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• For luggage box lid removal/installation (page 2-18).

• Route the cable properly (page 1-25).

[5] [9] [8]

[4]

[4]

[7]

[2]

[1]
[3]

[6]

2-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid (page 2-17)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the screw [1] and band [2].
Remove the trim clips [3], owners manual lid [4] and luggage box lid hinge cover [5].
Remove the socket bolts [6] and luggage box lid catch [7].
Remove the socket bolts and luggage box lid hinge assembly.
Remove the luggage box lid hinge nut [8], washers [9], hinge bolt [10] and hinge [11] from the hinge bracket
[12].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Align the luggage box lid catch holes [13] with the luggage box tabs [14].
• Apply grease to the luggage box lid catch sliding area.

TORQUE:
Luggage box lid hinge nut:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[7] [6]
[3]

[1]
[2] [4]

[13]

[9]
[11]
[5]
[8]
[14]

[3]

[6] [9]

[10]
[12]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-21
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid (page 2-18)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the screw [1] and band [2].
Remove the trim clips [3] and owners manual lid [4].
Remove the socket bolts [5] and luggage box lid catch [6].
Remove the socket bolts and luggage box lid hinge assembly.
Remove the luggage box lid hinge nut [7], washers [8], hinge bolt [9] and hinge [10] from the hinge bracket [11].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Align the luggage box lid catch hole [12] with the luggage box tab [13].
• Align the hinge bracket holes [14] with the luggage box tabs [15].
• Apply grease to the luggage box lid catch sliding area.

TORQUE:
Luggage box lid hinge nut:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[6] [5] [3]

[1] [4]
[2]

[12]
[5]

[13]

[10]

[7]
[8]
[15]

[9] [8] [11]

[14]

2-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

WINDSCREEN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the socket bolts [1], washers [2] and windscreen [3].
Remove the special nuts [4] and cushion rubbers [5] if necessary.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

If you wish the windscreen position upward, you can choose high position.
– High position: Install the special nuts to the upper holes.
– Low position: Install the special nuts to the lower holes.

[3] [4] [5]

[2]
[1]

Low position High position

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the socket bolts [1], plastic washers [2], rubbers [3] and windscreen [4].
Remove the special nuts [5] if necessary.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[4] [5]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-23
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (page 2-14).
Remove the trim clips [1], socket bolt [2] and bolts [3].
Disconnect the front turn signal light 3P connector [4] and remove the front side cowl [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

[1] [2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
[2] [3]
– Windscreen (page 2-23)
– Front side cowl (page 2-24)
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1].
Remove the bolts [2] and meter stay [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• For combination meter removal/installation (page

22-9). [1] [2]
• For digital clock setting procedure (page 22-14).

2-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT UNDER COVER (NC700X/XA/
XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the trim clips [1] and screw [2].
Release the tabs [3] and remove the front under cover
[4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[3]
[4] [2]

INNER UPPER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the front side cowl (page 2-24).
[1]
Remove the trim clips [1].
[2]
Release the tabs [2] and remove the inner upper cover
[3]. [1]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-25
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Meter stay (page 2-24)
– Front under cover (page 2-25)
– Inner upper cover (page 2-25)
Release the front turn signal light 3P connectors [1] from the wire bands [2].
Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [3] and front sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [4].
Remove the bolts [5].
Release the headlight boss [6] from the frame grommet [7] and remove the front center cowl/headlight [8].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

[5] [2] [3]

[1]
[2]

[8]

[5]

[5]
[4]

[6] [5] [7]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1] and front center cowl [2] from the headlight unit [3].
Remove the socket bolts [4] and headlight stay [5] from the headlight unit.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[1] [5]
[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

2-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY
(NC700S/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the socket bolts [1] and collars [2].
[1] [2]
Release the headlight stay tabs [3] from the grommet
[4]. [6] [5]
Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [5], front
sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [6] and remove the
headlight/headlight stay [7]. [4]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-

25).

[3] [7] [2] [1]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
[1] [6] [2]
Disconnect the following:
– Front left turn signal light 3P (Orange) connector [1]
– Front right turn signal light 3P (Blue) connector [2]
Remove the bolts [3], washers [4] and headlight stays
[5] from the headlight unit [6].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[3]/[4] [5] [5]

HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
[7] [8] [9] [11]
Remove the following:
– Bolt [1]
– Main wire harness clamp [2]
– Bolts [3] [10]
– Brake hose clamp (NC700S) [4]
– Washer (NC700SA/SD) [5]
– Wire band (NC700SD) [6]
Release the following:
– Front sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [7]
– Right handlebar switch 8P (Blue) connector [8]
– Ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector/Left handlebar [2] [3]
switch 10P (Gray) connector [9] [1] [3]
– Immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [10] NC700SD: [5]
Remove the headlight cover [11].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1- [6] NC700S: [4]
25).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-27
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT FENDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1], hose guide [2], socket bolts [3], washers [4] and front fender [5] from the fork legs.
Remove the flange collars (E, ED, F, KO, RU type) [6], reflector (U type) [7], grommets [8], front fender brace
[9] and collars [10] from the front fender.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).

E, ED, F, KO, RU type:

[3] [4]
[5]

[4]

[3] [2]

[9]

[8]

[6] [8]

[3]
U type: [10]

[7] [1]

LOWER COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the socket bolts [1].
[3] [1]
Release the bosses [2] from the grommets [3] and
remove the lower cowl [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]
[4]
[2]

2-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the socket bolts [1].
[3]
Release the bosses [2] from the grommets [3] and
remove the lower cowl [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1] [2] [4]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].
[1] [3] [2] [8] [5]
Release the tabs [2] from the slits [3] and separate the
left lower cowl [4], right lower cowl [5] and center lower
cowl [6].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. [6]

Align the left and right lower cowl holes [7] with center
lower cowl bosses [8].

[7]

[4] [1]

LEFT REAR COVER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the gearshift arm pinch bolt [1] and gearshift
arm [2].
Remove the bolts [3] and left rear cover [4]. [3]
Remove the drive chain guide plate [5] and collar [6]
from the left rear cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Align the gearshift arm slit with the punch mark.

• Replace the gearshift arm pinch bolt with a new one.

TORQUE:
Gearshift arm pinch bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft) [5]
Align [6]
[4] [1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-29
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
Remove the bolts [1] and left rear cover [2].
Remove the drive chain guide plate [3] from the left rear
cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3] [2] [1]

RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER

(NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
[2]
Remove the socket bolts [1] and right engine side cover
[2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
[1] [3] [8]
Release the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector (Optional) [1] from the guard pipe [2] and
clamp [3].
Remove the bolts [4], nuts [5] and guard pipe.
Release the fuel tank drain hose B [6] and battery box
drain hose [7].
If necessary, remove the socket bolts [8] and motor
guard [9].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[4] [2] [7] [6] [4]/[5] [9]

2-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BATTERY BOX
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Battery (page 21-6)
– Luggage box (page 2-19)
Remove the bolts [1] and ignition coil stay [2] from the battery box [3].
Release the following:
– Fuse box [4]
– Starter relay switch [5]
– CKP sensor harness [6]
– Battery negative (–) cable [7]
– Main wire harness [8]
– Junction B 14P (Orange) connector [9]
– Junction G 14P (Orange) connector [10]
– DLC [11]
– Battery positive (+) cable [12]
Remove the socket bolts [13] and battery box while releasing the grommets [14] from the frame bosses [15].
Disconnect the battery box drain hose [16].
Remove the grommet from the battery box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the cable, wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).

[6] [9] [10]

[11]
[7]
[12] [1]
[5]
[8]

[13]

[2]

[4]

[16] [3]

[15]

[14]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-31
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

CENTER CROSS PLATE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector [1] and remove it from the ECM box [2].
Release the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [3] from the ECM box.
Remove the bolts [4] and ECM box from the center cross plate [5].
Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector [6].
Release the fuel tank drain hose A [7] from the ECM box.
Remove the wire band (NC700S/SA/SD) [8] and seat lock cable (NC700S/SA/SD) [9] from the center cross
plate.
Remove the ABS modulator stay mounting bolts [10] and collars [11].
Remove the bolts [12] and ground terminals [13].
Remove the center cross plate to the left.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).

[12] [5]
NC700S/SA/SD:
[6]
[9]

[4]
[12]
[13]
[8]

[7]

[10]/[11] [2] [1] [3] [4]

EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER
MUFFLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Loosen the muffler band bolt [1].

[1]

2-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

Remove the muffler mounting nut [1], bolt [2] and
[1]
washer [3].
Remove the muffler [4] and gasket [5].

[5]

[4] [2]/[3]

Remove the muffler cover socket bolt.

Remove the muffler cover by releasing its slits from the muffler bosses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the gasket with a new one.

• Align the muffler band tab with the muffler upper right slit.

TORQUE:
Muffler cover socket bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Muffler band bolt:
17.5 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

MUFFLER MOUNTING NUT

WASHER

MUFFLER MOUNTING BOLT

GASKET

TAB

RIGHT

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

17.5 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-33
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

EXHAUST PIPE
REMOVAL
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Release the O2 sensor wire from the clamp [2] and
radiator reserve tank guide [3].

[1] [2] [3]

Remove the bolt [1] and disconnect the ground wire [2].
[7] [1]/[2] [4]
Loosen the exhaust pipe mounting nut [3].
Remove the exhaust pipe joint nuts [4].
Remove the exhaust pipe mounting nut, bolt [5],
washers [6] and exhaust pipe [7].
Remove the exhaust pipe gasket [8].

[5]/[6] [3] [8]

INSTALLATION
Install a new exhaust pipe gasket [1] to the exhaust port
[2]
of the cylinder head.
Install the exhaust pipe and exhaust pipe joint nuts [2]
but do not tighten yet.

[1]

Install the exhaust pipe mounting bolt [1], washers [2]

[4]/[5]
and nut [3] but do not tighten yet.
Install the ground wire [4] and bolt [5] but do not tighten
yet.

Route the ground wire properly (page 1-25).

[1]/[2]/[3]

2-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

Install the muffler, then loosely install the muffler
[1]
mounting bolt, washer, nut and band bolt (page 2-32).
Tighten the exhaust pipe joint nuts [1] to the specified
torque in numerical order by stamped number on the
exhaust pipe joint [2] in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

[2]

Tighten the exhaust pipe mounting nut [1] securely.

[2]
Tighten the ground wire mounting bolt [2] securely.

[1]

Install the O2 sensor wire to the clamp [1] and radiator

reserve tank guide [2].

Route the O2 sensor wire properly (page 1-25).

Connect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [3].
Tighten the muffler mounting nut and band bolt securely
(page 2-32).
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[3] [1] [2]

STUD BOLT REPLACEMENT

Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
30.0 – 31.0 mm
Thread two nuts onto the stud and tighten them (1.18 – 1.22 in)
together, and use a wrench on them to turn the stud bolt
out.
Install new stud bolts into the cylinder head as shown.
After installing the stud bolts, check that the length from
the bolt head to the cylinder head surface is within
specification.
Install the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-35
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

3. MAINTENANCE

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························3-2 DRIVE CHAIN ············································· 3-16

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE························3-3 DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER ······························· 3-20

FUEL LINE·····················································3-5 BRAKE FLUID ············································ 3-21

THROTTLE OPERATION······························3-5 BRAKE PADS WEAR ································· 3-22

AIR CLEANER···············································3-7 BRAKE SYSTEM ········································ 3-23

CRANKCASE BREATHER ···························3-8 BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ····························· 3-24

SPARK PLUG················································3-8 BRAKE LOCK OPERATION

(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 3-24
VALVE CLEARANCE··································3-10
HEADLIGHT AIM ········································ 3-25
ENGINE OIL ················································3-12
CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······ 3-26
ENGINE OIL FILTER···································3-13
SIDESTAND ················································ 3-27
CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD) ········3-14
SUSPENSION ············································· 3-28
ENGINE IDLE SPEED ·································3-15
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS ····················· 3-29
RADIATOR COOLANT ·······························3-15
WHEELS/TIRES ·········································· 3-29
COOLING SYSTEM·····································3-16
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS ··················· 3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-1
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
SERVICE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE

GENERAL
• Place the motorcycle on level surface before starting any work.
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and is explosive under certain conditions.
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where the gasoline is stored can cause
a fire or explosion.
• The exhaust contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that may cause loss of consciousness and may lead to death. Run the
engine in an open area or with an exhaust evacuation system in an enclosed area.

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Air cleaner housing cover screw 6 5 1.1 (0.1, 0.8)
Spark plug 2 14 22 (2.2, 16)
Valve adjusting screw lock nut 8 7 14 (1.4, 10) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Camshaft maintenance cap 1 36 4.0 (0.4, 3.0) See page 3-12
Timing hole cap 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Apply grease to the threads.
Crankshaft hole cap 1 30 15 (1.5, 11) Apply grease to the threads.
Engine oil drain bolt 1 12 30 (3.1, 22)
Engine oil filter cartridge 1 20 26 (2.7, 19) Apply engine oil to the threads.
Oil filter boss 1 20 – See page 3-14
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Rear axle nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Drive chain adjuster lock nut 2 8 21 (2.1, 15)
Drive sprocket bolt 1 10 54 (5.5, 40)
Driven sprocket nut 5 12 108 (11.0, 80) U-nut
Master cylinder reservoir cover 4 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Rear master cylinder push rod lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Sidestand pivot bolt 1 10 – See page 3-27
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Sidestand pivot nut 1 10 39 (4.0, 29) U-nut
Sidestand switch bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

3-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
NC700X/XA/S/SA
Perform the Pre-ride inspection in the Owner's Manual at each scheduled maintenance period.
I: Inspect and Clean, Adjust, Lubricate or Replace if necessary. C: Clean. R: Replace. A: Adjust. L: Lubricate.
The following items require some mechanical knowledge. Certain items (particularly those marked * and **) may require more
technical information and tools. Consult a dealer.
FREQUENCY ODOMETER READING (NOTE 1)
ANNUAL REGULAR REFER TO
x 1,000 km 1 12 24 36 48
CHECK REPLACE PAGE
ITEMS NOTE x 1,000 mi 0.6 8 16 24 32
* FUEL LINE I I I I I 3-5
* THROTTLE OPERATION I I I I I 3-5
* AIR CLEANER NOTE 2 R R 3-7
CRANKCASE BREATHER NOTE 3 C C C C C 3-8
* SPARK PLUG I R 3-8
* VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I 3-10
ENGINE OIL R R R R R R 3-12
ENGINE OIL FILTER R R R R R R 3-13
* ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I 3-15
RADIATOR COOLANT NOTE 4 I I I I I 3 YEARS 3-15
* COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I 3-16
DRIVE CHAIN EVERY 1,000 km
3-16
(600 mi) I, L
DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER I I I I 3-20
BRAKE FLUID NOTE 4 I I I I I 2 YEARS 3-21
BRAKE PADS WEAR I I I I I 3-22
BRAKE SYSTEM I I I I I I 3-23
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH I I I I I 3-24
HEADLIGHT AIM I I I I I 3-25
CLUTCH SYSTEM I I I I I I 3-26
SIDESTAND I I I I I 3-27
* SUSPENSION I I I I I 3-28
* NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS I I I I I I 3-29
** WHEELS/TIRES I I I I I 3-29
** STEERING HEAD BEARINGS I I I I I I 3-30

* Should be serviced by a dealer, unless the owner has proper tools and service data and is mechanically qualified.
** In the interest of safety, we recommend these items be serviced only by a dealer.
Honda recommends that a dealer should road test your motorcycle after each periodic maintenance is carried out.
NOTES:
1. At higher odometer readings, repeat at the frequency interval established here.
2. Service more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
3. Service more frequently when riding in rain or at full throttle.
4. Replacement requires mechanical skill.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-3
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
NC700XD/SD
Perform the Pre-ride inspection in the Owner's Manual at each scheduled maintenance period.
I: Inspect and Clean, Adjust, Lubricate or Replace if necessary. C: Clean. R: Replace. A: Adjust. L: Lubricate.
The following items require some mechanical knowledge. Certain items (particularly those marked * and **) may require more
technical information and tools. Consult a dealer.
FREQUENCY ODOMETER READING (NOTE 1)
ANNUAL REGULAR REFER TO
x 1,000 km 1 12 24 36 48
CHECK REPLACE PAGE
ITEMS NOTE x 1,000 mi 0.6 8 16 24 32
* FUEL LINE I I I I I 3-5
* THROTTLE OPERATION I I I I I 3-5
* AIR CLEANER NOTE 2 R R 3-7
CRANKCASE BREATHER NOTE 3 C C C C C 3-8
* SPARK PLUG I R 3-8
* VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I 3-10
ENGINE OIL R R R R R R 3-12
ENGINE OIL FILTER R R R R R R 3-13
CLUTCH OIL FILTER R R R 3-14
* ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I 3-15
RADIATOR COOLANT NOTE 4 I I I I I 3 YEARS 3-15
* COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I 3-16
DRIVE CHAIN EVERY 1,000 km
3-16
(600 mi) I, L
DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER I I I I 3-20
BRAKE FLUID NOTE 4 I I I I I 2 YEARS 3-21
BRAKE PADS WEAR I I I I I 3-22
BRAKE SYSTEM I I I I I I 3-23
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH I I I I I 3-24
* BRAKE LOCK OPERATION I I I I I 3-24
HEADLIGHT AIM I I I I I 3-25
SIDESTAND I I I I I 3-27
* SUSPENSION I I I I I 3-28
* NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS I I I I I I 3-29
** WHEELS/TIRES I I I I I 3-29
** STEERING HEAD BEARINGS I I I I I I 3-30
* Should be serviced by a dealer, unless the owner has proper tools and service data and is mechanically qualified.
** In the interest of safety, we recommend these items be serviced only by a dealer.
Honda recommends that a dealer should road test your motorcycle after each periodic maintenance is carried out.
NOTES:
1. At higher odometer readings, repeat at the frequency interval established here.
2. Service more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
3. Service more frequently when riding in rain or at full throttle.
4. Replacement requires mechanical skill.

3-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
FUEL LINE
INSPECTION
Check the quick connect fitting [1] for looseness.
[1]
Check the fuel feed hose [2] for deterioration, damage
or leakage.
Check the quick connect fittings for dirt, and clean if
necessary.
Replace the fuel pump packing if necessary (page 7-
13).

[2]

THROTTLE OPERATION
Check for any deterioration or damage to the throttle
cable.
Check the throttle grip for smooth operation.
2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)
Check that the throttle opens and automatically closes
in all steering positions.
If the throttle grip does not return properly, lubricate the
throttle cable, and overhaul and lubricate the throttle
grip housing.
If the throttle grip still do not return properly, replace the
throttle cable.
With the engine idling, turn the handlebar all the way to
the right and left to ensure that the idle speed does not
change.
If idle speed increases, check the throttle grip freeplay
and throttle cable connection.
Measure the throttle grip freeplay at the throttle grip
flange.
FREEPLAY: 2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-5
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Throttle grip freeplay can be adjusted at either end of
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [3]
the throttle cable.
Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster at
throttle housing adjuster.
Release the dust cover (NC700XD/SD) [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2] and turning the adjuster [3].
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster and
reposition the dust cover properly on the adjuster.
Recheck the throttle operation.

[2]

NC700XD/SD:

[2] [3] [1]

Major adjustment is made with the lower adjuster nut at

[1] [2]
the throttle body.
Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the adjuster nut [2].
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster nut.
Recheck the throttle operation.

3-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Remove the center cover but do not disconnect the seat
[1] [2] [3]
lock cable and luggage box lid lock cable (page 2-16).
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Remove the air cleaner housing cover screws [2] and
air cleaner housing cover [3].
[6]
Release the air cleaner housing cover tabs [4] and
remove the air cleaner element [5] from the air cleaner
housing cover.
Inspect the air cleaner element in accordance with the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3) or any time it is
excessively dirt or damaged.
Install the air cleaner element in the reverse order of [4]
removal.
[5]

Check that the condition of the packings [6], replace

them if necessary.
TORQUE:
Air cleaner housing cover screw:
1.1 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.8 lbf·ft)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Remove the following:
[1] [2]
– Side cowl (page 2-13)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the air cleaner housing cover screws [1].
Remove the air cleaner housing cover [2] to the left side
and disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [3].
Release the air cleaner housing cover tabs [4] and [6]
remove the air cleaner element [5] from the air cleaner
housing cover.
[3]
Inspect the air cleaner element in accordance with the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3) or any time it is [4]
excessively dirt or damaged.
Install the air cleaner element in the reverse order of
removal.

Check that the condition of the packings [6], replace [5]

them if necessary.
TORQUE:
Air cleaner housing cover screw:
1.1 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.8 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-7
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
CRANKCASE BREATHER
Service more Check the crankcase breather hose [1] for deterioration,
frequently when damage or loose connection. Make sure that the hoses
ridden in rain, at full are not kinked, pinched or cracked.
throttle, or after the
Replace the crankcase breather hose if necessary.
motorcycle is
washed or
overturned.

[1]
Service if the Check the air cleaner housing drain hose [1].
deposits level can
If necessary, remove the drain plug [2] from the air
be seen in the
cleaner housing drain hose and drain the deposits into
transparent section
a suitable container.
of the air cleaner
housing drain hose. Reinstall the drain plug securely.

[2] [1]

SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[1]
Disconnect the spark plug caps [1].

Clean around the Remove the spark plug [1] using the equipped spark
[2]
spark plug base plug wrench [2].
with compressed air
Inspect or replace the spark plug as described in the
before removing the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3).
spark plug, and be
sure that no debris Install and hand tighten the spark plug to the cylinder
is allowed to enter head, then tighten the spark plug to the specified torque
the combustion using the equipped spark plug wrench.
chamber.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Connect the spark plug caps securely.
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[1]

3-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION
Check the following and replace if necessary
[2] [3]
(recommended spark plug: page 3-9)

• Insulator [1] for damage

• Center electrode [2] and side electrode [3] for wear
• Burning condition, coloration
This motorcycle's If the electrodes are contaminated with accumulated
spark plug is objects or dirt, replace the spark plug.
equipped with an
iridium center [1]
electrode. Replace
the spark plug if the
electrodes are
contaminated.
Always use Replace the plug if the center electrode [1] is rounded
[1]
specified spark as shown in the illustration.
plugs on this
motorcycle. SPECIFIED SPARK PLUG:
NGK: IFR6G-11K

To prevent Check the spark plug gap between the center and side
[1]
damaging the electrodes with a wire type feeler gauge [1].
iridium center
Make sure that the Φ 1.0 mm (0.04 in) plug gauge does
electrode, use a
not insert between the gap.
wire type feeler
gauge to check the
spark plug gap.

Do not adjust the If the gauge can be inserted into the gap, replace the
spark plug gap. If plug with a new one.
the gap is out of
specification,
replace with a new
one.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-9
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
VALVE CLEARANCE
INSPECTION

• Inspect and adjust the valve clearance while the

engine is cold (below 35°C/95°F).
• After the valve clearance inspection, check the
engine idle speed (page 3-15).
• Inspection and adjustment of the valve clearance
can be serviced with the engine installed in the
frame.
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).
[2]
Remove the timing hole cap [1], crankshaft hole cap [2]
and O-rings [3].

[1] [3]

Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring

[1]
[2].

[2]
No.1 Cylinder: Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the
No.1 CYLINDER: No.2 CYLINDER:
"1T" mark [1] on the flywheel with the index notch [2] on
the alternator cover.
No.2 Cylinder: Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the
"2T" mark [3] on the flywheel with the index notch on
the alternator cover.

[1] [2] [3] [2]

3-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
No.1 Cylinder: Make sure that the "1" mark [1] on the cam sprocket is
No.1 CYLINDER: [2] No.2 CYLINDER: [2]
aligned with the upper cylinder head index line [2].
[1] [3]
No.2 Cylinder: Make sure that the "2" mark [3] on the cam sprocket is
aligned with the upper cylinder head index line.
If the "1" mark or "2" mark is facing lower cylinder head
index line [4], turn the crankshaft counterclockwise one
full turn (360°) and realign the "1T" mark or "2T" mark
with the index notch.

[4]

Check the valve clearance by inserting a feeler gauge

[1] between the valve adjusting screw and valve stem.

VALVE CLEARANCE:
IN: 0.17 ± 0.02 mm (0.007 ± 0.001 in)
EX: 0.28 ± 0.02 mm (0.011 ± 0.001 in)

[1]

ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the lock nut [1] and apply engine oil to the
[2] [3]
adjusting screw threads and seating surface.
Adjust by turning the adjusting screw [2] until there is a
slight drag on the feeler gauge [3].
Hold the adjusting screw and tighten the lock nut to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
After tightening the lock nut, recheck the valve
clearance.

[1]

Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the

[2]
camshaft maintenance cap [2].
Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-11
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler
[1]
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.
Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.

One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.

[2]

Install the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[3]
Apply engine oil to new O-rings [1] and install them to
each hole cap. [2]

Apply grease to the timing hole cap [2] and crankshaft

hole cap [3] threads.
Install and tighten the timing hole cap and crankshaft
hole cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE:
Timing hole cap:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Crankshaft hole cap:
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) [1]

ENGINE OIL
OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
Hold the motorcycle in an upright position.
[1]
Start the engine and let it idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
Stop the engine and wait 2 – 3 minutes.
Remove the oil filler cap/dipstick [1] and wipe it clean.
Reinstall the oil filler cap/dipstick, but do not screw it.
Remove the oil filler cap/dipstick and check the oil level.
If the level is below or near the lower level [2] on the
dipstick, fill the recommended engine oil to the upper
level [3].
Check that the O-ring [4] is in good condition, replace it [3]
if necessary.
[4] [2]
Apply engine oil to the O-ring.
Install the oil filler cap/dipstick.
Other viscosities RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
shown in the chart Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an equivalent
may be used when API classification: SG or higher (except oils
the average labeled as energy conserving on the circular API
temperature in your service label)
riding area is within Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
the indicated range. JASO T 903 standard: MA

3-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL CHANGE
Warm up the engine.
[1]
Stop the engine and remove the oil filler cap/dipstick [1].

Place an oil pan under the engine to catch the engine

oil, then remove the engine oil drain bolt [1]/sealing
washer [2].
Drain the engine oil completely.
Install a new sealing washer onto the drain bolt.
Apply engine oil to the drain bolt threads and seating
surface.
Install and tighten the drain bolt/sealing washer to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page

[1]
3-12).
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt) at draining
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) at oil filter change
3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt) at disassembly
NC700XD/SD:
3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt) at draining
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) at oil filter change
4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt) at disassembly
Install the oil filler cap/dipstick [1].
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Make sure there are no oil leaks.

ENGINE OIL FILTER

Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Remove the oil filter cartridge [1] using the special tool.
TOOL:
Oil Filter Wrench [2] 07HAA-PJ70101

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-13
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Check that the oil filter boss protrusion from the
crankcase is specified length as shown.
SPECIFIED LENGTH: 16.5 ± 0.5 mm (0.65 ± 0.02 in)

If the oil filter boss is removed, apply locking agent to

the oil filter boss threads (page 3-2).

16.5 ± 0.5 mm
(0.65 ± 0.02 in)

Apply engine oil to a new oil filter cartridge threads and

O-ring.
Install and tighten the oil filter cartridge [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[1]

CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD)

Replace the engine oil filter when the clutch oil filter is
replaced.
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
Remove the following:
– Bolts [1]
– Clutch oil filter cover [2]
– Spring [3]
– Clutch oil filter [4]
– O-ring [5]
Install a new clutch oil fitter with the "OUTSIDE" mark
[6] facing out.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-ring with a new one. [6]

• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[4]
[1]
[3]

[5]
[2]

3-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ENGINE IDLE SPEED
• Inspect the idle speed after all other engine
maintenance items have been performed and are
within specifications.
• Before checking the idle speed, inspect the following
items.
– No DTC and MIL blinking
– Spark plug condition (page 3-8)
– Air cleaner element condition (page 3-7)
• The engine must be warm for accurate idle speed
inspection.
• This system eliminates the need for manual idle
speed adjustment compared to previous designs.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Start the engine and let it idle.
Check the idle speed.
IDLE SPEED: 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
If the idle speed is out of the specification, check the
following:
– Intake air leak or engine top-end problem (page 10-
4)
– Throttle operation and freeplay (page 3-5)
– IACV operation (page 7-22)

RADIATOR COOLANT
Check the coolant level of the reserve tank with the
engine running at normal operating temperature.
The level should be between the "UPPER" and
"LOWER" level lines with the motorcycle in an upright
position.
If necessary, add recommended coolant.
RECOMMENDED ANTIFREEZE:
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing
silicate-free corrosion inhibitors

Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[2] [1]
Remove the reserve tank cap [1] and add the coolant to
the "UPPER" level line [2] with a 1:1 mixture of distilled
water and antifreeze (coolant preparation: page 8-6).
Reinstall the reserve tank cap.
Check to see if there are any coolant leaks when the
coolant level decreases very rapidly.
If the reserve tank becomes completely empty, there is
a possibility of air getting into the cooling system.
Be sure to remove any air from the cooling system
(page 8-6).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-15
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Check the radiator air passages for clogging or
damage.
Straighten bent fins, and remove insects, mud or other
obstructions with compressed air or low water pressure.
Replace the radiator if the air flow is restricted over
more than 20 % of the radiating surface.

Inspect the water hoses for cracks or deterioration, and

replace them if necessary.
Check the tightness of all water hose band screws
(page 8-10).

DRIVE CHAIN
DRIVE CHAIN SLACK INSPECTION
Never inspect and Turn the ignition switch OFF, support the motorcycle on
adjust the drive its sidestand and shift the transmission into neutral.
chain while the
Check the slack in the drive chain lower run midway
engine is running.
between the sprockets.
DRIVE CHAIN SLACK:
NC700X/XA/XD:
30 – 40 mm (1.2 – 1.6 in)
NC700S/SA/SD:
25 – 35 mm (1.0 – 1.4 in)

NC700X/XA/XD: 30 – 40 mm (1.2 – 1.6 in)

• NC700X/XA/XD: Excessive chain slack, 60 mm (2.4 NC700S/SA/SD: 25 – 35 mm (1.0 – 1.4 in)
in) or more, may damage the frame.
• NC700S/SA/SD: Excessive chain slack, 50 mm (2.0
in) or more, may damage the frame.

3-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the rear axle nut [1].
[5] [1] [2]
Loosen the lock nuts [2] and turn the adjusting nuts [3]
until the correct drive chain slack is obtained.
Make sure the index lines [4] on both adjusting plates
are aligned with the rear end of the axle slots [5] in the
swingarm.
Tighten the axle nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)
Hold the adjusting nuts and tighten the lock nuts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 21 N·m (2.1 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)
[4] [3]
Recheck the drive chain slack and free wheel rotation.
Check the drive chain wear indicator label attached on
the left swingarm.
If the drive chain adjuster arrow mark [1] reaches red
zone [2] of the indicator label, replace the drive chain
with a new one (page 3-19).

[1] [2]

CLEANING AND LUBRICATION

Clean the drive chain [1] with a chain cleaner designed
[1]
specifically for O-ring chains or a neutral detergent. Use
a soft brush if the drive chain is dirty.

Do not use a steam cleaner, high pressure cleaner, wire

brush, volatile solvent such as gasoline and benzene,
abrasive cleaner or a chain cleaner NOT designed
specifically for O-ring chains to clean the drive chain.
Inspect the drive chain for possible damage or wear.
Replace any drive chain that has damaged rollers,
loose fitting links, or otherwise appears unserviceable.
Be sure the drive chain has dried completely before [2]
lubricating.
Lubricate the drive chain with drive chain lubricant [2]
designed specifically for use with O-ring chains, #80 –
90 gear oil or equivalent.

Do not use a chain lubricant NOT designed specifically

for use with O-ring chains to lubricate the drive chain.
Wipe off the excess oil or drive chain lubricant.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-17
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
SPROCKET INSPECTION
Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).
[1]
Inspect the drive and driven sprocket teeth for wear [1]
or damage [2], replace if necessary.
Never use a new drive chain on worn sprockets.
Both chain and sprockets must be in good condition [3],
or new replacement chain will wear rapidly.

[2] [3]

Check the attaching bolts and nuts on the drive and

[1]
driven sprockets.
If any are loose, torque them.
TORQUE:
Drive sprocket bolt [1]:
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Driven sprocket nut [2]:
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
Install the left rear cover (page 2-29).

[2]

3-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
REPLACEMENT
This motorcycle uses a drive chain with a staked master
link.
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Remove the drive chain using the special tool. 1 LINK

When using the special tool, follow the manufacturer's

instruction.
TOOL:
Drive chain tool set 07HMH-MR10103
Remove the excess drive chain links from a new drive NC700X/XA/S/SA: 114 LINKS
chain with the drive chain tool set. NC700XD/SD: 112 LINKS
STANDARD LINKS:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
114 LINKS
NC700XD/SD:
112 LINKS

REPLACEMENT CHAIN
DID: DID520V0
RK: RK520MKO
Never reuse the old Insert a new master link [1] with new O-rings [2] from
[2] [3]
drive chain, master the inside of the drive chain, and install a new plate [3]
link, master link and O-rings with the identification mark facing the
plate and O-rings. outside.
Assemble the master link, O-rings and plate.
TOOL:
Drive chain tool set 07HMH-MR10103

[1]

Make sure that the master link pins [1] are installed
[1]
properly.
Measure the master link pin length projected from the
plate.
STANDARD LENGTH:
Approx. 1.3 mm (0.05 in)
Stake the master link pins.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-19
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Make sure that the pins are staked properly by
[1]
measuring the diameter of the staked area using a slide
caliper [1].

DIAMETER OF THE STAKED AREA:

DID: 5.40 – 5.60 mm (0.213 – 0.220 in)
RK: 5.25 – 5.65 mm (0.207 – 0.222 in)
After staking, check the staked area of the master link
for cracks.
If there is any cracking, replace the master link, O-rings
and plate.

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER

Check the drive chain slider for wear or damage.
[1]
The drive chain slider must be replaced if it is worn to
the wear indicator [1] (page 18-16).

[1]

3-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
BRAKE FLUID

Spilled fluid can damage painted, plastic or rubber

parts. Place a rag over these parts whenever the
system is serviced.

• Do not mix different types of fluid, as they are not

compatible with each other.
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When the fluid level is low, check the brake pads for
wear (page 3-22).
• A low fluid level may be due to wear of the brake
pads. If the brake pads are worn and caliper pistons
are pushed out, this accounts for a low fluid level. If
the brake pads are not worn and fluid level is low,
check the entire system for leaks (page 3-23).
FRONT BRAKE
Turn the handlebar to the left so that the reservoir is
[2] [3]
level and check the front brake fluid level through the
sight glass.
If the level is near the "LOWER" level line [1], fill the
recommended brake fluid.
Remove the following:
– Screws [2]
– Reservoir cover [3]
– Set plate [4]
– Diaphragm [5]

[4]/[5] [1]

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed

[1]
container to the casting ledge [1].
Install the diaphragm, set plate and reservoir cover.
Install and tighten the cover screws to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

REAR BRAKE
Support the motorcycle on a level surface, and check
the rear brake fluid level.
Check the brake fluid level.
If the level is near the "LOWER" level line [1], fill the
recommended brake fluid.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-21
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
[8] [3]
reservoir [2].
[10] [12]
Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6]. [4]
Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8]. [5]

[6]
Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container to the "UPPER" level line [11].
Remove the 6 mm nut, mounting bolt and reservoir.
Install the diaphragm, set plate and reservoir cover.
Install and tighten the cover screws to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft) [2] [11] [1] [7] [2] [9] [1]

Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting

bolt.

Align the reservoir tab with the reservoir stay upper hole
[12].
Tighten the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS WEAR

FRONT BRAKE PADS
Check the brake pads for wear.
Always replace the Replace the brake pads if either pad is worn to the
brake pads as a set bottom of wear limit grooves [1].
to assure even disc
For brake pad replacement.
pressure.
– NC700X/S (page 19-16)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-17)

[1]

REAR BRAKE PADS

Check the brake pads for wear.
NC700X/S: NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
Always replace the Replace the brake pads if either pad is worn to the
brake pads as a set bottom of wear limit grooves [1].
to assure even disc
For brake pad replacement (page 19-18).
pressure.

[1] [1]

3-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSPECTION
NC700XA/XD/SA/ This model is equipped with a Combi Brake System.
[1]
SD: Check the front and rear brake operation as follows:
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the front
wheel [1] off the ground.
Apply the brake pedal [2].
Make sure the front wheel does not turn while the brake
pedal is applied.

[2]

Firmly apply the brake lever or pedal, and check that no

air has entered the system.
If the lever or pedal feels soft or spongy when operated,
bleed the air from the system.
For brake air bleeding:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)
Inspect the brake hose [1] and fittings for deterioration,
cracks and signs of leakage.
Tighten any loose fittings.
Replace hoses and fittings as required.

[1]

BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the push rod [2] until
[2]
the correct pedal height is obtained.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-23
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
If the brake pedal [1] is adjusted to the lower position
[2] [3]
[2], make sure that the clearance between the lower
end of the push rod and the brake pedal does not fall
below 1 mm (0.04 in).
[4]
If the brake pedal is adjusted to the higher position [3],
make sure that the lower end of the push rod thread [4] 1 mm
is visible inside the joint. (0.04 in)
After adjustment, tighten the rear master cylinder push
rod lock nut to the specified torque.
[4]
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

[1]

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

The front brake light Adjust the brake light switch [1] so that the brake light
[1]
switch does not comes on just prior to the brake actually being
require adjustment. engaged.
If the light fails to come on, adjust the switch so that the
light comes on at the proper time.

Hold the switch body and turn the adjuster [2]. Do not
turn the switch body.

[2]

BRAKE LOCK OPERATION (NC700XD/

SD)
INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
[1]
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Turn the rear wheel with your hands and pull the
parking brake lever [1] slowly.
Check the parking brake lever " " mark [2] within the
index lines [3] at the rear wheel stopped.
If the parking brake lever " " mark not within the index
lines, adjust the parking brake as follows (page 3-25). [2]

[3]

3-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT
Parking brake lever position can be adjusted at the
upper end of the parking brake cable and at the parking
brake caliper adjuster bolt.
Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster.
Release the dust cover [1].
Adjust the lever position by loosening the lock nut [2],
and turning the adjuster [3].
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut securely.
If the correct freeplay cannot be gained from the upper
adjuster, turn the adjuster all the way in.
Make major adjustments with the parking brake caliper
adjuster bolt. [1] [3] [2]

Major adjustment is made with the parking brake caliper

adjuster bolt [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2].
Turn the adjuster bolt clockwise until bolt resistance is
felt (brake pads contact with the brake disc).
Then turn the adjuster bolt 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and tighten the lock nut to the specified torque while
holding the adjuster bolt.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Recheck the parking brake operation.

[2] [1]

HEADLIGHT AIM
Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
NC700X/XA/XD:
Adjust the headlight Adjust the headlight aim vertically by turning the vertical [1]
aim as specified by beam adjusting screw [1].
local laws and A clockwise rotation moves the beam up and
regulations. counterclockwise rotation moves the beam down.

NC700S/SA/SD:

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-25
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Adjust the headlight aim horizontally by turning the
NC700X/XA/XD:
horizontal beam adjusting screw [1].
A clockwise rotation moves the beam toward the right [1]
and counterclockwise rotation moves the beam toward
the left.

NC700S/SA/SD:
[1]

CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Measure the clutch lever freeplay at the end of the
10 – 20 mm (3/8 – 13/16 in)
clutch lever.
FREEPLAY:10 – 20 mm (3/8 – 13/16 in)

The adjuster may Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster at the
[1] [2]
be damaged if it is clutch lever.
positioned too far
Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the adjuster [2].
out, leaving minimal
thread If the adjuster is threaded out near its limit and the
engagement. correct freeplay cannot be obtained, turn the adjuster all
the way in and back out one turn.
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster.
Recheck the clutch lever freeplay.

3-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Major adjustment is made with the lower adjusting nut
[1]
[1] at the clutch lifter arm.
Loosen the lock nut [2] and turn the adjusting nut to
adjust the freeplay.
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting nut.
If proper freeplay cannot be obtained, or the clutch slips
during test ride, disassemble and inspect the clutch
(page 11-7).

[2]

SIDESTAND
INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.
[1]
Check the sidestand spring [1] for damage or loss of
tension.
Check the sidestand [2] assembly for freedom of
movement and lubricate the sidestand pivot if
necessary.
Check the sidestand ignition cut-off system:
– Sit astride the motorcycle and raise the sidestand.
– Start the engine with the transmission in neutral,
then, with the clutch lever fully squeezed, shift the
transmission into gear.
– Move the sidestand full down.
– The engine should stop as the sidestand is lowered. [2]
If there is a problem with the system, check the
sidestand switch (page 22-28).

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle upright on a level surface.
Remove the sidestand switch bolt [1] and sidestand
switch [2].

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-27
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Remove the sidestand springs [1].
Remove the sidestand pivot nut [2], bolt [3] and
sidestand [4].
Apply grease to the sidestand pivot bolt sliding surface.
Install the sidestand and sidestand pivot bolt.
Tighten the sidestand pivot bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
[2]
Loosen the sidestand pivot bolt 45 – 90°. [3]
Install and tighten the sidestand pivot nut to the
specified torque while holding the pivot bolt.
[4] [1]
TORQUE: 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
Install the sidestand springs.
Install the sidestand switch [1].
Align

• Align the sidestand switch groove with the frame pin.

• Align the sidestand switch tab with the sidestand
hole.
Install and tighten a new sidestand switch bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

Align [1] [2]

SUSPENSION
FRONT SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Check the action of the forks by operating the front
brake and compressing the front suspension several
times.
Check the entire assembly for signs of leaks, damage
or loose fasteners.
Replace damaged components which cannot be
repaired.

Loose, worn or damaged suspension parts impair

motorcycle stability and control.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
For fork service (page 17-25).

3-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
REAR SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Check the action of the rear shock absorber by
compressing the rear end several times.
Check the entire shock absorber assembly for leaks,
damage or loose fasteners.
Replace damaged components which cannot be
repaired.

Loose, worn or damaged suspension parts impair

motorcycle stability and control.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
For shock absorber service (page 18-14).

Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,

raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Check for worn swingarm bearings by grabbing the rear
wheel and attempting to move the wheel side to side.
Replace the bearings if any looseness to noted.
For swingarm service (page 18-16).

NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS

Check that all chassis nuts, screws and bolts are
tightened to their correct torque values (page 1-15).
Check that all cotter pins, safety clips, hose clamps and
cable stays are in place and properly secured.

WHEELS/TIRES
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Hold the front fork leg and move the front wheel
sideways with force to see if the wheel bearings are
worn.
For front wheel service (page 17-20).

Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,

raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Hold the swingarm and move the rear wheel sideways
with force to see if the wheel and driven flange bearings
are worn.
For rear wheel service (page 18-6).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-29
 dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Check the tire pressure with a tire pressure gauge when
the tires are cold.
RECOMMENDED TIRE PRESSURE:
DRIVER ONLY:
FRONT: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
REAR: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER:
FRONT: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
REAR: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)

RECOMMENDED TIRE SIZE:

FRONT: 120/70ZR17M/C (58W)
REAR: 160/60ZR17M/C (69W)

RECOMMENDED TIRE BRAND:

BRIDGESTONE
FRONT: BT023F G
REAR: BT023R G
METZELER
FRONT: ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT E
REAR: ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT
Check the tires for cuts, embedded nails, or other
damage.
Check the front and rear wheels for trueness.
Measure the tread depth at the center of the tires.
Replace the tires when the tread depth reaches the
following limits.
MINIMUM TIRE TREAD DEPTH
FRONT: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
REAR: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

STEERING HEAD BEARINGS

Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Check that the handlebar moves freely from side to
side. Make sure the control cables do not interfere with
the handlebar rotation.
Check for steering stem bearings by grabbing the fork
legs and attempting to move the front fork forward to
backward.
If the handlebar moves unevenly, binds, or has vertical
movement, inspect the steering head bearings (page
17-33).

3-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

4. PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION ·······················4-2 DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ························ 4-21

PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM·························4-4 MIL TROUBLESHOOTING ························· 4-43

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························4-6 MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ········· 4-63

PGM-FI SYMPTOM FUEL CUT RELAY ······································ 4-64

TROUBLESHOOTING···································4-7
ECT SENSOR ············································· 4-64
PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ············4-8
BANK ANGLE SENSOR····························· 4-65
PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION············································4-11 ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/
PCM (NC700XD/SD) ··································· 4-67
DTC INDEX··················································4-15
O2 SENSOR················································· 4-69
SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE
INSPECTION ···············································4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-1
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION
PGM-FI SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

IACV

IAT SENSOR
SENSOR UNIT:
– MAP SENSOR
– TP SENSOR

INJECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH ECT SENSOR

ECM

FUEL PUMP

DLC

O2 SENSOR

EOP SWITCH

CKP SENSOR

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

VS SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

4-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

IACV

IAT SENSOR
SENSOR UNIT:
– MAP SENSOR
– TP SENSOR

INJECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH ECT SENSOR

PCM

FUEL PUMP

DLC

O2 SENSOR

EOP SWITCH

CKP SENSOR

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

VS SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-3
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

MAIN FUSE 8P
FUEL
IGNITION SWITCH ENG STOP ENGINE STOP SWITCH PUMP
30A 7.5A W/Y (BLUE)
Bl Bl R R/Bl R/Bl W/Y UNIT

FI Bl Bl/R
15A Bl/W COMBINATION METER
BATTERY

R/Bl Bl/W Y/R

ILLUMI/STOP/HORN HISS INDICATOR
7.5A
P/Bu P/Bu
3P
(BLACK)
MIL
FAN Bl/G
15A R/W
(86)
G/R
TXD/RXD
P/G

Bl/W
(54) P/Bu G/R

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

Bl/Bu R/Bu
21 BA M-TXD/RXD 13 (11) Y/R
Y/R
VCC 1P
P P VS SENSOR (BLACK)
IMMOBILIZER RxDT 26 IMOID
O/Bu Bu Bl/W Br
RECEIVER TxCT 10 IMOAU
G/O W
SG K-LINE 25
Br
SCS 27
SENSOR UNIT G

DLC
(1) Y/R FLR 7
14 VCC
FUEL CUT
MAP SENSOR G/Y RELAY
5P
22 SG Bl Br/Bl
(BLACK) V/R
32 PB Bl/W Br
R/Y
33 TH IGP 23
(8)
TP SENSOR
ECM
G/Y G/Y Bl/W
Gr/Bu
FANC 18
(9) IAT SENSOR 9 TA
Bu Bl/Bu R/W
Bl
FAN CONT.
G
3P RELAY
P/W
(7) ECT SENSOR 20 TW
(GRAY)
Bl
P/Y
INJ1 5 No.1 INJECTOR (12)
Lg
(87) EOP SWITCH 31 OIL P
Bl
V/Y
INJ2 4 No.2 INJECTOR (13)
(21) Bl W/G
29 O2
O2 SENSOR 1P
Br
Bu/Y
2P (BLACK)
(RED)
IG1 1
Y Y
11 PCP Br
W/Y G/O Y/Bu
6 LG IG2 2
CKP SENSOR
G/O
IGNITION COIL /SPARK PLUG
Lg G/R
30 NLSW
Y/G
NEUTRAL 10P IACV1A 17
NEUTRAL DIODE (GRAY) V/W
SWITCH Bl IACV1B 16
Gr/R IACV
Bl IACV2A 15
P/Bl
IACV2B 3
CLUTCH
SWITCH
G/W G
28 SSTAND PG 12 (29)
G
SIDESTAND
SWITCH

1 11
( ) = DTC/MIL number Bl : Black P : PINK
Br : Brown R : Red
Bu : Blue V : Violet
= Engine does not start G : Green W : White
when detecting DTC/MIL 12 22 Gr : Gray Y : Yellow
Lg : Light green
= Short terminals for 23 33 O : Orange
reading DTC/MIL
ECM 33P CONNECTOR
ECM side of male terminals

4-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

MAIN FUSE 8P
FUEL
IGNITION SWITCH ENG STOP ENGINE STOP SWITCH PUMP
30A 7.5A W/Y (BLUE)
Bl Bl R R/Bl R/Bl W/Y UNIT

FI Bl Bl/R
15A Bl/W COMBINATION METER
BATTERY

R/Bl Bl/W Y/R

ILLUMI/STOP/HORN HISS INDICATOR
7.5A
P/Bu P/Bu
3P
(BLACK)
MIL
FAN Bl/G
15A R/W
(86)
G/R
TXD/RXD
P/G

Bl/W
(54) P/Bu G/R
P/G
BANK ANGLE SENSOR A32 RVW
Bl/Bu R/Bu
4P B21 BA M-TXD/RXD B13
(BLACK)
(11) Y/R
Y/R Y/R
VCC B14 VCC VS SENSOR
1P
P P (BLACK)
IMMOBILIZER RxDT B26 IMOID
O/Bu Bu Bl/W Br
RECEIVER TxCT B10 IMOAU
G/O W
SG K-LINE B25
Br
SCS B27
SENSOR UNIT G

(84) PCM DLC

(1) FLR B7
FUEL CUT
MAP SENSOR G/Y RELAY
5P
B22 SG Bl Br/Bl
(BLACK) V/R
B32 PB Bl/W Br
R/Y
B33 TH IGP B23
(8)
Y/V
TP SENSOR A8 VCCPB

G/Y G/Y Bl/W

Gr/Bu
FANC B18
(9) IAT SENSOR B9 TA
Bu Bl/Bu R/W
Bl
FAN CONT.
G
FAN MOTOR 3P RELAY
P/W
(7) ECT SENSOR B20 TW
(GRAY)
Bl
P/Y
INJ1 B5 No.1 INJECTOR (12)
Lg
(87) EOP SWITCH B31 POILSW
Bl
V/Y
INJ2 B4 No.2 INJECTOR (13)
(21) Bl W/G
B29 O2
O2 SENSOR 1P
Br
Bu/Y
2P (BLACK)
(RED)
IG1 B1
Y Y
B11 PCP Br
W/Y G/O Y/Bu
B6 LG IG2 B2
CKP SENSOR
G/O
IGNITION COIL /SPARK PLUG
Lg Lg
B30 NLSW
Y/G
IACV1A B17
NEUTRAL V/W
SWITCH IACV1B B16
Gr/R IACV
IACV2A B15
P/Bl
IACV2B B3

G/W G
B28 SSTAND PG1 B12 (29)
G
SIDESTAND
SWITCH

( ) = DTC/MIL number 1 11 1 11 Bl : Black P : PINK

Br : Brown R : Red
Bu : Blue V : Violet
= Engine does not start G : Green W : White
when detecting DTC/MIL 12 22 12 22 Gr : Gray Y : Yellow
Lg : Light green
23 33 23 33
= Short terminals for O : Orange
reading DTC/MIL
PCM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR PCM 33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
PCM side of male terminals PCM side of male terminals

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-5
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where gasoline is stored can cause a
fire or explosion.
• A faulty PGM-FI system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connectors. Check those connections before
proceeding.
• When disassembling the PGM-FI system parts, note the location of the O-rings. Replace them with new ones upon reassembly.
• Use a digital tester for PGM-FI system inspection.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bl = Black Bu = Blue Gr = Gray O = Orange R = Red W = White

Br = Brown G = Green Lg = Light green P = Pink V = Violet Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
IAT sensor resistance (at 20°C/68°F) 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ
ECT sensor resistance (at 40°C/104°F) 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
Injector resistance (at 20°C/68°F) 11 – 13 Ω

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
ECT sensor 1 10 12 (1.2, 9)
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt 2 6 10 (1.0, 7)
O2 sensor 1 12 24.5 (2.5, 18)

4-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
PGM-FI SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
When the motorcycle has one of these symptoms, check the DTC or MIL blinking, refer to the DTC index (page 4-15) and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. If there are no DTC/MIL blinking stored in the ECM/PCM memory, do the diagnostic
procedure for the symptom, in sequence listed below, until you find cause.
Symptom Diagnosis procedure Also check for
Engine cranks but won’t start 1. Inspect the spark plug condition (page 3- • No fuel to injector
(No DTC and MIL blinking) 8). – Clogged fuel filter
2. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6). – Pinched or clogged fuel feed
3. Inspect the cylinder compression (page hose
10-5). – Faulty fuel pump
4. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22). – Faulty fuel pump circuits
5. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-10). • Intake air leak
• Contaminated/deteriorated fuel
• Faulty fuel injector
Engine cranks but won’t start 1. ECM/PCM power/ground circuits • Open circuit in the power input
(No fuel pump operation sound malfunction (page 4-68). and/or ground wire of the ECM/
when the turning the ignition 2. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-10). PCM
ON) • Blown main fuse (30 A)
• Blown sub fuse 15 A (FI)
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
Engine stalls, hard to start, 1. Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15). • Restricted fuel feed hose
rough idling 2. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22). • Contaminated/deteriorated fuel
3. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-4). • Intake air leak
4. Inspect the battery charging system (page • Faulty MAP sensor
21-7). • Restricted fuel tank breather hose
5. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
Afterburn when engine braking Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
is used
Backfiring or misfiring during Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
acceleration
Poor performance (driveability) 1. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-4). • Faulty pressure regulator (fuel
and poor fuel economy 2. Inspect the air cleaner element (page 3-7). pump)
3. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6). • Faulty injector
• Faulty MAP sensor
Idle speed is below 1. Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15).
specifications or fast idle too low 2. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
(No DTC and MIL blinking) 3. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
Idle speed is above 1. Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15). • Intake air leak
specifications or fast idle too 2. Inspect the throttle operation and freeplay • Engine top-end problem
high (No DTC and MIL blinking) (page 3-5). • Air cleaner element condition
3. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
4. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
MIL stays ON but no DTCs set, Inspect the MIL circuit (page 4-63).
or MIL never comes ON at all

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-7
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14).
NOTE 1: Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).

ECM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-19).

PCM 33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2) PCM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

4-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NOTE 3: Remove the ECM box (page 4-65).

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 3)

NOTE 4: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

NOTE 5: Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-16).
NOTE 5: Remove the luggage box (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-20).

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

DLC (NOTE 4)

NOTE 6: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-9
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NOTE 7: Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

NOTE 8: Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 8)

4-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Intermittent Failure
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the MIL does not come on, check
for poor contact or loose pins at all connectors related to the circuit that of the troubleshooting. If the MIL was on, but then went out,
the original problem may be intermittent.
Opens and Shorts
"Opens" and "Shorts" are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidental
connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means something will not work at all. With ECM/
PCMs this can something mean something work, but not the way it’s supposed to.
If the MIL has come on
Refer to DTC READOUT (page 4-12).
If the MIL did not stay on
If the MIL did not stay on, but there is a driveability problem, do the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING (page 4-7).

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The PGM-FI system is equipped with the self-diagnostic system. When any abnormality occurs in the system, the ECM/PCM turns
on the MIL and stores a DTC in its erasable memory.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
The PGM-FI system is provided with a fail-safe function to secure a minimum running capability even when there is trouble in the
system. When any abnormality is detected by the self-diagnosis function, running capability is maintained by pre-programed value
in the simulated program map. When any abnormality is detected in the injector, the fail-safe function stops the engine to protect it
from damage.
DTC
• The DTC is composed of a main code and a sub code and it is displayed as a hyphenated number when retrieved from the
ECM/PCM with the HDS pocket tester.
The digits in front of the hyphen are the main code, they indicate the component of function failure.
The digits behind the hyphen are the sub code, they detail the specific symptom of the component or function failure.
For example, in the case of the TP sensor:
– DTC 08 – 1 = (TP sensor voltage) – (lower than the specified value)
– DTC 08 – 2 = (TP sensor voltage) – (higher than the specified value)
• The MAP, ECT, TP and IAT sensor diagnosis will be made according to the voltage output of the affected sensor.
If a failure occurs, the ECM/PCM determines the Function Failure, compares the sensor voltage output to the standard value,
and then outputs the corresponding DTC to the HDS pocket tester.
For example:
– If the input voltage line (A) on the MAP sensor is opened, the ECM/PCM detects the output voltage is about 5 V, then the DTC
1-2 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) will be displayed.
– If the input voltage line (B) on the TP sensor is opened, the ECM/PCM detects the output voltage is 0 V, then the DTC 8-1 (TP
sensor circuit low voltage) will be displayed.
MIL Blink Pattern
• If the HDS pocket tester is not available, DTC can be read from the
[1]
ECM/PCM memory by the MIL [1] blink pattern.
• The number of MIL blinks is the equivalent the main code of the DTC
(the sub code cannot be displayed by the MIL).
• The MIL will blink the current DTC, in case the ECM/PCM detects the
problem at present, when the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " or idling with the sidestand down. The MIL will stay ON when the
engine speed is over 1,850 min-1 (rpm) or with the sidestand up.
• The MIL has two types of blinks, a long blink and short blink. The long
blinking lasts for 1.3 seconds, the short blinking lasts for 0.3 seconds.
One long blink is the equivalent of ten short blinks. For example, when
two long blinks are followed by five short blinks, the MIL is 25 (two long
blinks = 20 blinks, plus five short blinks).
• When the ECM/PCM stores more than one DTC, the MIL will indicate
them by blinking in the order from the lowest number to highest number.
MIL Check
When the ignition switch is turned ON and engine stop switch " " the MIL will stay on for a few seconds, then go off. If the MIL does
not come on, troubleshoot the MIL circuit (page 4-63).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-11
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
CURRENT DTC/FREEZE DTC
The DTC is indicated in two ways according to the failure status.
• In case the ECM/PCM detects the problem at present, the MIL will come on and the MIL will start to blink as its DTC when the
sidestand is lowered. It is possible to readout the MIL blink pattern as the current DTC.
• In case the ECM/PCM does not detect any problem at present but has a problem stored in its memory, the MIL will not light and
blink. If it is necessary to retrieve the past problem, readout the freeze DTC by following the DTC readout procedure (page 4-
12).

HDS POCKET TESTER INFORMATION

• The HDS pocket tester can readout the DTC, freeze data, current data and other ECM/PCM condition.
How to connect the HDS pocket tester
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " " check the DTC and
freeze data.

Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the first malfunction was
detected.

ECM/PCM reset [1]

The HDS pocket tester can reset the ECM/PCM data including the DTC,
freeze data and some learning memory.
After the ECM/PCM reset, perform the TP sensor reset procedure (page 7-19).

DTC READOUT
Start the engine and check the MIL [1].
[1]

When the ignition switch is turned ON and engine stop switch " ", the MIL
will stay on for a few seconds, then go off.
If the MIL stays on or blinks, connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC
(page 4-12).
Read the DTC, freeze data and follow the troubleshooting index (page 4-
15).
To read the DTC with the MIL blinking, refer to the following procedure.

Reading DTC with the MIL

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
CONNECTION: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ", read, note the MIL
blinks and refer to the DTC index (page 4-15).

[1] [2]
If the ECM/PCM has any DTC in its memory, the MIL will start blinking.

4-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ERASING DTC
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC (page 4-12).
Erase the DTC with the HDS pocket tester while the engine is stopped.
To erase the DTC without HDS pocket tester, refer to the following procedure.
How to erase the DTC with SCS connector
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
3. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
4. Remove the special tool from the DLC.
5. The MIL will light for approximately 5 seconds. While the MIL lights,
short the DLC terminals again with a special tool. The self-diagnostic
[1] [2]
memory is erased if the MIL goes off and starts blinking.

• The DLC must be jumped while the MIL lights. If not, the MIL will not start blinking.
• Note that the self-diagnostic memory cannot be erased if the ignition switch is turned OFF before the MIL starts blinking.

CIRCUIT INSPECTION
INSPECTION AT ECM/PCM CONNECTOR
• Always clean around and keep any foreign material away from the ECM/
PCM 33P connector(s) before disconnecting it.
• A faulty PGM-FI system is often related to poorly connected or corroded
terminals. Check those connections before proceeding.
• In testing at ECM/PCM 33P connector(s) (wire harness side) terminal,
always use the test probe [1]. Insert the test probe into the connector
terminal, then attach the digital multimeter probe to the test probe.
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110

[1]

TEST HARNESS CONNECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14).
[1]
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-13
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Connect the ECM test harness [1] between the main wire harness [2] and
[2] [1]
ECM [3].

TOOL:
ECM test harness 33P 070MZ-MCA0100

[3]

TEST HARNESS CONNECTION (NC700XD/SD)

Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 2-19).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P (Gray)
connector [2].

[1] [2]

Connect the ECM test harness [1] between the main wire harness [2] and
[3] [1]
PCM [3].

TOOL:
ECM test harness 33P 070MZ-MCA0100

[2]

TEST HARNESS TERMINAL LAYOUT

The ECM/PCM 33P connector [1] terminals are numbered as shown in this
[1]
illustration.
The ECM test harness terminals are same layout as for the ECM/PCM 33P
connector terminals as shown. 1 11

12 22

23 33

4-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC INDEX
DTC Refer
Refer to
(MIL Function Failure Symptom/Fail-safe function to
(MIL)
blinks) (DTC)
MAP sensor circuit low voltage (less than • Engine operates normally
1-1 (1) 0.029 V) • Pre-program value: 225 mmHg/ 4-21
• MAP sensor or its circuit malfunction 30 kPa
MAP sensor circuit high voltage (more • Engine operates normally 4-43
than 3.809 V) • Pre-program value: 225 mmHg/
1-2 (1) • Loose or poor contact of the sensor 30 kPa 4-22
unit connector
• MAP sensor or its circuit malfunction
ECT sensor circuit low voltage (less than • Hard start at a low temperature
0.049 V) • Pre-program value: 110°C/
7-1 (7) 4-23
• ECT sensor or its circuit malfunction 230°F
• Cooling fan turns on
ECT sensor circuit high voltage (more • Hard start at a low temperature 4-45
than 4.946 V) • Pre-program value: 110°C/
7-2 (7) • Loose or poor contact of the ECT 230°F 4-24
sensor connector • Cooling fan turns on
• ECT sensor or its circuit malfunction
TP sensor circuit low voltage (less than • Poor engine acceleration
0.122 V) • Pre-program value: 0°
8-1 (8) • Loose or poor contact of the sensor 4-26
unit connector
4-47
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
TP sensor circuit high voltage (more than • Poor engine acceleration
8-2 (8) 4.966 V) • Pre-program value: 0° 4-27
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
IAT sensor circuit low voltage (less than • Engine operates normally
9-1 (9) 0.049 V) • Pre-program value: 35°C/95°F 4-28
• IAT sensor or its circuit malfunction
IAT sensor circuit high voltage (more • Engine operates normally
4-48
than 4.946 V) • Pre-program value: 35°C/95°F
9-2 (9) • Loose or poor contact of the IAT 4-29
sensor connector
• IAT sensor or its circuit malfunction
VS sensor no signal • Engine operates normally
• Loose or poor contact of the VS NC700X/XA/
11-1 sensor connector S/SA: 4-50
4-30
(11) • Open or short circuit in the VS sensor NC700XD/SD:
wire 4-51
• Faulty VS sensor
No.1 Injector circuit malfunction • Engine does not start
12-1 • Loose or poor contact of the injector • Injector, fuel pump and ignition
4-32 4-53
(12) connector coil shut down
• Injector or its circuit malfunction
No.2 Injector circuit malfunction • Engine does not start
13-1 • Loose or poor contact of the injector • Injector, fuel pump and ignition
4-33 4-54
(13) connector coil shut down
• Injector or its circuit malfunction
O2 sensor malfunction • Engine operates normally
21-1 • Loose or poor contact of the O2
4-34 4-54
(21) sensor connector
• O2 sensor or its circuit malfunction
IACV circuit malfunction • Engine stalls, hard to start, rough
29-1 • Loose or poor contact of the IACV idling
4-35 4-56
(29) connector
• IACV or its circuit malfunction
33-2 (–) ECM/PCM EEPROM malfunction • Engine operates normally 4-37 –

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-15
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC Refer
Refer to
(MIL Function Failure Symptom/Fail-safe function to
(MIL)
blinks) (DTC)
Bank angle sensor circuit low voltage • Engine operates normally
54-1 (less than 0.020 V) • Engine stop function does not
4-37
(54) • Bank angle sensor or its circuit operate
malfunction
Bank angle sensor circuit high voltage • Engine operates normally 4-58
(more than 4.986 V) • Engine stop function does not
54-2 • Loose or poor contact of the bank operate
4-38
(54) angle sensor connector
• Bank angle sensor or its circuit
malfunction
84-1 CPC in the PCM malfunction • Gearshift system stops
4-40 4-59
(84) • Faulty PCM
Meter communication malfunction • Engine operates normally
86-1 • Open or short circuit in the TXD/RXD
4-40 4-60
(86) wire
• Faulty combination meter
EOP switch high voltage (more than • Engine operates normally
1.001 V) • Oil pressure indicator stays on
87-1 • Loose or poor contact of the EOP
4-42 4-62
(87) switch connector
• Open circuit in the EOP switch wire
• EOP switch or its circuit malfunction

4-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE
INSPECTION
BEFORE DTC TROUBLESHOOTING

• When the DTC displays 1-1, 1-2, 8-1 and 8-2, check
the following before DTC troubleshooting.
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P connectors.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the wire harness side.
Connection: Y/R or Y/V G/Y
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet (+) – Green/yellow (–)

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V

If the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect the
sensor unit 5P (Black) connector and start
the DTC troubleshooting (page 4-21).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Y/R or Y/V
Yellow/red – Ground
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-17
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Sensor Unit Power Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Black) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2] Y/R
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [3]
Check for continuities between the sensor unit 5P Y/R
(Black) connector [4] and ECM/PCM 33P connector.
Connection: G/Y
NC700X/XA/S/SA: G/Y
Yellow/red – Yellow/red
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Yellow/violet [4]
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD: [2]
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 Y/V
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck. Y/V
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire G/Y

G/Y

[4] [3]

4-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
BEFORE MIL TROUBLESHOOTING

• When the MIL blinks 1 and 8 times, check the

following before MIL troubleshooting.
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P connectors.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
14 22
" ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
14 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD: NC700XD/SD:
A8 (+) – B22 (–)

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
A8 B22
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

2. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection 2

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Y/R or Y/V G/Y
Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet (+) – Green/yellow (–)

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect the
sensor unit 5P (Black) connector and start
the MIL troubleshooting (page 4-43).
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-19
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Y/R or Y/V
Yellow/red – Ground
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
4. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuities between the ECM test
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
harness [1] and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
22
14 – Yellow/red G/Y
22 – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
A8 – Yellow/violet Y/R
14
B22 – Green/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES – Intermittent failure
[1] [2]
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
NC700XD/SD: [2]

A8

Y/V

G/Y

B22

[1]

4-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 1-1 (MAP SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. MAP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.
3. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red (+) – Green/yellow (–) G/Y V/R
Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. MAP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Violet/red – ground V/R

Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-21
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. MAP Sensor Inspection
Replace the sensor unit with a known good one
(page 7-15).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector.
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 1-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original sensor unit (MAP sensor)

DTC 1-2 (MAP SENSOR HIGH

VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. MAP Sensor System Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Intermittent failure
• Loose or poor contact on the sensor
unit 5P (Black) connector
2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.
3. MAP Sensor System Inspection 2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
terminals at the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Violet/red – Green/yellow
G/Y V/R
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Faulty sensor unit (MAP sensor)
NO – GO TO STEP 4. [1]

4-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. MAP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
V/R
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P V/R
connector and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red – Violet/red

TOOL:
[2] [1]
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

DTC 7-1 (ECT SENSOR LOW

VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. ECT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-23
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. ECT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Measure the resistance at the ECT sensor [1]
terminals.
Standard: 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/104°F)
Is the resistance within 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/
104°F)?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty ECT sensor

4. ECT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the ECT sensor 2P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground
Is there continuity? P/W
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/white wire
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 7-2 (ECT SENSOR HIGH

VOLTAGE)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

4-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector terminals at
the wire harness side with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Pink/white – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON. G/Y P/W
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Inspect the ECT sensor (page 22-19).
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
[2]

3. ECT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire.
Disconnect the following:
G/Y
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1] G/Y
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P
P/W
connector and ECT sensor 2P connector [2] of the
wire harness side. P/W
Connection: Pink/white – Pink/white
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
[2] [1]
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-25
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 8-1 (TP SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester
with the throttle fully closed.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.
3. TP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
R/Y
Connection: Red/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Red/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. TP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side. R/Y
Connection: Red/yellow – Red/yellow R/Y

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
[2] [1]
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Red/yellow wire
5. TP Sensor Inspection
Replace the sensor unit with a known good one
(page 7-15).
Connect the following:
– Sensor unit 5P connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 8-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original sensor unit (TP sensor)

DTC 8-2 (TP SENSOR HIGH VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. TP Sensor Inspection
Check that the TP sensor voltage increases
continuously when moving the throttle from fully
closed to fully opened using the data list menu of the
HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage increase continuously?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – Replace the TP sensor (sensor unit) with a
known good one, and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-27
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. TP Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1] G/Y
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Measure the resistance at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/yellow – Green/yellow
R/Y
Standard: 0.29 – 0.71 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 0.29 – 0.71 Ω (20°C/
68°F)?
YES – GO TO STEP 4. [1]

NO – Faulty sensor unit (TP sensor)

4. TP Sensor Power Input Voltage Inspection
Connect the following:
[1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black) Y/R G/Y
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

DTC 9-1 (IAT SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. IAT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty IAT sensor

4-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. IAT Sensor Voltage Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Gray/blue – Ground
Gr/Bu
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Gray/blue wire
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 9-2 (IAT SENSOR HIGH

VOLTAGE)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. IAT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
terminals at the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Gray/blue – Green/yellow
Gr/Bu G/Y
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Faulty IAT sensor
NO – GO TO STEP 3. [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-29
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. IAT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1] Gr/Bu
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Gr/Bu
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side. G/Y
Connection: Gray/blue – Gray/blue G/Y
Green/yellow – Green/yellow

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 [2] [1]

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Gray/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

DTC 11-1 (VS SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. VS Sensor System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the VS sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 11-1 indicated?
YES – • NC700X/XA/S/SA: GO TO STEP 2.
• NC700XD/SD: GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Speedometer Inspection
Check for operation of speedometer.
Does the speedometer operate normally?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Inspect the speedometer (page 22-8).

4-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side. P/Bu G/R
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

4. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
P/G
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

5. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1]. [2]
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [2] and combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green
P/G P/G
NC700XD/SD:
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [3].
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [4] and PCM 33P (Gray)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green

TOOL:
NC700XD/SD: [4]
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
[3]
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

P/G
P/G

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-31
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
6. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS Sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Connect the following:
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the VS sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 11-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original VS sensor

DTC 12-1 (No.1 INJECTOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Injector System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the injector with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 12-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Injector Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector of the wire harness side and ground. Bl
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open or short circuit in the Black wire

4-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Injector Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector [1] of wire harness side and ground.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Ground
No.2: Violet/yellow – Ground
P/Y or V/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Injector Resistance Inspection

Measure the resistance between the injector 2P
[1]
(Gray) connector [1] terminals.
Standard: 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Faulty injector

5. Injector Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection

Disconnect the following:
[2] [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1] P/Y P/Y
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and injector 2P (Gray) connector [2] of
the wire harness side.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Pink/yellow
No.2: Violet/yellow – Violet/yellow V/Y
V/Y
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity? [2]

YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good

one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

DTC 13-1 (No.2 INJECTOR)

See page 4-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-33
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 21-1 (O2 SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and ECM 33P (Black) connector,
then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and PCM 33P (Gray) connector,
then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. O2 Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and check the O2 sensor
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 21-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. O2 Sensor Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor 1P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: White/green – Ground W/G

Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the White/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 1

Disconnect the following:
[2] [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of
the wire harness side. W/G
Connection: White/green – White/green W/G

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the White/green wire

4-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 2
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [1].
[1] [2]
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor cap and
O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of the sensor
side.
Connection: Black – Black
Is there continuity?
Bl Bl
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Black wire

5. O2 Sensor Inspection
Replace the O2 sensor with a known good one
(page 4-69).
Connect the following:
– O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°C).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the O2 sensor
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 21-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original O2 sensor and/or O2 sensor
cord

DTC 29-1 (IACV)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IACV with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 29-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Intermittent failure
• Loose or poor contact on the IACV 4P
(Black) connector

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-35
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IACV Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuities between the IACV 4P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Yellow/green – Ground
Gray/red – Ground Y/G Gr/R P/Bl V/W
Violet/white – Ground
Pink/black – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. IACV Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:
[2]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA) Y/G Y/G
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P Gr/R
connector and IACV 4P (Black) connector [2] of the Gr/R
wire harness side.
Connection: Yellow/green – Yellow/green
Gray/red – Gray/red
Violet/white – Violet/white
Pink/black – Pink/black P/Bl P/Bl

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 V/W V/W
[1]
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire
4. IACV Resistance Inspection
Measure the resistance at the IACV 4P (Black)
connector [1] at the motor side.
Connection: A – D
B–C
Standard: 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F) A D
Is the resistance within 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
B C
NO – Faulty IACV

[1]

4-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 33-2 (EEPROM)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Recheck the ECM EEPROM.
Is the DTC 33-2 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 54-1 (BANK ANGLE SENSOR

LOW VOLTAGE)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Bank Angle Sensor Power Input Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground. Bl/W
Connection: Black/white – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Short circuit in the Black/white wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-37
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the following:
[1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground. Bl/Bu
Connection: Black/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Black/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Bank Angle Sensor Inspection

Replace the bank angle sensor with a known good
one (page 4-65).
Connect the following:
– Bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original bank angle sensor
DTC 54-2 (BANK ANGLE SENSOR
HIGH VOLTAGE)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

4-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. Bank Angle Sensor Power Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the bank angle sensor Bl/W
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/white wire

3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor Bl/Bu
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Black/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Black/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
[2] [1]
connector [1] and bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Black/blue – Black/blue

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Bl/Bu
Is there continuity? Bl/Bu
YES – • Inspect the bank angle sensor (page 4-
66).
• Replace the ECM/PCM with a known
good one, and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/blue wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-39
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 84-1 (CPU IN THE PCM
MALFUNCTION) (NC700XD/SD)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 84-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 86-1 (METER COMMUNICATION

MALFUNCTION)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the meter communication with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is the DTC 86-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Combination Meter Serial Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the following:
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the combination meter R/Bu
16P (Gray) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Red/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

4-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Combination Meter Serial Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2]
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [1] and ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/blue – Red/blue

TOOL: R/Bu
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 R/Bu
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Red/blue wire

4. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON while pushing and
holding combination meter A button [1] and B button
[2] over 10 seconds.

The combination meter enters the communication

diagnostic mode.

[1] [2]

Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P

[1]
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
R/Bu
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).

5. ECM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-41
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.

The ECM enters the communication diagnostic

mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P

[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
Does the standard voltage exist? R/Bu
YES – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 87-1 (EOP SWITCH

MALFUNCTION)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. EOP Switch System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the EOP switch with the HDS.
Is the DTC 87-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

4-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. EOP Switch Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2]
Disconnect the following:
– EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[2]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]
Check for continuity between the EOP switch 1P Lg
(Gray) connector and ECM/PCM 33P connector of Lg
the wire harness side.
Connection: Light green – Light green

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Light green wire
3. EOP Switch Inspection
Replace the EOP switch with a known good one.
Connect the following:
– EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOP switch with the HDS.
Is the DTC 87-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original EOP switch

MIL TROUBLESHOOTING
MIL 1 BLINK (MAP SENSOR)

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-19).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-43
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the test harness terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
32 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD: 32 or B32 22 or B22
B32 (+) – B22 (–)

Standard: 0.50 – 3.41 V (20°C/68°F)

Is the voltage within 0.50 – 3.41 V (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection 2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red (+) – Green/yellow (–) G/Y V/R
Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – Faulty sensor unit (MAP sensor)
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. MAP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Violet/red – Ground
V/R
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

4-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. MAP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
[1]
and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
32 – Violet/red
NC700XD/SD: V/R
B32 – Violet/red 32 or B32

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

MIL 7 BLINKS (ECT SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
20 or B20 22 or B22
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
20 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B20 (+) – B22 (–)

Standard: 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)

Is the voltage within 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-45
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECT Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the ECT sensor 2P
connector of the wire harness side. G/Y P/W
Connection: Pink/white (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

3. ECT Sensor Resistance Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Measure the resistance at the ECT sensor [1]
terminals.
Standard: 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/104°F)
Is the resistance within 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/
104°F)?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty ECT sensor

4. ECT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuities between the ECM test
harness and ECT sensor 2P connector [1] of the
wire harness side.
Connection: 20 or B20
NC700X/XA/S/SA: P/W
20 – Pink/white
22 – Green/yellow
G/Y
NC700XD/SD: 22 or B22
B20 – Pink/white
B22 – Green/yellow
Are there continuities?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

4-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. ECT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the ECT sensor 2P
[1]
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/white wire P/W
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

MIL 8 BLINKS (TP SENSOR)

1. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-19).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.
2. TP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the TP sensor output voltage at the ECM
test harness terminals. 22 or B22
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
33 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B33 (+) – B22 (–)

Standard: 0.29 – 0.71 V (throttle fully closed) 33 or B33

4.13 – 4.76 V (throttle fully opened)
Is there standard voltage?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. TP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
R/Y
Connection: Red/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Red/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-47
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. TP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
[1]
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
33 – Red/yellow
NC700XD/SD: R/Y
33 or B33
B33 – Red/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES – Faulty sensor unit (TP sensor)
NO – Open circuit in the Red/yellow wire

MIL 9 BLINKS (IAT SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
9 or B9 22 or B22
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
9 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B9 (+) – B22 (–)

Standard: 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)

Is the voltage within 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

4-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IAT Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the IAT sensor 2P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side. Gr/Bu G/Y
Connection: Gray/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

3. IAT Sensor Resistance Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Measure the resistance at the IAT sensor terminals.
Standard: 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty IAT sensor

4. IAT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection: G/Y 22 or B22
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
9 – Gray/blue
22 – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD: Gr/Bu
9 or B9
B9 – Gray/blue
B22 – Green/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – • Open circuit in the Gray/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-49
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. IAT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
[1]
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Gray/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
Gr/Bu
YES – Short circuit in the Gray/blue wire
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

MIL 11 BLINKS (VS SENSOR) (NC700X/

XA/S/SA)

Before starting the inspection, check for loose or poor

contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector, then recheck
the MIL blinking.
1. Speedometer Inspection
Check for operation of speedometer.
Does the speedometer operate normally?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).
2. VS Sensor Pulse Inspection
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the rear
[1]
wheel off the ground.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] and ground while P/G
slowly turning the rear wheel by hand.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground ( – )
Standard: Repeat 0 to 5 V
Is the indicated voltage at the standard value?
YES – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side. P/Bu G/R
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red ( – )
Standard: Battery voltage
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

4-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2] [1]
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [2] and combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green P/G P/G
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

5. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
[1]
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/G
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/green wire
NO – Faulty VS sensor

MIL 11 BLINKS (VS SENSOR)

(NC700XD/SD)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. VS Sensor Pulse Inspection
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the rear
wheel off the ground.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM 33P
connectors (page 4-14).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
A32
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminal and ground while slowly turning the rear
wheel by hand.
Connection: A32 (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Repeat 0 to 5 V
Is the indicated voltage at the standard value?
YES – Intermittent failure
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-51
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side. P/Bu G/R
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection: A32 – Pink/green
Is there continuity? A32
P/G
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

[1]

4. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
[1]
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/G
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

5. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine and recheck the MIL blinking.
Does the MIL blink 11 times?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original VS sensor

4-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 12 BLINKS (No.1 INJECTOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Injector Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the injector 2P (Gray) Bl
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Black wire

2. Injector Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Ground
No.2: Violet/yellow – Ground
P/Y or V/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. Injector Resistance Inspection

Measure the resistance at the injector [1] terminals.
[1]
Standard: 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Faulty injector

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-53
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. Injector Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
[1]
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14) P/Y
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness 5 or B5
and injector 2P (Gray) connector [1] of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: 4 or B4
No.1: 5 – Pink/yellow V/Y
No.2: 4 – Violet/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
No.1: B5 – Pink/yellow [1]
No.2: B4 – Violet/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

MIL 13 BLINKS (No.2 INJECTOR)

See page 4-53

MIL 21 BLINKS (O2 SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and ECM 33P (Black) connector,
then recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and PCM 33P (Gray) connector,
then recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. O2 Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the MIL
blinking.
Does the MIL blink 21 times?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

4-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. O2 Sensor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor 1P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: White/green – Ground W/G
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the White/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 1

Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
[1]
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1] of the wire
harness side. W/G 29 or B29
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
29 – White/green
NC700XD/SD:
B29 – White/green
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the White/green wire
4. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 2
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [1].
[1] [2]
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor cap and
O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of the sensor
side.
Connection: Black – Black
Is there continuity?
Bl Bl
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Black wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-55
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. O2 Sensor Inspection
Replace the O2 sensor with a known good one
(page 4-69).
Disconnect the ECM test harness and connect the
ECM/PCM connector(s).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the MIL
blinking.
Does the MIL blink 21 times?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original O2 sensor

MIL 29 BLINKS (IACV)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IACV Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Measure the resistance at the IACV 4P (Black)
connector at the motor side.
A D
Connection: A – D
B–C
Standard: 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)
Is the resistance within 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)? B C
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty IACV
[1]

4-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IACV Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuities between the IACV 4P (Black)
[1]
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Gray/red – Ground
Yellow/green – Ground
Violet/white – Ground
Pink/black – Ground
Y/G Gr/R P/Bl V/W
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. IACV Open Circuit Inspection

Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14) 15 or B15
Check for continuities between the ECM test
harness and IACV 4P (Black) connector [1] of the Gr/R
wire harness side. 3 or B3
Connection: 17 or B17
Y/G P/Bl
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
17 – Yellow/green
15 – Gray/red
16 – Violet/white V/W 16 or B16
3 – Pink/black [1]
NC700XD/SD:
B17 – Yellow/green
B15 – Gray/red
B16 – Violet/white
B3 – Pink/black
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-57
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 54 BLINKS (BANK ANGLE
SENSOR)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Bank Angle Sensor Power Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Bl/W
Measure the voltage at the bank angle sensor 2P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/white wire
2. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor Bl/Bu
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Black/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Black/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

4-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
[1]
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] of
the wire harness side. Bl/Bu
21 or B21
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 – Black/blue
NC700XD/SD:
B21 – Black/blue
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/blue wire
4. Bank Angle Sensor Inspection
Inspect the bank angle sensor (page 4-66).
Is the bank angle sensor operation normal?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
No – Faulty bank angle sensor

MIL 84 BLINKS (CPU IN THE PCM

MALFUNCTION) (NC700XD/SD)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", and check the MIL blinking.
Does the MIL blink 84 times?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-59
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 86 BLINKS (METER
COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " while pushing and holding combination meter A
button [1] and B button [2] over 10 seconds.

The combination meter enter the communication [1] [2]

diagnostic mode.
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminal and ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
13 (+) – Ground (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B13 (+) – Ground (–)

Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds) 13 or B13

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).
2. ECM/PCM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
[1] [2]

4-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.

The ECM/PCM enters the communication

diagnostic mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P

[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
Does the standard voltage exist? R/Bu
YES – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
8).
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-61
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 87 BLINKS (EOP SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. EOP Switch Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
[1]
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness Lg
and the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector of the wire 31 or B31
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
31 – Light green
NC700XD/SD:
B31 – Light green

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Light green wire
2. EOP Switch Inspection
Replace the EOP switch with a known good one
(page 22-20).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MIL blinking
Does the MIL blink 87 times?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – Faulty original EOP switch

4-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
Check that the MIL comes on for 2 seconds and goes
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
off when the ignition switch is turned ON and engine
stop switch " ". [1] [2]
If the MIL dose not come on at all, inspect the
combination meter (page 22-10).
NC700X/XA/S/SA: If the MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] are
stay on, and the tachometer, high coolant temperature
indicator and HISS indicator do not come on, inspect
the TXD/RXD line (page 22-11).
NC700XD/SD: If the MIL [3] and engine oil pressure indicator [4] stay
on, the shift indicator "–" [5] is blinking, and the
tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on, inspect the TXD/RXD
line (page 22-11).
NC700XD/SD:
[3] [4]

[5]

If the MIL stays on, check as follows:

[1]
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD)
(page 2-19) Br

Disconnect the following:

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA) [1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
CONNECTION: Brown – Ground
STANDARD: No continuity

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
If there is continuity, check for short circuit in the Brown
wire between the DLC and ECM/PCM.
If there is no continuity, Replace the ECM/PCM with a
known good one, and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-63
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
FUEL CUT RELAY
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the fuel cut
relay [1].

[1]

Connect a ohmmeter to the fuel cut relay [1] terminals.

[1]
Connect a 12 V battery to the fuel cut relay terminals as
shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the fuel cut relay.

ECT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Remove the ECT Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
sensor while the
Remove the ECT sensor [2] and O-ring [3].
engine is cold.
Install a new O-ring onto the ECT sensor and install
them.
Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Fill the cooling system with recommended coolant
(page 8-6).
[1] [2] [3]

4-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
BANK ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
[2]
Remove the bolts [1] and ECM box [2] from the frame.

[1]

Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector

[1]
[1].
Remove the bank angle sensor mounting bolts [2] and
bank angle sensor [3]. [3]

[2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Install the bank angle sensor with its "UP" mark [1]
facing up.
TORQUE:
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-65
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
SYSTEM INSPECTION WITH HDS
POCKET TESTER
Connect the HDS pocket tester (page 4-12).
Remove the bank angle sensor (page 4-65).
60° BANK ANGLE POSITION
Connect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Place the bank angle sensor is horizontal as shown.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Read the voltage with the HDS pocket tester.
STANDARD: 7.0 – 8.8 V
Incline the bank angle sensor approximately 60° to the
left or right with keeping the ignition switch ON. approximately 60°
Read the voltage with HDS pocket tester.
STANDARD: 0.40 – 0.84 V
HORIZONTAL

approximately 60°

SYSTEM INSPECTION WITH ECM

TEST HARNESS
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM 33P
[1]
connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Remove the bank angle sensor (page 4-65).
6 or B6 21 or B21
Connect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Place the bank angle sensor horizontal as shown.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the output voltage at the ECM test harness [1]
terminals.
CONNECTION: 60° BANK ANGLE POSITION
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 (+) – 6 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B21 (+) – B6 (–)

STANDARD: 7.0 – 8.8 V

Incline the bank angle sensor approximately 60° to the
left or right with keeping the ignition switch ON and approximately 60°
engine stop switch " ".
Measure the output voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals. HORIZONTAL

CONNECTION:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 (+) – 6 (–)
NC700XD/SD: approximately 60°
B21 (+) – B6 (–)

STANDARD: 0.40 – 0.84 V

4-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM
(NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-
[2]
14).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].
Release the band [2] from the ECM and remove the
ECM from the ECM box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

If the ECM is replaced, perform the Key Registration

Procedures (page 23-6).
[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 2-
[1] [2]
19).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2].
Release the band [3] from the PCM and remove the
PCM from the ECM box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12- [3]
120)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-67
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ECM/PCM POWER/GROUND LINE
INSPECTION

• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
ENGINE DOES NOT START (MIL does not blink)
1. ECM/PCM Power Input Voltage Inspection
Remove the following:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD)
(page 2-19)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]

[1]

NC700XD/SD:

[2]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch

[1]
" ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage
Bl
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Open or short circuit in the Black wire
• Faulty ignition switch
• Blown main fuse 30 A
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
• Faulty engine stop switch

4-68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECM/PCM Ground Line Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Green/orange – Ground
Green – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 G/O G

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Green/orange wire
• Open circuit in the Green wire

O2 SENSOR

• Do not get grease, oil or other materials in the O2

sensor air hole.
• The O2 sensor may be damaged if dropped. Replace
it with a new one, if dropped.

• Handle the O2 sensor with care.

• Do not service the O2 sensor while it is hot.
REMOVAL
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
Release the O2 sensor wire from the clamp [1] and
radiator reserve tank guide [2].
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [3].

[1] [2] [3]

Remove the O2 sensor [1].

Do not use an impact wrench while removing or

installing the O2 sensor, or it may be damaged.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-69
 dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install and hand tighten the O2 sensor [1].
Tighten the O2 sensor to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

[1]

Connect the O2 sensor cap [1].

[1]

• Take care not to tilt the O2 sensor cap when

connecting the cap to the O2 sensor.
• Do not turn the O2 sensor cap, after connecting it.
Install the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Install the O2 sensor wire to the clamp [2] and radiator
reserve tank guide [3].
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[2] [3]

4-70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

5. IGNITION SYSTEM

SYSTEM LOCATION·····································5-2 IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION ················ 5-6

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ······································5-3 IGNITION TIMING ········································· 5-9

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························5-4 IGNITION COIL ··········································· 5-10

TROUBLESHOOTING···································5-5 CKP SENSOR ············································· 5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-1
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
SYSTEM LOCATION
IGNITION SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

IGNITION SWITCH ENGINE STOP SWITCH

IGNITION COILS
CLUTCH SWITCH
MAIN FUSE 30 A

BATTERY

ECM

FUSE BOX

SPARK PLUGS

CKP SENSOR

NEUTRAL SWITCH BANK ANGLE SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:
ENGINE STOP SWITCH

IGNITION COILS

MAIN FUSE 30 A

BATTERY

PCM

IGNITION SWITCH

FUSE BOX

SPARK PLUGS

CKP SENSOR

NEUTRAL SWITCH BANK ANGLE SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

5-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

R ECM
Bl Bl MAIN FUSE IGNITION FI
30 A SWITCH 15 A

R/Bl Bl/W Bl/Bu Br/Bl Y/Bu G/W Y

BATTERY 8P
(BLUE) Bl Bu/Y G G/R G/O
W/Y W/Y
ENGINE STOP ENG STOP BANK 2P (RED)
SWITCH 7.5 A ANGLE
SENSOR Y W/Y

CKP
Bl/R Bl Br/Bl SENSOR
Bl: Black Br
Br: Brown
Bu: Blue FUEL CUT RELAY
G: Green To NEUTRAL
Lg: Light green INDICATOR
Br Br
O: Orange NEUTRAL
R: Red Bu/Y Y/Bu SIDESTAND SWITCH DIODE
G
W: White
Y: Yellow
10P/14P
No 1. No 2. (GRAY) Lg
IGNITION IGNITION Bl Bl NEUTRAL
COIL COIL
SWITCH
SPARK SPARK CLUTCH
PLUG PLUG SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:

R PCM
Bl Bl MAIN FUSE IGNITION FI
30 A SWITCH 15 A
R/Bl Bl/W Bl/Bu Br/Bl Y/Bu G/W Y
BATTERY 8P
(BLUE) Bl Bu/Y G Lg G/O
W/Y W/Y
BANK 2P (RED)
ENGINE STOP ENG STOP
ANGLE
SWITCH 7.5 A
SENSOR Y W/Y

Bl Br/Bl CKP
Bl/R
SENSOR
Br

FUEL CUT RELAY

Br Br
Bu/Y Y/Bu Bl: Black
Br: Brown
G SIDESTAND Lg Bu: Blue
SWITCH
No 1. No 2. G: Green
IGNITION IGNITION NEUTRAL Lg: Light green
COIL COIL SWITCH O: Orange
R: Red
SPARK SPARK
W: White
PLUG PLUG
Y: Yellow

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-3
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

• The ECM/PCM may be damaged if dropped. Also if the connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive
voltage may damage the module. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• Use spark plug of the correct heat range. Using a spark plug with an incorrect heat range can damage the engine.
• When servicing the ignition system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
• Some electrical components may be damaged if terminals or connectors are connected or disconnected while the ignition switch
is turned to ON position and current is present.
• A faulty ignition system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connections. Check those connections before
proceeding.
• Make sure the battery is adequately charged. Using the starter motor with a weak battery results in a slower engine cranking
speed as well as no spark at the spark plug.
• For ECM/PCM service (page 4-67).
• Refer to following components informations:
– Ignition switch (page 22-24)
– Engine stop switch (page 22-25)
– Bank angle sensor (page 4-65)
– Sidestand switch (page 22-28)
– Neutral switch (page 22-27)
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bl = Black Bu = Blue Lg = Light green R = Red Y = Yellow

Br = Brown G = Green O = Orange W = White

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Spark plug (Iridium) IFR6G-11K (NGK)
Spark plug gap 1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in)
Ignition coil peak voltage 100 V minimum
CKP sensor peak voltage (at 20°C/68°F) 0.7 V minimum
Ignition timing ("F" mark) 12° BTDC at idle

TORQUE VALUE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Timing hole cap 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Apply grease to the threads.
Right crankcase cover wire clamp 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt (NC700XD/SD) Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

5-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Inspect the following before diagnosing the system.
– Faulty spark plug
– Loose spark plug cap or spark plug wire connection
– Water got into the spark plug cap (Leaking the ignition coil secondary voltage)
• If there is no spark at cylinder, temporarily exchange the ignition coil with a known-good one and perform the spark test. If there
is spark, the original ignition coil is faulty.
• "Initial voltage" of the ignition primary coil is the battery voltage with the ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " "
(The engine is not cranked by the starter motor).
No spark at spark plug
Unusual condition Probable cause (Check in numerical order)
Ignition coil No initial voltage with the ignition 1. Faulty ignition switch
primary voltage switch turned ON and engine 2. Faulty engine stop switch
stop switch " " (Other electrical 3. Faulty fuel cut relay or its related circuits
components are normal). 4. An open circuit in Brown wire between the ignition coil and fuel
cut relay
5. Loose or poor connection of the primary terminal, or an open
circuit in the primary coil
6. Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when the initial voltage is normal with
the ECM/PCM connector disconnected).
Initial voltage is normal, but it 1. Incorrect peak voltage adaptor connections (System is normal if
drops by 2 – 4 V while cranking measured voltage is over the specifications with reverse
the engine. connections).
2. Battery is undercharged (Voltage drops largely when the engine
is started).
3. No voltage between the Black (+) wire and body ground (–) at the
ECM/PCM connector or loosen ECM/PCM connection
4. An open circuit or loose connection in Green/orange wire at the
ECM/PCM
5. An open circuit or loose connection in Blue/yellow or Yellow/blue
wire between the ignition coil and ECM/PCM
6. Faulty sidestand switch, neutral diode (NC700X/XA/S/SA) or
neutral switch
7. Loose or poor connection or an open circuit in No. 6 related wires
– Sidestand switch line: Green/white and Green
– Neutral switch line (NC700X/XA/S/SA): Green/red and Light
green
– Neutral switch line (NC700XD/SD): Light green
8. Faulty CKP sensor (Measure peak voltage)
9. Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 8 are
normal).
Initial voltage is normal but there 1. Incorrect peak voltage adaptor connections
is no peak voltage while cranking 2. Faulty peak voltage adaptor
the engine. 3. Faulty CKP sensor
4. Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 3 are
normal).
Initial voltage is normal but peak 1. The multimeter impedance is too low; below 10 MΩ/DCV.
voltage is lower than the 2. Cranking speed is too slow (Battery is undercharged).
standard value. 3. The sampling timing of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized (System is normal if measured voltage is over the
standard voltage at least once).
4. Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 3 are
normal).
Initial and peak voltages are 1. Faulty spark plug or leaking ignition coil secondary current
normal but no spark jumps. ampere
2. Faulty ignition coil
CKP sensor Peak voltage is lower than 1. The multimeter impedance is too low; below 10 MΩ/DCV.
standard value. 2. Cranking speed is too low. (Battery is undercharged.)
3. The sampling timing of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized (System is normal if measured voltage is over the
standard voltage at least once).
4. Faulty CKP sensor (in case when above No.1 through 3 are
normal).
No peak voltage 1. Faulty peak voltage adapter
2. Faulty CKP sensor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-5
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION
• If there is no spark at the plug, check all connections
for loose or poor contact before measuring the peak
voltage.
• Use a commercially available digital multimeter with
an impedance of 10 MΩ/DCV minimum.
• The display value differs depending upon the
internal impedance of the multimeter.
• If using the Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625),
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Connect the peak voltage adaptor [1] to the digital
[2]
multimeter [2], or use the Imrie diagnostic tester.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor 07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)

[1]

IGNITION COIL PRIMARY PEAK

VOLTAGE

• Check all system connections before performing this

inspection. Loose connectors can cause incorrect
readings.
• If the system is disconnected, incorrect peak voltage
might be measured.
• Check the cylinder compression and check that the
spark plug is installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the spark plug caps (page 3-8).
Connect a known good spark plug [1] to the spark plug
cap and ground it to the cylinder head as done in a
spark test.

[1]

5-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13)
Do not disconnect With the ignition coil primary wire connected, connect
the ignition coil the peak voltage adaptor or Imrie tester to the ignition
primary wire. coil primary terminal [1] and ground.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor 07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)

CONNECTION: [1]
No.1: Blue/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
No.2: Yellow/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Check the initial voltage at this time.
The battery voltage should be measured.
If the initial voltage cannot be measured, follow the
checks described in the troubleshooting table (page 5-
5).
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Avoid touching the Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
spark plug and the ignition coil primary peak voltage.
tester probes to
prevent electric
PEAK VOLTAGE: 100 V minimum
shock. If the peak voltage is abnormal, follow the checks
described in the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
Install the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-
14).
Install the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).

CKP SENSOR PEAK VOLTAGE

(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Check the cylinder compression and check that the

spark plugs are installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1] (page 4-
[2]
67).
Connect the peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to
the ECM 33P (Black) connector terminals of the wire
harness side.
TOOLS:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or Y G/O
Peak voltage adaptor [2] 07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110

CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – Green/orange (–) [1]

Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
the CKP sensor peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 0.7 V minimum
If the peak voltage measured at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector is abnormal, measure the peak voltage at the
CKP sensor connector.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-7
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
connect the tester probes to the connector terminals of
the CKP sensor side.
CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)
In the same manner as at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector, measure the peak voltage and compare it to
the voltage measured at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector.
– If the peak voltage measured at the ECM is
abnormal and the one measured at the CKP sensor
is normal, the wire harness has an open or short
circuit or loose connection.
– If the peak voltage of the CKP sensor side is lower
than standard value, follow the checks described in
the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
For CKP sensor replacement (page 5-11).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.

CKP SENSOR PEAK VOLTAGE

(NC700XD/SD)

Check the cylinder compression and check that the

spark plugs are installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the spark plug caps (page 3-8).
[2]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM 33P
connectors (page 4-14).
Connect the peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to
the ECM test harness [1] terminals.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or B6
Peak voltage adaptor [2] 07HGJ-0020100
B11
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)

CONNECTION: B11 (+) – B6 (–)

[1]
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
the CKP sensor peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 0.7 V minimum
If the peak voltage measured at the ECM test harness
is abnormal, measure the peak voltage at the CKP
sensor connector.

5-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
connect the tester probes to the connector terminals of
the CKP sensor side.
CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)
In the same manner as at the ECM test harness,
measure the peak voltage and compare it to the voltage
measured at the ECM test harness.
– If the peak voltage measured at the ECM test
harness is abnormal and the one measured at the
CKP sensor is normal, the wire harness has an open
or short circuit or loose connection.
– If the peak voltage of the CKP sensor side is lower
than standard value, follow the checks described in
the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
For CKP sensor replacement (page 5-11).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.

IGNITION TIMING
Warm up the engine.
Stop the engine and remove the timing hole cap.
Connect the timing light [1] to the spark plug wire.

Read the instructions for timing light operation.

Start the engine and let it idle.
IDLE SPEED: 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
The ignition timing is correct if the "F" mark [2] on the
flywheel aligns with the index notch [3] on the alternator
cover.
[2] [3] [1]

Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the

[1]
timing hole cap.
Apply grease to the timing hole cap [2] threads.
Install and tighten the timing hole cap to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-9
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
No.1 IGNITION COIL
Remove the following:
[5] [2]
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Air cleaner housing (page 7-14) [3]
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
Release the spark plug wire [2] from the clamp [3].
Release the clamp [4] from the frame tab.
Release the clamp [5] from the fan motor stay.

[1] [4]
NC700S/SA/SD: Remove the wire band [1] and spark plug wire [2] from
NC700S/SA/SD: [1]
the main wire harness.

[2]

Disconnect the primary wire connectors [1] from the

[4] [1]
ignition coil.
Remove the bolts [2], spacers [3] and ignition coil [4]
from the ignition coil stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[2]/[3]

No.2 IGNITION COIL

Remove the following:
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Air cleaner housing (page 7-14)
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
Release the clamp [2] from the frame tab.

[2] [1]

5-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Disconnect the primary wire connectors [1] from the
[5] [2]
ignition coil.
Release the clamp [2] from the frame tab.
Remove the bolts [3], spacers [4] and ignition coil [5]
from the ignition coil stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[1] [3]/[4]

CKP SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).
[3] [1]
Remove the wire grommet [1] from the right crankcase
cover.
Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolts [2] and CKP
sensor [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply locking agent to the CKP sensor mounting

bolts threads (page 1-23).
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the CKP sensor wire grommet sealing
surface.
[2]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
[2]
Remove the right crankcase cover wire clamp bolts [1]
and wire clamp [2].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-11
 dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Remove the wire grommet [1] from the right crankcase
[3] [1]
cover.
Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolts [2] and CKP
sensor [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply locking agent to the CKP sensor mounting bolt

threads (page 1-23).
• Apply locking agent to the right crankcase cover wire
clamp bolt threads (page 5-4).
• Apply sealant to the wire grommet seating surface
and grommet mating surface.
[2]
TORQUE:
Right crankcase cover wire clamp bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

5-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

6. ELECTRIC STARTER

SYSTEM LOCATION·····································6-2 STARTER MOTOR ······································· 6-8

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ······································6-3 STARTER RELAY SWITCH ······················· 6-10

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························6-4 NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······· 6-12

TROUBLESHOOTING···································6-5 STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD) ············· 6-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-1
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
SYSTEM LOCATION
ELECTRIC STARTER

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

ENGINE STOP SWITCH

STARTER SWITCH
CLUTCH SWITCH MAIN FUSE 30 A

IGNITION SWITCH STARTER RELAY SWITCH

BATTERY

FUSE BOX

STARTER MOTOR

NEUTRAL SWITCH
SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:

ENGINE STOP SWITCH

STARTER SWITCH

MAIN FUSE 30 A

STARTER RELAY SWITCH

BATTERY

IGNITION SWITCH

FUSE BOX

STARTER MOTOR

6-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Bl Bl Bl Bl
STARTER STARTER RELAY SWITCH
MOTOR

BATTERY MAIN FUSE

30 A

IGNITION
SWITCH
G/R R

CLUTCH 10P
SWITCH (GRAY) Y/R R/Bl

Bl G/R Bl/R W/Y

STARTER ENGINE STOP ENG STOP
SWITCH SWITCH 7.5 A
Bl
NEUTRAL
G/W DIODE

Lg/R Lg
SIDESTAND Bl: Black
SWITCH G: Green
G NEUTRAL
To NEUTRAL SWITCH Lg: Light green
INDICATOR R: Red
Y: Yellow
W: White

NC700XD/SD:

Bl Bl Bl Bl
STARTER STARTER RELAY SWITCH Bl: Black
MOTOR G: Green
R: Red
BATTERY MAIN FUSE V: Violet
30 A W: White
Y: Yellow

Y/R R R/Bl
IGNITION
SWITCH

G/R Bl/R W/Y

STARTER ENGINE STOP ENG STOP
SWITCH SWITCH 7.5 A

To PCM V/W Bl/W

FI
G START
15 A
RELAY

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-3
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

If the current is kept flowing through the starter motor turn it while the engine is not cranking over, the starter motor may be
damaged.
• The starter motor can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF before servicing the starter motor. The motor could suddenly start, causing serious injury.
• A weak battery may be unable to turn the starter motor quickly enough, or supply adequate ignition current.
• When servicing the starter system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 6-5).
• Refer to the following components information:
– Ignition switch (page 22-24)
– Starter switch (page 22-25)
– Engine stop switch (page 22-25)
– Neutral switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-27)
– Sidestand switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-28)
– Clutch switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-26)

SPECIFICATION
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Starter motor brush length 12.0 – 13.0 (0.47 – 0.51) 6.5 (0.26)

TORQUE VALUE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Starter motor terminal nut 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)

6-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
TROUBLESHOOTING
Starter motor does not turn (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse 30 A or sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP).
Is the fuse blown?
YES – Replace the fuse.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition (page 21-6).
Is the battery in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Charge or replace the battery.
3. Starter Relay Switch Operation
Check the starter relay switch operation.
You should hear the relay "CLICK" when the starter switch button is depressed.
Is there a "CLICK"?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.
4. Starter Motor Inspection
Apply battery voltage directly to the starter motor and check the operation.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES – • Poorly contacted starter motor cable
• Faulty starter relay switch (page 6-10)
NO – Faulty starter motor (page 6-8)
5. Relay Coil Ground Lines Inspection
Disconnect the starter relay switch connector, and check the relay coil ground wire line as below for
continuity:
1. Green/red terminal – neutral diode – neutral switch line (with the transmission in neutral and clutch lever
released).
2. Green/red terminal – clutch switch – sidestand switch (in any gear except neutral, and with the clutch
lever pulled in and sidestand up.)
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – • Loose or poor contact connector
• Open circuit in wire harness
• Faulty neutral diode (page 6-12)
• Faulty neutral switch (page 22-27)
• Faulty sidestand switch (page 22-28)
• Faulty clutch switch (page 22-26)
6. Starter Relay Input Voltage Inspection
Connect the starter relay switch connector.
With the ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " " and the starter switch is pushed, measure the
voltage at the starter relay switch connector (between Yellow/red (+) and ground (–)).
Does the battery voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – • Faulty ignition switch (page 22-24)
• Faulty starter switch (page 22-25)
• Faulty engine stop switch (page 22-25)
• Loose or poor contact connector
• Open circuit in wire harness

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-5
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
7. Starter Relay Switch Continuity Inspection
Remove and check the operation of the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is there continuity?
YES – Loose or poor contact starter relay switch connector
NO – Faulty starter relay switch

Starter motor does not turn (NC700XD/SD)

1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse (30 A), ENG STOP fuse (7.5 A) and FI fuse (15 A).
Are the fuses in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Replace the blown fuse.
2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition (page 21-6).
Is the battery in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Charge or replace the battery.
3. Starter Relay Switch Operation Inspection
Check the starter relay switch operation (page 6-10).
Does the starter relay switch click?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.
4. Starter Motor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Apply battery voltage directly to the starter motor and check the operation.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES – • Poorly contacted battery positive cable or starter motor cable
• Faulty starter relay switch
NO – Faulty starter motor (page 6-8)
5. Relay Coil Input Line Inspection
Check the relay coil input line of the starter relay switch (page 6-10).
Is the input line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – • Faulty ignition switch (page 22-24)
• Faulty starter switch (page 22-25)
• Faulty engine stop switch (page 22-25)
• Loose or poor connected connector
• Open circuit in the wire harness
6. Relay Coil Ground Line Inspection
Check the relay coil ground line of the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is the ground line normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – GO TO STEP 8.
7. Starter Relay Switch Continuity Inspection
Check the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is there continuity?
YES – Loose or poor contact starter relay switch connector
NO – Faulty starter relay switch

6-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
8. Starter Relay Inspection
Check the starter relay (page 6-12).
Is the starter relay normal?
YES – • Loose or poor connected connector
• Open circuit in the wire harness
• Faulty neutral switch or its circuit
• Faulty PCM
NO – Faulty starter relay

The starter motor turns when the transmission is in neutral, but does not turn with the transmission in
any position except neutral, with the sidestand up and the clutch lever pulled in. (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
1. Clutch Switch Inspection
Check the clutch switch operation (page 22-26).
Is the clutch switch operation normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty clutch switch
2. Sidestand Switch Inspection
Check the sidestand switch operation (page 22-28).
Is the sidestand switch operation normal?
YES – • Loose or poor contact connector
• Open circuit in wire harness
NO – Faulty sidestand switch

Starter motor turns slowly

• Low battery voltage
• Poorly connected battery terminal cable
• Poorly connected starter motor cable
• Faulty starter motor
• Poorly connected battery ground cable
Starter motor turns, but engine does not turn
• Starter motor is running backwards
– Case assembled improperly
– Terminals connected improperly
• Faulty starter clutch
• Damaged or faulty starter reduction gear/shaft
• Damaged or faulty starter idle gear/shaft
Starter relay switch "Clicks", but engine does not turn over
• Crankshaft does not turn due to engine problems

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-7
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the battery negative cable (page 21-6).
[1] [2]/[3]
Release the rubber cap [1].
Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and starter
motor cable [3].
Remove the stater motor mounting bolts [4] and ground
cable [5].
Remove the starter motor [6].

[4] [4]/[5] [6]

Remove the O-ring [1].

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

• Route the cables properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Starter motor terminal nut:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

MOTOR CASE
SEAL RING
SEAL RING

FRONT COVER

O-RING

BOLTS

O-RING

NEGATIVE BRUSHES

NUT

WASHER

SCREW INSULATOR

TERMINAL STOPPER
BRUSH HOLDER
SPRING REAR COVER
POSITIVE BRUSHES
ARMATURE
TERMINAL BOLT

6-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
INSPECTION
FRONT COVER
Check the oil seal [1] in the front cover for deterioration,
[1]
wear or damage.
Turn the inner race of bearing [2] in the front cover with
your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the front
cover.
Replace the starter motor as an assembly if necessary.

[2]

REAR COVER
Inspect the brushes for damage and measure the brush
[3] [2] [1]
length.
SERVICE LIMIT: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
Check for continuity or no continuity for each part of
rear cover [1] as below:
– Between the positive brush [2] and cable terminal
[3]: should be continuity.
– Between the cable terminal and the rear cover:
should be No continuity.
– Between the positive brush and rear cover: should
be No continuity.
– Between positive brush and negative brush [4]:
should be No continuity. [4]

ARMATURE
Clean the metallic debris off between commutator bars
[1]
[1].
Check the commutator bars of the armature for
discoloration.
Check for continuity or no continuity for each part of
armature as below:
– Between pair of commutator bars: should be
continuity.
– Between each commutator bar and the armature
shaft [2]: should be No continuity.
Replace the starter motor as an assembly if necessary.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-9
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
STARTER RELAY SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
[1]
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Push the starter switch.
The coil is normal if the starter relay switch [1] clicks.
If you don't hear the starter relay switch "CLICK",
release the starter relay switch/shock rubber from the
battery box tabs [2] and inspect the starter relay switch
using a procedure below.

[2]

STARTER RELAY INPUT VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the Yellow/red (+) wire
terminal at the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector
[1] and ground (–).
If the battery voltage appears only when the starter
switch is pushed with the ignition switch turned ON and
engine stop switch " ", the starter relay input voltage is
normal.

[1]

GROUND LINE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector
[1].
Check for continuity between the Green/red wire of the
wire harness side (ground line) and ground.
If there is continuity when the transmission is in neutral
or when the clutch is disengaged and the sidestand is
retracted, the ground circuit of the relay coil is normal.
(In neutral, there is a slight resistance due to the diode.)

[1]

6-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
GROUND LINE (NC700XD/SD)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
[1]
Measure the voltage between the Yellow/red (+) and
Green/red (–) wire terminals at the starter relay switch
4P (Red) connector [1]. G/R Y/R
If the battery voltage appears only when the starter
switch is pushed with the ignition switch turned ON and
engine stop switch " ", the starter relay ground line is
normal.

OPERATION CHECK
Remove the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Connect a 12 V battery to the starter relay switch as
shown.
There should be continuity between the cable terminals
when the battery is connected, and not continuity when
the battery is disconnected.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
[2] [3]
Release the starter relay switch/shock rubber from the
battery box tabs [1].
Release the rubber cover [2]. [6]

Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector

[3].
Remove the bolts [4] and cables [5].
Remove the starter relay switch [6] from the shock
rubber [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1] [4]/[5] [7]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-11
 dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the neutral
diode [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between the neutral diode

terminals.
When there is continuity, a small resistance value will
register.
B
If there is continuity, in direction shown by the arrow,
A
the neutral diode is normal.

A C

B C

STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD)

INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the START
RELAY [1].

[1]

Connect an ohmmeter to the START RELAY [1]

[1]
connector terminals.
Connect a 12 V battery to the START RELAY connector
terminals as shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the START RELAY.

6-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

7. FUEL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION ····························7-2 AIR CLEANER HOUSING ·························· 7-14 7

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························7-3 THROTTLE BODY ······································ 7-15

FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT ························7-4 INJECTOR··················································· 7-20

FUEL TANK···················································7-8 IACV ···························································· 7-22

FUEL PUMP UNIT ·······································7-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-1
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION
FUEL SYSTEM

7-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where gasoline is stored can cause a
fire or explosion.
• Before disconnecting the fuel feed hose, relieve fuel pressure from the system (page 7-4).
• Bending or twisting the control cables will impair smooth operation and could cause the cables to stick or bind, resulting in loss
of vehicle control.
• Do not snap the throttle valve from full open to full close after the throttle cable has been removed. It may cause incorrect idle
operation.
• Seal the intake ports with tape or a clean cloth to keep dirt and debris from entering the engine after the throttle body or fuel rail
has been removed.
• Do not damage the throttle body. It may cause incorrect throttle valve operation.
• Prevent dirt and debris from entering the throttle bore and air passages after the throttle body has been removed. Clean them
using a compressed air if necessary.
• Do not loosen or tighten the white painted nut and screw of the throttle body. Loosening or tightening them can cause throttle
valve and idle control failure.
• The parts of the throttle body not shown in this manual should not be disassembled.
• For fuel level sensor inspection (page 22-21).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

G = Green P = Pink R = Red W = White Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Throttle body identification number GQ3UA
Idle speed 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
Throttle grip freeplay 2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)
Fuel pressure at idle 343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
Fuel pump flow (at 12 V) 230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/10 seconds

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Fuel pump mounting nut 6 6 12 (1.2, 9) For tightening sequence (page 7-14)
Air cleaner connecting hose band 1 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Insulator band screw 2 5 – See page 7-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-3
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING

Before disconnecting fuel feed hose, relieve pressure

from the system as follows.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
3. Disconnect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
4. Start the engine, and let it idle until the engine stalls.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the battery negative (–) cable (page 21-
6). [1]

QUICK CONNECT FITTING REMOVAL

Do not bend or twist fuel feed hose.

FUEL PUMP SIDE
Refer to fuel tank removal (page 7-8).

INJECTOR SIDE
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
[1]
Check the fuel quick connect fitting [1] for dirt, and
clean if necessary.
Place a shop towel over the quick connect fitting.

2. Pull and release the joint rubber [1] tabs from the
[1]
retainer.
3. Squeeze the retainer tabs [2] with the hand to
release them from the locking pawls [3].
Pull the fuel feed hose off and remove the retainer.

• Absorb the remaining fuel in the fuel feed hose from

flowing out with a shop towel.
• Be careful not to damage the hose or other parts.
• Do not use tools. [3]
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily. [2]

7-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
4. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
[1]
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with
the plastic bags [1].

QUICK CONNECT FITTING

INSTALLATION
FUEL PUMP SIDE
Refer to fuel tank installation (page 7-8).

INJECTOR SIDE

• Always replace the retainer and joint rubber of the

quick connect fitting when the fuel feed hose is
disconnected.
• Replace the retainer and joint rubber with the same
manufacturer’s item that was removed.
• Do not bent or twist fuel feed hose.
1. Insert a new retainer [1] into the connector [2].
Align [1]

• Align new retainer locking pawls with the connector

grooves.

[2] Align

2. Set a new joint rubber [1] as shown.

[1]
Then press the fuel feed hose into the quick connect
fitting until both retainer pawls [2] lock with a
"CLICK".

• Align retainer tabs with joint rubber grooves.

If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of engine
oil on the injector joint.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-5
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
3. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and
by pulling the fuel feed hose [1].
4. Make sure the joint rubber [2] is in place (between
the retainer tabs).
5. Increase the fuel pressure and check that there is no
leakage in fuel supply system (page 7-6).

[2] [1]

FUEL PRESSURE NORMALIZATION

1. Connect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the battery negative (–) cable (page 21-6).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".

• Do not start the engine.

The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel
pressure will rise.
3. Repeat 2 or 3 times, and check that there is no
leakage in the fuel supply system.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Install the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)

7-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL PRESSURE TEST
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
[3] [5] [1]
connect fitting from the injector (page 7-4).
Attach the fuel pressure gauge, attachments and
manifold.
TOOLS:
Fuel pressure gauge, 0 – 100 psi
[1] 07406-0040004
Pressure gauge manifold [2] 07ZAJ-S5A0111
Hose attachment, 9 mm/9 mm [3] 07ZAJ-S5A0120
Hose attachment, 8 mm/9 mm [4] 07ZAJ-S7C0100
Attachment joint, 8 mm/9 mm [5] 07ZAJ-S7C0200
Temporarily connect the battery negative (–) cable and
fuel pump 1P (Black) connector. [2] [4]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Start the engine and let it idle.
Read the fuel pressure.
STANDARD: 343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, replace the
fuel pump assembly.
If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect the
following:
– Fuel line leaking
– Pinched or clogged fuel feed hose or fuel tank
breather hose
– Fuel pump unit (page 7-10)
– Clogged fuel filter (page 7-11)
After inspection, relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
Remove the fuel pressure gauge, attachment and
manifold from the injector.
Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-5).

FUEL FLOW INSPECTION

Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the injector (page 7-4).
Wipe off spilled out Place the end of the hose [1] into an approved gasoline
gasoline. container.
Temporarily connect the battery negative (–) cable and
fuel pump 1P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the amount of fuel flow.

• The fuel pump operates for 2 seconds. Repeat 5

times so that the total measuring time.
• Return fuel to the fuel tank when the first fuel is
flowed.

Amount of fuel flow:

230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/
10 seconds at 12 V
If fuel flow is less than specified, inspect the following:
– Fuel pump unit (page 7-10)
– Clogged fuel filter (page 7-11)
Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-5).
[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-7
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
[4] [1] [3] [1] [7]
Remove the bolts [1], fuel cap [2] and fuel cap tray [3].
[5]
Release the following:
[6] [8]
– Fuel tank drain hose A [4]
– Fuel tank breather hose [5]
– Seat lock cable [6]
[9]
Remove the fuel tank mounting bolts [7], washers [8], [13]
upper mounting rubbers [9], lower mounting rubbers
[10] and collars [11].
Lift the rear end of the fuel tank and disconnect the
following:
– Fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector [12]
– Quick connect fitting (page 7-8) [10]

[11]
Do not bend or twist fuel feed hose.
Remove the fuel tank [13].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-9).

• Route the hose and wire properly (page 1-25).

[2]

[12]

FUEL PUMP SIDE QUICK CONNECT FITTING

REMOVAL
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
2. Check the fuel quick connect fitting [1] for dirt, and
clean if necessary.
Place a shop towel over the quick connect fitting.

[1]

3. Pull and release the joint rubber [1] from the

[1] [2]
retainer.
4. Hold the connector with one hand and squeeze the
retainer tabs [2] with the other hand to release them
from the locking pawls [3].
Pull the connector off and remove the retainer.

• Absorb the remaining fuel in the fuel feed hose from

flowing out with a shop towel.
• Be careful not to damage the hose or other parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push [3]
the connector until it comes off easily.

7-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
[1]
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with
the plastic bags [1].

FUEL PUMP SIDE QUICK CONNECT FITTING

INSTALLATION

• Always replace the retainer and joint rubber of the

quick connect fitting when the fuel feed hose is
disconnected.
• Replace the retainer and joint rubber with the same
manufacturer’s item that was removed.
• Do not bent or twist fuel feed hose.
1. Insert a new retainer [1] into the connector [2].
[1]

• Align new retainer locking pawls with the connector

grooves.

[2] Align

2. Set a new joint rubber [1] as shown.

Then press the quick connect fitting onto the pipe
until both retainer pawls [2] lock with a "CLICK".

• Align the quick connect fitting with the pipe.

• If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of engine
oil on the pipe end.

[1]

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-9
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
3. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
[2] [1]
pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and
by pulling the connector [1].
4. Make sure the joint rubber [2] is in place (between
the retainer tabs [3]).
5. Increase the fuel pressure and check that there is no
leakage in fuel supply system (page 7-6).

[2] [3]

FUEL PUMP UNIT

INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " "
and confirm that the fuel pump operates for 2 seconds.
If the fuel pump does not operate, inspect as follows:
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Lift and support the fuel tank (page 7-8).

Do not disconnect the quick connect fitting.

Disconnect the fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
[1]
Measure the voltage at the fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [1] terminals of the wire side.
CONNECTION: Yellow/red (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD: Battery voltage
Y/R G/R
There should be standard voltage for a few seconds.
If there is standard voltage, replace the fuel pump unit.
If there is no standard voltage, inspect the following:
– Loose or poor contact on the fuel pump 1P (Black)
connector
– Main fuse 30 A
– Sub fuse 15 A (FI)
– Sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
– Ignition switch
– Engine stop switch
– Fuel cut relay (page 4-64)
– Open circuit in Yellow/red or Green/red wire
– ECM/PCM (page 4-68)

7-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
REMOVAL
Remove the fuel tank (page 7-8).
[2] [1]
Clean around the fuel pump.
Loosen the fuel pump mounting nuts [1] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps and remove the nuts.
Remove the fuel pump unit [2] and packing [3].

Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor float arm.

[3]

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION
Remove the screws [1] and Black wire terminals [2].
[1]/[2] [1]/[2]
Disconnect the Pink wire connector [3] and Blue wire
connector [4].

[3] [4]

Remove the fuel pump unit assembly [1] and O-ring [2]
[1]
from the fuel pump stay [3].

[3] [2]

Remove the chamber [1].

[1]
Release the tab [2] and remove the fuel level sensor
assembly [3] from the fuel filter [4].
[2]

[3]

[4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-11
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the fuel pump [1] and O-ring [2].
[1] [3]
Visually inspect the fuel pump filter [3] for dirt, debris or
any clogging.
Replace fuel pump unit as an assembly if necessary.

[2]

Remove the pressure regulator [1] and O-ring [2] from

[2] [1]
the fuel filter [3].

[3]

ASSEMBLY
Replace the fuel filter [1] with a new one.
[2] [3]
Install a new O-ring [2] to the pressure regulator [3].
Install the pressure regulator.

[1]

Install a new O-ring [1] to the fuel pump [2].

[2]
Install the fuel pump.

Align the Blue wire with the fuel filter groove. Align

[1]

7-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Insert the fuel pump filter edge [1] between the fuel
[2] [4]
pump and pressure regulator [2].
Install the fuel level sensor assembly [3].
Install the chamber [4].

[1]

[3]

Install a new O-ring [1] to the fuel pump stay [2].

Align [3]
Install the fuel pump unit assembly [3] to the fuel pump
stay.

Align the fuel pump stay with fuel pump assembly

grooves.

[2] [1]

Install the screws [1] and Black wire terminals [2].

[1]/[2] [1]/[2]
Tighten the screws securely.
Connect the Pink wire connector [3] and Blue wire
connector [4].

[3] [4]

INSTALLATION
Install a new packing [1] onto the fuel pump unit [2].
[2]

• Always replace the packing with a new one.

• Be careful not to pinch the dirt and debris between
the fuel pump unit and packing.
• Align the packing tab with the fuel pipe.

[1] Align

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-13
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Install the fuel pump unit [1] into the fuel tank.
[1]

Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor float arm

[2].
[2]

Install and tighten the fuel pump mounting nuts [1] to

the specified torque in the sequence as shown.
3 6
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the fuel tank (page 7-8).

1 2

5 4

[1]

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the air cleaner (page 3-7).
[1] [2]
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].
Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3] SLITS [1] Align

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air

[1] [3]
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

[2]

7-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Lower the radiator and disconnect the crankcase
[1]
breather hose [1].

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Loosen the air cleaner connecting hose band screw [1].

[4] [2] [3]
Remove the bolts [2] and collar [3].
[1]
Disconnect connecting hose and remove the air cleaner
housing [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-

25).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.

TORQUE:
Air cleaner connecting hose band screw:
1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL
Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).
[2] [1]
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] and
IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].

Loosen the throttle cable A adjuster lock nut [1] and

[1] [2]
adjusting nut [2] then disconnect the throttle cable A [3]
from the throttle drum and cable stay.
Loosen the throttle cable B lock nut [4] then disconnect
the throttle cable B [5] from the throttle drum and cable
stay.

[3] [5] [4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-15
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Loosen the insulator band screw [1] and remove the
[1]
throttle body assembly [2].

[2]

DISASSEMBLY

• Do not remove the sensor unit unless it is replaced.

• The throttle body/sensor unit is factory pre-set. Do
not disassemble in a way other than shown in this
manual.
• Do not snap the throttle valve from full open to full
close after the throttle cable has been removed. It
may cause incorrect idle operation.
• Do not damage the throttle body. It may cause
incorrect throttle valve operation.
• Do not loosen or tighten the white painted nut and
screw [1] of the throttle body. Loosening or
tightening it can cause throttle valve and idle control
failure.
• Always clean around the throttle body before each
sensor removal to prevent dirt and debris from [1]
entering the air passage.

For IACV removal (page 7-22).

Remove the sensor unit torx screws [1], sensor unit [2]
[1]
and O-ring [3].

[3] [2]
Cleaning the air Clean the air passage of the throttle body using a
passages and compressed air.
sensor hole with a Check the air passage for clogs.
piece of wire will
damage the throttle
body.

7-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY

For IACV installation (page 7-23).

TORX SCREWS
THROTTLE BODY

O-RING

SENSOR UNIT
SETTING PLATE

IACV

O-RING

TORX SCREWS

If the O-ring is not Install a new O-ring [1] to the throttle body properly.
Align [2]
installed properly,
When installing the sensor unit [2] to the throttle body,
the idle air will leaks
align the following:
and engine idle
speed will be – The TP sensor clip with the throttle valve boss
unstable. – The sensor unit tab with the throttle body hole

[1] Align

Install and tighten the sensor unit torx screws [1]

[1]
securely.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-17
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install the throttle body assembly [1] to the cylinder
head.

• Align the throttle body tab with the insulator groove.

• Align the insulator band hole with the insulator tab.

Align

[1] Align

Tighten the insulator band screw to the specified range.

11 – 13 mm (0.4 – 0.5 in)

Connect the throttle cables [1] to the throttle drum and

[3]
throttle cable stay.

Route the cables properly (page 1-25).

Tighten the throttle cable B lock nut [2] securely.
Tighten the throttle cable A adjuster lock nut [3]
securely.

[1] [2]

Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] and

[2] [1]
IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

Install the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).
Adjust the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).

7-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
POSITION RESET PROCEDURE

If the sensor unit is removed, reset the throttle valve

fully closed position as following.
1. Erase the DTC’s (page 4-13).
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Short the DLC [1] terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100

[1] [2]

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[1]
Short the ECT sensor 2P connector terminals of the
wire harness side with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Pink/white – Green/yellow
5. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ", then MIL will start blinking.
G/Y P/W
Disconnect the jumper wire while the MIL blinking
(within 10 seconds).

[1] [2]

6. After disconnection of the jumper wire, the MIL [1]

[1]
start to short blinking.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-19
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
7. Check if the MIL blinks.
If the MIL begins short blink (0.3 seconds), the throttle valve fully closed position is reset.

0.3 seconds

0.3 seconds
within 10 seconds
0.1
seconds

MIL ON
1.2
seconds
MIL OFF

RESET RECEIVING PATTERN SUCCESSFUL PATTERN

If the MIL stays lit, the throttle valve fully closed position is not reset, repeat the reset procedure from step 1.

8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

9. Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[1]

INJECTOR
REMOVAL
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
[3] [2] [4] [3] [5]
connect fitting from the injector side (page 7-4).
Remove the battery box (page 2-31).
Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].
Remove the clip [2] from the fuel rail.
Remove the bolts [3], collars [4] and injector assembly
[5].

[4] [1]

Remove the retainers [1] from the injector/fuel rail.

[1]

7-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the injectors [1] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Remove the O-ring [1], cushion rubber [2] and seal ring
[2] [1]
[3] from the injector [4].
Check the removed parts for wear or damage and
replace them if necessary.

[3] [4]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and a new seal ring
[3] [4] [1]
[2].
Install the cushion rubber [3] until it is fully seated.

Align the cushion rubber cut out with the injector

connector.
Install the seal ring to the injector [4], being careful not
to damage them.
Install the O-ring to the injector.

[2] Align

Install the injectors [1] to the fuel rail [2], being careful
[1] [2]
not to damage the O-ring.

Align the injector body with the fuel rail tab [3] as
shown.

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-21
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Install the retainers [1] to the injector/fuel rail.
[1]

Install the injector assembly [1], bolts [2] and collars [3].
[2] [5] [3] [2] [1]
Tighten the fuel rail mounting bolts securely.
Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [4] while
aligning their grooves with the fuel rail tabs.
Install the clip [5] to the fuel rail.
Install the battery box (page 2-31).
Connect the quick connect fitting to the injector side
(page 7-5).

[3] [4]

IACV
REMOVAL/INSPECTION
Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).
[1] [2]
The IACV is installed on the throttle body and is
operated by the step motor. When the ignition switch is
turned ON and engine stop switch " ", the IACV
operates for a few seconds.
Check the step motor operating (beep) sound with the
ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " ".
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Remove the IACV setting plate torx screws [2] and
setting plate [3].
Remove the IACV [4] and O-ring [5].
[5] [4] [3]

Check the IACV [1] for wear or damage.

[1]
The IACV operation can be checked visually as follows:
1. Connect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ",
check the IACV operation.
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector.

[2]

7-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Turn the slide valve [1] clockwise until lightly seated on
[1]
IACV.

Install a new O-ring [1] to the IACV [2].

Align [5] [1]
Install the IACV by aligning its groove with the slide
valve housing pin.
Install the setting plate [3] while aligning its cut-out with [3]
the tab on the IACV.
Install and tighten the IACV setting plate torx screws [4]
securely.
Connect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [5].
Install the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).

[2] [4] Align

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-23
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

8. COOLING SYSTEM

SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN···························8-2 THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT

HOUSING ······················································ 8-7
8
SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························8-3
RADIATOR ···················································· 8-9
TROUBLESHOOTING···································8-4
WATER PUMP ············································ 8-12
SYSTEM TESTING········································8-5
RADIATOR RESERVE TANK····················· 8-14
COOLANT REPLACEMENT ·························8-6
FAN CONT. RELAY ···································· 8-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-1
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN
COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR RADIATOR RESERVE TANK

THERMOSTAT

WATER PUMP

8-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can allow the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Using coolant with silicate inhibitors may cause premature wear of water pump seals or blockage of radiator passages. Using tap
water may cause engine damage.
• Add coolant at the reserve tank. Do not remove the radiator cap except to refill or drain the system.
• All cooling system services can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
• Avoid spilling coolant on painted surfaces.
• After servicing the system, check for leaks with a cooling system tester.
• Refer to the ECT sensor inspection (page 22-18).

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant capacity Radiator and engine 1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
At draining 1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
Reserve tank 0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)
Radiator cap relief pressure 108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
Thermostat Begin to open 80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
Fully open 95°C (203°F)
Valve lift 8 mm (0.3 in) minimum
Recommended antifreeze High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing silicate-free
corrosion inhibitors
Standard coolant concentration 1:1 (mixture with distilled water)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Water hose band screw 6 – – See page 8-9
See page 8-10
See page 8-14
Fan motor shroud mounting bolt 3 6 8.4 (0.9, 6.2)
Fan motor mounting screw 3 4 2.7 (0.3, 2.0)
Cooling fan mounting nut 1 3 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply locking agent to the threads.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-3
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine temperature too high
• Faulty high coolant temperature indicator or ECT sensor
• Thermostat stuck closed
• Faulty radiator cap
• Insufficient coolant
• Passage blocked in radiator, hoses or water jacket
• Air in system
• Faulty cooling fan motor
• Faulty FAN CONT. RELAY
• Faulty water pump
Engine temperature too low
• Faulty high coolant temperature indicator or ECT sensor
• Thermostat stuck open
• Faulty FAN CONT. RELAY
Coolant leak
• Faulty water pump mechanical seal
• Deteriorated O-rings
• Faulty radiator cap
• Damaged or deteriorated cylinder head gasket
• Loose hose connection or clamp
• Damaged or deteriorated hose
• Damaged radiator

8-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
SYSTEM TESTING
COOLANT (HYDROMETER TEST)
Remove the screw [1] and radiator cap [2].
[2]

[1]

Test the coolant gravity using a hydrometer (see below

for "Coolant gravity chart").
For maximum corrosion protection, a 1:1 solution of
ethylene glycol and distilled water is recommended
(page 8-6).
Look for contamination and replace the coolant if
necessary.

COOLANT GRAVITY CHART

Coolant temperature °C (°F)
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
(32) (41) (50) (59) (68) (77) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
5 1.009 1.009 1.008 1.008 1.007 1.006 1.005 1.003 1.001 0.999 0.997
10 1.018 1.017 1.017 1.016 1.015 1.014 1.013 1.011 1.009 1.007 1.005
15 1.028 1.027 1.026 1.025 1.024 1.022 1.020 1.018 1.016 1.014 1.012
20 1.036 1.035 1.034 1.033 1.031 1.029 1.027 1.025 1.023 1.021 1.019
Coolant ratio%

25 1.045 1.044 1.043 1.042 1.040 1.038 1.036 1.034 1.031 1.028 1.025
30 1.053 1.052 1.051 1.049 1.047 1.045 1.043 1.041 1.038 1.035 1.032
35 1.063 1.062 1.060 1.058 1.056 1.054 1.052 1.049 1.046 1.043 1.040
40 1.072 1.070 1.068 1.066 1.064 1.062 1.059 1.056 1.053 1.050 1.047
45 1.080 1.078 1.076 1.074 1.072 1.069 1.066 1.063 1.060 1.057 1.054
50 1.086 1.084 1.082 1.080 1.077 1.074 1.071 1.068 1.065 1.062 1.059
55 1.095 1.093 1.091 1.088 1.085 1.082 1.079 1.076 1.073 1.070 1.067
60 1.100 1.098 1.095 1.092 1.089 1.086 1.083 1.080 1.077 1.074 1.071

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-5
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR CAP/SYSTEM PRESSURE
INSPECTION
Remove the radiator cap (page 8-5).
Wet the sealing surfaces of the cap, then install the cap
onto the tester [1].
Pressure test the radiator cap.
Replace the radiator cap if it does not hold pressure, or
if relief pressure is too high or too low.
It must hold specified pressure for at least 6 seconds.
RADIATOR CAP RELIEF PRESSURE:
108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
Install the tester to the radiator.
Pressure the radiator, engine and hoses, and check for
leaks. [1]

Excessive pressure can damage the cooling system

components. Do not exceed 137 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2, 20
psi).
Repair or replace components if the system will not hold
specified pressure for at least 6 seconds.

COOLANT REPLACEMENT
PREPARATION
• The effectiveness of coolant [1] decreases with the
accumulation of rust or if there is a change in the
mixing proportion during usage. Therefore, for best
performance change the coolant regularly as [3]
specified in the maintenance schedule.
• Mix only distilled, low mineral water [2] with the [2]
antifreeze [3].
RECOMMENDED ANTIFREEZE:
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing
silicate-free corrosion inhibitors

RECOMMENDED MIXTURE:
1:1 (mixture with distilled water)
[1]

REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING

When filling the system or reserve tank with coolant or

checking the coolant level, place the motorcycle in an
upright position on a flat, level surface.
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[2]
Remove the screw [1] and radiator cap [2].

[1]

8-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove the drain bolt [1], sealing washer [2] and drain
the coolant.
Reinstall the drain bolts with a new sealing washer.
Tighten the drain bolt securely.
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Empty the coolant and rinse the inside of the reserve
tank with water.
Install the reserve tank (page 8-14).

[1]/[2]

Fill the system with the recommended coolant through

[1] [2]
the filler opening up to filler neck [1].
Remove the radiator reserve tank cap [2] and fill the
reserve tank to the upper level line.
Bleed air from the system as follows:
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
Start the engine and let it idle for 2 – 3 minutes.
2. Snap the throttle 3 or 4 times to bleed air from the
system.
3. Stop the engine and add coolant up to the filler neck
if necessary.
Install the radiator cap.
4. Check the level of coolant in the reserve tank and fill
to the upper level if it is low.
After installation, check that there are no coolant leaks.
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
[1] [3]
Remove the battery box (page 2-31).
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Loosen the water hose band screw [2] and disconnect
the radiator upper water hose [3].

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-7
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
[2] Align [3]
the water bypass hose [2].
Remove the bolts [3], stay [4] and thermostat housing
[5].

[1] [5] [4]

Remove the O-ring [1].

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and thermostat housing cover [2].

[2] [1]

Remove the thermostat [1] from the housing.

Align

[1]

8-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Align the thermostat air bleed hole with the rib side
bolt hole.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the
thermostat housing tab.
• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-
25).
0 – 1 mm
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6). (0 – 0.04 in)

INSPECTION
Visually inspect the thermostat [1] for damage.
[1] [2]
Check for damage of the seal ring [2].
Wear insulated gloves and adequate eye protection.
Keep flammable materials away from the electric
heating element.

Do not let the Heat the water with an electric heating element to
thermostat or operating temperature for 5 minutes.
thermometer [1]
Suspend the thermostat [2] in heated water to check its
touch the pan, or
operation.
you will get false
reading. Replace the thermostat if the valve stays open at room
temperature, or if it responds at temperatures other
than those specified.
[1]
THERMOSTAT BEGIN TO OPEN:
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)

VALVE LIFT:
8 mm (0.3 in) minimum at 95°C (203°F)
[2]

RADIATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[1] [4]
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the radiator lower water hose [2] and radiator upper
water hose [3].
Disconnect the siphon hose [4].

[2] [3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-9
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].
[1] [2]
Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3] SLITS [1] Align

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air

[1] [3]
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator [4].
Disconnect the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector and
remove the radiator.

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

[4] [2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified

range as shown.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-
25).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).
0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

8-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the radiator as following the
illustration.

RADIATOR

1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

COOLING FAN 2.7 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.0 lbf·ft)
FAN MOTOR
8.4 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.2 lbf·ft)
SHROUD

• Align the cooling fan and fan motor shaft flat

surfaces.
• Apply locking agent to the cooling fan mounting nut
threads.

TORQUE:
Fan motor shroud mounting bolt:
8.4 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.2 lbf·ft)
Fan motor mounting screw:
2.7 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.0 lbf·ft)
Cooling fan mounting nut:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-11
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
WATER PUMP
MECHANICAL SEAL INSPECTION
Check the bleed hole [1] of the water pump for signs of
coolant leakage.
• A small amount of coolant weeping from the bleed
hole is normal.
• Make sure that there are no continuous coolant
leakage from the bleed hole while operating the
engine.
Replace the water pump as an assembly if necessary.

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[1] [3] Align [2]
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the radiator lower water hose [2] and water bypass
hose [3].

[1]

Remove the following:

[4] [1]
– 6 x 50 mm bolt [1]
– 6 x 32 mm bolt [2]
Loosen the 6 x 32 mm bolt [3] and 6 x 35 mm bolts [4].

[2] [3]

8-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove and slide the water pump assembly.
[1]
Remove the 6 x 35 mm bolts [1].
Reinstall the water pump assembly.
Remove the 6 x 32 mm bolt [2] and sealing washer [3].

[2]/[3]

Remove the following:

[3]
– Water pump cover [1]
– Gasket [2]
– Plate [3]

[2] [1]

Remove the gasket [1] and dowel pins [2] from the
[1]
water pump body.

[2]

Remove the water pump body [1] and O-rings [2] from
Align [2]
the cylinder head.

Do not disassemble the water pump body.

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-13
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-rings, gaskets and sealing washer

with new ones.
• Apply engine oil to the large O-ring.
• Align the water pump slit with camshaft tab.
• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the
water pump tab.
• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).
0 – 1 mm
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6). (0 – 0.04 in)

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

When engine removed, remove the water pump

[2] [1]
assembly.
Remove the following:
– 6 x 32 mm bolts [1] [3]
– Sealing washer [2]
– Water pump cover [3]
– Gasket [4]
– Plate [5]
– Gasket [6]
– Dowel pins [7]
– Water pump body [8]
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Do not disassemble the water pump body.

• Replace the gasket and sealing washer with new
[4]
ones

[5]

[6]

[7] [8]

RADIATOR RESERVE TANK

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[3] [4]
Release the O2 sensor wire [1] from the radiator reserve
tank [2].
Release the reserve tank overflow hose [3].
Remove the bolt [4] and radiator reserve tank.

Align [2] [1]

8-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Disconnect the siphon hose [1] and drain the coolant
from the reserve tank.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Align the radiator reserve tank tab with stay hole.

• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).
Fill the radiator reserve tank with the recommended
coolant (page 3-15).

[1]

FAN CONT. RELAY

INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the FAN
CONT. RELAY [1].

[1]

Connect an ohmmeter to the FAN CONT. RELAY [1]

[1]
connector terminals.
Connect a 12 V battery to the FAN CONT. RELAY
connector terminals as shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the FAN CONT. RELAY.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-15
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

9. LUBRICATION SYSTEM

LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM ············9-2 OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ····················· 9-6

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························9-4 OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD) ···························· 9-8

9
TROUBLESHOOTING···································9-5 OIL STRAINER ··········································· 9-11

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION ·····················9-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-1
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

ROCKER ARM SHAFT

CAMSHAFT

PISTON
EOP SWITCH

OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE

PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
CRANKSHAFT

OIL PUMP

OIL STRAINER

MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT

9-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

ROCKER ARM SHAFT

CAMSHAFT
EOP SWITCH

OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE

PISTON
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVES

EOP SENSOR

CRANKSHAFT

CLUTCH
OIL PUMP

ENGINE
OIL PUMP

OIL STRAINER

MAINSHAFT

COUNTERSHAFT
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-3
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Used engine oil may cause skin cancer if repeatedly left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods. Although this is unlikely
unless you handle used oil on a daily basis, it is still advisable to thoroughly wash your hands with soap and water as soon as
possible after handling used oil.

• This section covers service of the oil pump and oil strainer.
• The oil pump and oil strainer can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
• The service procedures in this section must be performed with the engine oil drained.
• When removing and installing the oil pump, use care not to allow dust or dirt to enter the engine.
• If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the specified service limits, replace the oil pump as an assembly.
• After the oil pump has been installed, check that there are no oil leaks and that oil pressure is correct.

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Engine oil NC700X/XA/S/SA After draining 3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt) –
capacity After draining/
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) –
filter change
After
3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt) –
disassembly
NC700XD/SD After draining 3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt) –
After draining/
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) –
filter change
After
4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt) –
disassembly
Recommended engine oil Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an
equivalent
API service classification: SG or higher
(except oils labeled as energy conserving –
on the circular API service label)
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
JASO T 903 standard: MA
Oil pressure at engine oil filter 470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi)
–
at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/(80°C/176°F)
Oil pump rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008)
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.35 (0.014)
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.12 (0.005)
Engine oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008)
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.35 (0.014)
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.12 (0.005)
Clutch oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD) Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) –
Body clearance 0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008) –
Side clearance 0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004) –

TORQUE VALUE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Engine oil filter cartridge 1 20 26 (2.7, 19) Apply engine oil to the threads.

9-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Oil level too low
• Oil consumption
• External oil leak
• Worn piston rings
• Improperly installed piston rings
• Worn cylinders
• Worn valve stem seals
• Worn valve guide
Low oil pressure
• Oil level low
• Clogged oil strainer
• Faulty oil pump
• Internal oil leak
• Incorrect oil being used
No oil pressure
• Oil level too low
• Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak
High oil pressure
• Oil pressure relief valve stuck closed
• Clogged oil filter, oil gallery or metering orifice
• Incorrect oil being used
Oil contamination
• Oil or filter not changed often enough
• Worn piston rings
Oil emulsification
• Blown cylinder head gasket
• Leaky coolant passage
• Entry of water

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-5
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION
Remove the following:
[3] [1]
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Engine oil filter cartridge (page 3-13)
Apply engine oil to the O-ring and install the oil pressure
attachment [1] onto the oil filter boss.
TOOL:
Oil pressure gauge attachment 070MJ-0010101
Apply engine oil to the O-ring and install the engine oil
filter cartridge [2] onto the oil pressure attachment. [2]
TOOL:
Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70101
[4]
TORQUE: 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
Connect the oil pressure gauge [3] and attachment [4]
to the oil pressure gauge attachment.
TOOLS:
Oil pressure gauge set 07506-3000001 or
equivalent
commercially
available
Oil pressure gauge attachment 07406-0030000 or
equivalent
commercially
available
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).
Warm the engine to normal operating temperature
(approximately 80°C/176°F) and increase the engine
speed to 6,000 min-1 (rpm) and read the oil pressure.
STANDARD:
470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi) at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/
(80°C/176°F)
Stop the engine and remove the tools.
Install the following:
– Engine oil filter cartridge (page 3-13)
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)

OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump [2].

[1] [2]

9-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Remove the O-rings [1] and dowel pins [2].
Align
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-rings with a new one.

• Align the oil pump shaft tab with the balancer shaft
slit.

[1] [2]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1], oil pump cover [2] and dowel pins
[9]
[3].
Remove the thrust washer [4], oil pump shaft [5], drive [3]
pin [6], outer rotor [7] and inner rotor [8] from the oil
pump body [9]. [7]
[8]
Clean all disassembled parts thoroughly.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. [5]
[4]
Dip all parts in clean engine oil. [2]

[6]

[1]

INSPECTION

If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the service

limit, replace the oil pump as an assembly.
Temporarily install the outer and inner rotors into the oil
TIP CLEARANCE:
pump body.
Temporarily install the drive pin and oil pump shaft.
Measure the rotor tip clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-7
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Measure the pump body clearance.
BODY CLEARANCE:
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.35 mm (0.014 in)

Measure the side clearance using a straight edge and

SIDE CLEARANCE:
feeler gauge.

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.12 mm (0.005 in)

OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump [2].

[1] [2]

Remove the O-rings [1] and dowel pins [2].

Align
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-rings with new ones.

• Align the oil pump shaft end with the balancer shaft
groove.

[2]

[1]

9-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump cover [2].
[1]

[2]

Remove the clutch oil pump inner rotor [1] and outer
[1] [2]
rotor [2].

Remove the drive pin [1], oil pump plate [2] and dowel
[3]
pins [3].

[2] [1]

Remove the oil pump shaft [1], drive pin [2], engine oil
[1] [2]
pump inner rotor [3] and outer rotor [4].

[4] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-9
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
INSPECTION
Engine oil pump: Temporarily install the inner rotor,
TIP CLEARANCE:
outer rotor, drive pin and oil pump shaft into the oil
pump body.
Clutch oil pump: Temporarily install the inner rotor,
outer rotor, drive pin and oil pump shaft into the oil
pump cover.
Measure the rotor tip clearance.
Engine oil pump
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)

Measure the pump body clearance.

BODY CLEARANCE:
Engine oil pump
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.35 mm (0.014 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD: 0.15 – 0.21 mm (0.006 – 0.008 in)

Measure the side clearance using a straight edge and

SIDE CLEARANCE:
feeler gauge.

Engine oil pump

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD: 0.04 – 0.09 mm (0.002 – 0.004 in)

9-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Dip all parts in clean engine oil.

CLUTCH OIL PUMP OIL PUMP PLATE

INNER ROTOR
DRIVE PIN
CLUTCH OIL PUMP
OUTER ROTOR

DOWEL PIN

DRIVE PIN

OIL PUMP BODY

ENGINE OIL PUMP
OUTER ROTOR
DOWEL PIN
ENGINE OIL PUMP
OIL PUMP COVER
INNER ROTOR
OIL PUMP SHAFT

OIL STRAINER
REMOVAL
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
[2]
Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
Loosen the bolts [1] in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3
steps, and remove the bolts and oil pan [2].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-11
 dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Remove the oil strainer [1] and seal ring [2].
[2]
Clean the oil strainer screen and check for damage,
replace it if necessary.

[1]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to a new seal ring [1] and install it onto
[1] Align
the oil strainer [2].
Install the oil strainer into the crankcase while aligning
the oil strainer boss with the crankcase groove.

[2]

Clean the oil pan mating surface thoroughly.

Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the oil pan mating surface as shown.

Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.

Install the oil pan [1] and bolts [2].

[1]
Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Install the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[2]

9-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

10. CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························10-2 ROCKER ARM ············································ 10-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························10-3 CAM CHAIN TENSIONER ························ 10-11

TROUBLESHOOTING·································10-4 CAMSHAFT··············································· 10-13

10
CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST·············10-5 CYLINDER HEAD ····································· 10-16

CYLINDER HEAD COVER··························10-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-1
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
COMPONENT LOCATION
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)

4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

10-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the cylinder head, valves, camshaft and rocker arm.
• The rocker arm services can be done with the engine installed in the frame. The cylinder head, valves and camshaft service
requires engine removal.
• When disassembling, mark and store the disassembled parts to ensure that they are reinstalled in their original locations.
• Clean all disassembled parts with cleaning solvent and dry them by blowing them off with compressed air before inspection.
• Camshaft lubricating oil is fed through oil passages in the cylinder head. Clean the oil passages before assembling cylinder
head.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the cylinder head cover and cylinder head.

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Cylinder compression at 470 min-1(rpm) 1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi) –
Valve clearance IN 0.17 ± 0.02 (0.007 ± 0.001) –
EX 0.28 ± 0.02 (0.011 ± 0.001) –
Rocker arm, Rocker arm I.D. 20.012 – 20.030 (0.7879 – 0.7886) 20.041 (0.7890)
rocker arm Rocker arm shaft O.D. 19.972 – 19.993 (0.7863 – 0.7871) 19.961 (0.7859)
shaft Rocker arm-to-shaft clearance 0.019 – 0.058 (0.0007 – 0.0023) 0.08 (0.003)
Cam chain tensioner wedge B length – 6.0 (0.24)
Camshaft Cam lobe height 34.7697
IN 34.7897 – 35.0297 (1.36967 – 1.37912)
(1.36888)
34.9027
EX 34.9227 – 35.1627 (1.37491 – 1.38436)
(1.37412)
Runout – 0.04 (0.002)
Camshaft journal O.D. 41.935 – 41.950 (1.6510 – 1.6516) 41.927 (1.6507)
Valve, valve Valve stem O.D. IN 4.975 – 4.990 (0.1959 – 0.1965) 4.965 (0.1955)
guide EX 4.965 – 4.980 (0.1955 – 0.1961) 4.955 (0.1951)
Valve guide I.D. IN/EX 5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973) 5.04 (0.198)
Stem-to-guide IN 0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.075 (0.0030)
clearance EX 0.020 – 0.047 (0.0008 – 0.0019) 0.085 (0.0033)
Valve guide IN 17.7 – 18.0 (0.70 – 0.71) –
projection above
EX 19.6 – 19.9 (0.77 – 0.78) –
cylinder head
Valve seat width IN 0.90 – 1.10 (0.035 – 0.043) 1.5 (0.06)
EX 1.30 – 1.50 (0.051 – 0.059) 1.9 (0.07)
Valve spring free length 49.07 (1.932) 48.1 (1.89)
Cylinder head warpage – 0.10 (0.004)
Cylinder head camshaft journal I.D. 41.995 – 42.019 (1.6533 – 1.6543) 42.027 (1.6546)
Cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance 0.045 – 0.084 (0.0018 – 0.0033) 0.10 (0.004)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Cylinder head cover socket bolt 3 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Breather plate mounting bolt 8 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Rocker arm shaft bolt 3 8 29 (3.0, 21) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Camshaft maintenance cap 1 36 4.0 (0.4, 3.0) See page 10-11
See page 10-28
Cam chain tensioner bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Cam sprocket bolt 1 10 56 (5.7, 41) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Water hose band screw 6 – – See page 10-16
Insulator band screw 1 5 – See page 10-25
Cylinder head special bolt 6 9 44 (4.5, 32) Apply molybdenum oil solution to the
threads and seating surface.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-3
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Engine top-end problems usually affect engine performance. These problems can be diagnosed by a compression test or by
tracing engine noises to the top-end with a sounding rod stethoscope.
• If the performance is poor at low speeds, check for white smoke in the crankcase breather hose. If the hose is smoky, check for
a seized piston ring (page 15-16).
Compression too low, hard starting or poor performance at low speed
• Valves:
– Incorrect valve clearance adjustment
– Burned or bent valve
– Incorrect valve timing
– Broken valve spring
– Uneven valve seating
• Cylinder head:
– Leaking or damaged cylinder head gasket
– Warped or cracked cylinder head
– Loose spark plug
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Compression too high, overheating or knocking
• Excessive carbon build-up on piston crown or on combustion chamber
Excessive smoke
• Cylinder head:
– Worn valve stem or valve guide
– Damaged stem seal
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Excessive noise
• Cylinder head:
– Incorrect valve clearance adjustment
– Sticking valve or broken valve spring
– Damaged or worn camshaft
– Loose or worn cam chain
– Worn or damaged cam chain
– Worn or damaged cam chain tensioner
– Worn cam sprocket teeth
– Worn rocker arm and/or shaft
– Worn rocker arm and valve stem end
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Rough idle
• Low cylinder compression

10-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
Warm the engine to normal operating temperature.
Stop the engine and remove the all spark plug caps and
spark plugs (page 3-8).
Disconnect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Install a compression gauge [1] into the spark plug hole.

[1]
Open the throttle all the way and crank the engine with
the starter motor until the gauge reading stops rising.
The maximum reading is usually reached within 4 – 7
seconds.
STANDARD:
1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi) at 470 min-1 (rpm)
Low compression can be caused by:
– Blown cylinder head gasket
– Improper valve clearance adjustment
– Valve leakage
– Worn piston ring or cylinder
High compression can be caused by:
– Carbon deposits in combustion chamber or on
piston head

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].
[1] [2]
Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3] SLITS [1] Align

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-5
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air
[1] [3]
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

[2]

Lower the radiator and disconnect the crankcase

[1]
breather hose [1].

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Remove the cylinder head cover socket bolts [1] and

[1]/[2]
mounting rubbers [2].

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Remove the cylinder head cover [1] from the cylinder

[1]
head.

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Remove the cylinder head cover packing [2] from the
cylinder head cover.

[2]

10-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[2]

• Replace the cylinder head cover packing with a new

one.
• Check the mounting rubbers [1] are in good
condition, replace them if necessary.
• Install the mounting rubbers with their "UP" mark [2]
facing up.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-
25).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.
[1]
TORQUE:
Cylinder head cover socket bolts:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the breather plate mounting bolts [1].
[1]

Remove the breather plate [1] and gasket [2].

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Replace the breather plate gasket with a new one.

• Apply locking agent to the breather plate mounting
bolt threads (page 10-3).

TORQUE:
Breather plate mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-7
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
ROCKER ARM
REMOVAL
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).
[1]
Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring
[2].

[2]

Remove the crankshaft hole cap (page 3-10).

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the " "
mark [1] on the cam sprocket with the lower cylinder
head index line [2].

[1] [2]

Remove the rocker arm shaft bolts [1].

[1]

Remove the rocker arm assembly [1].

[2]

Be careful not to let the dowel pin [2] fall into the
crankcase.
Remove the dowel pin from the rocker arm shaft.

[1]

10-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the washers [1] and rocker arms from the
rocker arm shaft [2].
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the rocker arm sliding
surface and rocker arm shaft outer surface.
Install the washers and rocker arms to the rocker arm
shaft.

Rocker arm identification tips

• "PWC-A" mark: exhaust rocker arm A [3]
• White paint mark: Intake rocker arm S [4]
• No mark: Intake rocker arm P [5]
• "PWC-B" mark: exhaust rocker arm B [6]

[3]
[4]

[5]

[3]
[6]
[4]

[5]
[1]

[6]

[1]

[2]

INSPECTION
Check the sliding surface of each rocker arm for wear
or damage.
Check the oil hole for clog of each rocker arm.
Measure the rocker arm I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 20.041 mm (0.7890 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-9
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Check the sliding surface of the rocker arm shaft for
wear or damage.
Check the oil hole for clog of the rocker arm shaft.
Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. at the rocker arm
sliding area.
SERVICE LIMIT: 19.961 mm (0.7859 in)
Calculate the rocker arm-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

INSTALLATION
Make sure the " " mark [1] on the cam sprocket facing
the lower cylinder head index line [2].
If it does not align, turn the crankshaft counterclockwise
and align it.

[1] [2]

Install the dowel pin [1] to the rocker arm shaft.

[4] [1] [2]
Install the rocker arm assembly [2].

• Align boss [3] and dowel pin with the cylinder head
holes [4].
• Make sure the washers [5] are installed in correct
position.
• Be careful not to let the dowel pin fall into the
crankcase.

[5] [3]

Apply engine oil to the rocker arm shaft bolts threads

and seating surface.
Install and tighten rocker arm shaft bolts [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

[1]

10-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
[2]
camshaft maintenance cap [2].
Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler

[1]
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.
Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.

One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.

Install the following:
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Crankshaft hole cap (page 3-12)
[2]

CAM CHAIN TENSIONER

CAM CHAIN INSPECTION
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).
[1]
Measure the cam chain tensioner wedge B [1] length.
SERVICE LIMIT: 6.0 mm (0.24 in) 6.0 mm (0.24 in)
Replace the cam chain with a new one if the projection
exceeds the service limit.
For the cam chain replacement, remove the following:
– Cam sprocket (page 10-13)
– Primary drive gear
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-108)

RELEASING CAM CHAIN TENSION

Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).
[2]
Install an O.D. 2 mm pin [1] into the cam chain
tensioner wedge A hole while pulling the wedge A [2]
straight up and pushing down the wedge B [3].

Be careful not to let the 2 mm pin fall into the

crankcase.

[1] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-11
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the thermostat housing (page 8-7).
[3]
Release the cam chain tension (page 10-11).
Remove the cam chain tensioner bolts [1] and sealing
washers [2].
Remove the cam chain tensioner [3].

[1]/[2]

Install the cam chain tensioner [1] while aligning

tensioner end with the groove in the crankcase.
Install new sealing washers, cam chain tensioner bolts
and tighten the cam chain tensioner bolts to the
specified torque. Align
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Apply the cam chain tension (page 10-12).
Install the thermostat housing (page 8-7).

[1]

INSPECTION
Remove the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).
[2]
Check the cam chain tensioner [1] for wear or damage.
Replace the cam chain tensioner if necessary.
Remove the cam chain guide (page 10-16).
Check the cam chain guide [2] for wear or damage.
Replace the cam chain guide if necessary.

[1]

APPLYING CAM CHAIN TENSION

Remove the O.D. 2 mm pin [1] from the cam chain
[2]
tensioner wedge A hole while pulling the wedge A [2]
straight up and pushing down the wedge B [3].

Be careful not to let the 2 mm pin fall into the

crankcase.
Install the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[1] [3]

10-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
CAMSHAFT
REMOVAL
Remove the engine.
[1]
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-9)
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the water bypass hose.
Remove the bolts [2], water pump [3] and O-rings [4].

[3] [2] [4]

Remove the rocker arm (page 10-8).

[2]
Release the cam chain tension (page 10-11).
Loosen the cam sprocket bolt [1] by holding the
flywheel mounting bolt and remove it.
Remove the cam sprocket bolt and cam sprocket [2] by
removing the cam chain [3] from the cam sprocket.

Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it

from falling into the crankcase.

[1] [3]

Remove the camshaft [1].

[1]

INSPECTION
CAMSHAFT
Check the cam and journal surfaces of the camshaft for
scoring, scratches or evidence of insufficient
lubrication.
Support both sides of the camshaft (at journals) with V-
blocks and check the camshaft runout with a dial
gauge.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.04 mm (0.002 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-13
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Using a micrometer, measure each cam lobe height.

SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 34.7697 mm (1.36888 in)
EX: 34.9027 mm (1.37412 in)

Measure the camshaft journals O.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 41.927 mm (1.6507 in)

CYLINDER HEAD
Measure the cylinder head camshaft journal I.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 42.027 mm (1.6546 in)

Calculate the cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

CAM SPROCKET
Check the cam sprocket teeth for wear or damage.

10-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
INSTALLATION
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the camshaft lobes,
journals and thrust surfaces.
Install the camshaft [1]. [1]

Align the "1T" mark on the flywheel with the index notch
[2] [1]
on the alternator cover (page 3-10).
Align the "1" mark [1] on the cam sprocket with the
upper index line [2] on the cylinder head and install the
cam chain onto the cam sprocket.
Install the cam sprocket onto the camshaft by aligning
the groove with the pin.

Align

Apply engine oil to the cam sprocket bolt threads and

[1]
seating surface.
Install the cam sprocket bolt [1].
Hold the flywheel mounting bolt and tighten the cam
sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
Apply the cam chain tension (page 10-12).
Install the rocker arm (page 10-10).

Apply engine oil to a new large O-ring [1] and install it to

[1] Align
the water pump [2].
Install a new O-ring [3] to the water pump.
[3]
Install the water pump to the cylinder head.

Align the water pump shaft groove with camshaft tab.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-15
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install and tighten the bolts [1].
[2] Align
Connect the water bypass hose [2].

• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the

water pump tab.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).

[1]

Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified

range as shown.
Install the engine.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-21)

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
[1]
– Engine
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-9)
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Right crankcase cover
– NC700X/XA/S/SA(page 11-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-97)
Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring
[2].

[2]

10-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the index lines
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]
[1] with the crankcase matting surface, while the "TOP"
mark [2] is facing down.

[2] Align

NC700XD/SD: [1]

[2] Align

Make sure the " " mark [1] on the cam sprocket facing
[3]
the lower cylinder head index line [2].
If the " " mark on the cam sprocket is facing the upper
cylinder head index line [3], turn the crankshaft
clockwise one full turn (360°) and realign the " " mark
with the lower cylinder head index line.

[1] [2]

Remove the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).

[1] [4]
Insert the gear holder [1] between the primary drive
gear and driven gear.
[3]
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 07724-0010100
Remove the cam sprocket bolt [2].
Remove the cam sprocket [3] by removing the cam
chain [4] from the cam sprocket.

Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it

from falling into the crankcase.
[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-17
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Remove the 6 mm bolts [1].

[1]

Remove the cylinder head special bolts [1].

[1] [2]

Loosen the cylinder head special bolts in a crisscross

pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Remove the cylinder head [2].

• Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it

from falling into the crankcase.
• Do not strike the cylinder too hard and do not
damage the mating surface with a screwdriver.

Remove the gasket [1], dowel pins [2] and cam chain
[1]
guide [3].

[3] [2]

Remove the partition plate [1].

[1]
Check the partition plate for deterioration or damage.

10-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the following:
[2]
– Cylinder head (page 10-16)
– Spark plug (page 3-8)
– Injector (page 7-20)
– Camshaft (page 10-13)
Loosen the insulator band screws [1] and remove the
insulator [2].

[1]

Remove the valve spring cotters using the special tool

as shown.

TOOL:
Valve spring compressor 07757-0010000

To prevent loss of tension, do not compress the valve

springs more than necessary to remove the cotters.

Remove the following:

[3] [5] [4] [2]
– Spring retainer [1]
– Valve spring [2]
– Valve [3]
– Stem seal [4]
– Valve spring seat [5] [1]

Mark all parts during disassembly so they can be

placed back in their original locations.

INSPECTION
CYLINDER HEAD
Remove carbon deposits from the combustion
chambers [1].

Avoid damaging the gasket surface.

Check the spark plug hole and valve areas for cracks.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-19
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Check the cylinder head for warpage with a straight
edge and feeler gauge.

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

VALVE SPRING
Measure the free length of the valve spring.

SERVICE LIMIT: 48.1 mm (1.89 in)

Replace the springs if they are shorter than the service
limits.

VALVE/VALVE GUIDE
Check that the valve moves smoothly in the guide.
Inspect each valve for bending, burning or abnormal
stem wear.
Measure and record each valve stem O.D.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 4.965 mm (0.1955 in)
EX: 4.955 mm (0.1951 in)

Ream the guides to remove any carbon deposits before

[1]
checking clearances.
Insert the reamer [1] from the combustion chamber side
of the cylinder head and always rotate the reamer
clockwise.
TOOL:
Valve guide reamer, 5.010 mm 07984-MA60001

10-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Measure and record each valve guide I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.04 mm (0.198 in)
Subtract each valve stem O.D. from the corresponding
guide I.D. to obtain the stem-to-guide clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
EX: 0.085 mm (0.0033 in)

Reface the valve If the stem-to-guide clearance is out of standard,

seats whenever the determine if a new guide with standard dimensions
valve guides are would bring the clearance within tolerance. If so,
replaced (page 10- replace any guides as necessary and ream to fit.
22). If the stem-to-guide clearance exceeds the service limit
with the new guides, replace the valves and guides.

VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT

Chill the replacement valve guides in the freezer
[1]
section of a refrigerator for about an hour.
Do not use a torch Heat the cylinder head to 100 – 150°C (212 – 302°F)
to heat the cylinder with a hot plate or oven.
head; it may cause To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
warping. heated cylinder head.
Support the cylinder head and drive out the valve
guides from combustion chamber side of the cylinder
head.
TOOL:
Valve guide driver [1] 07942-8920000

Drive in the valve guides to the specified depth from the

top of the cylinder head.
SPECIFIED DEPTH:
IN: 17.7 – 18.0 mm (0.70 – 0.71 in)
EX: 19.6 – 19.9 mm (0.77 – 0.78 in)

TOOL:
Valve guide driver [1] 07743-0020000
Let the cylinder head cool to room temperature.

[1]
Use cutting oil on Ream new valve guides after installation.
[1]
the reamer during
Insert the reamer [1] from the combustion chamber side
this operation.
of the cylinder head and always rotate the reamer
clockwise.
TOOL:
Valve guide reamer, 5.010 mm 07984-MA60001
Clean the cylinder head thoroughly to remove any
metal particles.
Reface the valve seat (page 10-22).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-21
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
VALVE SEAT INSPECTION/REFACING
Clean the intake and exhaust valves thoroughly to
[1]
remove carbon deposits.
Apply a light coating of Prussian Blue to the valve
seats.
Tap the valves and seats using a rubber hose or other
hand-lapping tool [1].

Remove the valve and inspect the valve seat face.

The valve seat contact should be within the specified
width and even all around the circumference.
STANDARD:
IN: 0.90 – 1.10 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)
EX: 1.30 – 1.50 mm (0.051 – 0.059 in)
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
EX: 1.9 mm (0.07 in)
If the seat width is not within specification, reface the
valve seat (page 10-23). SEAT WIDTH

Inspect the valve seat face for:

• Uneven seat width:
– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
• Damaged face:
– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
The valves cannot be ground.
If a valve face is burned or badly worn or if it contacts
the seat unevenly, replace the valve.
• Contact area (too high or too low)
– Reface the valve seat.

10-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
VALVE SEAT REFACING
Follow the refacing Valve seat cutters/grinders or equivalent valve seat
manufacturer's refacing equipment are recommended to correct worn
operating valve seats.
instructions.
If the contact area is too high on the valve, the seat
must be lowered using a 32° flat cutter. 45°
If the contact area is too low on the valve, the seat must
be raised using a 60° interior cutter.
Refinish the seat to specifications, using a 45° finish
60°
cutter. 32°
Reface the seat with Use a 45° cutter to remove any roughness or
a 45° cutter irregularities from the seat.
whenever a valve
guide is replaced.
TOOLS:
Seat cutter, 27.5 mm (45° IN) 07780-0010200
Seat cutter, 24 mm (45° EX) 07780-0010600
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm 07781-0010400
Use a 32° cutter to remove the top 1/4 of the existing
valve seat material.
TOOLS:
Flat cutter, 28 mm (32° IN) 07780-0012100
Flat cutter, 25 mm (32° EX) 07780-0012000
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm 07781-0010400
Use a 60° cutter to remove the bottom 1/4 of the old
seat.
TOOLS:
Interior cutter, 26 mm (60° IN) 07780-0014500
Interior cutter, 22 mm (60° EX) 07780-0014202
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm 07781-0010400
Using a 45° seat cutter, cut the seat to the proper width.
Make sure that all pitting and irregularities are removed.
Refinish if necessary.
After cutting the seat, apply lapping compound to the
valve face, and lap the valve using light pressure.

• Excessive lapping pressure may deform or damage

the seat.
• Change the angle of lapping tool [1] frequently to
prevent uneven seat wear.
• Do not allow lapping compound to enter the guides.
After lapping, wash all residual compound off the
cylinder head and valve.
Recheck the seat contact after lapping.
[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-23
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
ASSEMBLY

INSULATOR

COTTERS

RETAINER

VALVE SPRING

STEM SEAL

SPRING SEAT

VALVE GUIDE

INTAKE VALVE
EXHAUST VALVE

Install the valve spring seats [1].

[2]
Apply engine oil to new stem seals [2] inside and install
them.
[4]
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the valve stem sliding
surface and stem end.
Insert the valve [3] into the valve guide while turning it
slowly to avoid damage to the stem seal. [5]

Install the valve springs [4] with the tightly wound coils
facing the combustion chamber.
Install the valve spring retainer [5].

[3] [1]

[4]

COMBUSTION CHAMBER SIDE

10-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install the valve cotters using the special tool as shown.
TOOL:
Valve spring compressor 07757-0010000

• To prevent loss of tension, do not compress the

valve spring more than necessary.
• Grease the cotters to ease installation.

Tap the valve stems gently with plastic hammer and

shaft as shown to seat the cotters firmly.

Support the cylinder head above the work bench

surface to prevent possible valve damage.

Install the insulator [1] while aligning its slit with cylinder
[1]
head tab.
11 – 13 mm
Tighten the band screw [2] to the specified range. (0.4 – 0.5 in)
Install the following:
– Camshaft (page 10-15)
– Injector (page 7-21)
– Spark plug (page 3-8)
– Cylinder head (page 10-25)

[2] Align

INSTALLATION
Install the partition plate [1] to the No.1 cylinder intake
[2] [1]
side.

Install the partition plate with its tab [2] side facing
inside.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-25
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install the cam chain guide [1].
[1]

• Align the cam chain guide end with the groove in the
crankcase.
• Align the cam chain guide tabs with the grooves in
the crankcase.

Align

Align

Install the dowel pins [1] and new gasket [2].

[2]

[1]

Route the cam chain through the cylinder head and

[1]
install the cylinder head [1] onto the cylinder.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the cylinder head [2]
special bolts [2] threads and seating surface.
Install and tighten the cylinder head special bolts in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

Install and tighten the 6 mm bolts [1].

[1]

10-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the index lines
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]
[1] with the crankcase matting surface, while the "TOP"
mark [2] is facing down.

[2] Align

NC700XD/SD: [1]

[2] Align

Install the cam sprocket to the camshaft while installing

Align
cam chain [1] onto the cam sprocket.
[3]
• Install the cam sprocket with its "MGS" mark [2]
facing out.
• Align the cam sprocket slit with camshaft pin.
• Align the cam sprocket " " mark with cylinder head
lower index line.
Apply engine oil to the cam sprocket bolt threads and
seating surface.
Install the cam sprocket bolt [3].
Insert the gear holder [4] between the primary drive
gear and driven gear, then tighten the cam sprocket bolt Align
to the specified torque.
[1] [2]
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 07724-0010100

TORQUE: 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)

Install the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).

[3]

[4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-27
 dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
[2]
camshaft maintenance cap [2].
Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler

[1]
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.
Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.

One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.

Install the following:
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Right crankcase cover
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-5) [2]
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-103)
– Engine
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-21)

10-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

11. CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························11-2 CLUTCH ······················································ 11-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························11-3 PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR

ROTOR······················································ 11-15
TROUBLESHOOTING·································11-4
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE ····························· 11-16
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER ····················11-5 11
GEARSHIFT PEDAL ································· 11-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-1
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

COMPONENT LOCATION
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

11-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the clutch and gearshift linkage. All service can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
• Engine oil viscosity and level have an effect on clutch disengagement. Oil additives also effect clutch performance and are not
recommended. When the clutch does not disengage or the motorcycle creeps with the clutch lever pulled in, inspect the engine
oil level before servicing the clutch system.

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Clutch lever freeplay 10 – 20 (3/8 – 13/16) –
Clutch Spring free length 43.2 (1.70) 41.7 (1.64)
Disc thickness 2.62 – 2.78 (0.103 – 0.109) 2.3 (0.09)
Plate warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Clutch outer guide I.D. 21.991 – 22.016 (0.8658 – 0.8668) 22.03 (0.867)
O.D. 31.959 – 31.975 (1.2582 – 1.2589) 31.92 (1.257)
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide 21.967 – 21.980 (0.8648 – 0.8654) 21.95 (0.864)
Clutch outer guide-to-mainshaft clearance 0.011 – 0.049 (0.0004 – 0.0019) 0.08 (0.003)
Primary driven gear I.D. 32.000 – 32.025 (1.2598 – 1.2608) 32.09 (1.263)
Primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide clearance 0.025 – 0.066 (0.0010 – 0.0026) 0.10 (0.004)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Clutch center lock nut 1 18 128 (13.1, 94) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Lock nut; replace with a new one and
stake.
Clutch lifter plate bolt 4 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Primary drive gear mounting bolt 1 10 93 (9.5, 69) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Shift drum center socket bolt 1 8 23 (2.3, 17) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Gearshift pedal adjuster lock nut 2 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt 1 8 27 (2.8, 20)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-3
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch lever is too hard to pull in
• Damaged, kinked or dirty clutch cable
• Improperly routed clutch cable
• Damaged clutch lifter mechanism
• Faulty clutch lifter bearing
• Clutch lifter piece installed improperly
Clutch slips when accelerating
• Clutch lifter sticking
• Worn clutch disc
• Weak clutch springs
• No clutch lever freeplay
• Engine oil mixed with molybdenum or graphite additive
Clutch will not disengage or motorcycle creeps with clutch disengaged
• Excessive clutch lever freeplay
• Clutch plate warped
• Engine oil level too high, improper engine oil viscosity or additive used
• Loose clutch center lock nut
• Damaged clutch lifter mechanism
• Clutch lifter rod installed improperly
• Worn clutch outer slot and clutch center grooves
• Improper clutch operation
Hard to shift
• Misadjusted clutch cable
• Improper clutch operation
• Improper engine oil viscosity
• Damaged or bent shift fork
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Bent shift fork claw
• Loose shift drum stopper plate bolt
• Damaged shift drum stopper plate
• Damaged shift drum guide grooves
• Damaged or bent gearshift spindle
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn shift drum stopper arm
• Weak or broken shift drum stopper arm return spring
• Loose shift drum stopper plate bolt
• Damaged shift drum stopper plate
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Damaged or bent shift forks
• Worn gear engagement dogs or slots
Gearshift pedal will not return
• Weak or broken gearshift spindle return spring
• Damaged or bent gearshift spindle

11-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Right shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.

[1]

Release the reserve tank overflow hose [1] from the

[1]
stay [2].
Remove the bolt [3] and stay.

[2] [3]

Remove the bolts [1] and clutch cable guide [2], then
[4] [3] [2]
disconnect the clutch cable [3] from the clutch lifter arm
[4].

[1]

Loosen the right crankcase cover bolts [1] in a

crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts
and sealing washer [2].
Remove the right crankcase cover [3]. [1]/[2]

[3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-5
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Remove the dowel pins [1].
Clean off any sealant from the right crankcase cover
mating surfaces.

[1] [1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or

equivalent) to the right crankcase cover mating
surface as shown.
• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the CKP sensor wire grommet sealing
surface.
• Replace the sealing washer with a new one.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 1-
25).
Adjust the clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

CLUTCH LIFTER ARM REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION
Remove the clutch lifter rod A [1].
Remove the snap ring [2], clutch lifter arm [3] and return
spring [4] from the right crankcase cover.
Check the return spring for fatigue or damage.

[3]

[2] [4] [1]

Check the lifter arm spindle [1] for wear or damage.

[2]
Check the lifter arm oil seal [2] and needle bearings [3]
for wear or damage.

[3] [1]

11-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Install the clutch lifter arm [1], return spring [2] and snap
[4]
ring [3].

• Align the return spring hook [4] with right crankcase

cover.
• Align the return spring end [5] with clutch lifter arm
groove.
• Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the [1]
groove.
Apply engine oil to the clutch lifter rod A sliding surface.
Install the clutch lifter rod A [6]. [6]

[3] [5] [2]

CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).
[2] [4]
Remove the clutch lifter rod B [1].
Loosen the clutch lifter plate bolts [2] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts, lifter plate/
bearing [3] and clutch springs [4].

[1] [3]

Unstake the clutch center lock nut [1].

Be careful not to damage the mainshaft threads.

Unstake

[1]

Hold the clutch pressure plate with the special tool and
loosen the clutch center lock nut [1].
TOOL:
Clutch center holder [2] 07JMB-MN50302
Remove and discard the lock nut.

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-7
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Remove the lock washer [1] and thrust washer [2].

[2] [1]

Remove the clutch assembly [1].

[1]

Remove the following:

[1] [8] [2]/[3]
– Clutch center [1]
– Spring seat [2]
– Judder spring [3]
– Clutch disc B [4]
– Seven clutch plates [5]
– Six clutch discs C [6]
– Clutch disc A [7]
– Pressure plate [8]

[4] [7] [5]/[6]

Remove the thrust washer [1].

[1]

11-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Remove the clutch outer guide [1].
[1]

INSPECTION
CLUTCH LIFTER BEARING
Turn the inner race of the clutch lifter bearing [1] with
[1]
your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the pressure plate.
Replace the clutch lifter bearing if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the lifter plate.

CLUTCH SPRING
Replace the clutch Measure the clutch spring free length.
springs as a set.
SERVICE LIMIT: 41.7 mm (1.64 in)

CLUTCH CENTER
Check the grooves [1] of the clutch center for damage
or wear caused by the clutch plates.
Replace it if necessary.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-9
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

CLUTCH LIFTER ROD B
Check the clutch lifter rod B for damage or abnormal
wear.

CLUTCH DISC
Replace the clutch Replace the clutch discs if they show signs of scoring or
discs and plates as discoloration.
a set.
Measure the disc thickness of each disc.
SERVICE LIMIT: 2.3 mm (0.09 in)

CLUTCH PLATE
Replace the clutch Check the plates for discoloration.
discs and plates as
Check the plate warpage on a surface plate using a
a set.
feeler gauge.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)

JUDDER SPRING/SPRING SEAT

Check the judder spring and spring seat for
deformation, warpage or damage.

• A damaged or warped spring seat will cause the

judder spring to be pressed unevenly.
• A damaged judder spring also causes the weak
contact between the discs and plates or uneven
disc/plate contact.

11-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

CLUTCH OUTER/PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR/CLUTCH
OUTER GUIDE
Check the slots of the clutch outer for damage or wear
caused by the clutch discs.
Check the primary driven gear for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the I.D. of the primary driven gear.
SERVICE LIMIT: 32.09 mm (1.263 in)
Replace the clutch outer assembly if necessary.
Measure the O.D. and I.D. of the clutch outer guide.
SERVICE LIMITS:
O.D.: 31.92 mm (1.257 in)
I.D.: 22.03 mm (0.867 in)
Calculate the primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide
clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

MAINSHAFT
Measure the mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide
sliding surfaces.

SERVICE LIMIT: 21.95 mm (0.864 in)

Calculate the clutch outer guide-to-mainshaft
clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-11
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

INSTALLATION
CLUTCH OUTER GUIDE

CLUTCH OUTER

THRUST WASHER
PRESSURE PLATE

CLUTCH DISC A

CLUTCH DISC C

CLUTCH DISC B

JUDDER SPRING
SPRING SEAT
CLUTCH CENTER
CLUTCH PLATE THRUST WASHER
LOCK WASHER
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)
CLUTCH SPRING
CLUTCH LIFTER ROD B
LIFTER PLATE
CLUTCH LIFTER BEARING

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the clutch outer guide

[1]
sliding surface.
Install the clutch outer guide [1] to the mainshaft.

Install the thrust washer [1] to the clutch outer.

[1]

11-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Apply engine oil to the clutch discs entire surface.
Install the spring seat [1], judder spring [2] and clutch
disc B [3] to the clutch center [4].
Install the clutch discs C [5] and clutch plates [6]
alternately, starting with the clutch plate.
Install the clutch disc A [7] and pressure plate [8].

[6]

7° 30’
CLUTCH DISC A:

[8]

CLUTCH DISC B:
[7]

5.3 – 5.9 mm (0.21 – 0.23 in)

9°
CLUTCH DISC C:

[1] [2] [3] [5]

[4]

Install the clutch center assembly [1] to the clutch outer

[1]
[2].

• Align the clutch disc A/C tabs with clutch outer slits
[3].
• Align the clutch disc B tabs with clutch outer shallow
slots [4].

[3] [4] [2]

Install the clutch assembly [1] to the clutch outer guide.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-13
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Install the thrust washer [1].
[3]
Install the lock washer [2] with its "OUTSIDE" mark [3]
facing out.

[1] [2]

Apply engine oil to a new clutch center lock nut threads

[1]
and seating surface.
Install the clutch center lock nut [1] onto the mainshaft.
Hold the pressure plate with the special tool and tighten
the lock nut to the specified torque.
TOOL:
Clutch center holder [2] 07JMB-MN50302

TORQUE: 128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)

[2]

Stake the clutch center lock nut [1] into the mainshaft
groove.

Be careful not to damage the mainshaft threads.

Stake

[1]

Install the clutch springs [1], lifter plate/bearing [2] and

[3] [1]
clutch lifter plate bolts [3].
Tighten the clutch lifter plate bolts to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the clutch lifter rod B sliding surface.
Install the clutch lifter rod B [4].
Install the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

[4] [2]

11-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR
ROTOR
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).
[4] [3] [1]
Hold the primary drive gear [1] using a special tool and
remove the primary drive gear mounting bolt [2] and
washer [3].
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 [4] 07724-0010100
Remove the gear holder.
Remove the CKP sensor rotor [5] and primary drive
gear.

[2] [5]

INSPECTION
Check the primary drive gear [1] for wear or damage.
Check the CKP sensor rotor [2] for wear or damage.

[1] [2]

INSTALLATION
Install the primary drive gear [1] on the crankshaft.
[2]

• Align the primary drive gear wide groove with the

crankshaft wide tooth.
• Install the primary drive gear with its "OUT" mark [2]
facing out.
Align

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-15
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Install the CKP sensor rotor [1] on the crankshaft.
[1]

• Align the CKP sensor rotor wide groove with the

crankshaft wide tooth.
• Install the CKP sensor rotor with its "MGS" mark [2]
facing out.
Align

[2]

Apply engine oil to the primary drive gear mounting bolt

[2] [1]
threads and seating surface.
Install the washer [1] and primary drive gear mounting
bolt [2].
Hold the primary drive gear using a special tool and
tighten the primary drive gear mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 [3] 07724-0010100

TORQUE: 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

Remove the gear holder.
[3]
Install the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
[1]
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
– Right crankcase cover (page 11-5)
Clean the gearshift spindle [1].

Remove the gearshift spindle [1] and washer [2].

[2]

[1]

11-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Remove the following:
[5] [3] [4]
– Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt [1]
– Washers [2]
– Stopper arm [3]
– Return spring [4]
Remove the shift drum center socket bolt [5], shift drum
stopper plate [6] and dowel pin [7].

[6] [7] [1]/[2]

Remove the bolt [1] and setting plate [2].

[3]
Remove the gearshift spindle oil seal [3].

[2] [1]

INSPECTION
Check the gearshift spindle for bend, wear or damage.
Check the return springs for fatigue or damage.

INSTALLATION
Install the gearshift spindle oil seal [1] as shown.
0.4 – 1.6 mm
(0.02 – 0.06 in)
• Install the oil seal with its marked side facing out.
• Apply grease to the oil seal lips.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-17
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Install the setting plate [1] and a new bolt [2].

Align the setting plate hole with the crankcase boss.

Align

[1] [2]

Install the following:

[1] [2] [3]
– Return spring [1]
– Stopper arm [2]
– Washers [3]
– Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt [4]

• Apply locking agent to the shift drum stopper arm

pivot bolt threads (page 11-3).
• Align the return spring hook [5] with stopper arm cut-
out.
• Install the stopper arm with its "MGS" mark [6] facing
out. [4]

TORQUE: [5] [6]

Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Hold the stopper arm [1] with a screwdriver.
[3] [2]
Install the dowel pin [2] into the shift drum hole.
Install the shift drum stopper plate [3] while aligning its
slit with the dowel pins.

Align [1]

Apply locking agent to the shift drum center socket bolt

threads (page 11-3).
Install and tighten the shift drum center socket bolt [1] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

11-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Install the washer [1] and gearshift spindle [2].
[1]

Align the return spring ends with the spring pin.

Install the following:
– Right crankcase cover (page 11-5)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)

Align

[2]

GEARSHIFT PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Loosen the gearshift pedal adjuster lock nuts [1] and
[2] [4]
remove the tie-rod [2].
Remove the gearshift pedal pivot bolt [3] and gearshift
pedal [4].

[1] [3]

Remove the dust seals [1].

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

• Apply grease to the gearshift pedal pivot and dust

seal lips. 8 mm (0.3 in)
• Apply grease to the gearshift pedal tie-rod ball joint
area.

TORQUE:
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt:
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
91.1 mm (3.59 in)
Adjust the tie-rod length so that the distance between
the ball joint ends is standard length as shown.
After adjustment tighten the gearshift pedal adjuster [1]
lock nut [1] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-19
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

12. DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························12-2 RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER ·················· 12-97

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························12-3 DUAL CLUTCH ······································· 12-105

DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ·····12-5 PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR

ROTOR···················································· 12-108
DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
LOCATION ··················································12-6 SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION
GEARS ···················································· 12-109 12
DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM····························12-7
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE ··························· 12-112
DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ···············12-8
MAINSHAFT SENSOR ··························· 12-115
DCT TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION··········································12-11 TR SENSOR············································ 12-115

DTC INDEX················································12-15 SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR ········ 12-116

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ······················12-20 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR ························· 12-117

SHIFT INDICATOR EOT SENSOR ········································· 12-118

TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-61
DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL) ··········· 12-118
MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-95 CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING
(PCM) ······················································ 12-120
AT/MT MODE SWITCH
TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-1
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

COMPONENT LOCATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

12-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the electrical and mechanical systems of the Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT).
• A faulty DCT system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connectors. Check those connections before proceeding.
• Read the "DCT Troubleshooting Information" carefully, and inspect and troubleshoot the DCT system according to the DTC.
Observe each step of the procedures one by one. Note the DTC and probable faulty part before starting diagnosis and
troubleshooting.
• The PCM may be damaged if dropped. Also, if a connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive voltage may
damage the PCM. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• The drive mode AT or MT are changed electrically with the AT/MT mode switch.
• Be sure to use the recommended tires, and the specified drive and driven sprocket to operate the dual clutch transmission
system normally.
• For oil pump service (page 9-8).
• For neutral switch service (page 22-27).
• For VS sensor service (page 22-18).
• Description of the system (page 1-90).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bl = Black Bu = Blue Gr = Gray O = Orange R = Red W = White

Br = Brown G = Green Lg = Light green P = Pink V = Violet Y = Yellow

For DCT System Troubleshooting

• The DCT system is controlled by the PCM. Therefore some detection items are shared in the PGM-FI and DCT systems, and
they may affect the operation of both systems.
• Before starting any troubleshooting, check the following items and refer to the appropriate troubleshooting.
– MIL blinks or DTC for the PGM-FI system (page 4-12).
– Shift indicator blinks or DTC for the DCT system (page 12-11)
– Symptom of the DCT system operation (page 12-5)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
• Refer to the "PGM-FI Troubleshooting Information" for the "CIRCUIT INSPECTION" information (page 4-13).
• The gearshift mechanism included the following items. If the gearshift mechanism is faulty, refer to each component service.
– Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
– Gearshift linkage (page 12-112)
– Shift drum/shift fork (page 14-17)

Shift Control Motor Function Procedures

• If the PCM has a DTC, the function test does not work.
• The function test is not for the quality check of the shift control motor.
Conduct a test of the shift control motor when the following items have been serviced or replaced.
– Shift control motor
– Reduction gears
– TR sensor
– Shift spindle angle sensor
1. Connect the HDS pocket tester.
2. Select the "DRIVE TRAIN MODE MENU".
3. Select the "FUNCTION TEST" and then select the "SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR".
4. Place the motorcycle on its centerstand to raise the rear wheel off the ground.
5. Select the "Shift Up" or "Shift Down" mode while turning the rear wheel above 5 km/h (3 mph) with your hands. Measure the shift
spindle angle sensor voltage at this time. This also tests the mechanical function of the DCT to shift between gears.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-3
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Linear Solenoid Valve Function Procedures

• If the PCM has a DTC, the function test does not work.
• The function test is not for the quality check of the linear solenoid valve.
• Do not open the throttle while testing the linear solenoid valve function.
Conduct a test of the linear solenoid valves when the linear solenoid valves have been serviced or replaced.
1. Connect the HDS pocket tester.
2. Select the "DRIVE TRAIN MODE MENU".
3. Select the "FUNCTION TEST" and then select the "Linear Solenoid".
4. Select the "Linear Solenoid 1" or "Linear Solenoid 2".
5. Start the engine and let it idle.
6. Make sure that the transmission is in neutral position.
7. Select the "Drive Linear Solenoid To 0 kPa", "Drive Linear Solenoid To 400 kPa" or "Drive Linear Solenoid To 800 kPa" mode.
Measure the linear solenoid current at each mode.

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Clutch clearance 0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043) 2.0 (0.08)
EOT sensor resistance (20°C/68°F) 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ –

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Solenoid valve stopper plate bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Right crankcase cover wire clamp 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Linear solenoid valve body 6 6 – For tightening sequence (page 12-
mounting bolt 101)
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Primary drive gear mounting bolt 1 10 93 (9.5, 69) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Reduction gear cover bolt 3 6 14 (1.4, 10)
TR sensor bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Shift control motor bolt 3 6 14 (1.4, 10)
Shift drum center bolt 1 8 23 (2.3, 17) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Drum shifter guide plate bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Clutch line EOP sensor 3 10 19.6 (2.0, 14)
EOT sensor 1 10 14 (1.4, 10) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

12-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the shift indicator "–" blinking of the combination meter (page 12-11).
If the shift indicator "–" is blinking, refer to the DTC index (page 12-15) and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
If there are no "–" blinking, inspect the engine oil condition and follow the symptom troubleshooting described below.

CLUTCH SLIPS AND MOTORCYCLE DOES NOT ACCELERATE

Check the clutch clearance (page 12-106).

EXCESSIVE NOISE OR VIBRATION AROUND THE DCT SYSTEM

Inspect the following components:
– Clutch clearance
– Dual clutch needle bearings for wear or damage
– Primary drive/sub-gear for wear or damage
– Primary driven gear for wear or damage
– Each fasteners are tightened to their correct torque values
Replace the damaged components if necessary and tighten the loose fasteners to the specified torque.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-5
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOCATION

PCM
CKP SENSOR

ABS MODULATOR

VS SENSOR

INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR

No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

DLC

EOT SENSOR

CLUTCH EOP SENSORS

NEUTRAL SWITCH
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
TR SENSOR

No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

12-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ILLUMI/STOP/HORN FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
FUSE 7.5A P/Bu Bl Bl G/Y

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

P/Bu Bl G/Y
ENG STOP
MAIN FUSE 30A FUSE 7.5A
Bl R R/Bl W/Y Bl/R Bl
IGNITION ENGINE STOP SWITCH
SWITCH
Bl/W
FI FUSE 15A

SUB PVB
R FUSE 7.5A Br/R

Y/R
From STARTER
PVB FUSE 30A RELAY
COMBINATION SWITCH
Lg METER Lg Y/R

NEUTRAL Y/R G/R

Bl/W
SWITCH R/Bu Br/R
STARTER
RELAY
P/G
Bl
P/Bu V/W G
P/G P/G
G/R
Bu/Y
ABS V/R
W/Y Bl/W
MODULATOR
W W DLC
VS SENSOR Br Br
Bu W Y Y
G
W/Y G/O G/O
LG
FRONT WHEEL V/W
SPEED SENSOR CKP SENSOR P/Bu
P/Bu P/Bu SHIFT CONTROL
Y/Bu MOTOR
Lg/R Lg/R
SHIFT SWITCH
DOWN UP

Y/Bu Y/Bu
Y/R
Bu/W Gr No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID
G/Bu Bu/Y Gr/W Bu VALVE
N-D SHIFT SWITCH Y/R
Br/W W/R No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID
Bl/Y Bl/Y P/W Y VALVE
Lg/Bl
Lg/Bu Lg/Bl W/Y G/Y
R Y/R
AT/MT Bu/Bl W/Y
No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT DISENGAGE
MODE Bl/W
SWITCH
SHIFT PEDAL Y/R Y/R No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT DISENGAGE
ANGLE SENSOR Y/Bu Y/V Y/V SFTPANG
(OPTIONAL) Bu/G G/Y
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED RATIO
V/G
G/Y G/Y
CLUTCH SG
V/G Y/R FAIL SAFE RELAY
LINE EOP Y/R
SENSOR

G/Y IGNITION HOLD RELAY

No.1 CLUTCH Y/G Y/G
EOP SENSOR Y/R
No.1 CLUTCH SLIPS
G/Y
No.2 CLUTCH Bl/G Bl/G
EOP SENSOR Y/R No.2 CLUTCH SLIPS

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

No.1 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
G G/Y
Bu V/R V/R
Bl/W Y/R
No.2 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE

G G/Y
TR SENSOR FRONT/REAR WHEEL SPEED
Bu Bl/P Bl/P
Bl/W Y/R

GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
G/Y
OUTER MAINSHAFT P/Y P/Y Br : Brown
SENSOR W/Bu W/Bu TP SENSOR
Bl : Black
Y : Yellow
G/W
G/Y UP Bu : Blue
Gr/Y Gr/Y G : Green
INNER MAINSHAFT Br/Y Br/Y DOWN
SENSOR R : Red
SIDESTAND
G SWITCH W : White
G/Bu O : Orange
G
Bu/G Bu/G G/Bu Lg : Light green
EOT SENSOR G/Y P : Pink
Gr : Gray
V : Violet
( ) :DTC/Number of shift 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
indicator blinks 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

:Short terminals for

PCM 33P (BLACK) PCM 33P (GRAY)
reading DTC / shift indicator CONNECTOR A CONNECTOR B

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-7
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

6P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

NOTE 3: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 3)

CKP SENSOR
DLC (NOTE 2) 2P (RED) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

NOTE 4: Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700SD) (page 2-27).

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH

7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

12-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

NOTE 5: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).

No.2 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR

3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

No.1 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR

3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

NOTE 6: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).

NOTE 7: Remove the left rear cover (page 2-30).

NEUTRAL SWITCH (NOTE 7)

TR SENSOR (NOTE 7)

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6) 2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

NOTE 8: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).

INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR

3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 8)
VS SENSOR
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-9
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

NOTE 9: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
NOTE 10: Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).
NOTE 11: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).
NOTE 11: Remove the side cowl (NC700SD) (page 2-13).

ABS MODULATOR PCM

25P CONNECTOR (NOTE 9) 33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 10)

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE PCM

4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 11) 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 10)

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 11)

NOTE 12: Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).

TR SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 12)

12-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Intermittent Failure
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the shift indicator "–" does not come
on, check for poor contact or loose pins at all connectors related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the shift indicator "–"
was on, but then went out, the original problem may be intermittent.
Opens and Shorts
"Opens" and "Shorts" are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidental
connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means something will not work at all. With
PCMs this can sometimes mean something works, but not the way it’s supposed to.
If the shift indicator "–" has come on
Refer to DTC READOUT (page 12-12).
If the shift indicator "–" did not stay on
If the shift indicator "–" did not stay on, but there is a driveability problem, do the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING (page 12-5).

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The DCT system is equipped with the self-diagnostic system. When any
abnormality occurs in the DCT system, the PCM have the shift indicator [1]
blinking "–" and stores a DTC in its erasable memory for the relevant
system failure.

[1]

FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
The DCT system is provided with a fail-safe function to secure a minimum running capability even when there is trouble in the
system.
When the PCM detects a problem in the DCT system, the PCM stops the gearshift function, and hold the gear position. Also, the
shift indicator blinks "–" to indicate the DTC.
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)
• The DTC is composed of a main code and a sub code and it is displayed as a hyphenated number when retrieved from the PCM
with the HDS pocket tester.
The digits in front of the hyphen are the main code, they indicate the component of function failure.
The digits behind the hyphen are the sub code, they detail the specific symptom of the component or function failure.
For example, in the case of the shift spindle angle sensor:
– DTC 21 – 1 = (Shift spindle angle sensor voltage) – (lower than the specified value)
– DTC 21 – 2 = (Shift spindle angle sensor voltage) – (higher than the specified value)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-11
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Shift indicator "–" Blink Pattern
• If the HDS pocket tester is not available, DTC can be read from the PCM memory by the shift indicator "–" blink pattern.
• The number of shift indicator "–" blinks is the equivalent of the main code of the DTC (the sub code cannot be displayed by the
shift indicator "–").
• The shift indicator "–" has two types of blinks, a long blink and short blink. The long blinking lasts for 1.2 seconds, the short
blinking lasts for 0.4 seconds. One long blink is the equivalent of ten short blinks. For example, DTC 14 and DTC 8 are indicated
in the following blink pattern.
• When there isn’t a DTC, the shift indicator "–" stay lights.

0.4 sec. 0.4 sec. 0.4 sec.

2 sec. 1.2 sec. 2 sec. 1.2 sec.

ON

OFF

2.5 sec. 2.5 sec. 0.4 sec. 2.5 sec. 0.4 sec. 2.5 sec. 2.5 sec. 0.4 sec.

DTC 14 DTC 8 DTC 14

One long blink = 10 blinks, Eight short blinks
plus four short blinks

Pattern repeated
1 cycle

Shift indicator Check

When the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine stop switch to " ", the shift indicator will stay on for a few seconds, then go
off.
CURRENT DTC/STORED DTC
The DTC is indicated in two ways according to the failure status.
• If the PCM detects a current problem, the shift indicator "–" will come on and begin to blink when the sidestand is lowered. The
shift indicator "–" blink pattern will indicate the current DTC.
• If the PCM does not detect any current but has a problem stored in its memory, the shift indicator "–" will not light and blink. If it
is necessary to retrieve the past problem, readout the stored DTC by following the DTC readout procedure (page 12-12).

HDS POCKET TESTER INFORMATION

Refer to the PGM-FI system (page 4-12).

The front wheel speed sensor signal can be disabled with the HDS for testing. Never ride the motorcycle with the PCM in this mode.

DTC READOUT

• If the shift indicator [1] blinks, check the PGM-FI DTC (page 4-12). If
there is any problem in the PGM-FI system, troubleshoot it first. Then
recheck the DCT system after erasing the PGM-FI DTC.
• After performing diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem code(s)
(page 12-13) and test-ride the motorcycle to be sure that the problem(s)
have been removed.
Read the DTC and stored data with the HDS Pocket Tester, and follow the
troubleshooting index (page 12-15).
To read the DTC without the HDS pocket tester, use the following
procedure.

[1]

12-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Reading DTC with the shift indicator "–"
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100

[1] [2]

3. Make sure the engine stop switch is turned to " ". [1]
While pushing the shift switch (+) [1], turn the ignition switch ON. Read,
note the shift indicator "–" blinks and refer to the troubleshooting index
(page 12-15).
[1]

• If the PCM has no DTC in its memory, the shift indicator "–" will start
blinking (page 12-14).
4. Release the shift switch (+).

ERASING DTC
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC (page 4-12).
Erase the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
To erase the DTC without HDS, refer to the following procedure.
How to erase the DTC without HDS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-13
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Make sure the engine stop switch is turned to " ". [1]
While pushing the shift switch (+) [1], turn the ignition switch to ON.

[1]

4. Push the shift switch (–) [1].

[2]
5. Push the shift switch (+) [2].

[2]

[1]

6. The self-diagnostic memory is erased if the shift indicator "–" goes off and starts blinking as shown.

2 sec. 2 sec. 2 sec.

ON

OFF

3 sec. 3 sec. 3 sec.

Pattern repeated
1 cycle

Note that the self-diagnostic memory cannot be erased if the ignition switch is turned to "OFF" before the shift indicator "–" starts
blinking.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Remove the special tool from the DLC.

12-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC INDEX
Refer Refer
DTC Symptom/Fail-safe
Function Failure to to
("–" blinks) function
DTC "–"
TP sensor abnormal voltage • Gearshift function
• Loose or poor contact of the TP sensor connector works normally
8-1 (8) 12-20 4-47
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line EOP sensor low voltage • Gearshift function
9-1 (9) • Clutch line EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction works normally 12-20
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line EOP sensor high voltage • Gearshift function
12-61
• Loose or poor contact of the clutch line EOP works normally
9-2 (9) sensor connector 12-21
• Clutch line EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
CKP sensor no signal • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the CKP sensor not work (while driving)
connector • Engine does not
19-1 (19) 12-22 12-62
• Electromagnetic interference at CKP sensor operate
• CKP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift spindle angle sensor low voltage • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the shift spindle angle not work (while driving)
21-1 (21) sensor connector • Only shifted into 1st 12-23
• Shift spindle angle sensor or its circuit malfunction gear
• Faulty PCM 12-63
Shift spindle angle sensor high voltage • Gearshift function does
• Shift spindle angle sensor or its circuit malfunction not work (while driving)
21-2 (21) 12-24
• Faulty PCM • Only shifted into 1st
gear
Shift spindle operation malfunction (after operating • Gearshift function does
gearshift mechanism) not work (while driving)
22-1 (22) 12-25
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction • Only shifted into 1st
• Shift spindle angle sensor malfunction gear
12-64
Shift spindle operation malfunction (while operating • Gearshift function does
gearshift mechanism) not work (while driving)
23-1 (23) 12-26
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction • Only shifted into 1st
• Shift spindle angle sensor malfunction gear
Shift control motor drive circuit • Gearshift function does
• Shift control motor or its circuit malfunction not work (while driving)
24-1 (24) • Shift control motor drive circuit in the PCM • Engine does not 12-27 12-65
malfunction operate
• Faulty PCM
Shift drum position malfunction • Gearshift function does
• TR sensor malfunction not work (while driving)
27-1 (27) 12-28 12-66
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction • Engine does not
• Faulty PCM operate
Shift control motor low voltage • Gearshift function does
• Shift control motor circuit malfunction not work (while driving)
• Ignition hold relay circuit in the PCM malfunction • Engine does not
31-1 (31) • Blown PVB fuse (30 A) operate 12-29 12-67
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P (Black)
connector
• Faulty PCM
Fail safe relay circuit malfunction • Gearshift function does
• PCM (DCT drive circuit) power input line not work (while driving)
malfunction • Engine does not
32-1 (32) 12-30 12-68
• Blown PVB fuse (30 A) operate
• Fail safe relay in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Ignition hold relay malfunction • Gearshift function does
• PCM (DCT drive circuit) sub power input line not work (while driving)
malfunction • Engine does not
37-1 (37) 12-30 12-68
• Blown SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A) operate
• Ignition hold relay in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-15
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Refer Refer
DTC Symptom/Fail-safe
Function Failure to to
("–" blinks) function
DTC "–"
N-D shift switch malfunction • N-D shift switch does
• Loose or poor contact of the N-D shift switch not operate
41-1 (41) connector 12-31 12-69
• N-D shift switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift switch malfunction • Shift switch does not
• Loose or poor contact of the shift switch connector operate
42-1 (42) 12-33 12-71
• Shift switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
EOT sensor low voltage • Gearshift function
44-1 (44) • EOT sensor or its circuit malfunction works normally 12-34
• Faulty PCM
EOT sensor high voltage • Gearshift function
12-73
• Loose or poor contact of the EOT sensor works normally
44-2 (44) connector 12-35
• EOT sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch EOP sensor low voltage • Gearshift function does
47-1 (47) • No.1 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction not work 12-37
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch EOP sensor high voltage • Gearshift function does
12-74
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 clutch EOP not work
47-2 (47) sensor connector 12-38
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch EOP sensor low voltage • Gearshift function does
48-1 (48) • No.2 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction not work 12-37
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch EOP sensor high voltage • Gearshift function does
12-74
• Loose or poor contact of the No.2 clutch EOP not work
48-2 (48) sensor connector 12-38
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line low oil pressure (when clutch engage) • Engine does not
• Engine oil level low operate
• Faulty oil pump
49-1 (49)
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Clutch line EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty PCM
12-39 12-76
Clutch line low oil pressure (when engine running) • Engine does not
• Engine oil level low operate
• Faulty oil pump
49-2 (49)
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Clutch line EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty PCM
TR sensor low voltage • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the TR sensor connector not work (while driving)
51-1 (51) 12-40
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction • Engine does not
• Faulty PCM operate
12-77
TR sensor high voltage • Gearshift function does
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction not work (while driving)
51-2 (51) 12-41
• Faulty PCM • Engine does not
operate
Neutral switch stuck OFF • Operates normally
• Loose or poor contact of the neutral switch • Shift indicator blinking
52-1 (52) connector 12-42
• Neutral switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM 12-78
Neutral switch stuck ON • Gearshift function does
• Neutral switch or its circuit malfunction not work (while driving)
52-2 (52) 12-43
• Faulty PCM • Engine does not
operate

12-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Refer Refer
DTC Symptom/Fail-safe
Function Failure to to
("–" blinks) function
DTC "–"
Inner mainshaft sensor speed low • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the inner mainshaft not work
sensor connector
53-1 (53) 12-43 12-79
• Inner mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Electromagnetic interference
• Faulty PCM
Outer mainshaft sensor speed low • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the outer mainshaft not work
sensor connector
54-1 (54) 12-46 12-82
• Outer mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Electromagnetic interference
• Faulty PCM
No.1 linear solenoid valve current failure • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid not work
valve connector
55-1 (55) • No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.1 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 linear solenoid valve driver in the PCM failure • Gearshift function does 12-48 12-84
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid not work
valve connector
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P connector
55-2 (55)
• No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.1 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 linear solenoid valve current failure • Gearshift function does
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid not work
valve connector
56-1 (56) • No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.2 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 linear solenoid valve driver in the PCM failure • Gearshift function does 12-49 12-85
• Loose or poor contact of the No.2 linear solenoid not work
valve connector
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P connector
56-2 (56)
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.2 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Gearshift mechanism malfunction • Gearshift function does
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction not work (while driving)
57-1 (57) 12-50
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction • Engine does not
• Faulty PCM operate
12-86
Gear position malfunction (jumps out of gear) • Gearshift function does
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction not work (while driving)
57-2 (57) 12-50
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction • Engine does not
• Faulty PCM operate
No.1 clutch does not disengage (when shifting gear) • Engine does not
58-1 (58) • No.1 clutch sticking operate 12-51 12-86
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
No.2 clutch does not disengage (when shifting gear) • Engine does not
59-1 (59) • No.2 clutch sticking operate 12-51 12-86
• Faulty clutch oil circuit

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-17
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Refer Refer
DTC Symptom/Fail-safe
Function Failure to to
("–" blinks) function
DTC "–"
No.1 clutch oil pressure malfunction (at clutch initial • Gearshift function does
diagnosis) not work
61-1 (61) • No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch no oil pressure • Gearshift function does
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work
61-2 (61) • Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure degradation • Gearshift function does
12-51 12-86
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work
61-3 (61) • Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure canceling malfunction • Engine does not
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction operate
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
61-4 (61) • Loose or poor contact of the linear solenoid valve
and No.1 clutch EOP sensor connectors
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure high • Gearshift function does
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work (while driving)
62-1 (62) • Faulty clutch oil circuit • Engine does not
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction operate
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure high (Prevention of • Gearshift function does 12-51 12-86
motorcycle creeps) not work (while driving)
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction • Engine does not
62-2 (62)
• Faulty clutch oil circuit operate
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure malfunction (at clutch initial • Gearshift function does
diagnosis) not work
63-1 (63) • No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch no oil pressure • Gearshift function does
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work
63-2 (63) • Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure degradation • Gearshift function does
12-52 12-87
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work
63-3 (63) • Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure canceling malfunction • Engine does not
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction operate
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
63-4 (63) • Loose or poor contact of the linear solenoid valve
and No.2 clutch EOP sensor connectors
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM

12-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Refer Refer
DTC Symptom/Fail-safe
Function Failure to to
("–" blinks) function
DTC "–"
No.2 clutch oil pressure high • Gearshift function does
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction not work (while driving)
64-1 (64) • Faulty clutch oil circuit • Engine does not
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction operate
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure high (Prevention of • Engine does not 12-52 12-87
motorcycle creeps) operate
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
64-2 (64)
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Front and rear wheel speed signal malfunction • Gearshift function does
• Front wheel speed sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
65-1 (65) • VS sensor or its circuit malfunction 12-53 12-88
• Faulty ABS modulator
• Faulty PCM
VS sensor no signal • Gearshift function does
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
66-1 (66) • Loose or poor contact of the VS sensor connector 12-54 12-89
• Electromagnetic interference at VS sensor
• Faulty PCM
Front wheel speed sensor no signal • Gearshift function does
• Front wheel speed sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
• Loose or poor contact of the front wheel speed
sensor connector
67-1 (67) • Electromagnetic interference at front wheel speed 12-55 12-90
sensor
• Faulty ABS modulator
• Faulty pulser ring
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch operation malfunction (clutch slips) • Gearshift function does
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
68-1 (68) 12-56 12-91
• Faulty No.1 clutch
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch operation malfunction (clutch slips) • Gearshift function does
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
69-1 (69) 12-57 12-92
• Faulty No.2 clutch
• Faulty PCM
Inner mainshaft / countershaft speed ratio failure • Gearshift function does
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
71-1 (71)
• Inner mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
12-57 12-92
Outer mainshaft / countershaft speed ratio failure • Gearshift function does
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction not work
72-1 (72)
• Outer mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
CPU in the PCM malfunction • Gearshift system stops
84-1 (84) 12-58 12-93
• Faulty PCM
Shift pedal angle sensor (Optional) malfunction • DCT shift pedal
• Shift pedal angle sensor or its circuit malfunction (Optional) function
• DCT shift pedal (Optional) mechanism does not work
1-1 (1) malfunction 12-58 12-93
• Loose or poor contact of the shift pedal angle
sensor connector
• Faulty PCM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-19
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 8-1 (TP SENSOR ABNORMAL
VOLTAGE)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester
when the throttle is fully closed.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES – • About 0 V: See DTC 8-1 (page 4-26)
• About 5 V: See DTC 8-2 (page 4-27)
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 9-1 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR

LOW VOLTAGE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Connect the HDS pocket tester and start the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Stop the engine.
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a
known good one, and recheck.
3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
G/Y Y/R

[1]

12-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/green wire V/G

NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,

and recheck.

DTC 9-2 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR

HIGH VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the clutch line EOP sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Connect the wire harness side clutch line EOP
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals with a
jumper wire [2].
Connection: Violet/green – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON. G/Y V/G
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is the 0 V indicated?
YES – Faulty clutch line EOP sensor
[2]
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-21
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] B22 [2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.

Connection: Green/yellow – B22

TOOL: G/Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
[2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.

Connection: Violet/green – A17

TOOL:
V/G
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/green wire [1] A17

DTC 19-1 (CKP SENSOR NO SIGNAL)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the CKP sensor 2P (Red) and PCM
33P (Gray) connectors, then recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. CKP sensor Peak Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
[1]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
W/Y
Crank the engine with the starter motor, and
measure the CKP sensor peak voltage at the CKP
sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] terminals of the CKP
sensor side.
Y
Connection: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)

TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2] 07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum) [2]
Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty CKP sensor

12-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. CKP sensor Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
B11 B6 [1]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the CKP sensor 2P
(Red) connector [1] and PCM 33P (Gray) connector
[2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow – B11
Green/orange – B6 G/O

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 Y

Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Yellow wire
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow wire [2]
• Open circuit in the Green/orange wire

DTC 21-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE

SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift spindle angle sensor 3P
(Gray) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Input Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] G/Y Y/R
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-23
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
V/R
Connection: Violet/red – A16
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire
[1] A16

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Short

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/red – ground
Is there continuity?
V/R
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Inspection

Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original shift spindle angle sensor

DTC 21-2 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE

SENSOR HIGH VOLTAGE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

12-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] G/Y Y/R
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection

Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty shift spindle angle sensor

DTC 22-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE

OPERATION MALFUNCTION: AFTER
OPERATING GEARSHIFT
MECHANISM)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES – • About 0 V: See DTC 21-1 (page 12-23).
• About 5 V: See DTC 21-2 (page 12-24).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Shift Control Motor/Reduction Gear Condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-25
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection

Remove the shift spindle angle sensor with the
connector connected (page 12-116).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
While turning the shift spindle angle sensor shaft,
check the shift spindle angle sensor voltage with the
HDS pocket tester.
When turning the sensor shaft clockwise:
Voltage increase
When turning the sensor shaft
counterclockwise:
Voltage decrease
Does the voltage vary properly?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Faulty shift spindle angle sensor
5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the shift spindle angle sensor is installed
properly.
Is the shift spindle angle sensor in normal
condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Install the shift spindle angle sensor
properly.
6. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 22-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 23-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE

OPERATION MALFUNCTION: WHILE
OPERATING GEARSHIFT
MECHANISM)
Refer to DTC 22-1 (page 12-25)

12-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 24-1 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
DRIVE CIRCUIT)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
A2 A1
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and P/Bu
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2 Y/Bu
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
[1] [2] A4 A15
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire
2. Shift Control Motor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/blue – Ground
Yellow/blue – Ground P/Bu Y/Bu
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

[1]

3. Shift Control Motor Inspection

Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-27
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 27-1 (SHIFT DRUM POSITION
MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES – • About 0 V: See DTC 51-1 (page 12-40).
• About 5 V: See DTC 51-2 (page 12-41).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.
3. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

4. TR Sensor System Inspection

Remove the TR sensor with the connector
connected (page 12-115).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
While turning the TR sensor shaft, check the TR
sensor voltage with the HDS pocket tester.
When turning the sensor shaft clockwise:
Voltage increase
When turning the sensor shaft
counterclockwise:
Voltage decrease
Does the voltage vary properly?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Faulty TR sensor

12-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

5. TR Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the TR sensor is installed properly and is
not damaged.
Is the TR sensor in normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Install the TR sensor properly.
6. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 27-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 31-1 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR

LOW VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift control motor 2P (Black)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 32-1 or 37-1 indicated?
YES – • DTC 32-1 indicated (page 12-30).
• DTC 37-1 indicated (page 12-30).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
A2 A1
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and P/Bu
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2 Y/Bu
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
[1] [2] A4 A15
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-29
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 32-1 (FAIL SAFE RELAY CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Power Supply Voltage
Inspection
Check the shift control motor power supply voltage
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector
• Blown PVB fuse (30 A)
2. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 32-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 37-1 (IGNITION HOLD RELAY

MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PCM (DCT Drive Circuit) Sub Power Voltage
Inspection
Check the PCM sub power voltage with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is the battery voltage indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – • Open circuit in the Brown/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector
• Blown SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A)

12-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 37-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 41-1 (N-D SHIFT SWITCH

MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. N-D Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the following:
NC700XD: NC700SD:
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
[1] [2]
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ". Y/R Y/R
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
2. N-D Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each [1]
switch position.
Connection: R
N switch:
Light green/blue – Red
D switch: Lg/Bu
Black/yellow – Red Bl/Y
Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NC700SD:
NO – Faulty N-D shift switch
[1]

Bl/Y
Lg/Bu

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-31
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
NC700XD: A18
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P [1]
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green/black – A18
Lg/Bl
Black/yellow – A29

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 Bl/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Light green/black
wire A29 [2]
• Open circuit in the Black/yellow wire

NC700SD:
A18
[1]

Lg/Bl

Bl/Y

A29 [2]

4. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
A18
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] terminals and
ground.
Connection: A18 – Ground
A29 – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Short circuit in the Black/yellow wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one, A29 [1]
and recheck.

12-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 42-1 (SHIFT SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the left handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, then recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the following:
NC700XD: NC700SD:
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
[1] [2]
(NC700XD) [1]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop Y/R
switch " ". Y/R
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
2. Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the switch side left
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each [1]
switch position. Y/R
Connection:
"+" switch:
Green/blue – Yellow/red
"–" switch: Lg/R
Light green/red – Yellow/red G/Bu
Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
Y/R
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty shift switch

NC700SD:
[1]

Lg/R
G/Bu

Y/R

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-33
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P [1] A7
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/yellow – A7
Light green/red – A30 Bu/Y

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Lg/R
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Light green/red wire A30 [2]

NC700SD:
[1] A7

Bu/Y

Lg/R

A30 [2]

4. Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
A7
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] terminals and
ground.
Connection: A7 – Ground
A30 – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Light green/red wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck. A30 [1]

DTC 44-1 (EOT SENSOR LOW

VOLTAGE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor System Inspection
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

12-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. EOT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. EOT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Measure the resistance at the EOT sensor [1]
terminals.
Is the resistance within 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty EOT sensor

4. EOT Sensor Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check the continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
2P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Blue/green – Ground
Is there continuity? Bu/G
YES – Short circuit in the Blue/green wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 44-2 (EOT SENSOR HIGH

VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the EOT sensor 2P (Black) and
PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor System Inspection
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-35
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. EOT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Short the wire harness side EOT sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1] terminals with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Blue/green – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated? Bu/G G/Y
YES – Faulty EOT sensor.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

[2]

3. EOT Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/green – A19

TOOL: Bu/G
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Blue/green wire
[1] A19

4. EOT Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
[1] [2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 G/Y

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wires
B22

12-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 47-1 or 48-1 (No.1 or No.2
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor System Inspection
Connect the HDS pocket tester and start the engine.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Stop the engine.
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty clutch EOP sensor
3. Clutch EOP Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

G/Y Y/R

[1]

4. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] terminal
and ground.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – Ground Y/G or Bl/G
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Short circuit in the Black/green wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-37
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 47-2 or 48-2 (No.1 or No.2
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Short the wire harness side clutch EOP sensor 3P
(Gray) connector [1] terminals with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
G/Y Y/G or Bl/G
Yellow/green – Green/yellow
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
[2]
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES – Faulty clutch EOP sensor
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. Clutch EOP Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

TOOL: G/Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
B22

12-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
[1] A6 [2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor: Y/G
Yellow/green – A6
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – A5 Bl/G
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity? A5
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Open circuit in the Black/green wire

DTC 49-1, 49-2 (CLUTCH LINE LOW

OIL PRESSURE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES – • About 0 V (while engine running): See
DTC 9-1 (page 12-20).
• About 5 V: See DTC 9-2 (page 12-21).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Engine Oil Level Inspection
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Is the engine oil level correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Add the recommended oil to the upper
level.
3. Clutch Line Oil Filter Condition Inspection
Check the clutch oil filter (page 3-14).
Is the oil filter in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Replace the clutch oil filter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-39
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 49-1 or 49-2 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor
5. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 49-1 or 49-2 indicated?
YES – • Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak in the clutch oil line
NO – Faulty original PCM

DTC 51-1 (TR SENSOR LOW

VOLTAGE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the TR sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage about 0 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. TR Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–) G/Y Y/R
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

12-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. TR Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Black/pink – A28

TOOL: Bl/P
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/pink wire
A28

4. TR Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/pink – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Black/pink wire Bl/P

NO – GO TO STEP 5.

5. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage about 0 V?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 51-2 (TR SENSOR HIGH

VOLTAGE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-41
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. TR Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
G/Y Y/R
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

3. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 52-1 (NEUTRAL SWITCH STUCK

OFF)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the neutral switch and PCM 33P
(Gray) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Neutral Switch Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] B30 [2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and
neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1] and neutral switch
connector [2] terminals.
Connection: B30 – Light green
Lg
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Light green wire

12-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Neutral Switch Inspection
Replace the neutral switch with a known good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and neutral
switch connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 52-2 (NEUTRAL SWITCH STUCK

ON)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Neutral Switch Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector terminal and ground.
Connection: Light green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Light green wire.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Neutral Switch Inspection
Replace the neutral switch with a known good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-2 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 53-1 (INNER MAINSHAFT

SENSOR SPEED LOW)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the inner mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-43
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals. Br/Y G/Y
Connection: Brown/yellow (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is there about battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

3. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection

Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V? Gr/Y
YES – GO TO STEP 8.
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

4. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] A14
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow – A14

TOOL: Br/Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Brown/yellow wire
[2]

12-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

5. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
[2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 G/Y

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
[1] B22

6. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/yellow – A20

TOOL: Gr/Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – Open circuit in the Gray/yellow wire
A20 [1]

7. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground
Connection: Gray/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
Gr/Y
YES – Short circuit in the Gray/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 8.

8. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the inner mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original inner mainshaft sensor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-45
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 54-1 (OUTER MAINSHAFT
SENSOR SPEED LOW)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the outer mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals. W/Bu G/Y
Connection: White/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is there about battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

3. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection

Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V? P/Y
YES – GO TO STEP 8.
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

12-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: White/blue – A25

TOOL: W/Bu
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the White/blue wire
A25

5. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
[1] [2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 G/Y

Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
B22

6. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/yellow – A21

TOOL: P/Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
A21 [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-47
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

7. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground
Connection: Pink/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/Y
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 8.

8. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Condition Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the outer mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original outer mainshaft sensor

DTC 55-1, 55-2 (No.1 LINEAR

SOLENOID VALVE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 55-1 or 55-2 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector. Bu
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Blue – Gray

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)

Is the resistance within standard range?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty linear solenoid valve Gr

12-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
[1] A9 [2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/white – A9
Blue/white – A10 Gr/W

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Bu/W
Is the continuity normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Open circuit in the Blue/white wire A10

4. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Gray/white – Ground
Blue/white – Ground Gr/W
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Gray/white wire Bu/W
• Short circuit in the Blue/white wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 56-1, 56-2 (No.2 LINEAR

SOLENOID VALVE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 56-1 or 56-2 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-49
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector.
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals. Y
Connection: Yellow – White/red

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)

Is the resistance within standard range?
YES – GO TO STEP 3. W/R
NO – Faulty linear solenoid valve

3. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
[1] A11 [2]
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/white – A11
Brown/white – A22 P/W

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 Br/W
Is the continuity normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Brown/white wire A22

4. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground P/W
Brown/white – Ground
Br/W
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Short circuit in the Brown/white wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 57-1 (GEARSHIFT MECHANISM

MALFUNCTION)
See page 12-28

DTC 57-2 (GEAR POSITION

MALFUNCTION; JUMPS OUT OF
GEAR)
See page 12-28

12-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 58-1 (No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT
DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the dual clutch assembly and inspect the
clutch for sticking (page 12-105).
Is the No.1 clutch stuck?
YES – Faulty clutch
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Clutch Oil Line Inspection
Check the clutch oil passages in the right crankcase
cover and mainshaft for clogging.
Is the oil passage clogged?
YES – Clean the oil passage.
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 59-1 (No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT

DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
See page 12-51

DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1, 62-2

(No.1 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 47-1, 47-2, 55-1 or 55-2 indicated?
YES – • DTC 47-1 is indicated (page 12-37).
• DTC 47-2 is indicated (page 12-38).
• DTC 55-1 is indicated (page 12-48).
• DTC 55-2 is indicated (page 12-48).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. No.1 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1 or 62-2
indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty original No.1 clutch EOP sensor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-51
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1 or 62-2
indicated?
YES – • Faulty No.1 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.1 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.1 clutch oil
line
NO – Faulty original PCM

DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1, 64-2

(No.2 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 48-1, 48-2, 56-1 or 56-2 indicated?
YES – • DTC 48-1 is indicated (page 12-37).
• DTC 48-2 is indicated (page 12-38).
• DTC 56-1 is indicated (page 12-49).
• DTC 56-2 is indicated (page 12-49).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. No.2 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1 or 64-2
indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty original No.2 clutch EOP sensor
3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1 or 64-2
indicated?
YES – • Faulty No.2 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.2 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.2 clutch oil
line
NO – Faulty original PCM

12-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 65-1 (FRONT AND REAR WHEEL
SPEED SIGNAL MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check that the tire

sizes are correct, and the drive and driven sprockets
are the specified ones.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 or 67-1 indicated?
YES – • DTC 66-1 is indicated (page 12-54).
• DTC 67-1 is indicated (page 12-55).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the front wheel speed sensor air gap (page
20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.
3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the front wheel speed
sensor.
Check that there is no iron or other magnetic
deposits between the pulser ring and wheel speed
sensor, and check the pulser ring slots for
obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage.
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.
4. VS Sensor Condition Inspection
Remove the VS sensor (page 22-18).
Check the VS sensor for damage or contaminated.
Is the VS sensor in good condition?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Replace the VS sensor with a known good
one, and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-53
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 66-1 (VS SENSOR NO SIGNAL)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–) P/Bu G/R
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Output Line Inspection

Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V? P/G
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

12-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. VS Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2] [1]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/green – A32

TOOL: P/G
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/green wire
A32

5. VS Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/G
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

6. VS Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original VS sensor
DTC 67-1 (FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR NO SIGNAL)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue), ABS modulator 25P and PCM 33P (Black)
connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 67-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-55
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. ABS Problem Code Inspection
Check the ABS problem code (page 20-8).
Does the ABS modulator have any problem
code?
YES – Follow the problem code index (page 20-
10).
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
A33 [2]
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector and
PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] and PCM 33P (Black) connector
[2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A33

TOOL: V/R
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire [1]

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: A33 – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

A33

DTC 68-1 (No.1 CLUTCH OPERATION

MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES – Refer to DTC 66-1 troubleshooting (page
12-54).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

12-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Clutch Clearance Inspection
Remove the No.1 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty No.1 clutch assembly

DTC 69-1 (No.2 CLUTCH OPERATION

MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES – Refer to DTC 66-1 troubleshooting (page
12-54).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.2 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty No.2 clutch assembly.

DTC 71-1, 72-1 (INNER, OUTER

MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
RATIO FAILURE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck 1
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1, 54-1 or 66-1 indicated?
YES – • DTC 53-1 is indicated (page 12-43).
• DTC 54-1 is indicated (page 12-46).
• DTC 66-1 is indicated (page 12-54).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-57
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. DTC Recheck 2
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 71-1 or 72-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 84-1 (CPU IN THE PCM

MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 84-1 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 1-1 (SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE

SENSOR (OPTIONAL) MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting this inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift pedal angle sensor 3P
(Black) connector and PCM 33P connectors, and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
– DCT Shift Pedal (Optional) Registration (page 12-
118)
• If the DCT shift pedal (optional) is removed from the
vehicle, perform the DCT Shift Pedal Registration
Cancellation (page 12-119).
1. Recheck the DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Operate the DCT shift pedal up and down several
times with the engine stopped.
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 1-1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

12-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector Y/R G/Y
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Open Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector terminals.
Y/R
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Yellow/red – B14

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 G/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck. [2] B22 B14
NO – • Open circuit in Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in Yellow/red wire
4. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector terminals.
Connection: Yellow/violet – B19

TOOL: Y/V
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in Yellow/violet wire
[2] B19 [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-59
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

5. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
and ground.
Connection: Yellow/violet – Ground
Is there continuity?
Y/V
YES – Short circuit in Yellow/violet wire.
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

6. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Resistance Inspection

Measure the resistance at the sensor side shift
[1]
pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – Blue/green
Standard: 4 – 6 kΩ (20°C/68°F)
Y/R Bu/G
Operate the DCT shift pedal to check that the
resistance changes in accordance with the pedal
operation.
Connection: Yellow/blue – Blue/green Y/Bu Bu/G

When moving the pedal up:

Resistance increases
When moving the pedal down:
Resistance decreases
Are the resistance inspections normal?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty shift pedal angle sensor, replace the
DCT shift pedal as an assembly.

12-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SHIFT INDICATOR
TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 9 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the clutch line EOP sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
G/Y Y/R
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.
[1]

2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.

Connection: Violet/green – A17

V/G
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/green wire

[2] A17

3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Short

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
V/G
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-61
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Connect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 9 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor.
5. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Power/Ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] [2] B22
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Y/R
Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity? G/Y
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire B14
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

DTC 19 (CKP SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the CKP sensor 2P (Red) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. CKP Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection at PCM
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Crank the engine and measure the CKP sensor
peak voltage between the test harness [1] terminal
and ground.

Connection: B11 (+) – B6 (–) B6

TOOL: B11
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2] 07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum) [1]

Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?

YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

12-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. CKP Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
W/Y
Crank the engine and measure the CKP sensor
peak voltage between the CKP sensor 2P (Red)
connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–) Y
Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?
YES – • Open or short circuit in the Yellow wire
• Open circuit in the White/yellow wire
NO – Faulty CKP sensor

DTC 21 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE

SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift spindle angle sensor 3P
(Gray) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Blue) connector [1] G/Y Y/R
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A16
V/R
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

[1] A16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-63
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/red – Ground
Is there continuity?
V/R
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Inspection

Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 21 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original shift spindle angle sensor
5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Power/Ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1] B14 [2]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and test harness [2] terminals.
Y/R
Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22
G/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire B22

DTC 22, 23 (SHIFT SPINDLE

OPERATION MALFUNCTION)
1. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

12-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Condition Inspection

Check that the shift spindle angle sensor is installed
properly.
Is the shift spindle angle sensor in normal
condition?
YES – Faulty shift spindle angle sensor
NO – Install the shift spindle angle sensor
properly.

DTC 24 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR

DRIVE CIRCUIT)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
A1 A2 [2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) P/Bu
connector. A4
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test Y/Bu
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 2. [1] A15
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-65
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Control Motor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and
ground.
Connection: Pink/blue – Ground
Yellow/blue – Ground P/Bu Y/Bu
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/blue wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

[1]

3. Shift Control Motor Inspection

Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

DTC 27 (SHIFT DRUM POSITION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.
2. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty shift control motor

[2] [1]

12-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. TR Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the TR sensor is installed properly and is
not damage.
Is the TR sensor normal condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Install the TR sensor properly.
4. DTC Recheck
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 27 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 31 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift control motor 2P (Black)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the PVB fuse (30 A).
Is the PVB fuse in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty PVB fuse (30 A)
2. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
A1 A2 [2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) P/Bu
connector. A4
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test Y/Bu
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one, [1] A15
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-67
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 32 (FAIL SAFE RELAY)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the PVB fuse (30 A).
Is the PVB fuse in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty PVB fuse (30 A)
2. Shift Control Motor Power Supply Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Measure the voltage between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A12 (+) – Ground (–)
A13 (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between A12 A13 [1]
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector

DTC 37 (IGNITION HOLD RELAY)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. SUB PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A).
Is the SUB PVB fuse in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A)

12-68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. PCM (DCT Drive Circuit) Sub Power Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
A3
connectors (page 4-14).
Measure the voltage between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A3 (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Brown/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay [1]
switch 4P (Red) connector

DTC 41 (N-D SHIFT SWITCH)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. N-D Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD: NC700SD:
Disconnect the following:
[1] [2]
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop Y/R Y/R
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-69
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. N-D Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each [1]
switch position.
Connection: R
N switch:
Light green/blue – Red
D switch: Lg/Bu
Black/yellow – Red Bl/Y
Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty N-D shift switch

NC700SD:
[1]

Bl/Y
Lg/Bu

3. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
NC700XD: A18
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side [1]
right handlebar switch connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green/black – A18 Lg/Bl
Black/yellow – A29
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Light green/black Bl/Y
wire
• Open circuit in the Black/yellow wire
A29 [2]

NC700SD: A18
[1]

Lg/Bl

Bl/Y

A29 [2]

12-70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
A18
terminals and ground.
Connection: A18 – Ground
A29 – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Short circuit in the Black/yellow wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

A20 [1]

DTC 42 (SHIFT SWITCH)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the left handlebar switch and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD: NC700SD:
Disconnect the following:
[1] [2]
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Y/R
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop Y/R
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-71
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the switch side left
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each [1]
switch position. Y/R
Connection:
"+" switch:
Green/blue – Yellow/red
"–" switch: Lg/R
Light green/red – Yellow/red G/Bu
Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
Y/R
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty shift switch

NC700SD:
[1]

Lg/R
G/Bu

Y/R

3. Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit Inspection

Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
NC700XD:
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side [1] A7 [2]
left handlebar switch connector [1] and test harness
[2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/yellow – A7 Bu/Y
Light green/red – A30
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Open circuit in the Blue/yellow wire Lg/R
• Open circuit in the Light green/red wire

A30

NC700SD:
[1] A7 [2]
Bu/Y

Lg/R

A30

12-72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
A7 [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A7 – Ground
A30 – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Light green/red wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

A30

DTC 44 (EOT SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the EOT sensor 2P (Black) and
PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/green – A19
Is there continuity? Bu/G

YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Blue/green wire

[1] A19

2. EOT Sensor Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check the continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Blue/green – Ground
Bu/G
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Blue/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-73
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. EOT Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
G/Y
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

[2] [1] B22

4. EOT Sensor Resistance Inspection

Measure the resistance between the EOT sensor [1]
[1]
connector terminals.
Is the resistance within 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty EOT sensor

DTC 47 or 48 (No.1 or No.2 CLUTCH

EOP SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
G/Y Y/R
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.
[1]

12-74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] A6 [2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and test Y/G
harness [2] terminals.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – A6
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – A5
Is there continuity? Bl/G

YES – GO TO STEP 3.
A5
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Open circuit in the Black/green wire
3. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] terminal
and ground.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – Ground
Y/G or Bl/G
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Short circuit in the Black/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection

Replace the clutch EOP sensor with a known good
one (page 12-117).
Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 47 or 48 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original clutch EOP sensor
5. Clutch EOP Sensor Power/Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] [2] B14 B22
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – B14 Y/R
Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one G/Y
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-75
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 49 (CLUTCH LINE LOW OIL
PRESSURE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Engine Oil Level Inspection
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Is the engine oil level correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Add the recommended oil to the upper
level.
2. Clutch Line Oil Filter Condition Inspection
Check the clutch oil filter (page 3-14).
Is the oil filter in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Replace the clutch oil filter
3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 49 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor
4. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 49 indicated?
YES – • Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak in the clutch oil line
NO – Faulty original PCM

12-76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 51 (TR SENSOR)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the TR sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
G/Y Y/R
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

2. TR Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection

Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] [2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals
Connection: Black/pink – A28
Bl/P
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/pink wire

A28

3. TR Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/pink – Ground
Is there continuity?
Bl/P
YES – Short circuit in the Black/pink wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-77
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 51 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original TR sensor
5. TR Sensor Power/Ground Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] B14 [2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – B14 Y/R
Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one G/Y
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
B22

DTC 52 (NEUTRAL SWITCH)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the neutral switch and PCM 33P
(Gray) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 52 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. Neutral Switch Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2] [1]
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector [1] and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green – B30
Is there continuity? Lg
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Light green wire

B30

12-78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. Neutral Switch Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
[1]
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector terminal and ground.
Connection: Light green – Ground
Is there continuity?
Lg
YES – Short circuit in the Light green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Neutral Switch Inspection

Replace the neutral switch with a know good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 52 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 53 (INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR

SPEED LOW)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the inner mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] Br/Y G/Y
terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is there about battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-79
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
Gr/Y
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

3. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] A14
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow – A14
Is there continuity? Br/Y

YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Brown/yellow wire

[2]

4. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1] [2]
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one, G/Y
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

B22

12-80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

5. Inner Mainshaft Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/yellow – A20
Is there continuity? Gr/Y
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in the Gray/yellow wire

A20 [1]

6. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
Gr/Y
YES – Short circuit in the Gray/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 7.

7. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Inspection

Replace the inner mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and read the DTC with the
shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 53 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a new one, and
recheck.
NO – Faulty original inner mainshaft sensor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-81
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 54 (OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
SPEED LOW)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the outer mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] W/Bu G/Y
terminals.
Connection: White/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is there about battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

2. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection

Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
P/Y
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 7.
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

3. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] A25
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: White/blue – A25
Is there continuity? W/Bu

YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the White/blue wire

[2]

12-82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1] [2]
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one, G/Y
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

B22

5. Outer Mainshaft Output Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/yellow – A21
Is there continuity? P/Y
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire

A21 [1]

6. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short

Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/Y
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 7.

7. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Inspection

Replace the outer mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and read the DTC with the
shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 54 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM sensor with a new one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original outer mainshaft sensor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-83
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 55 (No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector. Bu
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Blue – Gray

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)

Is the resistance within standard range?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty linear solenoid valve Gr

2. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2] A9 [1]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals. Gr/W
Connection: Gray/white – A9
Blue/white – A10
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
Bu/W
NO – • Open circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Open circuit in the Blue/white wire
A10

3. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Gray/white – Ground
Blue/white – Ground Gr/W

Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Short circuit in the Blue/white wire Bu/W
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

12-84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 56 (No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector. Y
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow – White/red

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)

Is the resistance within standard range?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty linear solenoid valve W/R

2. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[1] [2] A11
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/white – A11 P/W
Brown/white – A22
Is there continuity?
Br/W
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Brown/white wire
A22

3. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line

Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground P/W
Brown/white – Ground
Br/W
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Short circuit in the Brown/white wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-85
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 57 (GEARSHIFT MECHANISM/
GEAR POSITION MALFUNCTION)
See page 12-66

DTC 58 (No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT

DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the dual clutch assembly and inspect the
clutch for sticking (page 12-105).
Is the No.1 clutch stuck?
YES – Faulty clutch assembly
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Clutch Oil Line Inspection
Check the clutch oil passages in the right crankcase
cover and mainshaft for clogging.
Is the oil passage clogged?
YES – Clean the oil passage.
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 59 (No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT

DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
See page 12-86

DTC 61, 62 (No.1 CLUTCH OIL

PRESSURE MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 47 or 55 indicated?
YES – • DTC 47 indicated (page 12-74).
• DTC 55 indicated (page 12-84).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. No.1 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty original No.1 clutch EOP sensor

12-86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES – • Faulty No.1 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.1 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.1 clutch oil
line
NO – Faulty original PCM

DTC 63, 64 (No.2 CLUTCH OIL

PRESSURE MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 48 or 56 indicated?
YES – • DTC 48 indicated (page 12-74).
• DTC 56 indicated (page 12-85).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. No.2 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 63 or 64 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty original No.2 clutch EOP sensor
3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 4-
67).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 63 or 64 indicated?
YES – • Faulty No.2 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.2 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.2 clutch oil
line
NO – Faulty original PCM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-87
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 65 (FRONT AND REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting the inspection, check that the tire

sizes are correct, and the drive and driven sprockets
are the specified ones.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 or 67 indicated?
YES – • DTC 66 indicated (page 12-89).
• DTC 67 indicated (page 12-90).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the front wheel speed sensor air gap (page
20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.
3. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the front wheel speed
sensor.
Check that there is no iron or other magnetic
deposits between the pulser ring and wheel speed
sensor, and check the pulser ring slots for
obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage.
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.
4. VS Sensor Condition Inspection
Remove the VS sensor (page 22-18).
Check the VS sensor for damage or contaminated.
Is the VS sensor in good condition?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Replace the VS sensor with a known good
one, and recheck.

12-88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC 66 (VS SENSOR NO SIGNAL)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure
2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
P/Bu G/R
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Output Line Inspection

Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
[1]
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V? P/G
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-89
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. VS Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
[2]
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/green – A32
Is there continuity? P/G
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

A32 [1]

5. VS Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
P/G
YES – Short circuit in the Pink/green wire
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

6. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty original VS sensor

DTC 67 (FRONT WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR NO SIGNAL)

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue), ABS modulator 25P and PCM 33P
connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 67 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

12-90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. ABS Problem Code Inspection
Check the ABS problem code (page 20-8).
Does the ABS modulator have any problem
code?
YES – Follow the problem code index (page 20-
10).
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
A33
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A33
V/R
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

[2] [1]

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit

Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
[1] A33
terminal and ground.
Connection: A33 – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in the Violet/red wire
NO – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 68 (No.1 CLUTCH OPERATION

MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES – Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page 12-
89).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-91
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.1 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty No.1 clutch assembly

DTC 69 (No.2 CLUTCH OPERATION

MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES – Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page 12-
89).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.2 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty No.2 clutch assembly

DTC 71, 72 (INNER, OUTER

MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
RATIO FAILURE)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck 1
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 53, 54 or 66 indicated?
YES – • Refer to DTC 53 troubleshooting (page
12-79).
• Refer to DTC 54 troubleshooting (page
12-82).
• Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page
12-89).
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

12-92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. DTC Recheck 2
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 71 or 72 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 84 (CPU IN THE PCM

MALFUNCTION)

• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 84 indicated?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure

DTC 1 (SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR

(OPTIONAL) MALFUNCTION)

• Before starting this inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the shift pedal angle sensor 3P
(Black) connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector
and recheck the MIL.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following
procedure.
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
– DCT Shift Pedal (Optional) Registration (page 12-
118)
• If the DCT shift pedal (optional) is removed from the
vehicle, perform the DCT Shift Pedal Registration
Cancellation (page 12-119).
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTC’s (page 12-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Operate the DCT shift pedal up and down several
times with the engine stopped.
Recheck the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-
13).
Is the DTC 1 indicated?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Intermittent failure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-93
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector Y/R G/Y
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

3. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Open Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
B14 [2]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the shift pedal angle
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test harness [2]
terminals. Y/R
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Yellow/red – B14
Is there continuity?
G/Y
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – • Open circuit in Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in Yellow/red wire [1] B22

4. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Open

Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[2]
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the shift pedal angle
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test harness [2] Y/V
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/violet – B19
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in Yellow/violet wire

[1] B19

12-94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

5. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
[1]
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
and ground.
Connection: Yellow/violet – Ground
Is there continuity?
Y/V
YES – Short circuit in Yellow/violet wire
NO – GO TO STEP 6.

6. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Resistance Inspection

Measure the resistance at the sensor side shift
[1]
pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – Blue/green
Standard: 4 – 6 kΩ (20°C/68°F)
Y/R Bu/G
Operate the DCT shift pedal to check that the
resistance changes in accordance with the pedal
operation.
Connection: Yellow/blue – Blue/green Y/Bu Bu/G

When moving the pedal up:

Resistance increases
When moving the pedal down:
Resistance decreases
Are the resistance inspections normal?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Faulty shift pedal angle sensor, replace the
DCT shift pedal as an assembly.

MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING
If the mode indicator does not operate, check that the
[1] [2]
combination meter shows following when the ignition
switch is turned ON with the engine stop switch " ".
– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on.
If so, check the TXD/RXD line (page 22-11).
If not so, replace the combination meter.

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-95
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

AT/MT MODE SWITCH
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the engine can be started but AT/MT mode cannot be
changed, perform this troubleshooting.

• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or

poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the AT/MT mode
switch operation.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. AT/MT mode switch Power Input Voltage
Inspection
Disconnect the following:
NC700XD: NC700SD:
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
[1] [2]
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ". Bl/W Bl/W
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in the Black/white wire
between the right handlebar switch
connector and fuse/relay box (FI fuse)
2. AT/MT mode switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position. Bl/W
Connection: Black/white – Blue/black
Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty AT/MT mode switch

Bu/Bl

[1]

NC700SD:

Bl/W

Bu/Bl

[1]

12-96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. AT/MT mode switch Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
NC700XD:
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P [1] [2]
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: White/yellow – A27

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110 W/Y
Is there continuity?
YES – Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
NO – Open circuit in the White/yellow wire A27

NC700SD:
[1] [2]

W/Y

A27

RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER

REMOVAL
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
[1]
Remove the following:
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700SD) (page 2-15)
– Right engine side cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector [1] and remove it from the ABS modulator
stay.

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and

release the CKP sensor harness.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-97
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].
[5]/[6]
Remove the following:
– Bolt and shift spindle angle sensor [2]
– Bolt [3] and wire clip stay [4]
– Bolts [5] and wire clamps [6]
Remove the wire harness and shift spindle angle
sensor wire from the right crankcase cover.

[2] [3]/[4] [1]

Do not allow dust or Remove the bolts [1] and hose clamp [2].
[1] [2]
dirt to enter the oil
Remove the right crankcase cover [3].
passages.

[3]

Remove the oil joint pipe [1] and dowel pins [2].
[2]
Remove the O-rings from the joint pipe.
Remove the seal rings [3] from the mainshaft end.

[3] [1]

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE BODY

DISASSEMBLY

• Keep dust and dirt away from all the parts.

• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces of the
valve body components.
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
[3] [2]
Remove the right crankcase cover wire clamp bolt [1]
and wire clamp [2].
Remove the wire grommets [3] from the right crankcase
cover.

[1]

12-98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Remove the bolts [1] and linear solenoid valve body [2].
[1]

[2]

Remove the separate plate [1] and dowel pins [2],

[1] [2]

Remove the bolts [1] and valve body cover [2].

[1] [3]
Remove the wire grommet [3] from the valve body
cover.

[2]

Remove the bolt [1], linear solenoid valves [2] and

[1] [3]
stopper plate [3] from the valve body.
Remove the stopper plate from the linear solenoid
valves.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-99
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Wash all the parts with a high flash point or non-
[1]
flammable solvent and blow through all oil passages
with compressed air to clean completely.
Check the linear solenoid valves [1] and valve body [2]
for scratches, scoring or damage.

[2]

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE BODY

ASSEMBLY

Clean all the parts with compressed air. Make sure that
there is no dust or lint on any parts.

VALVE BODY LINEAR SOLENOID VALVES

VALVE BODY COVER

CKP SENSOR MOUNTING BOLTS

STOPPER PLATE

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

SEPARATE PLATE
WIRE CLAMP

DOWEL PIN

Coat linear solenoid valves [1] with engine oil.

[2]
Set the stopper plate [2] into the grooves in the solenoid
valves.

[1]

12-100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the linear solenoid valves [1] and stopper plate
[3] [2]
[2] into the valve body.
Apply locking agent to the threads of the stopper plate
bolt [3] (page 12-4).
Install the stopper plate bolt and tighten it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[1]

Set the wire grommet [1] into the groove in the body
[1]
cover [2].
Install the valve body cover onto the valve body and
tighten the bolts securely.

[2]

Check the oil filter screen [1] and packing [2] for [3] [4]
damage and replace them if necessary.
Install the dowel pins [3] and separate plate [4] onto the
right crankcase cover.

[2] [1]

Install the valve body [1] and bolts [2], and tighten the
[2]
bolts in the sequence as shown.
4
2
6

5
3
[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-101
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or equivalent)
[1]/[2] [4]
to the CKP sensor wire grommet and linear solenoid
valve wire grommet sealing surface.
Set the linear solenoid valve wire grommet [1] and CKP
sensor wire grommet [2] into the groove in the right
crankcase cover.
Apply locking agent to the threads of the right
crankcase cover wire clamp bolts [3] (page 12-4).
Install the wire clamp [4] and tighten bolts.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).
[3]

OIL GUIDE COLLAR REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
[1]
Remove the snap ring [1] from the right crankcase
cover.

Remove the oil guide collar [1] from the right crankcase
[2]
cover with the special tool.

TOOL:
Bearing remover, 20 mm [2] 07931-MA70000
Remove the O-rings from the oil guide collar.

[1]

Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
[1]
into the grooves in the oil guide collar [2].
Install the oil guide collar into the right crankcase cover
until it is seated.

[2]

12-102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the snap ring [1] into the right crankcase cover
[1]
groove with the chamfered edge facing in.
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).

INSTALLATION
Do not allow dust or Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
[2]
dirt to enter the oil onto the oil joint pipe [2].
passages.
Install the oil joint pipe into the oil pump.

[1]

Install the dowel pins [1].

[1]
Apply engine oil to new seal rings [2] and install them
into the mainshaft grooves.
Push in the seal rings to seat them into the grooves.

[2]
Clean the right crankcase cover mating surfaces
thoroughly.
Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the right crankcase cover mating surface as shown.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-103
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the right crankcase cover [1].
[2] [3]
Install the bolts [2] with the hose clamp [3] and tighten
them in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.

[1]

Route the wire harness and shift spindle angle sensor

Align
wire on the right crankcase cover properly (page 1-25).
Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it onto
the shift spindle angle sensor [2].
Install the shift spindle angle sensor by aligning the flat
surfaces of the sensor and spindle.

[1] [2]

Install the following:

[1]/[2]
– Wire clamps [1] and bolts [2]
– Wire clip stay [3] and bolt [4]
Install the shift spindle angle sensor bolt [5] and tighten
it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [6].
(Connector with no mark to the upper sensor, connector
with "P" mark to the middle sensor and connector with
"1" mark to the lower sensor.)

[5] [3]/[4] [6]

Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].

[1]

12-104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Connect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[1]
[1] and install it to the ABS modulator stay.
Install the following:
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700SD) (page 2-15)
– Right engine side cover (page 2-30)
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

DUAL CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
[2] [1]
Align the gear teeth of the primary drive gear and sub-
gear [1] by prying the gears through the holes [2] and
hold them with a 6 mm socket bolt [3].

[3]

Remove the ball bearing [1].

[1]
Remove the dual clutch assembly [2] from the
mainshaft.

[2]

Remove the seal rings [1] from the mainshaft grooves.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-105
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DISASSEMBLY
Remove clutch guide 1 [1], clutch guide 2 [2] and
[1]
washers [3] from the clutches.

[2] [3]

Remove the clutch assemblies [1] and O-rings [2] from

[1]
the primary driven gear.

• Do not disassemble the clutch assembly.

• The No.1 clutch assembly (for inner mainshaft) and
No.2 clutch assembly (for outer mainshaft) are the
same parts.

[2]

CLUTCH CLEARANCE INSPECTION

Set a dial indicator on the end plate [1] with the plate
bottomed.
Measure the clearance by lifting the end plate against
the snap ring and record it.
Perform this inspection at three points in 120° apart.
SERVICE LIMIT: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
If the measured value exceeds the service limit, replace
the clutch assembly. 120° 120°

120°

[1]

ASSEMBLY
Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
[2]
into the grooves in the primary driven gear.
Install the clutch assemblies [2] onto the primary driven
gear.

[1]

12-106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Apply engine oil to the needle bearings in the primary
[3]
driven gear.

The primary driven gear has the index line [1] on its
flange for the installation direction. The dual clutch
assembly should be installed with the index line facing
the outside.
Line up the clutch disc tabs with the two wide grooves
[2] aligned as shown.
Install the washer [3] onto the clutch assembly.
Install clutch guide 1 [4] into the clutch on the index line
side by aligning the gear teeth with the clutch disc tabs.
[1] [2] [4]

Turn over the dual clutch assembly while holding clutch

[2]
guide 1.
Apply engine oil to the needle bearings in the primary
driven gear.
Line up the clutch disc tabs with the two wide grooves
[1] aligned as shown.
Install the washer [2] onto the clutch assembly.
Install clutch guide 2 [3] into the clutch by aligning the
gear teeth with the clutch disc tabs.

[1] [3]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to new seal rings [1] and install them
[1]
into the mainshaft grooves.
Push in the seal rings to seat them into the grooves.

Install the dual clutch assembly [1] onto the mainshaft,

[2]
being careful not to damage the seal rings.
Install the ball bearing [2] onto clutch guide 1 with the
marked side facing out.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-107
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Remove the 6 mm socket bolt [1] to free the primary
[2]
drive gear and sub-gear [2].
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).

[1]

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR

ROTOR
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
[4] [2] [3] [5]
Hold the primary drive gear and sub-gear with a 6 mm
socket bolt (page 12-105).
Install the special tool between the primary drive and
driven gears, and loosen the primary drive gear bolt [1].
TOOL:
Gear holder, M2.5 [2] 07724-0010100

Do not separate the Remove the primary drive gear bolt, washer [3], CKP
sub-gear from the sensor rotor [4] and primary drive gear/sub-gear [5]
primary drive gear from the crankshaft.
unless necessary.
[1]

INSTALLATION
Install the primary drive gear/sub-gear [1] and CKP
[2] [1]
sensor rotor [2] onto the crankshaft by aligning their
wide grooves with the wide tooth.

Align

Apply engine oil to the primary drive gear bolt threads

[2] [1]
and seating surface.
Install the washer [1] and primary drive gear bolt [2].
Install the special tool between the primary drive and
driven gears, and tighten the primary drive gear bolt.
TOOL:
Gear holder, M2.5 [3] 07724-0010100

TORQUE: 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

Remove the 6 mm socket bolt [4] to free the primary
drive gear and sub-gear.
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).
[3] [4]

12-108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION
GEARS
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
[3]
– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[1].
Remove the bolts [2] and shift control motor [3].

[2] [1]

Remove the bolt [1], wire clip stay [2] and TR sensor [3].
[3] [1]

[2]

Remove the bolts [1] and reduction gear cover [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the dowel pins [1] and gasket [2].

[3] [2]
Remove the reduction gears [3].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-109
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

INSTALLATION

REDUCTION GEAR
O-RING CASE COVER

TR SENSOR
GASKET

REDUCTION GEAR C

REDUCTION GEAR B

REDUCTION GEAR A
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

O-RING

14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft) SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR

Apply 2 – 4 g (0.07 – 0.14 oz) of specified grease to the

Align [2] [3]
reduction gear journals and teeth.
SPECIFIED GREASE: Templex N3 grease (ESSO)
Install reduction gear B [1] and align the gear ends with
the ribs of the crankcase. Then install reduction gear C
[2] so the punch marks [3] on the gear and shift spindle
line up as shown.
Install reduction gear A [4].

[4] [1] Align

Install the dowel pins [1] and a new gasket [2].

[2]

[1]

12-110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the reduction gear cover [1] and bolts [2], and
[2]
tighten the bolts.

TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

[1]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
[1]
the groove in the TR sensor [2].
Install the TR sensor into the crankcase by aligning the
flat surfaces of the sensor and shift drum end.

[2] Align

Install the wire clip stay [1] and TR sensor bolt [2], and
[2]
tighten the bolt.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[1]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
[1]
the groove in the shift control motor [2].

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-111
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the shift control motor [1] and bolts [2], and
[1]
tighten the bolts.
TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Connect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[3].
Install the following:
– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)

[2] [3]

GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
[2]
– Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
– Dual clutch (page 12-105)
– Gearshift spindle [1]
– Washer [2]

[1]

– Drum shifter collar [1]

[2]
– Bolts [2]
– Drum shifter guide plate/drum shifter assembly [3]

[3] [1]

– Guide plate distance collar [1]

[1] [4]
– Stopper arm side collar [2]
– Shift drum center bolt [3]
– Shift drum center [4]

[3] [2]

12-112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

– Shift drum stopper arm [1]
[4] [3]
– Stopper arm return spring [2]
– Stopper arm distance collar [3]
– Shift drum center dowel pins [4]
– 8 x 20 mm dowel pins [5] if necessary

[5] [1] [2]

INSPECTION
Check the gearshift spindle [1] and gearshift arm [2] for
[3]
wear or damage.
Check the return spring [3] for fatigue or damage.

[2] [1]

Check the drum shifter guide plate [1], drum shifter [2],
[3] [4] [5]
ratchet pawls [3] and plungers [4] for wear or damage.
Check the plunger springs [5] for fatigue or damage.

[1] [2]

INSTALLATION
Install the following:
[2] [3]
– 8 x 20 mm dowel pins [1]
– Shift drum center dowel pins [2]
– Stopper arm distance collar [3]
– Stopper arm return spring [4]
– Shift drum stopper arm [5]

[1] [5] [4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-113
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Hold the shift drum stopper arm [1] with a screwdriver
[3] [4]
and install the shift drum center [2] by aligning the
groove [3] with the dowel pin [4].

[2] [1]

Apply locking agent to the threads of the shift drum

[3]
center bolt [1] (page 12-4).
Install the shift drum center bolt and tighten it.
TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
Install the stopper arm side collar [2] and guide plate
distance collar [3].

[1] [2]

Install the plunger springs [1], plungers [2] and ratchet

[3] [2] [1]
pawls [3] into the drum shifter [4] and set them in the
drum shifter guide plate [5].

[5] [4]

Install the drum shifter guide plate/drum shifter

[2]
assembly [1].
Apply locking agent to the threads of the guide plate
bolts [2] (page 12-4).
Install the guide plate bolts and tighten them.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the drum shifter collar [3] onto the drum shifter.

[1] [3]

12-114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Install the washer [1] onto the gearshift spindle [2] and
[1] Align
insert the spindle into the crankcase while aligning the
return spring ends with spring pin and the spindle arm
hole with the drum shifter collar.
Install the following:
– Dual clutch (page 12-107)
– Reduction gears/shift control motor (page 12-110)

[2] Align

MAINSHAFT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

The mainshaft sensors and VS sensor are the same

parts.
Inner mainshaft Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
[1]
sensor:
Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1] from the outer mainshaft sensor [2].
[5]
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector [3] from the inner mainshaft sensor [4].
[2]
Remove the bolt [5] and mainshaft sensor.
Remove the O-ring [6] from the mainshaft sensor.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[6]

• Replace the O-ring with a new one. [5]

• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

[4]

[6]

[3]

TR SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
[1]
– Center cross plate (page 2-32)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
remove it from the ABS modulator stay.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-115
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Remove the wire band [1] and release the wires and
[1] [2]
hose from the stay [2].

Remove the bolt [1], wire clip stay [2] and TR sensor [3].
[3] [1]
Remove the O-ring [4] from the TR sensor.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[4]
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
• Align the flat surfaces of the TR sensor and shift
drum end.

TORQUE:
TR sensor bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
[2] Align

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700SD) (page 2-13)
– Right engine side cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector [1] and remove it from the ABS modulator
stay.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and clamps [2].

[1]/[2]
Remove the bolts [3] and wire clip stay [4].
Remove the shift spindle angle sensor wire clip [5] from
the clip stay.
Remove the shift spindle angle sensor bolt [6] and shift
spindle angle sensor [7].
[7]

[6] [3]/[4] [5]

12-116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Remove the O-ring [1] from the shift spindle angle
Align
sensor [2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-ring with a new one.

• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
• Align the flat surfaces of the shift spindle angle
sensor and gearshift spindle end.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
[1] [2]

CLUTCH EOP SENSOR

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
[3]
The No.1 clutch Disconnect the 3P connector [4] from the clutch EOP
EOP sensor [1], sensor.
clutch line EOP
Remove the clutch EOP sensor and O-rings from the
sensor [2] and No.2
right crankcase cover.
clutch EOP sensor
[3] are the same
parts.

[2]

[1] [4]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
[2]
the right crankcase cover.
Install the clutch EOP sensor [2] and tighten it.
TORQUE: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
Connect the 3P connector to the proper sensor.

Each sensor wires has the following identification mark

near the connector.
• 1: No.1 clutch (lower) EOP sensor
• P: Clutch line (middle) EOP sensor
• No mark: No.2 clutch (upper) EOP sensor
[1]
Install the lower cowl (page 2-29).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-117
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

EOT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
[1] [2]
Remove the EOT sensor [2] and sealing washer [3]
from the crankcase.
Apply engine oil to the EOT sensor threads and seating
surface.
Install the EOT sensor with a new sealing washer and
tighten it.
TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Connect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.

[3]

DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL)

REGISTRATION (TO ENABLE THE
PEDAL)

• The following registration procedure must be

performed in order to enable the optional shift pedal.
• Make sure that the CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING
(PCM) (page 12-120) is complete before starting the
registration.
• The registration will fail if any of the following
condition presents during the procedure.
– The vehicle is moved.
– The engine is started.
– The transmission is in gear.
– The shift pedal is operated incorrectly.
– The shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector
is disconnected.
1. Install the shift pedal to the vehicle and connect the
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Indicators start blinking
After 2 seconds, "S" [1] and "D" [2] indicators will simultaneously.
start short blinking (0.5 seconds) simultaneously.

• The short blinking lasts 5 seconds.

Within 5 seconds after blinking starts, move the shift
pedal [3] up and hold for 1 second.
Within 5 seconds after moving the shift pedal up,
move it down and hold for 1 second.
[2] [1]

1: UP for 1 second.

[3]

2: DOWN for 1 second.

12-118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. If the "S" and "D" indicators start short blinking (0.5
Successful:
seconds) alternately, registration is successful.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

• If the "S" and "D" indicators go OFF during the

procedure, registration is unsuccessful. Turn the
ignition switch OFF and perform the registration
procedure from step 2 again.
Indicators blink alternately.

Unsuccessful:

Both go OFF

REGISTRATION CANCELLATION (TO

DISABLE THE PEDAL)

• The registration must be cancelled after removing

the optional shift pedal from the vehicle. If the
registration is not cancelled, DTC 1-1 (DTC 1 blink)
"SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR MALFUNCTION"
will be indicated.
• The cancellation will fail if any of the following
condition presents during the procedure.
– The vehicle is moved.
– The engine is started.
– The transmission is in gear.
– The shift switch (+)/(–) is operated incorrectly.
– The shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector
is connected.
1. Remove the shift pedal from the vehicle and
disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black)
connector.
2. While pressing down and holding the shift switch (+)
[1] and shift switch (–) [2], turn the ignition switch
ON.
The "S" [3] and "D" [4] indicators will start short [1]
blinking (0.5 seconds) simultaneously.

• Do not release the shift switch (+) and shift switch

(–) until the successful pattern described in the next
step is indicated.

[2]

[4] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-119
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

3. After 5 seconds, the "S" and "D" indicators will start
Successful:
short blinking (0.5 seconds) alternately.
If so, cancellation is successful.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

• If the "S" and "D" indicators go OFF during the

procedure, cancellation is unsuccessful. Turn the
ignition switch OFF and perform the cancellation
procedure from step 1 again. Indicators blink alternately.

Unsuccessful:

Both go OFF

CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING (PCM)

• If the PCM and/or clutch assembly are replaced,
perform this procedure.
• Before starting this procedure, check the following:
– PGM-FI system and DCT system have no DTC.
– Engine idle speed is normal.
– Transmission is in neutral and cooling fan stops.
• Do not operate the throttle during clutch initialize
learning
1. Warm up the engine to the normal operating
Extremely low oil Low oil temperature:
temperature (engine oil temperature: 50 – 110°C/
122 – 230°F) and stop it. temperature:
[1] [1]

If the PCM is replaced with a new one, the "D" and "S"
indicators [1] come on to indicate that the clutch
initialize learning is necessary when the ignition switch
is turned ON. Further the large "L" [2] (extremely low oil
temperature) or small "L" [3] (low oil temperature) is
displayed on the shift indicator to indicate that the
engine warming up is necessary if it is not warmed.

[2] [3]

12-120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

2. Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " " while pushing the D switch [1] of the N-D
shift switch. The MIL [2] will come on.
Release the D switch after the MIL goes off.
• When only the dual clutch assembly is replaced:
No indication appears on the shift indicator [3].
• When the PCM is replaced:
The "D" and "S" indicators [4] come on.

[1]
[2]

[3] [4]

3. Operate the N-D shift switch [1] in the sequence as

follows:
– Push the D switch
– Push the D switch
– Push the N switch
– Push the D switch
– Push the N switch
• When only the dual clutch assembly is replaced:
The PCM is ready to clutch initialize learning when
the "D" and "S" indicators [2] lights, and the "–" [3] is [1]
displayed on the shift indicator and blinks at interval
of 2 seconds. [2]
• When the PCM is replaced: [3]
The PCM is ready to clutch initialize learning when
the "–" is displayed on the shift indicator and blinks
at interval of 2 seconds.

When the engine is not warmed up enough, the large

"L" [4] (extremely low oil temperature) or small "L" [5]
(low oil temperature) is displayed on the shift indicator.
If so, warm up it until the "L" on the shift indicator goes
off. Stop the engine and perform the steps 2 and 3
again.

[4] [5]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12-121
 dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

4. Start the engine and let it idle. The "–" [1] on the shift
indicator starts blinking at interval of 2 seconds. The [1] [2]
Clutch Initialize Learning is successful, when the "–",
"D" and "S" indicators [2] go off.
Stop the engine.

The clutch initialize learning is unsuccessful, if the "–"

starts blinking at interval of 0.5 second or it goes off,
and the "D" and "S" indicators stay on. Perform the
initialize learning procedure from step 2 again.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Restart the engine, push the D switch of the N-D
shift switch and check that the "D" indicator comes
on.

12-122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

13. ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························13-2 FLYWHEEL ················································· 13-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························13-4 STARTER CLUTCH ·································· 13-10

TROUBLESHOOTING·································13-4 STATOR ···················································· 13-13

ALTERNATOR COVER·······························13-5

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-1
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
COMPONENT LOCATION
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)

13-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
NC700XD/SD:

157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-3
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the alternator and starter clutch. All service can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
• For alternator inspection (page 21-9).
• For CKP sensor inspection (page 5-6).
• For starter motor service (page 6-8).

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Starter driven gear boss O.D. 57.749 – 57.768 (2.2736 – 2.2743) 57.73 (2.273)
Starter clutch outer I.D. 74.412 – 74.442 (2.9296 – 2.9308) 74.46 (2.931)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Flywheel mounting bolt 1 12 157 (16.0, 116) Left hand thread
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Starter clutch socket bolt 6 8 30 (3.1, 22) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Alternator stator mounting bolt 4 6 10 (1.0, 7) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Alternator wire clamp bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

TROUBLESHOOTING
Starter motor turns, but engine does not turn
• Faulty starter clutch
• Damaged starter reduction gear/shaft
• Damaged starter idle gear/shaft
• Damaged or faulty starter motor pinion gear
• Damaged starter driven gear

13-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
ALTERNATOR COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
[3] [1] [3]
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
– Guard pipe (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-30)
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].
Align
Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2] [1]
Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]
Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-5
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Release the battery box drain hose (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [3]
[1] from the stay.
[4]
Loosen the alternator cover bolts [2] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts and stays
[2]
[3].
Remove the alternator cover [4].

The alternator cover (stator) is magnetically attracted to

the flywheel, be careful during removal.

[1]

NC700XD/SD:
[4]

[2] [3]

Remove the dowel pins [1], oil orifice [2] and O-ring [3].
[1] [2]/[3]
Clean off any sealant from the alternator cover mating
surfaces.

[1]

Do not loosen the alternator cover sealing bolt [1].

[1]

13-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or

equivalent) to the alternator cover mating surface as
shown.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the alternator wire grommet sealing
surface.
• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 1-
25).
• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame
tab.
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

FLYWHEEL
REMOVAL
Remove the alternator cover (page 13-5).
[4] [2]
Remove the starter idle gear shaft [1] and starter idle
gear [2].
Remove the starter reduction gear shaft [3] and starter
reduction gear [4].

[3] [1]

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool and loosen
[3] [2]/[4]
the flywheel mounting bolt [2].
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [3] 07725-0040001

The flywheel mounting bolt has left hand threads.

Remove the flywheel mounting bolt and washer [4].

[1]

Remove the flywheel [1] using the special tool.

[1]
TOOL:
Rotor puller [2] 07933-3290001

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-7
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Remove the washer [1] and needle bearing [2].
[2] [3]
Remove the woodruff key [3].

Be careful not to damage the key groove and

crankshaft.

[1]

INSPECTION
STARTER REDUCTION GEAR/STARTER IDLE
GEAR
Check the starter reduction gear [1] and shaft [2] for
[1]
wear or damage and replace it if necessary.
Check the starter idle gear [3] and shaft [4] for wear or
damage and replace it if necessary. [2]

[3]

[4]

NEEDLE BEARING
Check the needle bearing [1] for abnormal wear or
[1]
damage.
Replace it if necessary.

STARTER CLUTCH OPERATION

Check the operation of the one-way clutch by turning
[1]
the starter driven gear [1].
You should be able to turn the starter driven gear
counterclockwise smoothly, but the gear should not turn
clockwise.
For starter clutch service (page 13-10).

13-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
INSTALLATION
Install the woodruff key [1].
[2] [1]

Be careful not to damage the key groove and

crankshaft.
Apply engine oil to the needle bearing rotating area.
Install the needle bearing [2] and washer [3].

[3]

Clean any oil from the crankshaft tapered area and

[1]
flywheel thoroughly.
Install the flywheel [1] to the crankshaft.

Align
Align the woodruff key with flywheel keyway.

Apply engine oil to the flywheel mounting bolt threads

[4] [1]/[2]
and seating surface.
Install the washer [1] and flywheel mounting bolt [2].
Hold the flywheel [3] using the special tool and tighten
the flywheel mounting bolt to the specified torque.
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [4] 07725-0040001

TORQUE: 157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)

The flywheel mounting bolt has left hand threads.

[3]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the starter reduction

[1] [3] [5]
and idle gear shaft outer surface.
Install the starter reduction gear [1] and shaft [2].
Install the starter idle gear [3] and shaft [4].

Install the starter reduction gear with its "OUT" mark [5]
facing out.
Install the alternator cover (page 13-5).

[2] [4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-9
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
STARTER CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the flywheel (page 13-7).
[1]
Remove the starter driven gear [1] while turning the
starter driven gear counterclockwise.

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool and remove
[1] [3]
the starter clutch socket bolt [2].
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [3] 07725-0040001

[2]

Remove the starter clutch assembly [1].

[1]

Remove the starter one-way clutch [1] from the starter

[2] [1]
clutch outer [2].

13-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
INSPECTION
Check the starter driven gear for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the starter driven gear boss O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 57.73 mm (2.273 in)

Check the starter clutch outer [1] inner surface for

abnormal wear or damage and replace them if
necessary.
Measure the clutch outer I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 74.46 mm (2.931 in)
Check the starter one-way clutch [2] for abnormal wear
or damage and replace them if necessary.

[1] [2]

INSTALLATION

STARTER DRIVEN GEAR

STARTER CLUTCH OUTER

ONE-WAY CLUTCH

FLYWHEEL
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-11
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Apply engine oil to the starter one-way clutch [1] sliding
[1]
surface.
Install the starter one-way clutch to the starter clutch
outer [2].

[2]

Install the starter clutch assembly [1].

[1]

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool.

[1] [2]
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [2] 07725-0040001
Apply locking agent to the starter clutch socket bolt
threads (page 13-4).
Install and tighten the starter clutch socket bolt [3] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the starter driven gear [1] into the starter clutch
[1]
outer while turning the starter driven gear
counterclockwise.
Recheck the one-way clutch operation (page 13-8).
Install the flywheel (page 13-9).

13-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
STATOR
REMOVAL
Remove the alternator cover (page 13-5).
[5]
Remove the alternator wire clamp bolt [1], wire clamp
[2] and grommet [3] from the alternator cover.
Remove the alternator stator mounting bolts [4] and
stator [5].

[3]

[1]

[2] [4]

INSTALLATION
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

WIRE CLAMP
STATOR

ALTERNATOR COVER

Install the stator [1] to the alternator cover.

[3] [1]
Apply locking agent to the alternator stator mounting
bolt threads (page 13-4).
Tighten the alternator stator mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the alternator wire grommet [3] sealing surface, then [5]
install it into the alternator cover groove securely.
Apply locking agent to the alternator wire clamp bolt
threads (page 13-4).
Install the wire clamp [4] and alternator wire clamp bolt [4] [2]
[5].
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Install the alternator cover (page 13-5).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13-13
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

14. CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························14-2 TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ········· 14-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························14-4 TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD)·············· 14-17

TROUBLESHOOTING·································14-6 BALANCER··············································· 14-26

CRANKCASE SEPARATION······················14-7 CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY ······················· 14-28

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-1
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
COMPONENT LOCATION
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150°
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

14-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
NC700XD/SD:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150° 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-3
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Transmission
– Balancer
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• The following components must be removed before separating the crankcase:
– Engine (page 16-5)
– Clutch (page 11-7)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (page 11-15)
– Gearshift linkage (page 11-16)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Cylinder head (page 10-16)
– Oil strainer (page 9-11)
– Oil pump (page 9-6)
– Engine oil filter (page 3-13)
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– EOP switch (page 22-20)
– VS sensor (page 22-18)
– Neutral switch (page 22-28)
• Be careful not to damage the crankcase mating surfaces when servicing.
• Prior to assembling the crankcase halves, apply sealant to their mating surfaces. Wipe off excess sealant thoroughly.

GENERAL (NC700XD/SD)
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Transmission
– Balancer
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• The following components must be removed before separating the crankcase:
– Engine (page 16-9)
– Engine oil filter (page 3-13)
– EOP switch (page 22-20)
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– Cylinder head (page 10-16)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
– Neutral switch (page 22-28)
– Dual clutch (page 12-105)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (page 12-108)
– Gearshift linkage (page 12-112)
– Oil pump (page 9-8)
– Mainshaft sensors (page 12-115)
– VS sensor (page 22-18)
– EOT sensor (page 12-118)
– Oil strainer (page 9-11)
• Be careful not to damage the crankcase mating surfaces when servicing.
• Prior to assembling the crankcase halves, apply sealant to their mating surfaces. Wipe off excess sealant thoroughly.

14-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SPECIFICATIONS (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Transmission Gear I.D. M5, M6, C1 28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032) 28.04 (1.104)
C2, C3, C4 31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215) 31.04 (1.222)
Gear bushing M5, M6 27.959 – 27.980 (1.1007 – 1.1016) 27.94 (1.100)
O.D. C2 30.955 – 30.980 (1.2187 – 1.2197) 30.93 (1.218)
C3, C4 30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195) 30.93 (1.218)
Gear-to-bushing M5, M6 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.08 (0.003)
clearance C2 0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028) 0.10 (0.004)
C3, C4 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
Gear bushing I.D. M5 25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851) 25.04 (0.986)
C2 27.985 – 28.006 (1.1018 – 1.1026) 28.02 (1.103)
Mainshaft O.D. At M5 bushing 24.972 – 24.993 (0.9831 – 0.9840) 24.95 (0.982)
Countershaft O.D. At C2 bushing 27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016) 27.95 (1.100)
Bushing-to-shaft M5 0.007 – 0.049 (0.0003 – 0.0020) 0.09 (0.004)
clearance C2 0.005 – 0.039 (0.0002 – 0.0015) 0.06 (0.002)
Shift fork, Fork I.D. 12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731) 12.03 (0.474)
fork shaft Claw thickness 5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236) 5.9 (0.23)
Shift fork shaft O.D. 11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712) 11.95 (0.470)

SPECIFICATIONS (NC700XD/SD)
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Transmission Gear I.D. M5 33.000 – 33.025 (1.2992 – 1.3002) 33.04 (1.301)
M6 43.000 – 43.025 (1.6929 – 1.6939) 43.04 (1.694)
C1 31.010 – 31.035 (1.2209 – 1.2218) 31.06 (1.223)
C2 25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851) 25.03 (0.985)
C3, C4 31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215) 31.04 (1.222)
Gear bushing M5 32.955 – 32.980 (1.2974 – 1.2984) 32.93 (1.296)
O.D. M6 42.950 – 42.975 (1.6909 – 1.6919) 42.93 (1.690)
C1 30.970 – 30.995 (1.2193 – 1.2203) 30.94 (1.218)
C2 24.959 – 24.980 (0.9826 – 0.9835) 24.94 (0.982)
C3, C4 30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195) 30.93 (1.218)
Gear-to-bushing M5 0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028) 0.10 (0.004)
clearance M6 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
C1 0.015 – 0.065 (0.0006 – 0.0026) 0.10 (0.004)
C2 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.09 (0.004)
C3, C4 0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030) 0.11 (0.004)
Gear bushing I.D. M5 29.985 – 30.006 (1.1805 – 1.1813) 30.03 (1.182)
M6 40.007 – 40.028 (1.5751 – 1.5759) 40.038 (1.5763)
C1 28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032) 28.04 (1.104)
C2 21.985 – 22.006 (0.8655 – 0.8664) 22.02 (0.867)
Inner mainshaft
At M5 bushing 29.957 – 29.970 (1.1794 – 1.1799) 29.93 (1.178)
O.D.
Outer mainshaft
At M6 bushing 39.975 – 39.991 (1.5738 – 1.5744) 39.965 (1.5734)
O.D.
Countershaft O.D. At C1 bushing 27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016) 27.95 (1.100)
At C2 bushing 21.952 – 21.965 (0.8643 – 0.8648) 21.94 (0.864)
Bushing-to-shaft M5 0.015 – 0.049 (0.0006 – 0.0019) 0.09 (0.004)
clearance M6 0.016 – 0.053 (0.0006 – 0.0021) 0.10 (0.004)
C1 0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021) 0.08 (0.003)
C2 0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021) 0.08 (0.003)
Shift fork, Fork I.D. 12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731) 12.03 (0.474)
fork shaft Claw thickness 5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236) 5.9 (0.23)
Shift fork shaft O.D. 11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712) 11.95 (0.470)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-5
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Mainshaft bearing set plate bolt 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Shift drum bearing set plate bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Balancer shaft bearing set plate 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
bolt Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Crankcase main journal bolt (new) 6 9 20 (2.0, 15) + 150° See page 14-30
Replace with a new one.
Crankcase 10 mm bolt 1 10 39 (4.0, 29)
Crankcase 8 mm bolt 3 8 24 (2.4, 18)
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt 1 8 24 (2.4, 18) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Crankcase 6 mm bolt 8 6 12 (1.2, 9)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Hard to shift
• Improper clutch operation
• Incorrect engine oil weight
• Bent shift fork
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Bent shift fork claw
• Damaged shift drum groove
• Bent gearshift spindle
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn gear dogs
• Worn gear shifter groove
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Worn or bent shift forks
• Broken shift drum stopper arm
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
• Broken shift drum stopper arm return spring
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
• Broken gearshift spindle return spring
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
Excessive engine noise
• Worn or damaged transmission gear
• Worn or damaged transmission bearings

14-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
CRANKCASE SEPARATION
For Service Information for removal of necessary parts
before separating the crankcase (page 14-4).
Remove the cam chain [1] from the crankshaft.

[1]

Remove the crankcase 8 mm bolts [1] and sealing

[1]
washer [2].

[1]/[2]

Place the engine upside down.

[3] [4]
Loosen the crankcase 10 mm bolt [1], 8 mm bolts [2], 8
x 45 mm bolts [3] and 6 mm bolts [4] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts.
[2]

[1]

Loosen the crankcase main journal bolt [1] in a

[1]
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove them.
Separate the lower crankcase [2] from the upper
crankcase.

Do not ply the crankcase halves with a screwdriver.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-7
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the dowel pins [1] and oil orifices [2].
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]
Clean any sealant off from the crankcase mating
surface.
Clean the oil orifices in solvent thoroughly.
Check the oil orifices for clogs, and replace them if
necessary.

[1] [2]

NC700XD/SD: [1]

[1] [2]

TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REMOVAL/DISASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).
[3] [1]
Remove the countershaft assembly [1].
Remove the dowel pin [2] and countershaft bearing set
ring [3].
Disassemble the countershaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.

• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,

bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the [2]
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.
Remove the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts [1] and
[2]
set plate [2].

[1]

14-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the right mainshaft bearing [1] from the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Remove the mainshaft assembly [1].

[1]
Disassemble the mainshaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.

• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,

bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK

Remove the shift drum bearing set plate bolts [1] and
set plate [2].

[1] [2]

Remove the fork shaft [1] and shift forks [2].

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-9
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the shift drum [1] and shift drum bearing [2].

[1] [2]

INSPECTION
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Check the shift fork guide pin for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the shift fork I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 12.03 mm (0.474 in)
Measure the shift fork claw thickness.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.9 mm (0.23 in)

Measure the shift fork shaft O.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 11.95 mm (0.470 in)

Inspect the shift drum guide grooves for abnormal wear

or damage.
Turn the outer race of the shift drum bearing with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the shift drum.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
shift drum.

14-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TRANSMISSION
Check the gear shifter groove [1] and gear dogs [2] for
abnormal wear or damage.
Check the dog holes and teeth for abnormal wear or
damage.

[1] [2]

Measure the I.D. of each gear.

SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6, C1: 28.04 mm (1.104 in)
C2, C3, C4: 31.04 mm (1.222 in)
Measure the O.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6: 27.94 mm (1.100 in)
C2, C3, C4: 30.93 mm (1.218 in)
Measure the I.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 25.04 mm (0.986 in)
C2: 28.02 mm (1.103 in)
Calculate the gear-to-bushing clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
C2: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C3, C4: 0.11 mm (0.004 in)

Check the mainshaft and countershaft for abnormal

wear or damage.
M5
Measure the mainshaft O.D. at the M5 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 24.95 mm (0.982 in)
Measure the countershaft O.D. at the C2 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 27.95 mm (1.100 in)
Calculate the gear bushing-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
C2: 0.06 mm (0.002 in) C2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-11
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
MAINSHAFT BEARING
Temporarily install the right mainshaft bearing [1] onto
[1]
the mainshaft.
Turn the outer race of the right mainshaft bearing with
your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the mainshaft.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
mainshaft.

Turn the inner race of the left mainshaft bearing [1] with
[1]
your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the upper crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-12) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the crankcase.

COUNTERSHAFT BEARING
Turn the outer race of countershaft bearing [1] with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing inner race fits tightly on the
countershaft.
Replace the countershaft, collar, and bearing as an
assembly, if the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or
if the inner race fits loosely on the countershaft.

The countershaft bearing cannot be replaced. If the

countershaft bearing is faulty, replace the countershaft
as an assembly.
[1]

LEFT MAINSHAFT BEARING

REPLACEMENT
Remove the following:
[1]
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston (page 15-14)
– Countershaft/mainshaft (page 14-8)
To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
heated upper crankcase.
Do not use a torch Heat the upper crankcase to 80°C (176°F) evenly using
to heat the upper a heat gun.
crankcase; it may
Tap the upper crankcase lightly and remove the left
cause warping.
mainshaft bearing [1].

14-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply engine oil to a new left mainshaft bearing [1].
[2]
Drive in a new Drive the left mainshaft bearing into the upper
bearing squarely crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
with the marking
side facing toward
TOOLS:
the inside of the Driver, 15 x 280L [2] 07949-3710001
crankcase. Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500 [3]/[4]

Install the removed parts in the reverse order of

removal.

[1]

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Clean all parts in solvent, and dry them thoroughly.
Apply engine oil to the gear teeth, rotating surface and
bearing.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the spline bushing
outer surface, bushing inner and outer surface, shift fork
grooves.
Assemble the mainshaft and countershaft.
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT/M1 GEAR (16T)

THRUST WASHER

M5 GEAR BUSHING

M5 GEAR (30T)

SPLINE WASHER

SNAP RING M3/4 GEAR (22/25T)

SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
M6 GEAR BUSHING
M6 GEAR (37T)
SPLINE WASHER
LOCK WASHER
THRUST WASHER M2 GEAR (19T)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-13
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
COUNTERSHAFT
NEEDLE BEARING CAP
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
C1 GEAR (45T)
LOCK WASHER
THRUST WASHER
SPLINE WASHER
C5 GEAR (31T)
C3 GEAR (32T)
SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
C4 GEAR BUSHING
C6 GEAR (31T)
C4 GEAR (30T)
C3 GEAR BUSHING
SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
SPLINE WASHER
SNAP RING

COUNTERSHAFT

C2 GEAR BUSHING COUNTERSHAFT BEARING SET RING

C2 GEAR (36T) OIL SEAL

Assemble the transmission gears and shafts.

CORRECT INCORRECT
• Coat each gear with clean engine oil and check for
smooth movement.
• Align the lock washer tabs with the spline washer
grooves.
• Always install the thrust washers and snap rings with
the chamfered (rolled) edge facing away from the
thrust load.
• Install the snap rings [1] so that the end gap aligns
with the groove of the splines.
• Make sure that the snap rings are fully seated in the
shaft groove after installing them.
[1]

14-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
INSTALLATION
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Install the mainshaft assembly [1] into the upper
[1]
crankcase.

Apply engine oil to the right mainshaft bearing [1].

Install the right mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase.

Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked

side facing out.

[1]

Apply locking agent to the mainshaft bearing set plate

[2] [1]
bolts threads (page 14-6).
Install the mainshaft bearing set plate [1] with its "OUT
SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts
[3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the dowel pin [1] onto the upper crankcase hole.
[2] [3]
Install the countershaft bearing set ring [2] to the
countershaft bearing groove.
Install the countershaft assembly [3].

• Align the needle bearing cap hole with the dowel pin.
• Align the set ring with the upper crankcase groove.
Install the shift drum/shift fork (page 14-16).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-15
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Apply engine oil to the shift drum bearing [1].
Install the shift drum [2] and shift drum bearing into the
lower crankcase.

[2] [1]

The shift forks have the following identification marks:

– "L" mark [1]: left shift fork
– "C" mark [2]: center shift fork
– "R" mark [3]: right shift fork
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork guide
area and guide pin.

[1] [2] [3]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork shaft

outer surface.
Install the shift forks [1] into the shift drum guide
grooves with the identification marks facing toward the
right side of the engine and insert the fork shaft [2].

[1] [2]

Apply locking agent to the shift drum bearing set plate

[2]
bolt threads (page 14-6).
Install the set plate [1] and shift drum bearing set plate
bolts [2].
Tighten the shift drum bearing set plate bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the mainshaft/countershaft (page 14-15).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).

[1]

14-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/DISASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).
[1] [3]
Remove the countershaft assembly [1].
Remove the dowel pin [2] and countershaft bearing set
ring [3].
Disassemble the countershaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.

• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,

bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the [2]
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.
Remove the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts [1] and
[2]
set plate [2].

[1]

Remove the right mainshaft bearing [1] from the upper

crankcase.

[1]

Remove the mainshaft assembly [1].

Disassemble the mainshaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.

• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,

bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-17
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Remove the shift drum bearing set plate bolts [1] and
[1]
set plate [2].

[2]

Remove the fork shafts [1] and shift forks [2].

[2] [1]

[2]

Remove the shift drum [1] and shift drum bearing [2].

[1] [2]

INSPECTION
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Check the shift fork guide pin for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the shift fork I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 12.03 mm (0.474 in)
Measure the shift fork claw thickness.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.9 mm (0.23 in)

14-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Measure the shift fork shaft O.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 11.95 mm (0.470 in)

Inspect the shift drum guide grooves for abnormal wear

or damage.
Turn the outer race of the shift drum bearing with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Replace the bearing if the outer race does not turn
smoothly or quietly.

TRANSMISSION
Check the gear shifter groove and gear dogs for
abnormal wear or damage.
Check the dog holes and gear teeth for abnormal wear
or damage.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-19
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Measure the I.D. of each gear.

SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 33.04 mm (1.301 in)
M6: 43.04 mm (1.694 in)
C1: 31.06 mm (1.223 in)
C2: 25.03 mm (0.985 in)
C3, C4: 31.04 mm (1.222 in)
Measure the O.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 32.93 mm (1.296 in)
M6 42.93 mm (1.690 in)
C1: 30.94 mm (1.218 in)
C2: 24.94 mm (0.982 in)
C3, C4: 30.93 mm (1.218 in)
Calculate the gear-to-bushing clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
M6: 0.11 mm (0.004 in)
C1: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C2: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
C3, C4: 0.11 mm (0.004 in)
Measure the I.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 30.03 mm (1.182 in)
M6: 40.038 mm (1.5763 in)
C1: 28.04 mm (1.104 in)
C2: 22.02 mm (0.867 in)
Check the mainshafts and countershaft for abnormal
M5
wear or damage.
Measure the inner mainshaft O.D. at the M5 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 29.93 mm (1.178 in) M6
Measure the outer mainshaft O.D. at the M6 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 39.965 mm (1.5734 in)
Measure the countershaft O.D. at the C1 and C2
bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
C1: 27.95 mm (1.100 in)
C2: 21.94 mm (0.864 in) C1 C2

Calculate the gear bushing-to-shaft clearance.

SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
M6: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C1: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
C2: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

14-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
MAINSHAFT BEARING
Turn the inner race of the left mainshaft bearing [1] with
[1]
your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the upper crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-21) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the crankcase.

COUNTERSHAFT BEARING
Turn the outer race of countershaft bearing [1] with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing inner race fits tightly on the
countershaft.
Replace the countershaft, collar, and bearing as an
assembly, if the outer race does not turn smoothly,
quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
countershaft.

[1]

LEFT MAINSHAFT BEARING

REPLACEMENT
Remove the following:
[1]
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Pistons/connecting rods (page 15-14)
To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
heated upper crankcase.
Do not use a torch Heat the upper crankcase to 80°C (176°F) evenly using
to heat the upper a heat gun.
crankcase; it may
Tap the upper crankcase lightly and remove the left
cause warping.
mainshaft bearing [1].

Apply engine oil to a new left mainshaft bearing [1].

[2]
Drive in a new Drive the left mainshaft bearing into the upper
bearing squarely crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
with the marking
side facing toward
TOOLS:
the inside of the Driver, 15 x 280L [2] 07949-3710001
crankcase. Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500 [3]/[4]

Install the following:

– Pistons/connecting rods (page 15-20)
– Crankshaft (page 15-6)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-21
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Clean all parts in solvent, and dry them thoroughly.
Apply engine oil to the gear teeth, rotating surface and
bearing.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the spline bushing
outer surfaces, bushing inner and outer surfaces, and
gear shifter grooves.
Assemble the mainshaft and countershaft.
MAINSHAFT

INNER MAINSHAFT/M1 GEAR (15T)

THRUST WASHER

M5 GEAR BUSHING

M5 GEAR (30T)
SPLINE WASHER

SNAP RING

M3 GEAR (22T)

THRUST WASHER

M4 GEAR (25T)

SNAP RING

SPLINE WASHER

M6 GEAR (37T)

M6 GEAR BUSHING
SEAL RINGS
THRUST WASHER

NEEDLE BEARING

OUTER MAINSHAFT/M2 GEAR (21T)

NEEDLE BEARING

: Gear teethe, rotating surfaces and bearing

: Bushing surfaces and gear shifter grooves

14-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
COUNTERSHAFT

OIL SEAL

COUNTERSHAFT
BEARING SET RING

COUNTERSHAFT

C5 GEAR (31T)

SNAP RING
C1 GEAR BUSHING
SPLINE WASHER
C1 GEAR (40T) C3 GEAR BUSHING
C3 GEAR (32T)

SPLINE WASHER
SPLINE WASHER
LOCK WASHER
SNAP RING
C4 GEAR BUSHING THRUST WASHER
C2 GEAR BUSHING

C4 GEAR (30T)

SPLINE WASHER
C2 GEAR (40T)
SNAP RING
THRUST WASHER
C6 GEAR (31T) NEEDLE BEARING

NEEDLE BEARING CAP

: Gear teethe, rotating surfaces and bearing

: Bushing surfaces and gear shifter grooves

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-23
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

• Coat each gear with clean engine oil and check for
smooth movement.
• Align the lock washer tabs with the spline washer CORRECT INCORRECT
grooves.
• Always install the thrust washers and snap rings with
the chamfered (rolled) edge facing away from the
thrust load.
• Install the snap rings [1] so that the end gap aligns
with the groove of the splines.
• Make sure that the snap rings are fully seated in the
shaft groove after installing them.

[1]

INSTALLATION
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Install the mainshaft assembly [1] into the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Apply engine oil to the right mainshaft bearing [1].

Install the right mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase.

Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked

side facing out.

[1]

Apply locking agent to the mainshaft bearing set plate

[2] [1]
bolts threads (page 14-6).
Install the mainshaft bearing set plate [1] with its "OUT
SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts
[3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

14-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Install the dowel pin [1] onto the upper crankcase hole.
[3] [2]
Install the countershaft bearing set ring [2] into the
countershaft bearing groove.
Install the countershaft assembly [3].

• Align the needle bearing cap hole with the dowel pin.
• Align the set ring with the upper crankcase groove.
• Align the oil seal flange [4] with the upper crankcase
groove.
Install the shift drum/shift fork (page 14-25).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).
[1] [4]

SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK

Apply engine oil to the shift drum bearing [1].
Install the shift drum [2] and shift drum bearing into the
lower crankcase.

[2] [1]

The shift forks have the following identification marks:

[1] [2]
– "D2M L" mark [1]: Mainshaft left shift fork
– "D2M R" mark [2]: Mainshaft right shift fork
– "D2C L" mark [3]: Countershaft left shift fork
– "D2C R" mark [4]: Countershaft right shift fork

[3] [4]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork shaft

[2]
outer surfaces, shift fork claws and guide pins.
Install the countershaft shift forks [1] into the shift drum
outer guide grooves with the identification marks facing
toward the right side of the engine and insert the shift
fork shaft [2].
Install the mainshaft shift forks [3] into the shift drum
inner guide grooves with the identification marks facing
toward the right side of the engine and insert the shift
fork shaft.

[1] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-25
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply locking agent to the shift drum bearing set plate
[2]
bolt threads (page 14-6).
Install the shift drum bearing set plate [1] and bolts [2].
Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the mainshaft/countershaft (page 14-24).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).

[1]

BALANCER
REMOVAL
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).
[2]
Remove the balancer shaft bearing set plate bolts [1]
and set plate [2].

[1]

Remove the balancer shaft [1] and right balancer shaft

bearing [2].

[2] [1]

INSPECTION
Check the balancer shaft [1] and balancer driven gear
[1]
[2] for excessive wear or damage.
Replace the balancer shaft if necessary.

[2]

14-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Turn the inner race of the left balancer shaft bearing [1]
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the lower crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-27) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the lower crankcase.

[1]

Temporarily install the right balancer shaft bearing onto

the balancer shaft.
Turn the outer race of the right balancer shaft bearing
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the balancer shaft.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
balancer shaft.

LEFT BALANCER SHAFT BEARING

REPLACEMENT
Drive out the left balancer shaft bearing [1] from the
lower crankcase.

[1]

Apply engine oil to a new left balancer shaft bearing [1].

[2]
Drive in a new Drive the left balancer shaft bearing into the lower
bearing squarely crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
with the marking
side facing toward
TOOLS:
the inside of the Driver, 15 x 280L [2] 07949-3710001
crankcase. Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500 [3]/[4]

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-27
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to the right balancer shaft bearing [1].
Install the balancer shaft [2] and right balancer shaft
bearing into the lower crankcase.

Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked

side facing out.

[1] [2]

Apply locking agent to the balancer shaft bearing set

[2] [1]
plate bolts threads (page 14-6).
Install the balancer shaft bearing set plate [1] with its
"OUT SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the balancer shaft bearing set plate
bolts [3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY
Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the crankcase mating surface as shown.

• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.

• Do not apply liquid sealant to the crankcase main
journal bolts area and the oil passage area as
shown.

14-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Install the oil orifices [1] onto the upper crankcase [2].
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]

Install the oil orifices with its narrow hole side facing
upper crankcase.

[2]

NC700XD/SD: [1]

[2]

Install the dowel pins [1] onto the upper crankcase [2].
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1]

[1] [2]

NC700XD/SD: [1]

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-29
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Align the balancer driven gear [1] and balancer driven
[1]/[2]
sub gear [2] teeth then install a 6 x 14 mm socket bolt
[3] to the balancer driven gear and balancer driven sub
gear holes at the lower crankcase inspection hole [4].
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the main journal
bearing sliding surfaces on the lower crankcase.

[4] [3]

Align the index line [1] on balancer drive gear with

[1] [2]
upper crankcase top surface while the " " mark [2] is
facing up.

Install the lower crankcase onto the upper crankcase.

[3]
Make sure that the index line [1] on the balancer drive
gear is positioned between the index lines [2] on the
balancer driven gear as shown. [2]
Remove the 6 x 14 mm socket bolt [3].

[1]

Install new crankcase main journal bolts [1].

[1]

• Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts using the

Plastic Region Tightening Method. 2 1 3
• Do not reuse the crankcase main journal bolts,
because the correct axial tension will not be
obtained.
• The crankcase main journal bolts are pre-coated
with an oil additive for axial tension stability. Do not 2 1 3
remove the oil additive from the new crankcase main
journal bolt surfaces.
Make sure the upper and lower crankcase are seated
securely.
Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts in numerical
order as shown in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to
the specified torque.
Further tighten the crankcase main journal bolts 150°.
TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150°

14-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply locking agent to the crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt
[4]
threads (page 14-6).
Install and tighten the crankcase bolts to the specified [3]
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE:
Crankcase 10 mm bolt [1]:
[2]
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 8 mm bolt [2]:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt [3]: [1]
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 6 mm bolt [4]
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

Place the engine with the lower side down.

Install the crankcase 8 mm bolts [1] and a new sealing
washer [2].

The sealing washer location is indicated on the upper

crankcase by the " " mark.
Tighten the crankcase 8 mm bolts to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

[1] [1]/[2]

Install the cam chain [1] to the crankshaft.

Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal (page 14-4).

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

14-31
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

15. CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························15-2 MAIN JOURNAL BEARING························ 15-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························15-3 CRANKPIN BEARING ······························ 15-11

TROUBLESHOOTING·································15-4 PISTON/CYLINDER ·································· 15-14

CRANKSHAFT ············································15-5

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-1
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
COMPONENT LOCATION
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°

15-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

This motorcycle provides cracking connecting rods. Be sure to install each part in its original position, as noted during removal. Do
not reuse the improperly installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their mating surfaces are damaged.
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• Mark and store the connecting rods, bearing caps and bearing inserts to be sure of their correct locations for reassembly.
• The crankpin and main journal bearing inserts are select fit and are identified by color codes. Select replacement bearings from
the code tables. After selecting new bearings, recheck the oil clearance with a plastigauge. Incorrect oil clearance can cause
major engine damage.
• Clean the oil passages in the upper crankcase with compressed air before installing the pistons.

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Crankshaft Connecting rod side clearance 0.15 – 0.35 (0.006 – 0.014) 0.45 (0.018)
Runout Right side – 0.03 (0.001)
Left side – 0.03 (0.001)
Main journal bearing oil clearance 0.019 – 0.037 (0.0007 – 0.0015) 0.05 (0.002)
Cylinder I.D. 73.000 – 73.015 (2.8740 – 2.8746) 73.07 (2.877)
Out-of-round – 0.10 (0.004)
Taper – 0.10 (0.004)
Warpage – 0.10 (0.004)
Piston, piston Piston O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
72.976 – 72.990 (2.8731 – 2.8736) 72.970 (2.8728)
rings bottom
Piston pin bore I.D. 18.010 – 18.013 (0.7091 – 0.7092) 18.023 (0.7096)
Piston pin O.D. 17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087) 17.988 (0.7082)
Piston-to-piston pin clearance 0.010 – 0.017 (0.0004 – 0.0007) 0.035 (0.0014)
Piston ring end Top 0.15 – 0.30 (0.006 – 0.012) 0.6 (0.02)
gap Second 0.30 – 0.42 (0.012 – 0.017) 0.6 (0.02)
Oil (side rail) 0.20 – 0.70 (0.008 – 0.028) 0.8 (0.03)
Piston ring-to-ring Top 0.035 – 0.080 (0.0014 – 0.0032) 0.15 (0.006)
groove clearance Second 0.030 – 0.055 (0.0012 – 0.0022) 0.13 (0.005)
Cylinder-to-piston clearance 0.010 – 0.039 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.05 (0.002)
Connecting rod small end I.D. 17.964 – 17.977 (0.7072 – 0.7078) 17.985 (0.7081)
Crankpin bearing oil clearance 0.026 – 0.044 (0.0010 – 0.0017) 0.05 (0.002)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Crankpin bearing cap bolt 4 6 10 (1.0, 7) + 90° See page 15-7
Replace with a new one.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Crankcase main journal bolt 6 9 20 (2.0, 15) + 120° See page 15-9
(retightening) Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-3
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
TROUBLESHOOTING
Cylinder compression is too low, hard to starting or poor performance at low speed
• Leaking cylinder head gasket
• Worn, stuck or broken piston ring
• Worn or damaged cylinder and piston
Cylinder compression too high, overheating or knocking
• Excessive carbon built-up on piston head or combustion chamber
Excessive smoke
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston ring
• Improper installation of piston rings
• Scored or scratched piston or cylinder wall
Abnormal noise
• Worn piston pin or piston pin hole
• Worn connecting rod small end
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings
• Worn main journal bearings
• Worn crankpin bearings
Engine vibration
• Excessive crankshaft runout

15-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
CRANKSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).
SIDE CLEARANCE INSPECTION
Measure the connecting rod side clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.45 mm (0.018 in)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the
connecting rod.
Recheck and if still out of limit, replace the crankshaft.

REMOVAL

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be

installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Mark the bearing caps and bearings as you remove
[1]
them to indicate the correct cylinder for reassembly.
Remove the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] and bearing
caps [2].
Remove the crankshaft [3].

Before removal, position all the pistons at TDC (Top

Dead Center) to prevent damaging the crankpin with
the connecting rod.

[3] [2]

Remove the main journal bearings [1] from both

[2]
crankcase halves.
Remove the crankpin bearings [2] from the connecting
rods and bearing caps.

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be

installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-5
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
INSPECTION
Support the crankshaft on both end journals.
Set a dial gauge on the crankshaft.
Rotate the crankshaft two revolutions (720°) and read [2] [1]
the runout.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Right side [1]: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Left side [2]: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Check the balancer drive gear [3] teeth for abnormal
wear or damage.

[3]

INSTALLATION
The bearing tabs Install the main journal bearings [1] and crankpin
[2]
should be aligned bearings [2] into the original locations.
with the grooves in
the crankcase.

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be

installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the main journal
bearing sliding surfaces on the upper crankcase and
crankpin bearing sliding surfaces on the connecting
rods.
[1]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the thrust surfaces of

the crankshaft as shown.

Install the crankshaft [1] onto the upper crankcase.

Set the connecting rods [2] to the crankpins.

[1] [2]

15-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Clean the mating surface of the connecting rods and
crankpin bearing caps with cleaning solvent and blow
them with compressed air.

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the crankpin bearing

sliding surfaces on the crankpin bearing caps [1]. Align
Install the crankpin bearing caps.

Be sure to install each part in its original position, as

noted during removal. Do not reuse the improperly
installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their
mating surfaces are damaged.

Align the I.D. code number on the connecting rods.

[1]
The crankpin Apply engine oil to new crankpin bearing cap bolt
[1]
bearing cap bolts threads and seating surfaces.
cannot be reused.
Install and tighten new crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] to
Once the bolts have
the specified torque in 2 or 3 steps alternately.
been loosened
Further tighten the bolts 90°.
replace them with
new ones. TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°
Assemble the crankcase halves (page 14-28).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-7
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
MAIN JOURNAL BEARING

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be

installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Remove the crankshaft (page 15-5).
BEARING INSPECTION
Inspect the main journal bearing inserts [1] on the upper
and lower crankcase halves for unusual wear or
peeling.
Check the bearing tabs for damage.

[1]

OIL CLEARANCE INSPECTION

Clean off any oil from the bearing inserts and main
[1]
journals.
Install the crankshaft [1] onto the upper crankcase.

Put a strip of plastigauge [1] lengthwise on each main

[1]
journal avoiding the oil hole.

Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.

15-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Install the dowel pins [1] and oil orifices [2] onto the
[1]
upper crankcase [3].

Install the oil orifices with its narrow hole side facing
upper crankcase.

[3] [2]

Install the lower crankcase [1] onto the upper

[2]
crankcase.
Apply engine oil to the crankcase main journal bolt
(reuse) threads and seating surfaces.
2 1 3
Install the crankcase main journal bolts [2].
Make sure the upper and lower crankcase are seated
securely.
Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts in numerical 2 1 3
order as shown in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to
the specified torque.
Further tighten the crankcase main journal bolts 120°.
TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 120° [1]
Remove the crankcase main journal bolt and lower
crankcase.
Measure the compressed plastigauge at its widest point
on each main journal to determine the oil clearance.

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select a
replacement bearing.

BEARING SELECTION
Letters (A, B or C) Record the crankcase bearing support I.D. code letters
on the left side of [1] from left side of the upper crankcase as shown.
upper crankcase
are bearing support
I.D. codes from left
to right.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-9
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Numbers (1, 2 or 3) If you are replacing the crankshaft, record the
on the crank weight corresponding main journal O.D. code numbers [1] from
are main journal the crank weight.
O.D. codes from left
If you are reusing the crankshaft, measure the crankpin
to right.
O.D. with a micrometer.

[1]

Cross-reference the main journal and bearing support

codes to determine the replacement bearing color code
[1].

MAIN JOURNAL BEARING THICKNESS:

A: Blue: Thickest
B: Black:
C: Brown:
D: Green:
E: Yellow: Thinnest

[1]

MAIN JOURNAL BEARING SELECTION TABLE:

BEARING SUPPORT I.D. CODE
A B C
37.000 – 37.006 mm 37.006 – 37.012 mm 37.012 – 37.018 mm
(1.4567 – 1.4569 in) (1.4569 – 1.4572 in) (1.4572 – 1.4574 in)
MAIN JOURNAL 34.010 – 34.016 mm
1 E (Yellow) D (Green) C (Brown)
O.D. CODE (1.3390 – 1.3392 in)
34.004 – 34.010 mm
2 D (Green) C (Brown) B (Black)
(1.3387 – 1.3390 in)
33.998 – 34.004 mm
3 C (Brown) B (Black) A (Blue)
(1.3385 – 1.3387 in)

After selecting new bearings, recheck the clearance

with a plastigauge. Incorrect clearance can cause
severe engine damage.

BEARING INSTALLATION
Clean the bearing outer surfaces and crankcase
Align
bearing supports.
Install the main journal bearing inserts [1] onto the
crankcase bearing supports, aligning each tab with
each groove.

[1]

15-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
CRANKPIN BEARING

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be

installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Remove the crankshaft (page 15-5).
BEARING INSPECTION
Check the bearing inserts for unusual wear or peeling.
Check the bearing tabs for damage.

OIL CLEARANCE INSPECTION

Clean the mating surface of the connecting rod and
crankpin bearing cap with cleaning solvent and blow
them with compressed air.

Clean off any oil from the bearing inserts and crankpins.
[1]
Carefully install the crankshaft onto the upper
crankcase.
Set the connecting rods onto the crankpins.
Put a strip of plastigauge [1] lengthwise on each
crankpin avoiding the oil hole.

Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-11
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Install the crankpin bearing caps [1].
Align

Be sure to install each part in its original position, as

noted during removal. Do not reuse the improperly
installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their
mating surfaces are damaged.

Align the I.D. code number on the connecting rods.

[1]
Use the removed Apply engine oil to the crankpin bearing cap bolt (reuse)
[1]
crankpin bearing threads and seating surfaces.
cap bolts when
Install and tighten the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] to
checking the oil
the specified torque in 2 or 3 steps alternately.
clearance.
Further tighten the bolts 90°.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°

Remove the bearing caps and measure the

compressed plastigauge at its widest point on the
crankpin to determine the oil clearance.

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select the
correct replacement bearings.

BEARING SELECTION
Numbers (1, 2, 3 or Record the connecting rod I.D. code number [1] or
4) on the measure the I.D. with the crankpin bearing cap installed
connecting rods are without bearing inserts.
the connecting rod
I.D. codes.

[1]

15-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Letters (A, B, C or If you are replacing the crankshaft, record the
D) on the crank corresponding crankpin O.D. code letter [1].
weight are the
If you are reusing the crankshaft, measure the crankpin
crankpin O.D.
O.D. with a micrometer.
codes from left to
right.

[1]

Cross-reference the connecting rod and crankpin codes

[1]
to determine the replacement bearing color code [1].

CRANKPIN BEARING THICKNESS:

B: Black: Thickest
C: Brown:
D: Green:
E: Yellow:
F: Pink:
G: Red:
H: White: Thinnest

CRANKPIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE:

CONNECTING ROD I.D. CODE
1 2 3 4
43.000 – 43.006 mm 43.006 – 43.012 mm 43.012 – 43.018 mm 43.018 – 43.024 mm
(1.6929 – 1.6931 in) (1.6931 – 1.6934 in) (1.6934 – 1.6936 in) (1.6936 – 1.6939 in)
CRANKPIN 39.994 – 40.000 mm
A H (White) G (Red) F (Pink) E (Yellow)
O.D. CODE (1.5746 – 1.5748 in)
39.988 – 39.994 mm
B G (Red) F (Pink) E (Yellow) D (Green)
(1.5743 – 1.5746 in)
39.982 – 39.988 mm
C F (Pink) E (Yellow) D (Green) C (Brown)
(1.5741 – 1.5743 in)
39.976 – 39.982 mm
D E (Yellow) D (Green) C (Brown) B (Black)
(1.5739 – 1.5741 in)

After selecting new bearings, recheck the clearance

with a plastigauge. Incorrect clearance can cause
severe engine damage.

BEARING INSTALLATION
Clean the bearing outer surfaces, crankpin bearing cap
[1]
and connecting rod.
Install the crankpin bearings [1] onto the bearing cap
and connecting rod, aligning each tab with each groove.

Align

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-13
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
PISTON/CYLINDER
PISTON/CONNECTING ROD
REMOVAL

• Before piston removal, place a clean shop towel

around the connecting rod to prevent damaging the
cylinder sleeve.
• Do not try to remove the piston/connecting rod
assembly from bottom of the cylinder; the assembly
will get stuck in the gap between the cylinder liner
and the upper crankcase.
• Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must
be installed in their original locations or the correct
bearing oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting
in engine damage.
Mark the bearing caps and bearings as you remove
[1]
them to indicate the correct cylinder for reassembly.
Remove the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] and bearing
caps [2].
Remove the crankshaft [3].
Remove the countershaft.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 14-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 14-17)

[3] [2]

Remove the piston/connecting rod assembly [1] from

[1]
the top of the cylinder.

Do not try to remove the connecting rod/piston

assembly from the bottom of the cylinder; the assembly
will be locked when the oil ring expands in the gap
between the cylinder liner and the upper crankcase.

PISTON RING REMOVAL

Be careful not to Spread each piston ring ends and remove them by
damage the piston lifting up at a point opposite the gap.
ring by spreading
the ends too far.

15-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Never use a wire Clean carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves with
brush; it will scratch a ring that will be discarded.
the groove.

PISTON REMOVAL
Assemble the special tools as shown.
[1] [2]
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000
– Piston base head [1] 07PAF-0010400
– Piston pin pilot [2] 07PAF-0010300
– Piston base spring [3] 07973-6570600
– Piston base [4] 07973-6570500

[4] [3]

Temporarily install the pilot collar [1] to the piston pin

[1] [2] [1] [2]
pilot, and adjust the piston base head inserts [2] as
shown, then tighten the screws [3].

TOOLS: [2]
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000
– Piston base head insert 07PAF-0010500
– Pilot collar, 18 mm 07PAF-0010640
[3] [3]
Remove the pilot collar.
1.0 mm (0.04 in)

[3]

Assemble and adjust the length of the insert pin [1] and
insert adjuster [2] to 44.0 mm (1.73 in).

TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000 44.0 mm (1.73 in)
– Insert pin 07PAF-0010700
– Insert adjuster 07PAF-0010800

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-15
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Place the piston assembly [1] on the special tools [2].
[1] [4]

Be sure to position the piston flat area against the

piston base head inserts as shown.
Place the pilot collar [3] and insert pin/insert adjuster [4]
on the piston assembly.

[2] [3]

Press the piston pin [1] out with the insert pin [2], insert
[2]/[3]
adjuster [3], pilot collar [4] and a hydraulic press.
[4]

[1]

PISTON INSPECTION
Inspect the piston rings for free movement by rotating
them in their grooves. The rings should be able to move
freely grooves without catching.
Push the ring until the outer surface of the piston ring is
nearly flush with the piston and measure the ring-to-ring
groove clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Top: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Second: 0.13 mm (0.005 in)

Push the rings into Insert the piston ring squarely into the top of the
the cylinder with the cylinder and measure the ring end gap.
top of the piston to
be sure they are SERVICE LIMITS:
squarely in the Top: 0.6 mm (0.02 in)
cylinder. Second: 0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Oil (side rail): 0.8 mm (0.03 in)

15-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Measure the piston pin bore I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 18.023 mm (0.7096 in)

Measure the O.D. of the piston pin.

SERVICE LIMIT: 17.988 mm (0.7082 in)

Calculate the piston-to-piston pin clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.035 mm (0.0014 in)

Measure the diameter of the piston at 13 mm (0.5 in)

from the bottom and 90° to the piston pin hole.

SERVICE LIMIT: 72.970 mm (2.8728 in)

13 mm
(0.5 in)

CONNECTING ROD INSPECTION

Measure the connecting rod small end I.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 17.985 mm (0.7081 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-17
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
CYLINDER INSPECTION
Inspect the cylinder bore for wear or damage.
Measure the cylinder I.D. in X and Y axis at three levels.
Take the maximum reading to determine the cylinder Y
wear.
SERVICE LIMIT: 73.07 mm (2.877 in) X
Calculate the cylinder-to-piston clearance.
Take a maximum reading to determine the clearance.
For piston O.D. measurement (page 15-17).
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Calculate the taper and out-of-round at three levels in X
and Y axis. Take the maximum reading to determine
them.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Taper: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Out-of-round: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Inspect the top of the cylinder for warpage.

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

PISTON INSTALLATION
Face the connecting rod oil jet [1] to the piston "IN"
[1] [2]
mark [2] side.

Temporarily install the pilot collar [1] to the piston pin

[1] [2] [1] [2]
pilot, and adjust the piston base head inserts [2] as
shown, then tighten the screws [3].
TOOLS: [2]
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000
– Piston base head insert 07PAF-0010500
– Pilot collar, 18 mm 07PAF-0010640
[3] [3]
Remove the pilot collar.
1.0 mm (0.04 in)

[3]

15-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Apply engine oil to the piston pin outer surface.
[4] [1]/[2]
Adjust the length of the insert pin [1] and insert adjuster
[2] to 44.0 mm (1.73 in).
TOOLS: [5]
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000
– Insert pin 07PAF-0010700
– Insert adjuster 07PAF-0010800 44.0 mm
Insert the pilot collar [3] into the piston [4] and (1.73 in)
connecting rod [5].
TOOL:
Piston pin tool set 07PAF-0010000
– Pilot collar, 18 mm 07PAF-0010640 [3]
Place the piston, connecting rod and pilot collar on the
special tools.
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set [6] 07PAF-0010000
– Piston base head insert 07PAF-0010500
– Piston base head 07PAF-0010400
– Piston pin pilot 07PAF-0010300 [7]
– Piston base spring 07973-6570600
[6]
– Piston base 07973-6570500

Be sure to position the piston flat area against the

piston base head inserts as shown.
Place the piston pin [7], insert pin/insert adjuster on the
pilot collar.
Place the piston [1], connecting rod [2], piston pin [3]
[3] [2]
and special tools on the hydraulic press.
Press the piston pin until special tools fully seated.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

15-19
 dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
PISTON RING INSTALLATION
Clean the piston ring grooves thoroughly and install the
[1]
piston rings.
• Apply engine oil to the piston ring sliding surface.
• Avoid piston and piston ring damage during
installation. 120° [1]
• Install the piston rings with the marked side facing
up.
– "R" mark: top ring [1] [2]
– "2R" mark: second ring [2]
• To install the oil ring [3], install the spacer [4] first,
then install the side rails [5]. [3]
[2]
Stagger the piston ring end gaps 120° apart from each
other.
Stagger the side rail end gaps as shown.
After installation, the rings should rotate freely in the
ring groove.
[4]
20 mm (0.8 in)
OR MORE
[5]

PISTON/CONNECTING ROD
INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to the piston and cylinder sliding
[3] [1]
surface.
Install the piston/ Install the piston/connecting rod assemblies [1] into the
connecting rod cylinders using a commercially available piston ring
assembly with the compressor tool [2].
"IN" mark [3] facing When reusing the connecting rods, they must be
the intake side. installed in their original locations.

• While installing the piston, be careful not to damage

the top surface of the cylinder, especially around the
cylinder bore.
• Be careful not to damage the cylinder sleeve with
the connecting rod. [2]

Make sure the Use the handle of a plastic hammer or equivalent tool to
piston ring tap the piston into the cylinder.
compressor tool sits
Install the following:
flush on the top
surface of the – Countershaft
cylinder. – NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 14-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 14-24)
– Crankshaft (page 15-6)

15-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

16. ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························16-2 ENGINE REMOVAL

(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 16-9
SERVICE INFORMATION ···························16-4
ENGINE INSTALLATION
ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ··································· 16-15
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)······································16-5
ENGINE INSTALLATION
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 16-21

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-1
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMPONENT LOCATION
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

16-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NC700XD/SD:

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft) 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-3
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• A hoist or equivalent is required to support the motorcycle when removing and installing the engine.
• When removing/installing the engine, tape the frame around the engine beforehand for frame protection.
• When installing the engine, be sure to tighten the engine mounting fasteners to the specified torque in the specified sequence. If
you mistake the torque or sequence, loosen all mounting fasteners, then tighten them again to the specified torque in the correct
sequence.
• The following components can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– Throttle body (page 7-15)
– Water pump (page 8-12)
– Oil pump (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 9-6)
– Oil pump (NC700XD/SD) (page 9-8)
– Rocker arm (page 10-8)
– Clutch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-7)
– Gearshift linkage (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-16)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-15)
– Dual clutch (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-105)
– Gearshift linkage (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-112)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-108)
– CKP sensor (page 5-11)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Stator (page 13-13)
• The following components require engine removal for service.
– Camshaft (page 10-13)
– Cylinder head/valves (page 10-16)
– Transmission (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 14-8)
– Transmission (NC700XD/SD) (page 14-17)
– Balancer (page 14-26)
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Engine dry NC700X/XA/S/SA 60.5 kg (133.4 lbs)
weight NC700XD/SD 67.3 kg (148.4 lbs)
Engine oil NC700X/XA/S/SA After draining 3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt)
capacity After draining/filter
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)
change
After disassembly 3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt)
NC700XD/SD After draining 3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt)
After draining/filter
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)
change
After disassembly 4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt)
Coolant Radiator and engine 1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
capacity At draining 1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
Reserve tank 0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Rear lower engine hunger nut 1 12 59 (6.0, 44)
Front lower engine hunger bolt 2 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Upper engine hunger bolt 2 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Rear upper engine hunger nut 1 12 54 (5.5, 40)
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Drive sprocket bolt 1 10 54 (5.5, 40)
Starter motor terminal nut 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Water hose band screw 2 – – See page 16-18
See page 16-19
See page 16-24
See page 16-25

16-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the fuel injector side (page 7-4).
Remove the following:
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
– Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
– Radiator (page 8-9)
– Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
– Throttle body (page 7-15)
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and [1]
release the CKP sensor harness.
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
[3] [1] [3]
reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2] [1]
Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]
Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-5
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
[2] [7]
Remove the wire band [2], bolt [3] and setting plate [4].
Release the following:
– Neutral switch wire [5]
– Sidestand switch wire [6]
– Fuel tank drain hose B [7]

[5]

[6] [1] [3]/[4]

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].

[2]
Release the clip [2] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Loosen the band screw [1] and disconnect the water

[4]
hose [2] from the water pump.
Disconnect the spark plug cap [3].
Release the spark plug wire clamp [4] from the frame.

[3] [2] [1]

16-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
[2]
Release the spark plug wire clamp [2] from the frame.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and stay [2] from the frame.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [3].

[3] [1] [2]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[4]
Loosen the band screw and disconnect the water hose
[2] from the thermostat cover.
Release the main wire harness [3] from the stay [4] and
frame [5].

[2]

[1] [3] [5]

Remove the bolts [1] and clutch cable guide [2], then
[4] [3] [2]
disconnect the clutch cable [3] from the clutch lifter arm
[4].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-7
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Release the rubber cap [1].
[2]/[3] [7]
Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and
disconnect the starter motor cable [3].
Remove the starter motor mounting bolt [4] and
disconnect the ground cable [5].
Release the fuel feed hose [6] from the clamp [7].

[1] [4]/[5] [6]

Remove the drive sprocket bolt [1], washer [2] and drive
[3]
sprocket [3].

[1] [2]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and

[2]
left step holder [2].

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and

right step holder [2].

Do not twist the brake hose.

[1] [2]

16-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
The jack height Support the engine using a jack or other adjustable
Left side: Right side: [2]
must be continually support to ease of engine hanger bolts removal.
adjusted to relieve [1] [1]
Remove the upper engine hunger bolts [1] and collar
stress for ease of
[2].
bolt removal.

Remove the front lower hunger bolts [1] and collars [2].
Left side: Right side:

[1] [2] [2] [1]

Remove the rear engine hunger nuts [1], collars [2] and
Left side: [3] Right side:
bolts [3].
Carefully maneuver the engine and remove it out of the
frame to the right.
[2] [1]

During engine removal, hold the engine securely and

be careful not to damage the frame and engine.
[2]

[3] [1] [2]

ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)

Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the fuel injector side (page 7-4).
Remove the following:
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Center cross plate (page 2-32)
– Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
– Radiator (page 8-9)
– Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14) [1]
– Throttle body (page 7-15)
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-9
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
[3] [1] [3]
reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2] [1]
Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]
Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

Remove the wire band [1] and release the wires and
[1] [2] [5]
hose from the stay [2].
Remove the sidestand switch wire clamp [3] from the
stay.
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[4] and neutral switch connector [5].

[4] [3]

16-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2].

[2] [1]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].

[2]
Release the clip [2] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and

[1]
remove it from the ABS modulator stay.

Loosen the band screw [1] and disconnect the water

[4]
hose [2] from the water pump.
Disconnect the spark plug cap [3].
Release the spark plug wire clamp [4] from the frame.

[3] [2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-11
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
[2]
Release the spark plug wire clamp [2] from the frame.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and stay [2] from the frame.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [3].

[3] [1] [2]

Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].

Remove the bolts [2] and clamps [3].

[2]/[3] [1]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[4]
Loosen the band screw and disconnect the water hose
[2] from the thermostat cover.
Release the main wire harness [3] from the stay [4] and
frame [5].

[2]

[1] [3] [5]

16-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
[1]
connector [1] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector [2] and remove them from the ABS
modulator stay.
Release the fuel feed hose [3] from the clamp [4].
[3]

[2] [4]

Disconnect the following:

[2]
– Inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
– Outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]

[1]

Release the rubber cap [1].

[2]/[3] [7]
Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and
disconnect the starter motor cable [3].
Remove the starter motor mounting bolt [4] and
disconnect the ground cable [5].
Release the fuel feed hose [6] from the clamp [7].

[1] [4]/[5] [6]

Remove the drive sprocket bolt [1], washer [2] and drive
[3]
sprocket [3].

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-13
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
left step holder [2].

[2] [1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and

right step holder [2].

Do not twist the brake hose.

[1] [2]
The jack height Support the engine using a jack or other adjustable
Left side: [1] Right side: [2]
must be continually support to ease of engine hanger bolts removal.
adjusted to relieve [1]
Remove the upper engine hunger bolts [1] and collar
stress for ease of
[2].
bolt removal.

Remove the front lower hunger bolts [1] and collars [2].
Left side: Right side:

[1] [2] [2] [1]

16-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the rear engine hunger nuts [1], collars [2] and
Left side: [3] Right side: [2]
bolts [3].
Carefully maneuver the engine and remove it out of the
frame to the right.

During engine removal, hold the engine securely and

be careful not to damage the frame and engine. [2]

[1]

ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/

SA)
• All the engine mounting bolts and nuts loosely
[5] [6] [3] [4]
install, then tighten the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque in the specified sequence.
• Note the direction of the engine hanger bolts.
– Front lower right side [1]: 12 x 55 mm bolt and 20
mm collar
– Front lower left side [2]: 12 x 80 mm bolt and 41
mm collar
– Upper right side [3]: 12 x 45 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar
– Upper left side [4]: 12 x 35 mm bolt
– Rear upper side: 12 x 276 mm bolt, 37 mm collar
(right side) [5] and 47 mm collar (left side) [6]
– Rear lower side: 12 x 168 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar (right side) [7] [7] [1] [2]
• Place the jack or other adjustable support under the
engine.
• The jack height must be continually adjusted to
relieve stress for ease bolt installation.
• Carefully align the mounting points with the jack to
prevent damage to engine, frame, water hose, wires
and cables.
• Route the hoses, wires and cables properly (page 1-
25).
During engine Place the engine in the frame, then loosely install all the
installation, hold the bolts, nuts and collars.
engine securely
Tighten the rear lower engine hunger nut [1] to the
and be careful not
specified torque.
to damage the
frame and engine. TORQUE: 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-15
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Tighten the left front lower engine hunger bolt [1] to the
Left side: Right side:
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right front lower engine hunger bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[1] [2]

Tighten the left upper engine hunger bolt [1] to the

Left side: Right side:
specified torque.
[1] [2]
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right upper engine hunger bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Tighten the rear upper engine hunger nut [1] to the

[1]
specified torque.

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2] [1]

16-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
[1]
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2]

Install the drive sprocket [1], washer [2] and drive

[1]
sprocket bolt [3].
Tighten the drive sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[3] [2]

Install the ground cable [1] and starter motor mounting

[3]/[4] [7]
bolt [2].
Tighten the mounting bolt securely.
Install the starter motor cable [3] and starter motor
terminal nut [4].
Tighten the starter motor terminal nut to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Reposition the rubber cap [5] properly on the starter
motor terminal.
Install the fuel feed hose [6] to the clamp [7].
[5] [1]/[2] [6]
Align the fuel feed hose White paint with clamp.
Connect the clutch cable [1] to the clutch lifter arm [2].
[2] [1] [3]
Install clutch cable guide [3] and bolts [4].
Tighten the bolts securely.

[4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-17
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
[4] Align
Connect the water hose [2] to the thermostat cover.

Align the water hose paint mark with the thermostat

cover tab.
Install the main wire harness [3] to the stay [4] and
frame [5]. [2]

[1] [3] [5]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified

range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Connect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].

Install the stay [2] and bolts [3] to the frame.
Tighten the bolts securely.

[1] [3] [2]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[1]
Connect the spark plug cap [2].

[2]

16-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.
[1]
Connect the spark plug cap [2].
Connect the water hose [3] to the water pump.

[2] [3]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified

range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Install the clip [1] to the fuel rail.

[1]
Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [2].

[2]

Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-19
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the following:
[6] [1]
– Fuel tank drain hose B [1]
– Sidestand switch wire [2]
– Neutral switch wire [3]
Install the setting plate [4] and a new bolt [5].
Align

Align the setting plate hole with the crankcase boss.

Install the wire band [6].
Connect the neutral switch connector [7]. [3]

[2] [7] [4]/[5]

Route the alternator wire harness [1].

[2]
Install the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [2].

[1]

Connect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Install the rear fender B [1] and socket bolts [2].

[2] [1] [4] [2]
Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [3] and
bolt [4].

Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.
Align
Tighten the bolt securely.

[3]

16-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].
Install the following:
– Throttle body (page 7-18)
– Radiator (page 8-9)
– Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
– Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
Inspect the following:
– Throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5)
– Clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26)
Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page [1]
3-12).
Connect the quick connect fitting to the fuel injector side
(page 7-5).
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).
Check the exhaust system and cooling system for
leaks.

ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)

• All the engine mounting bolts and nuts loosely
[5] [6] [3] [4]
install, then tighten the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque in the specified sequence.
• Note the direction of the engine hanger bolts.
– Front lower right side [1]: 12 x 55 mm bolt and 20
mm collar
– Front lower left side [2]: 12 x 80 mm bolt and 41
mm collar
– Upper right side [3]: 12 x 45 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar
– Upper left side [4]: 12 x 35 mm bolt
– Rear upper side: 12 x 276 mm bolt, 37 mm collar
(right side) [5] and 47 mm collar (left side) [6]
– Rear lower side: 12 x 168 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar (right side) [7] [7] [1] [2]
• Place the jack or other adjustable support under the
engine.
• The jack height must be continually adjusted to
relieve stress for ease bolt installation.
• Carefully align the mounting points with the jack to
prevent damage to engine, frame, water hose, wires
and cables.
• Route the water hose, wires and cables properly
(page 1-25).
During engine Place the engine in the frame, then loosely install all the
installation, hold the bolts, nuts and collars.
engine securely
Tighten the rear lower engine hunger nut [1] to the
and be careful not
specified torque.
to damage the
frame and engine. TORQUE: 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-21
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Tighten the left front lower engine hunger bolt [1] to the
Left side: Right side:
specified torque.

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Tighten the right front lower engine hunger bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[1] [2]

Tighten the left upper engine hunger bolt [1] to the

Left side: [1] Right side:
specified torque.
[2]
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right upper engine hunger bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Tighten the rear upper engine hunger nut [1] to the

[1]
specified torque.

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2] [1]

16-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[1] [2]

Install the drive sprocket [1], washer [2] and drive

[1]
sprocket bolt [3].
Tighten the drive sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[3] [2]

Install the ground cable [1] and starter motor mounting

[3]/[4] [7]
bolt [2].
Tighten the mounting bolt securely.
Install the starter motor cable [3] and starter motor
terminal nut [4].
Tighten the starter motor terminal nut to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Reposition the rubber cap [5] properly on the starter
motor terminal.
Install the fuel feed hose [6] to the clamp [7].
[5] [1]/[2] [6]
Align the fuel feed hose White paint with clamp.
Connect the following:
[2]
– Inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
– Outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-23
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the fuel feed hose [1] to the clamp [2].
[3]
Connect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[3] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector
[4] and install them to the ABS modulator stay.
[1]

[4] [2]

Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[4] Align
Connect the water hose [2] to the thermostat cover.

Align the water hose paint mark with the thermostat

cover tab.
Install the main wire harness [3] to the stay [4] and
frame [5]. [2]

[1] [3] [5]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified

range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].

Install the clamps [2] and bolts [3].
Tighten the bolts securely.

[2]/[3] [1]

16-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Install the stay [2] and bolts [3] to the frame.
Tighten the bolts securely.

[1] [3] [2]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[1]
Connect the spark plug cap [2].

[2]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[1]
Connect the spark plug cap [2].
Connect the water hose [3] to the water pump.

[2] [3]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified

range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-25
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
[1]
install it to the ABS modulator stay.

Install the clip [1] to the fuel rail.

[1]
Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [2].

[2]

Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and

EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2].

[2] [1]

Route the wires and hose properly.

[5] [4] [1]
Connect the neutral switch wire connector [1] and shift
control motor 2P (Black) connector [2].
Install the sidestand switch wire clamp [3] onto the stay.
Set the hose and wires into the stay [4] and install the
wire band [5]

[2] [3]

16-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Route the alternator wire harness [1].
[2]
Install the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [2].

[1]

Connect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Install the rear fender B [1] and socket bolts [2].

[2] [1] [4] [2]
Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [3] and
bolt [4].

Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.
Align
Tighten the bolt securely.

[3]

Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].

Install the following:
– Throttle body (page 7-18)
– Radiator (page 8-9)
– Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
– Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
– Center cross plate (page 2-32)
– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Inspect the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).
Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page [1]
3-12).
Connect the quick connect fitting to the fuel injector side
(page 7-5).
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).
Check the exhaust system and cooling system for
leaks.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

16-27
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

17. FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························17-2 FRONT WHEEL ········································ 17-20

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························17-8 FORK························································· 17-25

TROUBLESHOOTING·································17-9 STEERING STEM ····································· 17-33

HANDLEBAR ············································17-10 CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)······· 17-42

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-1
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
COMPONENT LOCATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

NC700X:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-3
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XD:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700S:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-5
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700SA:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700SD:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-7
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When servicing the front wheel, fork or steering stem, support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• Do not operate the brake lever and pedal after removing the caliper and front wheel.
• After the front wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake lever.
• Use only tires marked "TUBELESS" and tubeless valves on rim marked "TUBELESS TIRE APPLICABLE".
• For brake system information (page 19-5).

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Minimum tire tread depth – 1.5 (0.06)
Cold tire Driver only 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) –
pressure Driver and passenger 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) –
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01)
Wheel rim runout Radial – 2.0 (0.08)
Axial – 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel balance weight 60 g (2.1 oz)
–
max.
Fork Spring free NC700X/XA/XD 394.9 (15.55) 387.0 (15.24)
length NC700S/SA/SD 357.0 (14.06) 349.9 (13.78)
Tube runout – 0.20 (0.008)
Recommended fork fluid Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL 10W or
–
equivalent
Fluid level NC700X/XA/XD 104 (4.1) –
NC700S/SA/SD 103 (4.1) –
Fluid capacity 514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.1 ±
NC700X/XA/XD –
0.09 Imp oz)
518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.2 ±
NC700S/SA/SD –
0.09 Imp oz)

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Handlebar holder bolt 4 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Handlebar switch housing screw 4 5 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Front master cylinder holder bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Handlebar weight mounting screw 2 6 10 (1.0, 7) ALOC screw; replace with a new
one.
Front brake disc mounting bolt 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Front axle 1 18 74 (7.5, 55) Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Front axle pinch bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Fork socket bolt 2 8 20 (2.0, 15) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Bottom bridge pinch bolt 2 10 39 (4.0, 29)
Fork cap 2 37 22 (2.2, 16)
Top bridge pinch bolt 2 8 22 (2.2, 16)
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 2 8 30 (3.1, 22) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Steering stem adjusting nut 1 26 23 (2.3, 17) See page 17-38
Apply engine oil to the threads.
Steering stem adjusting lock nut 1 26 – See page 17-38
Steering stem nut 1 24 103 (10.5, 76) See page 17-38
Clutch lever pivot bolt 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply grease to the sliding surface.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lever pivot nut 1 6 6.0 (0.6, 4.4)
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

17-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hard steering
• Steering stem adjusting nut too tight
• Damaged steering head bearings
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Faulty tire
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Bent fork pipe
• Bent axle
• Worn wheel bearing
• Unequal fork fluid quantity in each fork pipe
• Faulty steering head bearing
• Bent frame
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Weak front fork
• Loose steering stem adjusting nut
Front wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worm wheel bearing
• Faulty tire
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Axle not tightened properly
• Unbalanced tire and wheel
Wheel hard to turn
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Bent axle
• Brake drag
Soft suspension
• Weak fork spring
• Insufficient fork fluid
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Incorrect fork fluid viscosity
Stiff suspension
• Incorrect fork fluid viscosity
• Bent fork pipe
• Clogged fork fluid passage
• Damaged fork pipe and/or fork slider
• Fork pipe binds
• High tire pressure
Front suspension noisy
• Insufficient fork fluid
• Loose fork fasteners
• Bent fork pipe

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-9
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
HANDLEBAR
REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].
[1]

[2]

Hold the handlebar weight [1] and remove the

[2]
handlebar weight mounting screw [2], then remove both
handlebar weights.

[1]

Disconnect the clutch switch connectors [1].

[3] [4] [1]
Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and clutch lever bracket
[4].

[2]

Remove the screws [1] and separate the left handlebar

[1] [3]
switch housing [2].
Remove the left handlebar grip rubber [3].

[2]

17-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [1].
[4] [3]
Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and master cylinder [4].

Keep the brake master cylinder upright to prevent air

from entering the hydraulic system.

[1] [2]

Remove the screws [1].

[1] [2]
Separate the right handlebar switch housing [2].

Remove the screws [1].

[2] [4] [5]
Separate the throttle housing [2].
Disconnect the throttle cables [3] from the throttle pipe
[4], then remove the throttle pipe [5].

[1] [3]

Hold the handlebar [1] and remove the bolts [2] and
[2]
holder [3].

[3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-11
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].
[1]

[2]

Hold the handlebar weight [1] and remove the

[1]
handlebar weight mounting screw [2], then remove both
handlebar weights.

[2]

Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].

[2] [4]
Remove the socket bolts [2], holder [3] and parking
brake lever bracket [4].

[1] [3]

Remove the screws [1] and separate the left handlebar

[1] [3]
switch housing [2].
Remove the left handlebar grip rubber [3].

[2]

17-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [1].
[4] [3]
Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and master cylinder [4].

Keep the brake master cylinder upright to prevent air

from entering the hydraulic system.

[1] [2]

Remove the screws [1].

[2]
Separate the right handlebar switch housing [2].

[1]

Disconnect the throttle cables [1] from the throttle pipe

[2]
[2], then remove the throttle pipe.

[1]

Hold the handlebar [1] and remove the bolts [2] and
[2]
holder [3].

[3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-13
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Route the wires, hoses and cables properly (page 1-

25).
Clean the inside surface of the handlebar grip and
outside surface of the handlebar and throttle pipe.
Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent to
the inside surface of the grips and to the clean surface
of the left handlebar and throttle pipe.
Allow the adhesive Wait 3 – 5 minutes and install the grip.
to dry for 1 hour Rotate the grips for even application of the adhesive.
before using.

Install the handlebar [1] onto the top bridge.

[3]

Align the handlebar punch mark with the top bridge top
surface.
Hold the handlebar and install the holder [2] and
handlebar holder bolts [3] as shown.
Tighten the upper bolts first, then the lower bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Align [2] [1]

Apply grease to the throttle cable end and throttle pipe

[1] [3]
flange groove.
Install the throttle pipe [1] to the handlebar.
Connect the throttle cable [2] end to the throttle pipe.
Install the throttle housing [3] and screws [4].

Align throttle housing locating pin with the handlebar

hole.
Tighten the screws securely.
[2]
Align [4]

Install the right handlebar switch housing [1].

[1]

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar

hole.

Align

17-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
[1]
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

Install the master cylinder [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark [3]
[1] Align [2]
facing up) and bolts [4].
Align the end of the master cylinder with the punch
mark on the handlebar and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the brake light switch connectors [5].

[5] [3] [4]

Install the left handlebar switch housing [1].

Align

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar

hole.

[1]

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
[1]
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-15
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the clutch lever bracket [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark
[2] [1] Align [5]
[3] facing up) and bolts [4].
Align the end of the clutch lever bracket with the punch
mark on the handlebar, and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt.
Connect the clutch switch connectors [5].

[4] [3]

Install the handlebar weight [1] to both handlebars

[1]
aligning each cutout.

Align

Hold the handlebar weight [1].

[2]
Install and tighten a new handlebar weight mounting
screw [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]
Adjust the following:
– Clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26)
– Throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5)

[2]

17-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)

Route the wires, hoses and cables properly (page 1-

25).
Clean the inside surface of the handlebar grip and
outside surface of the handlebar and throttle pipe.
Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent to
the inside surface of the grips and to the clean surface
of the left handlebar and throttle pipe.
Allow the adhesive Wait 3 – 5 minutes and install the grip.
to dry for 1 hour Rotate the grips for even application of the adhesive.
before using.

Install the handlebar [1] onto the top bridge.

[3]

Align the handlebar punch mark with the top bridge top
surface.
Hold the handlebar and install the holder [2] and
handlebar holder bolts [3] as shown.
Tighten the upper bolts first, then the lower bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Align [2] [1]

Apply grease to the throttle cable end and throttle pipe

[1] [3]
flange groove.
Install the throttle pipe [1] to the handlebar.
Connect the throttle cable [2] end to the throttle pipe.
Install the right handlebar switch housing [3].

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar

hole.

[2] Align

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-17
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the master cylinder [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark [3]
[1] Align [2]
facing up) and bolts [4].
Align the end of the master cylinder with the punch
mark on the handlebar and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the brake light switch connectors [5].

[5] [3] [4]

Install the left handlebar switch housing [1].

Align

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar

hole.

[1]

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
[1]
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

Install the parking brake lever bracket [1].

[1]

Align the parking brake lever bracket locating pin with

the handlebar hole.

Align

17-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the holder [1] and socket bolts [2].
[2]
Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Connect the parking brake switch connectors [3].

[3] [1]

Install the handlebar weight [1] to both handlebars

[1]
aligning each cutout.

Align

Hold the handlebar weight [1].

[1]
Install and tighten a new handlebar weight mounting
screw [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[2]

Install the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]
Adjust the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-19
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INNER WEIGHT REPLACEMENT
Remove the throttle pipe or grip rubber from the
[5] [1] [4]
handlebar.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 17-10)
– NC700XD/SD (page 17-12)
Straighten the retainer ring tab [1] by the screwdriver or
punch.
Apply lubricant Temporarily install the handlebar weight [2] and screw,
spray through the then remove the inner weight assembly [3] by turning
tab locking hole [4] the handlebar weight.
to the rubber
cushions [5] for
easy removal.
[3] [2]

Remove the screw [1], handlebar weight [2], retainer

[5]
ring [3] and rubber cushions [4] from the inner weight
[5].
Install the rubber cushions and new retainer ring onto [2]
the inner weight.
Install the handlebar weight to the inner weight align
with each cut-outs of the inner weight and handlebar
[1]
weight.
Install and tighten the handlebar weight screw.
[4]

[3]

Install the inner weight assembly [1] into the handlebar.

[2] [3]
Turn the inner weight and hook the weight retainer tab
[2] with the tab locking hole [3] in the handlebar.
Remove the screw and handlebar weight.
Install the throttle pipe and grip rubber to the handlebar.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 17-14)
– NC700XD/SD (page 17-17)

[1]

FRONT WHEEL
REMOVAL
NC700X/S: Remove the front brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and
NC700X/S: [1]
slide the brake caliper/bracket assembly [2].

Do not suspend the brake caliper/bracket assembly

from the brake hose. Do not twist the brake hose.

[2]

17-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Remove the brake pads (page 19-17).
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
SD:
Remove the bolts [1] and front wheel speed sensor [2]
[1]
from the caliper bracket.
Check that there is no iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring and front wheel speed sensor.
Remove any deposits.
Check the sensor tip for deformation or damage (e.g.,
chipped pulser ring teeth).
Replace the front wheel speed sensor if necessary
(page 20-25).

[2]

Loosen the front axle pinch bolt [1] and front axle [2].
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Remove the front axle and front wheel.

Do not operate the brake lever after removing the front

wheel.

[1] [2]

Remove the side collars [1].

[1]

INSPECTION
WHEEL RIM
Check the wheel rim runout by placing the wheel in a
truing stand.
Spin the wheel by hand and measure the runout using a
dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Radial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Axial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

AXLE
Place the axle on V-blocks.
Turn the axle and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.2 mm (0.01 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-21
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
WHEEL BEARING
Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the wheel
hub.
Remove and discard the bearings if the races do not
turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the wheel
hub.
Replace the wheel bearings, if necessary (page 17-22).

Replace the bearings in pairs.

WHEEL BALANCE

• Carefully check balance before installing the wheel.

[2]
• The wheel balance must be checked when the tire is
remounted.
• For optimum balance, the tire balance mark [1] (light
mass point: a paint dot on the side wall) must be
located next to the valve stem [2]. Remount the tire if
necessary.

[1]

Note the rotating direction marks [1] on the tire, and

[1]
upon tire installation, always fit the tire so the marks
face the same direction.
Mount the wheel, tire and brake disc assembly on an
inspection stand.
Spin the wheel, allow it to stop, and mark the lowest
(heaviest) part of the wheel with chalk.
Do this 2 or 3 times to verify the heaviest area.
If the wheel is balanced, it will not stop consistently in
the same position.
To balance the wheel, install a new balance weight on
the lightest side of the rim, on the side opposite the
chalk marks. Add just enough weight so the wheel will
no longer stop in the same position when it is spun.
Do not add more than 60 g (2.1 oz) to the wheel.

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Loosen the front brake disc mounting bolts [1] in a
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown: [2]
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts,
pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [2] and brake disc [1]
[3].
Remove the front wheel dust seal [4] from the right
wheel hub.

[3] [4]

17-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the front wheel dust seal [1] from the left wheel
hub.

[1]

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Replace the front wheel dust seals and front brake

disc mounting bolts with new ones.
• Apply grease to the front wheel dust seal lips.
• Install the front wheel dust seal until it is flush with
the wheel hub surface.
• Install the front brake disc with the " " marked side
facing out.

TORQUE:
Front brake disc mounting bolt:
42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)

42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)

BRAKE DISC

BEARING (6204UU)

PULSER RING
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) DISTANCE COLLAR

DUST SEAL

DUST SEAL

BEARING (6204UU)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-23
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
WHEEL BEARING REPLACEMENT
Install the bearing remover head [1] into the bearing [2].
From the opposite side, install the bearing remover
shaft [3] and drive out the bearing from the wheel hub.
Remove the distance collar and drive out the other
bearing.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover head, 20 mm 07746-0050600
Bearing remover shaft 07GGD-0010100

[1] [2] [3]

Never install the old Drive in a new right side bearing [1] squarely with its
[2]
bearing, once the marked side facing up until it is fully seated.
bearing has been
Install the distance collar.
removed, the
bearing must be Drive in a new left side bearing squarely with its marked
replaced with new side facing up until it is seated on the distance collar.
ones.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500

[1] [3]/[4]

INSTALLATION
Install the side collars [1].
[1]

Install the front wheel between the fork legs.

Apply a thin coat of grease to the front axle sliding
surface.
Install the front axle [1] from left side.
Tighten the front axle to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

[1]

17-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Install the front wheel speed sensor [1] and bolts [2].
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
SD: Tighten the bolts securely.
[2]
Check the air gap between the front wheel speed
sensor and pulser ring (page 20-24).
Install the brake pads (page 19-17).

[1]
NC700X/S: Install the front brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] and
NC700X/S:
tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.
[2]
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

[1]

With the front brake applied, pump the forks up and

down several times to seat the axle and check brake
operation.
Tighten the front axle pinch bolt [1] to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

[1]

FORK
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown: [1]
– Front wheel (page 17-20)
– Front fender (page 2-28)
Do not suspend the Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and brake
brake caliper/ caliper/bracket assembly [2].
bracket assembly
from the brake
hose. Do not twist
the brake hose.

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-25
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Loosen the top bridge pinch bolts [1].
[2] [4]
When the fork is ready to be disassembled, loosen the
fork cap [2].
Hold the fork legs [3] and loosen the bottom bridge
pinch bolts [4] and lower the fork legs, then remove it.

[1] [3]

DISASSEMBLY
Be careful not to Remove the dust seal [1] and stopper ring [2].
[1]
scratch the fork
pipe.

[2]

Remove the following:

[1] [3]
– Fork cap [1]
– O-ring [2]
– Spring collar [3]
– Spring seat [4]

[2] [4]

Remove the fork spring [1].

[1]
Drain the fork fluid by pumping the fork pipe several
times.

17-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Do not over-tighten Set the fork slider [1] in a vise with a piece of wood or
[1] [2]/[3]
the vise on the fork soft jaws to avoid damage.
slider.

If the fork piston Remove the fork socket bolt [2] and sealing washer [3].
turns with the
socket bolt,
temporarily install
the fork spring,
spring seat, spring
collar and fork cap.

Do not remove the Remove the fork piston [1] and rebound spring [2] from
[4] [2] [1] [3]
fork piston ring [4], the fork pipe [3].
unless it is
necessary to
replace with a new
one.

Using quick successive motions, pull the fork pipe out of

the fork slider.

Remove the oil lock piece [1] from the fork slider [2].
[2]

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-27
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the following:
[1] [2] [3]
– Oil seal [1]
– Back-up ring [2]
– Guide bushing [3]

INSPECTION
FORK SPRING
Check the fork spring for fatigue or damage.
Measure the fork spring free length.
SERVICE LIMITS:
NC700X/XA/XD: 387.0 mm (15.24 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 349.9 mm (13.78 in)

FORK PIPE/SLIDER
Check the fork pipe [1] and slider [2] for score marks,
[1]
scratches, or excessive or abnormal wear.

[2]

Place the fork pipe on V-blocks.

Turn the fork pipe and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

17-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
FORK PISTON/REBOUND SPRING/OIL LOCK PIECE
Check the fork piston [1], piston ring [2] and oil lock
[2] [1] [4] [3]
piece [3] for wear or damage.
Check the rebound spring [4] for fatigue or damage.
Replace any components that are worn or damage.

GUIDE BUSHING/SLIDER BUSHING/BACK-UP RING

Visually inspect the slider and guide bushings [1].
Replace the bushings if there is excessive scoring or
scratching, or if the teflon is worn so the copper surface
[1]
appears [2] on more than 3/4 of the entire surface.
Check the back-up ring [3]; replace it if there is any
distortion at the points shown. [3]

CHECK POINTS

[2]
Do not damage the If the slider bushing [1] will be removed, carefully
slider bushing, remove the slider bushing by prying the bushing gap
especially the with a screwdriver until the bushing can be pulled off by
sliding surface. To hand.
prevent loss of
tension, do not
open the bushing Do not remove the slider bushing, unless it is necessary
more than to replace with a new one.
necessary.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-29
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
ASSEMBLY
FORK PISTON RING 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
FORK PISTON

DUST SEAL

STOPPER RING
O-RING

OIL SEAL
SPRING COLLAR
BACK-UP RING

GUIDE BUSHING SPRING SEAT

SLIDER BUSHING

FORK SLIDER FORK SPRING

REBOUND SPRING

FORK PIPE

SEALING WASHER OIL LOCK PIECE

20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)

Do not open the Install the slider bushing [1] being careful not to damage
[3] [2] [1]
bushing slit more the coating of the bushing, if it has been removed.
than necessary.
Remove the burrs from the bushing mating surface,
being careful not to peel off the coating.
Install the oil seal Apply fork fluid to a new oil seal lips.
with its marked side Install the guide bushing [2], back-up ring [3] and oil
facing up. seal [4] onto the fork pipe.

[4]

Install the rebound spring [1] to the fork piston [2] and
[1] [2] [3]
install them into the fork pipe [3].

17-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the oil lock piece [1] onto the fork piston [2] end.
[3] [2] [1] [4]
Install the fork pipe [3] into the fork slider [4].

Do not over-tighten Set the fork slider in a vise with a piece of wood or soft
[1]
the vise on the fork jaws to avoid damage.
slider.
Install a new sealing washer [1] to the fork socket bolt
[2].
Apply locking agent to the fork socket bolt threads and
install it.

[2]
If the fork piston Tighten the fork socket bolt [1] to the specified torque.
[1]
turns with the
socket bolt, TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)
temporarily install
the fork spring,
spring seat, spring
collar and fork cap.

Drive the oil seal [1] until the stopper ring groove [2] is
[3] [2]
visible using the special tools.

TOOLS:
Fork seal driver [3] 07947-KA50100
Fork seal driver attachment [4] 07947-KF00100

[4] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-31
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the stopper ring [1] into the groove of the fork
[1]
slider securely.
Apply fork fluid to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [2].

[2]

Pour the specified amount of recommended fork fluid

into the fork pipe.

NC700X/XA/XD: 104 mm (4.1 in)

NC700S/SA/SD: 103 mm (4.1 in)
RECOMMENDED FORK FLUID:
Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL 10W or equivalent

FORK FLUID CAPACITY:

NC700X/XA/XD: 514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz,
18.1 ± 0.09 Imp oz)
NC700S/SA/SD: 518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz,
18.1 ± 0.09 Imp oz)
Slowly pump the fork pipe several times to remove any
trapped air from the lower portion of the fork pipe.
Compress the fork pipe fully and measure the fluid level
from the top of the fork pipe.
FLUID LEVEL:
NC700X/XA/XD: 104 mm (4.1 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 103 mm (4.1 in)
Pull the fork pipe up and install the fork spring [1] with
[3]
the tightly wound coil side facing down.
Install the spring seat [2] and spring collar [3].
[2]

[1]

DOWN

Apply fork fluid to a new O-ring [1] and install it onto the
[1] [2]
fork cap [2].
Tighten the fork cap Loosely install the fork cap by pushing it to the fork pipe
after installing the [3].
fork pipe into the
fork bridges.

[3]

17-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION
Route the wires and Install the fork leg through the bottom bridge and top
[2] [1]
cables properly bridge while aligning top surface of fork pipe with the
(page 1-25). top surface of top bridge.
Tighten the bottom bridge pinch bolts [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
If the fork cap [2] is loosened, tighten the fork cap to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Align
Tighten the top bridge pinch bolts [3] to the specified
torque.
[3]
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Install the front brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] and
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD: [2]
SD: tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Install the following:
– Front fender (page 2-28)
– Front wheel (page 17-24)

[1]

STEERING STEM
REMOVAL
NC700X/XA/XD: Remove the following:
NC700X/XA: [3]
– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
[3]
– Handlebar
– NC700X/XA (page 17-10)
– NC700XD (page 17-12)
Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].
Release the each wire harness from the clamps [3].

[1] [2]

NC700XD: [3] [3]

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-33
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700X/XA/XD: Remove the ignition switch wire harness clamp [1] and
NC700X/XA/XD:
immobilizer receiver wire harness clamp [2].

[1] [2]
NC700X: Remove the bolt [1] and brake hose clamp [2] from the
NC700X: [1]
bottom bridge.

[2]
NC700S/SA/SD: Remove the following:
NC700S/SA/SD:
– Headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27)
– Handlebar
– NC700S/SA (page 17-10)
– NC700SD (page 17-12)
Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].

[2] [1]
NC700S/SA/SD: Remove the headlight cover (page 2-27).
NC700S/SA/SD: [4]
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
[1]
connector [1].
Remove the socket bolts [2], brake hose guide [3] and
combination meter/stay [4].

[2]/[3] [2]

17-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the cap.
Remove the steering stem nut [1].

[1]

Remove the fork legs (page 17-25).

[1] [2] [5] [3]
NC700X/XA/XD: Release the following:
– Clutch cable (NC700X/XA) [1]
– Parking brake cable (NC700XD) [1]
– Left handlebar switch wire harness clamp [2] [6]
– Throttle cables [3]
– Right handlebar switch wire harness clamp [4]
– Brake hose [5]
Remove the top bridge [6].

[4]
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Remove the bolt [1], front wheel speed sensor wire
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD: [2]
SD: guide [2] and brake hose joints [3].

[1] [3]

Straighten the lock washer tabs [1].

[1]
Remove the steering stem adjusting lock nut [2] and
lock washer.

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-35
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Loosen the steering stem adjusting nut [1] using a
special tool.
TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2] 07916-3710101
Hold the steering stem and remove the steering stem
adjusting nut.

[1] [2]

Remove the following:

[1] [2] [5]
– Dust seal [1]
– Upper bearing inner race [2]
– Upper steering head bearing [3]
– Steering stem [4]
– Lower steering head bearing [5]

[3] [4]

BEARING REPLACEMENT
Replace the Remove the upper outer race using a special tool.
[2]
bearing, outer and
inner races as a TOOLS:
set. Ball race remover set 07953-MJ10000
Remover attachment [1] 07953-MJ10100
Remover handle [2] 07953-MJ10200

[1]

Remove the lower bearing outer race using the special

tool and suitable shaft.

TOOL:
Bearing remover [1] 07946-3710500

[1]

17-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Temporarily install the steering stem nut [1] onto the
[2] [3]
steering stem [2] to prevent the threads from being
damaged when removing the lower inner race [3] from
the steering stem.
Remove the lower inner race with a chisel or equivalent
tools, being careful not to damage the steering stem.
Remove the steering head bearing dust seal [4].

[1] [4]

Apply specified grease to a new steering head bearing

dust seal lips (page 1-23).
Install the steering head bearing dust seal [1] to the
steering stem.
Install a new lower inner race [2] using a hydraulic
press and special tool.
TOOL:
Attachment, 30 mm I.D. [3] 07746-0030300

[1] [3] [2]

Drive in a new upper outer race [1] using the special

[2] [3]
tools.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300

[1]

Drive in a new lower outer race [1] using the special

[1] [3]
tools.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 52 x 55 mm [3] 07746-0010400

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-37
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION
LOCK NUT

: BEARINGS LOCK WASHER

: BEARING RACES ADJUSTING NUT
: DUST SEALS
UPPER DUST SEAL
LOWER OUTER RACE UPPER INNER RACE

LOWER BEARING UPPER BEARING

UPPER OUTER RACE

LOWER INNER RACE

LOWER DUST SEAL

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

STEERING STEM

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

Apply 3 – 5 g (0.1 – 0.2 oz) of specified grease to each

[4] [1]
steering head bearing inner races and outer races
sliding surface (page 1-23).
Apply specified grease to a new steering head bearing
dust seal lips (page 1-23).
Install the bearings [1] in the lower inner race and upper
outer race.
Install the steering stem [2], upper inner race [3] and
dust seal [4].

[3] [1] [2]

Apply engine oil to the steering stem adjusting nut [1]

[2]
threads.
Install and tighten the steering stem adjusting nut to the
specified torque using a special tool.
TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2] 07916-3710101

TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

17-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Move the steering stem left and right, lock-to-lock five
times to seat the bearings.

Retighten the adjusting nut [1] to the specified torque

[2]
using a special tool.

TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2] 07916-3710101

TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install a new lock washer [1], aligning its short bent tabs
[3] [1]
with the grooves in the steering stem adjusting nut.
Install the lock nut [2] until it contacts with the lock
washer.
Further tighten the lock nut, within 90°, to align its
grooves with the tabs of the lock washer.
Bend up the long lock washer tabs [3] into the grooves
of the lock nut.

[2] [3]
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Install the brake hose joints [1], front wheel speed
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD: [2] [4]
SD: sensor wire guide [2] and bolt [3].

• Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 1-

25).
• Note the installation position of the brake hose
joints.
– Right side: Brake sub hose C (white painted [4]
hose)
– Left side: Front brake hose D
Tighten the bolt securely.

[3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-39
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the top bridge [1].
[6] [5] [2] [4]
NC700X/XA/XD: Install the following:
– Brake hose [2]
– Right handlebar switch wire harness clamp [3]
– Throttle cables [4] [1]
– Left handlebar switch wire harness clamp [5]
– Clutch cable (NC700X/XA) [6]
– Parking brake cable (NC700XD) [6]

Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 1-25).

[3]

Install the steering stem nut [1], but do not tighten the
steering stem nut yet.
Install the fork legs (page 17-33).
Tighten the steering stem nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)
Turn the steering stem left and right, lock-to-lock
several times to make sure the steering stem moves
smoothly without play or binding.
Install the cap to the steering stem nut.

[1]
NC700X: Install the brake hose clamp [1] and bolt [2] to the
NC700X: [2]
bottom bridge.

Be sure to rest the brake hose clamp against the

bottom bridge tab [3].

[1] [3]
NC700X/XA/XD: Install the ignition switch wire harness clamp [1] and
NC700X/XA/XD:
immobilizer receiver wire harness clamp [2].

[1] [2]

17-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700X/XA/XD: Install the wire harness from the clamps [1].
NC700X/XA: [1]
Connect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [2]
[1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [3].
Install the following:
– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
– Handlebar
– NC700X/XA (page 17-14)
– NC700XD (page 17-17)

[2] [3]

NC700XD: [1] [1]

[2] [3]
NC700S/SA/SD: Install the combination meter/stay [1], brake hose guide
NC700S/SA/SD: [4] [1]
[2] and socket bolts [3].

• Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 1-

25).
• Install the brake hose guide against the combination
meter stay.
Connect the combination meter 16P (Gray) connector
[4].

[2]/[3] [3]
NC700S/SA/SD: Install the headlight cover (page 2-27).
NC700S/SA/SD:
Connect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].
Install the following:
– Headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27)
– Handlebar
– NC700S/SA (page 17-14)
– NC700SD (page 17-17)
Perform the digital clock set procedure (page 22-14).

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

17-41
 dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the clutch lever pivot nut [1] and bolt [2].
[2]
Remove the clutch lever [3] and disconnect the clutch
cable [4].

[4] [1] [3]

Connect the clutch cable [1] to the clutch lever [2].

Install the clutch lever to the clutch lever bracket.
Apply grease to the clutch lever pivot bolt sliding
surface.
Install and tighten the clutch lever pivot bolt to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Install and tighten the clutch lever pivot nut to the
specified torque while holding the clutch lever pivot bolt.
TORQUE: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
[1] [2]

17-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

18. REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························18-2 SHOCK LINKAGE····································· 18-13

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························18-4 SHOCK ABSORBER ································ 18-14

TROUBLESHOOTING·································18-5 SWINGARM ·············································· 18-16

REAR WHEEL ·············································18-6

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-1
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
COMPONENT LOCATION
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

NC700XA/SA shown:

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

18-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
NC700XD/SD:

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-3
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When servicing the rear wheel and suspension, support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• After the rear wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake pedal.
• Use only tires marked "TUBELESS" and tubeless valves on rim marked "TUBELESS TIRE APPLICABLE".
• Use genuine Honda replacement bolts and nuts for all suspension pivot and mounting point.
• For brake system information (page 19-5).

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Minimum tire tread depth – 2.0 (0.08)
Cold tire pressure Driver only 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) –
Driver and passenger 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) –
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01)
Wheel rim runout Radial – 2.0 (0.08)
Axial – 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel balance weight 60 g (2.1 oz)
–
max.
Drive Size/link NC700X/ DID DID520V0-114LE –
chain XA/S/SA RK RK520MKO-114LE –
NC700XD DID DID520V0-112LE –
/SD RK RK520MKO-112LE –
Slack NC700X/XA/XD 30 – 40 (1.2 – 1.6) –
NC700S/SA/SD 25 – 35 (1.0 – 1.4) –

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Driven sprocket nut 5 12 108 (11.0, 80) U-nut
Rear brake disc mounting bolt 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Rear axle nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Shock absorber mounting nut 2 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Shock arm nut 1 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Shock link nut 2 10 44 (4.5, 32) U-nut
Drive chain slider mounting screw 2 5 5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
Swingarm pivot nut 1 18 98 (10.0, 72) U-nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Gearshift arm pinch bolt 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

18-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
TROUBLESHOOTING
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Drive chain adjusters not adjusted equally
• Bent axle
• Bent frame
• Worn swingarm pivot components
Rear wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worn wheel bearing
• Worn driven flange bearing
• Faulty tire
• Bent frame or swingarm
• Axle not tightened properly
• Unbalanced tire and wheel
• Insufficient tire pressure
Wheel hard to turn
• Brake drag
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Faulty driven flange bearing
• Bent axle
• Drive chain too tight (page 3-16)
Soft suspension
• Weak shock absorber spring
• Oil leakage from damper unit
• Insufficient tire pressure
Stiff suspension
• Bent shock absorber damper rod
• Damaged suspension or swingarm pivot bearing
• Bent swingarm pivot or frame
Rear suspension noisy
• Loose suspension fasteners
• Faulty shock absorber

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-5
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
REAR WHEEL
REMOVAL
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
[2]
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Remove the bolts [1] and rear wheel speed sensor [2].
SD:

[1]

Loosen the lock nut [1], drive chain adjusting nut [2] and
[2] [3]
axle nut [3].
Push the rear wheel forward.
Derail the drive chain [4] from the driven sprocket.
Remove the axle nut, washer [5] and adjusting plate [6].
Do not operate the Remove the axle [7], adjusting plate and rear wheel.
brake pedal after
removing the rear
wheel.

[4] [1] [5] [6] [7]

Remove the side collars [1].

[1]

18-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
INSPECTION
WHEEL RIM
Check the rim runout by placing the wheel in a truing
stand.
Spin the wheel by hand, and measure the runout using
a dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Radial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Axial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

AXLE
Place the axle on V-blocks.
Turn the axle and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.2 mm (0.01 in)

WHEEL AND DRIVEN FLANGE BEARINGS

Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the wheel
hub and driven flange.
Replace the Remove and discard the bearings if the races do not
bearings as a set. turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the wheel
hub and driven flange.

WHEEL BALANCE
For wheel balance servicing (page 17-22).

DRIVEN SPROCKET
For driven sprocket inspection (page 3-18).

DISASSEMBLY
Loosen the rear brake disc mounting bolts [1] in a
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown: [1]
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
[3]
Remove the rear brake disc mounting bolts, brake disc
[2] and pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [3].
Remove the dust seal [4] from the right wheel hub.

[2] [4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-7
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the dust seal [1] from the driven flange [2].
[1]
If you will Remove the driven flange assembly.
disassemble the
driven flange,
loosen the driven
sprocket nuts [3] in
a crisscross pattern
in 2 or 3 steps,
before removing the
driven flange from
the left wheel hub.

[2] [3]

Remove the damper rubbers [1] and O-ring [2].

[2] [1]

Remove the driven sprocket nuts [1] and driven

[1]
sprocket [2].

[2]

Drive out the rear wheel distance collar B [1].

[2]
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3] 07746-0010800
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500
[1]

[3]/[4]

18-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Drive out the driven flange bearing [1].
[1]

Install the bearing remover head [1] into the bearing.

From the opposite side, install the bearing remover
shaft [2] and drive out the bearing from the wheel hub.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover head, 20 mm 07746-0050600
Bearing remover shaft 07GGD-0010100
Remove the distance collar and drive out the other
bearing.

[1] [2]

ASSEMBLY

DRIVEN FLANGE
42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)
BEARING (22 x 50 x 15)
BRAKE DISC
DUST SEAL
PULSER RING
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)

DUST SEAL
DRIVEN SPROCKET

DAMPER RUBBER
BEARING (6204UU)
REAR WHEEL
DISTANCE COLLAR B
DISTANCE COLLAR

O-RING

BEARING (6204UU)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-9
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Never install the old Drive in a new right side bearing [1] squarely until it is
[6] [2]
bearing, once the fully seated.
bearing has been
removed, the TOOLS:
bearing must be Driver [2] 07749-0010000 [5]
replaced with new Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
ones. Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500
Install the distance collar [5].
[1]
Drive in a new left side bearing [6] squarely until it is
seated on the distance collar.

[3]/[4]

Drive the rear wheel distance collar B [1] to a new

[3] [4]/[5]
driven flange bearing [2].

TOOLS:
Driver [3] 07749-0010000 [1]
Attachment, 28 x 30 mm [4] 07946-1870100
Pilot, 20 mm [5] 07746-0040500

[2]

Drive in the driven flange bearing/collar [1] squarely

[2]
with its collar side facing down until it is fully seated.

TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3] 07746-0010300
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500

[1] [3]/[4]

Install the driven sprocket [1] to the driven flange.

[2]

Install the driven sprocket with its marked side facing

out.
Temporarily install the driven sprocket nuts [2].

[1]

18-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Apply grease to a new O-ring [1].
Install the damper rubbers [2] and the O-ring into the
left wheel hub.

[1] [2]

Install the driven flange assembly [1] into the left wheel
[3]
hub.
Tighten the driven sprocket nuts [2] to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
Apply grease to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [3] to the driven flange.

[1] [2]

Install the pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [1] onto

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown: [4]
right wheel hub.
[3]
Install the rear brake disc [2] with its arrow mark [3]
facing out.
Install and tighten new brake disc bolts [4] to the
specified torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)
Apply grease to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [5] to the right wheel hub.

Do not get grease on the brake disc. [2] [1] [5]

INSTALLATION
Install the right side collar [1] and left side collar [2].

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-11
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] to the
NC700XA/SA shown:
swingarm.

Align the bracket groove with swingarm tab.

[1] Align

NC700XD/SD:

[1] Align
Be careful not to Install the rear wheel in the swingarm aligning the brake
[2] [5]
damage the brake disc between the brake pads.
pads.
Install the drive chain [1] over the driven sprocket.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the rear axle outer
surface.
Install the rear axle [2] from the left side through the
axle adjusting plate [3], swingarm, rear wheel and
collars.
Install the adjusting plate, washer [4] and rear axle nut
[5].
Tighten the rear axle nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft) [1] [3] [4] [3]

Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).

NC700XA/XD/SA/ Install the rear wheel speed sensor [1] and bolts [2].
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
SD: Tighten the bolts securely.
[1]
Check the air gap between the rear wheel speed sensor
and pulser ring (page 20-24).
NC700XD/SD: Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[2]

18-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
SHOCK LINKAGE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
[5]/[6]
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Remove the following:
– Shock link bolt [1] and nut [2]
– Shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3] and nut [4]
– Shock arm bolt [5] and nut [6]
– Shock linkage assembly [7]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Shock absorber mounting nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock arm nut:
[1]/[2] [3]/[4] [7]
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock link nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION/
ASSEMBLY
Remove the shock link bolt [1], nut [2] and shock links
[4]
[3] from the shock arm [4].

[3] [1]/[2]

Remove the collars [1] from the shock arm [2].

[2]
Check the collars for wear, damage or fatigue.
Check the shock arm for cracks or damage.
Replace them if necessary.
Check the needle bearings [3] for damage or loose fit.
If the needle bearings are damaged, replace them
(page 18-14).
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
TORQUE:
Shock link nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft) [3] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-13
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
BEARING REPLACEMENT
Remove the needle bearings [1] using the special tools.

TOOLS:
Bearing remover set, 17 mm [2] 07936-3710300
Remover handle [3] 07936-3710100
Remover weight [4] 07741-0010201
[3]

[4] [2] [1]

Never install the old Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new needle
[2] [3]/[4]
bearing, once the bearings rotating area.
bearing has been
Install the needle bearings [1] with the marked and dust
removed, the
seal side facing out until it is flush with the shock arm
bearing must be
surface using a hydraulic press and special tools as
replaced with new
shown.
ones.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3] 07746-0010800
Pilot, 17 mm [4] 07746-0040400

[1]

SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the shock arm bolt [1] and nut [2].
Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3]
and nut [4].

[3]/[4] [1]/[2]

Remove the shock absorber upper mounting nut [1].

Remove the shock absorber upper mounting socket
bolt [2] and shock absorber.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Shock absorber mounting nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock arm nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

18-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
INSPECTION
Visually inspect the shock absorber for wear or
damage.
Check the following:
– Damper rod [1] for bend or damage
– Damper unit [2] for deformation or oil leaks
– Rubber bumper [3] for wear or damage
– Bushing [4] for wear or damage
[4]
Replace the shock absorber as an assembly if
necessary.

[2] [1] [3]

Remove the collar [1] and dust seals [2].

Check the needle bearings [3] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-15).
Check the collar for wear or damage, replace it if
necessary.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the needle
bearings rotating area and new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seals until it is flush with the shock
absorber surface.
Install the collar.
[3]
[1] [2]

BEARING REPLACEMENT
Drive the needle bearing [1] out of the lower pivot using
[2]
a hydraulic press and special tool.

TOOLS: [3]
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3] 07746-0010800
Pilot, 17 mm [4] 07746-0040400

[4] [1]

Never install the old Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new needle
[2]
bearing, once the bearings rotating area. 5.0 – 5.5 mm
bearing has been
Install the needle bearing [1] into the lower pivot to the [3] (0.20 – 0.22 in)
removed, the
specified range using a hydraulic press and special
bearing must be
tools as shown.
replaced with new
ones. TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3] 07746-0010800
Pilot, 17 mm [4] 07746-0040400

[4] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-15
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
PROCEDURE
Center punch the shock absorber to mark the drilling
point.
Wrap the shock absorber inside a plastic bag.
Support the shock absorber in a vise as shown.
Through the open end of the bag, insert a drill motor 31 mm
with a sharp 2 – 3 mm (5/64 – 1/8 in) drill bit. (1.2 in)

• Do not use a dull drill bit which could cause a build-

up of excessive heat and pressure inside the
damper, leading to an explosion and severe injury.
• The shock absorber contains nitrogen gas and oil
under high pressure. Do not drill any further down
the damper case than the measurement given
above, or you may drill into the oil chamber. Then
high pressure oil may cause serious injury.
• Always wear eye protection to avoid getting metal
shavings in your eyes when the gas pressure is
released. The plastic bag is only intended to shield
you from the escaping gas.
Hold the bag around the drill motor and briefly run the
drill motor inside the bag; this will inflate the bag with air
from the motor and help keep the bag from getting
caught in the bit when you start.

SWINGARM
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
NC700X/XA/S/SA: [2]
– Rear wheel (page 18-6)
– Muffler (page 2-32)
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Remove the gearshift arm pinch bolt [1] and gearshift
arm [2].

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and

NC700X/XA/S/SA shown:
left step holder [2].

[2] [1]

18-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the socket bolts [1] and drive chain case [2].
[2]

[1]
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].
NC700XA/SA shown:
Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
[2] [4]
sensor wire (NC700XA/SA) [4] from the brake hose
guide.

[3]

[1]
NC700XD/SD: Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].
NC700XD/SD: [4] [2]
Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
sensor wire [4] from the brake hose guide.
Remove the screws [5] and parking brake cable guides
[6].

[3]

[1] [5]/[6]

Remove the shock link bolt [1] and nut [2].

Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3]
and nut [4].

[1]/[2] [3]/[4]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-17
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

Do not twist the brake hose.

[1] [2]

Remove the swingarm pivot nut [1], washer [2], pivot

bolt [3] and swingarm [4].

[4] [1]/[2]/[3]

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION
Remove the drive chain slider mounting screws [1] and
[5] [1]/[2] [3]
washers [2].
Remove the drive chain slider [3] by releasing the slider
slit [4] from the swingarm tab and slider tabs [5] from
the swingarm holes.

[4]

Remove the pivot collars [1], dust seals [2] and distance
collar [3] from the swingarm pivot.
Check the collar for wear, damage or fatigue.
[1]
Check the needle bearings [4] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-19).
[2]

[3]

[4] [1] [2]

18-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the collar [1] form the shock absorber bracket.
Check the collar for wear, damage or fatigue.
Check the needle bearings [2] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-19).

[2] [1]

Turn the inner race of the right side pivot ball bearings
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the
swingarm pivot.
Remove and discard the bearing if the race does not
turn smoothly and quietly, or if it fits loosely in the
swingarm pivot (page 18-19).

PIVOT BEARING REPLACEMENT

Remove the snap ring [1] from the right pivot.
[1]

Drive the needle bearing [1] and ball bearing [2] out of
[3]
the right pivot using a hydraulic press and special tool.

TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [3] 07949-3710001 [4]
Pilot, 28 mm [4] 07746-0041100
[2]

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-19
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Drive the needle bearing [1] out of the left pivot using a
[2] [3]
hydraulic press and special tool.
TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [2] 07949-3710001
Pilot, 32 mm [3] 07MAD-PR90200

[1]

Remove the needle bearings [1] out of the shock

[4] [2] [1]
absorber bracket using the special tools.

TOOLS:
Bearing remover set, 17 mm [2] 07936-3710300
Remover handle [3] 07936-3710100
Remover weight [4] 07741-0010201

[3]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle

[2] [3]/[4]
bearing rotating area.
Install the needle bearing [1] into the left pivot with the 4.5 – 5.0 mm
marked side facing up to the specified range using a (0.18 – 0.20 in)
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 37 mm [3] 07ZMD-MBW0200
Pilot, 28 mm [4] 07746-0041100
[1]

Apply grease to a new ball bearing rotating area.

[2]
Install the ball bearing [1] into the right pivot with the
marked side facing out until it is fully seated using a
[3]/[4]
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 37 mm [3] 07ZMD-MBW0200
Pilot, 20 mm [4] 07746-0040500

[1]

18-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle
[2] [3]/[4]
bearing rotating area.
Install the needle bearing [1] into the right pivot with the
marked side facing out until it is fully seated using a
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 37 mm [3] 07ZMD-MBW0200
Pilot, 30 mm [4] 07746-0040700

[1]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle

[2]
bearing rotating area.
Install the needle bearings [1] into the shock absorber
[3]/[4]
bracket with the marked side facing out until it is flush
with the bracket surface using a hydraulic press and
special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2] 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3] 07746-0010800
Pilot, 17 mm [4] 07746-0040400

[1]

Install the snap ring [1] into the right pivot groove
[1]
securely.

• Do not reuse the snap ring which could easily spin in

the groove.
• Make sure that the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-21
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
ASSEMBLY

SNAP RING DUST SEAL

PIVOT COLLAR
NEEDLE BEARING

BEARING
DISTANCE COLLAR
NEEDLE BEARING

NEEDLE BEARING

DUST SEAL SWINGARM

PIVOT COLLAR

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER

WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
DRIVE CHAIN ADJUSTERS
5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
COLLAR

Install the collar [1] to the shock absorber bracket.

[1]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new dust seal

rips.
Install the distance collar [1] and dust seals [2] to the
swingarm pivot. [4]

Install the dust seal flush with the pivot surface.

Install the wide pivot collar [3] to the swingarm right
pivot.
Install the narrow pivot collar [4] to the swingarm left [1]
pivot.

[2] [3]

18-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the drive chain slider [1].
[3] [4]/[5] [1]

• Align the drive chain slider slit [2] from the swingarm
tab.
• Align the drive chain slider tabs [3] from the
swingarm holes.
Install the washers [4] and drive chain slider mounting
screws [5].
Tighten the drive chain slider mounting screws to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
[2]

INSTALLATION
Apply a thin coat of grease to the swingarm pivot bolt
[1]
sliding surface.
Set the drive chain [1] onto the swingarm [2] and install
the swingarm to the frame.
Install the swingarm pivot bolt [3] from the left side.

[3] [2]

Install the washer [1] and swingarm pivot nut [2].

Tighten the swingarm pivot nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-23
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the shock arm [1] and shock absorber lower
[4]
mounting bolt [2] to the shock absorber.
Install and tighten the shock absorber lower mounting
nut [3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Install the shock links [4] and shock link bolt [5] to the
swingarm.
Install and tighten the shock link nut [6] to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

[5]/[6] [2]/[3] [1]

NC700X/XA/S/SA: Install the rear wheel speed sensor wire (NC700XA/SA)

NC700XA/SA shown:
[1] and brake hose [2] to the brake hose guide [3].
[3] [1]
Install the brake hose guide and socket bolts [4].
Tighten the socket bolts securely.

[2]

[4]
NC700XD/SD: Install the rear wheel speed sensor wire [1] and brake
NC700XD/SD: [1] [3]
hose [2] to the brake hose guide [3].
Install the brake hose guide and socket bolts [4].
Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the parking brake cable guides [5] and screws
[6].
Tighten the screws securely.
[2]

[4] [5]/[6]

Install the drive chain case [1] and socket bolts [2].
[1]
Tighten the socket bolts securely.

[2]

18-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
NC700X/XA/S/SA shown:
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[1] [2]

NC700X/XA/S/SA: Install the gearshift arm [1] to the gearshift spindle.

NC700X/XA/S/SA: Align [1]

Align the gearshift arm slit with the gearshift spindle

punch mark.
Install and tighten a new gearshift arm pinch bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the following:
– Muffler (page 2-32)
– Rear wheel (page 18-11)
[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18-25
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

19. HYDRAULIC BRAKE

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························19-2 REAR MASTER CYLINDER ····················· 19-23

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························19-5 FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

(NC700X/S) ··············································· 19-26
TROUBLESHOOTING·································19-7
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ······························ 19-28
BLEEDING (NC700X/S) ······························19-8
REAR BRAKE CALIPER ·························· 19-30
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ···········19-11 PARKING BRAKE CALIPER
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 19-32
BRAKE PAD/DISC ····································19-16
BRAKE PEDAL ········································· 19-37
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER ···················19-20
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 19-38

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-1
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
COMPONENT LOCATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE

NC700XA/SA shown: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

NC700X/S:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

19-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

NC700XA/SA shown:

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-3
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
NC700XD/SD:

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)

19-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

Spilling brake fluid will severely damage instrument lenses and painted surface. It is also harmful to some rubber parts. Be careful
whenever you remove the reservoir cover; make sure the front reservoir is horizontal first.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• Check the brake system by applying the brake lever or pedal after the air bleeding.
• Never allow contaminates (dirt, water, etc.) to get into an open reservoir.
• Once the hydraulic system has been opened, or if the brake feels spongy, the system must be bled.
• Always use fresh DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container when servicing the system. Do not mix different types of fluid, they
may not be compatible.
• Always check brake operation before riding the motorcycle.
• This section covers service of the conventional brake components of the brake system. For Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
service (page 20-4).

SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Front Specified brake fluid DOT 4 –
Brake disc thickness 4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20) 4.0 (0.16)
Brake disc warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Master cylinder I.D. 11.000 – 11.043 (0.4331 – 0.4348) 11.055 (0.4352)
Master piston O.D. 10.957 – 10.984 (0.4314 – 0.4324) 10.945 (0.4309)
Caliper cylinder I.D. (NC700X/S) 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650) 27.060 (1.0654)
Caliper piston O.D. (NC700X/S) 26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617) 26.91 (1.059)
Caliper cylinder I.D. Cylinder A 22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937) 22.712 (0.8941)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) Cylinder B 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650) 27.060 (1.0654)
Caliper piston O.D. Piston A 22.585 – 22.618 (0.8892 – 0.8905) 22.56 (0.888)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) Piston B 26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617) 26.91 (1.059)
Rear Specified brake fluid DOT 4 –
Brake disc thickness 4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20) 4.0 (0.16)
Brake disc warpage – 0.30 (0.012)
Master cylinder I.D. 14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529) 14.055 (0.5533)
Master piston O.D. 13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506) 13.945 (0.5490)
Caliper cylinder I.D. 38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505) 38.24 (1.506)
Caliper piston O.D. 38.098 – 38.148 (1.4999 – 1.5019) 38.09 (1.500)
Brake pedal height 85.0 – 87.0 (3.35 – 3.43) –

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-5
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Brake caliper bleed valve 2 8 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(NC700X/S)
Brake caliper bleed valve 3 8 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Master cylinder reservoir cover 4 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt 1 6 10 (1.0, 7)
Brake pad pin 2 10 17 (1.7, 13)
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Front master cylinder holder bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Brake hose oil bolt 4 10 34 (3.5, 25)
(NC700X/S)
Brake hose oil bolt 5 10 34 (3.5, 25)
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Front brake light switch screw 1 4 1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
Front brake lever pivot bolt 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) silicone
grease to the sliding surface.
Front brake lever pivot nut 1 6 5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
Rear master cylinder mounting 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
bolt
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Rear master cylinder hose joint 1 4 1.5 (0.2, 1.1) Apply locking agent to the threads.
screw
Rear master cylinder push rod lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut
Front brake caliper pin 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Front brake caliper bracket pin 1 8 12 (1.2, 9) Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 2 8 30 (3.1, 22) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Rear brake caliper pin 1 12 27 (2.8, 20) Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Parking brake caliper mounting 2 8 31 (3.2, 23) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
bolt (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake caliper pin bolt 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Apply locking agent to the threads.
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake pad pin 2 8 17 (1.7, 13) ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock 1 8 17 (1.7, 13)
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake cable mounting nut 1 10 10 (1.0, 7)
(NC700XD/SD)

19-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brake lever/pedal soft or spongy
• Air in hydraulic system
• Leaking hydraulic system
• Contaminated brake pad/disc
• Worn caliper piston seal
• Worn master cylinder piston cups
• Worn brake pad/disc
• Contaminated caliper
• Contaminated master cylinder
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Low brake fluid level
• Clogged fluid passage
• Warped/deformed brake disc
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston
• Bent brake lever/pedal
Brake lever/pedal hard
• Clogged/restricted hydraulic system
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Worn caliper piston seal
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston
• Bent brake lever/pedal
Brake drags
• Contaminated brake pad/disc
• Misaligned wheel
• Badly worn brake pad/disc
• Warped/deformed brake disc
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Clogged/restricted hydraulic system
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Clogged master cylinder port
• Sticking master cylinder piston

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-7
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700X/S)
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When using a commercially available brake bleeder,
follow the manufacture’s operating instructions.
BRAKE FLUID DRAINING
Front brake: Turn the handlebar until the reservoir is parallel to the
Front: [3]/[4]
ground.
[1]
Remove the reservoir cover screws [1], reservoir cover
[2], set plate [3] and diaphragm [4].

[2]
Rear brake: Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
Rear: [3]
Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
[8] [10]
reservoir [2].
[4]
Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6].
[5]
Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8]. [6]

Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].

[2] [1] [7] [2] [9] [1]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the caliper bleed valve [2].

Front shown:
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the brake lever/pedal
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.

[1] [2]

19-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING
Do not mix different Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
Front shown:
types of fluid. There container.
are not compatible.
Connect a automatic refill system to the reservoir.
If an automatic refill system is not used, add fluid when
the fluid level in the reservoir is low.

• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brake

to prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• When using a brake bleeding tool, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions.

Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to

Front shown:
the bleed valve [2].
Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the bleed valve. [1]
If air enters the Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
bleeder from completely flushed/bled.
around the bleed Close the bleed valve and operate the brake lever/
valve threads, seal pedal. If it still feels spongy, bleed the system again.
the threads with
After bleeding the system completely, tighten the brake
teflon tape.
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

[2]

If the brake bleeder is not available, perform the

Front shown:
following procedure.
Pump up the system pressure with the brake lever/
pedal until the lever/pedal resistance is felt.
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the bleed valve [2].
1. Squeeze the brake lever/pedal all the way and
loosen the bleed valve 1/4 turn. Wait several
seconds and then close the bleed valve.

• Do not release the brake lever/pedal until the bleed

valve has been closed.
2. Release the brake lever/pedal slowly and wait [1] [2]
several seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until there are no air
bubbles in the bleed hose.
After bleeding the system completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-9
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Do not mix different Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
Front shown:
types of fluid. There container to the casting ledge [1].
are not compatible. [1]

Front brake: Install the diaphragm [1], set plate [2], reservoir cover
Front: [1]/[2]
[3] and reservoir cover screws [4], then tighten the
screws to the specified torque. [4]

TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

[3]

Rear brake: Remove the 6 mm nut [1], rear brake reservoir

Rear: [9] [7]
mounting bolt [2] and reservoir [3].
[1]
Install the diaphragm [4], set plate [5] and reservoir
cover [6]. [6]
Install and tighten the cover screws [7] to the specified
torque. [5]
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)
[4]
Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting
bolt.

Align the reservoir tab [8] with the reservoir stay upper
hole [9].
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[3] [2] [3] [8] [2]

19-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When using a commercially available brake bleeder,
follow the manufacture’s operating instructions.
BRAKE FLUID DRAINING
LEVER BRAKE LINE
Turn the handlebar until the reservoir is parallel to the
[1] [3]/[4]
ground.
Remove the reservoir cover screws [1], reservoir cover
[2], set plate [3] and diaphragm [4].

[2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper

[1]
upper bleed valve [2].
Loosen the upper bleed valve and pump the brake lever
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.

[2]

PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE LINE

Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
[8] [3]
Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
[10]
reservoir [2].
[4]
Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6].
[5]
Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8]. [6]

Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].

[2] [1] [7] [2] [9] [1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-11
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
Loosen the center bleed valve and pump the brake
pedal until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
Tighten the bleed valve.

[1] [2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed

[1]
valve [2].
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the brake pedal until
no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
Tighten the bleed valve.

[2]

BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING

BRAKE FLUID LINE

FRONT MASTER CYLINDER

ABS MODULATOR

DELAY VALVE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

REAR BRAKE CALIPER

PCV

REAR MASTER CYLINDER

19-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
LEVER BRAKE LINE
Close the bleed valves.
[1]
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Connect an automatic refill system to the reservoir.

• If an automatic refill system is not used, add brake

fluid when the fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brakes
to prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• When using a brake bleeding tool, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
• If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed
valve threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
the front brake caliper upper bleed valve.
Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the bleed valve.
Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
completely flushed/bled.
Close the bleed valve and operate the brake lever. If it
is still spongy, bleed the system again.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
If a brake bleeder is not available, use the following
[1]
procedure:
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
upper bleed valve [2].
Pressurize the system with the brake lever until lever
resistance is felt.
1. Squeeze the brake lever all the way and loosen the
bleed valve 1/4 turn and then close the bleed valve.

• Do not release the lever until the bleed valve has

been closed. [2]
2. Release the brake lever slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. until air bubbles do not
appear in the bleed hose.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
[1]
container to the casting ledge [1].
Install the diaphragm and set plate.
Install the reservoir cover and tighten the screws to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-13
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE FLUID FILLING
Add fluid and bleed any air from the pedal brake line in
the sequence as follow:
1. Front brake caliper center bleed valve
2. Rear brake caliper bleed valve
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Operate the brake pedal several times to bleed any air
from the master cylinder.

Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to

[1]
the front brake caliper center bleed valve.

If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed valve

threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
1. Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the front
brake caliper center bleed valve. Add fluid when the
fluid level in the master cylinder is low to prevent
drawing air into the system.
2. Repeat the above procedures until a sufficient
amount of fluid flows out of the front brake caliper
center bleed valve.
It is not problem if the fluid flowing out from the center
bleed valve contains air bubbles because the lines will
be bled later (page 19-15).
Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
[1]
the rear brake caliper bleed valve.
Repeat above step 1. and 2. for rear brake caliper bleed
valve.
Bleed the hydraulic system (page 19-15).

If a brake bleeder is not available, use the following

procedure:
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
1. Pump the brake pedal several (5 – 10) times quickly,
then push the brake pedal all the way down, loosen
the front brake caliper center bleed valve 1/4 of turn.
Wait several seconds and close the bleed valve.
Release the brake pedal slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
2. Repeat the above procedures until a sufficient
amount of the fluid flows out from the front brake [1] [2]
caliper center bleed valve.
It is not a problem if the fluid flowing out from the front
brake caliper center bleed valve contains air bubbles
because the lines will be bled later (page 19-15).

19-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed
[1]
valve [2].
Repeat above steps 1. and 2. for the rear brake caliper
bleed valve.
Bleed the rear hydraulic system (page 19-15).

[2]

PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE AIR BLEEDING

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
1. Pump the brake pedal several (5 – 10) times quickly,
then push the brake pedal all the way down, loosen
the front brake caliper center bleed valve 1/4 of turn.
Wait several seconds and close the bleed valve.
Release the brake pedal slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
2. Repeat the above procedures until air bubbles do
not appear in the transparent hose.

[1] [2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed

[1]
valve [2].
Repeat above steps 1. and 2. for the rear brake caliper
bleed valve.
Note that you may feel strong resistance on the rear
(combi) brake pedal during pumping when bleeding air
from the caliper. This symptom is caused by the PCV
function. Be sure to apply the brake pedal fully.

[2]

After there are no more air bubbles in the fluid, repeat

the air bleeding procedure about 2 or 3 times at each
bleed valve.
Make sure the bleed valves are closed and operate the
brake pedal. If it still feels spongy, bleed the system
again.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir [1] with DOT 4 brake fluid from a
sealed container to the "UPPER" level [2].
[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-15
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the 6 mm nut [1], rear brake reservoir
[1] [9] [7]
mounting bolt [2] and reservoir [3].
Install the diaphragm [4], set plate [5] and reservoir
cover [6]. [6]
Install and tighten the cover screws [7] to the specified
torque. [5]
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)
[4]
Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting
bolt.

Align the reservoir tab [8] with the reservoir stay upper
hole [9].
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[3] [2] [3] [8] [2]

BRAKE PAD/DISC
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
(NC700X/S)

• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure

even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Remove the brake pad pin [1] and brake pads [2].

Do not operate the brake lever after removing the brake

pads. Align
Install new brake pads to the brake caliper so their ends
seat against the retainer.

Make sure that the retainer and pad spring are installed
to the brake caliper.
Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [3] is in good
condition, replace if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring
and install it to the brake pad pin groove.
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.
Tighten the brake pad pin to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake lever to seat the caliper piston
against the pads.

[1]

[2] [3]

19-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure

even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Do not operate the Remove the brake pad pin [1] and brake pads [2].
brake lever after
removing the brake
pads.

[2] [1]

Install new brake pads [1] to the brake caliper so their

Align
ends seat against the retainer.

Make sure that the retainer is installed to the caliper

bracket.
Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [2] is in good
condition, replace if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring
and install it to the brake pad pin [3] groove.
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against [1]
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.
[2] [3]
Tighten the front brake pad pin to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake lever to seat the caliper piston
against the pads.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-17
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
REAR BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT

• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure

even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Remove the brake pad pin [1] and rear brake caliper
[1]
mounting bolt [2].

[2]
Do not operate the Lift the caliper [1] and remove the brake pads [2].
[1] [3]
brake pedal after
Install new brake pads to the brake caliper so their ends
removing the brake
seat against the retainer.
pads.

Make sure that the retainer and pad spring [3] are
installed to the brake caliper.
Lower the caliper.

[2] Align

Loosely install a new rear brake caliper mounting bolt

[3]
[1].
Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [2] is in good
condition, replace it if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring.
Install the brake pad pin [3] by pushing the pads against
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.

[2] [1]

19-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Tighten the rear brake caliper mounting bolt [1] to the
[2]
specified torque.

TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Tighten the brake pad pin [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake pedal to seat the caliper pistons
against the pads.

[1]

PARKING BRAKE PAD

REPLACEMENT (NC700XD/SD)
Loosen the parking brake pad pins [1].
[1]

Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt [1] and caliper

[1]
[2] from the bracket.

[2]

Remove the parking brake pad pins [1] and pads [2].
[1]
Make sure the pad spring is installed in position.
Install new parking brake pads and pad pins.
Install the parking brake caliper and new mounting bolts
and tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
Tighten the parking brake pad pins to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

[2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-19
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE DISC INSPECTION
Visually inspect the brake discs for damage or crack.
Measure the brake disc thickness using a micrometer.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Front: 4.0 mm (0.16 in)
Rear: 4.0 mm (0.16 in)
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is
less than the service limit.

Measure the brake discs warpage using a dial indicator.

SERVICE LIMITS:
Front: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Rear: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Check the wheel bearings for excessive play, if the
warpage exceeds the service limit.
Replace the brake disc if the wheel bearings are
normal.

FRONT MASTER CYLINDER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:
[2] [1] [3]
– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Release the dust cover [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2] and remove the rearview mirror.
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [3].

Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
[2]
and brake hose [3].

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of the brake
hose to prevent contamination.

[3] [1]

19-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the bolts [1], holder [2] and master cylinder [3].
[3] [2]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Install the master cylinder holder with the "UP" mark

[4] facing up.
• Align the end of the master cylinder with the
handlebar punch mark.
• Tightening the front master cylinder holder bolts,
upper bolt first, then the lower bolt to the specified
torque.
• Replace the sealing washers with new ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint against the master
cylinder stopper.
Align [4] [1]
TORQUE:
Front master cylinder holder bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-21
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the front master cylinder as
following the illustration.

• Be careful not to damage the boot.

• When removing and installing the snap ring, use the
special tool.
TOOL:
Snap ring pliers 07914-SA50001
• Replace the piston and cups as a set.
• Apply brake fluid to the master piston and cups.
• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder inside.
• Do not allow the piston cup lips to turn inside out.
• Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.
• Align the brake light switch boss and master cylinder
hole.
• Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) of silicone grease to the
brake lever sliding surface and lever-to-master
piston contacting area.
• Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) of silicone grease to the
brake lever pivot bolt sliding surface.

SCREWS

1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

RESERVOIR COVER

SET PLATE
BOOT
SNAP RING
WASHER DIAPHRAGM
CUPS

MASTER PISTON SPRING

MASTER CYLINDER

BRAKE LEVER
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)

1.2 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.9 lbf·ft)

19-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the master cylinder [1] for scoring, scratches or
[1] [3]
damage.
Check the master piston [2] for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Check the piston cups [3] for wear, deterioration or [2]
damage.

Measure the master cylinder I.D.

SERVICE LIMIT: 11.055 mm (0.4352 in)
Measure the master piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 10.945 mm (0.4309 in)

REAR MASTER CYLINDER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:
[1] [3]
– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Remove the muffler (page 2-32).
Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose [3].

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of the brake
hose to prevent contamination.

[2]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and

right step holder [2].

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-23
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Unhook the brake light switch spring [1].
[3] [2]
Remove the brake light switch [2] from the right step
holder [3], then remove the right step holder.

[1]

Remove and discard the cotter pin [1].

Remove the joint pin [2] and disconnect the push rod
joint from the brake pedal.
Remove the master cylinder mounting bolts [3] and
master cylinder [4] from the right step holder.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. [1]

• Replace the cotter pin and sealing washers with new

ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint against the master
cylinder stopper.

TORQUE: [2] [4] [3]

Rear master cylinder mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the rear
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)

19-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the rear master cylinder as
following the illustration.

• Be careful not to damage the boot.

• When removing and installing the snap ring, use the
special tool.
TOOL:
Snap ring pliers 07914-SA50001
• Replace the piston, spring and cup as a set.
• Apply brake fluid to the master piston and cups.
• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder inside.
• Do not allow the piston cup lips to turn inside out.
• Apply silicone grease to the push rod sliding area
and boot fitting area.
• Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.
• Replace the hose joint O-ring with a new one.
• Apply brake fluid to a new hose joint O-ring.
• Apply locking agent to the rear master cylinder hose
joint screw threads.

1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

MASTER CYLINDER HOSE JOINT

O-RING
SPRING
RESERVOIR COVER

PISTON CUP
SET PLATE

MASTER PISTON
DIAPHRAGM

PUSH ROD
RESERVOIR
SNAP RING

BOOT

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

PUSH ROD JOINT 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

If the push rod joint is disassembled, adjust the push

[1]
rod length so that the distance from the center of the
master cylinder lower mounting hole to the center of the
joint pin hole is standard length as shown.

STANDARD LENGTH: 85.0 – 87.0 mm (3.35 – 3.43 in)

After adjustment tighten the push rod lock nut [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

85.0 – 87.0 mm
(3.35 – 3.43 in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-25
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the master cylinder [1] for scoring, scratches or
[2]
damage.
Check the master piston [2] for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Check the piston cup [3] for wear, deterioration or
damage.
Measure the master cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 14.055 mm (0.5533 in)
Measure the master piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 13.945 mm (0.5490 in)
[1] [3]

Check the following:

[1] [3]
– Push rod [1] for bent
– Boot [2] for damage
– Rod joint [3] for damage
Replace the damaged part if necessary.

[2]

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700X/S)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system (page
[1] [4]
19-8).
Remove the brake pads (page 19-16).
When removing the Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
oil bolt, cover the and brake hose.
end of brake hose to
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [3] and brake
prevent
caliper/bracket assembly [4].
contamination.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the front brake caliper mounting bolts and

sealing washers with new ones. [2]
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint between the brake
caliper body.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Front brake caliper mounting bolt:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system (page 19-9).
[3]

19-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the front brake caliper as following the
illustration.

• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.

• If the caliper pin boot and bracket pin boot are hard
or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

CALIPER PIN BOOT

PAD RETAINER CALIPER BRACKET
CALIPER PISTON

DUST SEAL

PISTON SEAL
BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

CALIPER BODY

BRACKET PIN
STOPPER RING 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PAD PIN

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

CALIPER PIN
BRACKET PIN BOOT 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) BRAKE PADS
PAD SPRING

Place a shop towel over the pistons.

Do not use high Position the caliper body with the pistons down and
pressure air or bring apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet to
the nozzle too close remove the pistons.
to the inlet.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Apply locking agent to the caliper pin and bracket

pin threads.
• Replace the piston seals and dust seals with new
ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper pistons and new
piston seals.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seals.
• Install the pistons with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the caliper
pin and bracket pin sliding surface.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-27
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring or other damage.
Measure the each caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 27.060 mm (1.0654 in)
Check the caliper pistons for scratches, scoring or other
damage.
Measure the each caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 26.91 mm (1.059 in)

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XA/

XD/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system (page
[1] [2]
19-11).
Remove the brake pads (page 19-17).
Remove the bolt [1] and front wheel speed sensor wire
guide [2].
[3]
Remove the bolts [3] and front wheel speed sensor [4].

[4]

Remove the brake hose oil bolts [1], sealing washers [2]
[1]
and brake hoses.

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of brake hose
to prevent contamination.

[2]

19-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and brake
[2] [1]
caliper/bracket assembly [2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the front brake caliper mounting bolts and

sealing washers with new ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet stopper against the
caliper body.
• Route the hoses and wire properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Front brake caliper mounting bolt:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system (page 19-12).
Check the air gap between the front wheel speed
sensor and pulser ring (page 20-24).

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the front brake caliper as following the
illustration.

• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.

• If the caliper pin boot and bracket pin boot are hard
or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

CALIPER PIN BOOT CALIPER PISTONS

DUST SEALS
PAD RETAINER
BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
PISTON SEALS
CALIPER PIN
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
BRACKET

CALIPER BODY BRACKET PIN

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
STOPPER RING

BRACKET PIN BOOT

BRAKE PAD PIN PAD SPRING

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-29
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Place a shop towel over the pistons.
Do not use high Position the caliper body with the pistons facing down
pressure air or bring and apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet
the nozzle too close to remove the pistons.
to the inlet.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Apply locking agent to the caliper pin and bracket

pin threads.
• Replace the piston seals and dust seals with new
ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper pistons and new
piston seals.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seals.
• Install the pistons with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the caliper
pin and bracket pin sliding surface.

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinders for scoring or other
[2] [1] [2] [4]
damage.
Measure the each caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Cylinder A [1]: 22.712 mm (0.8941 in)
Cylinder B [2]: 27.060 mm (1.0654 in)
Check the caliper pistons for scratches, scoring or other
damage.
Measure the each caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Piston A [3]: 22.56 mm (0.888 in)
Piston B [4]: 26.91 mm (1.059 in) [4] [3]

REAR BRAKE CALIPER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose.

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of brake hose
to prevent contamination.
Remove the brake pads (page 19-18).

[2] [1]

19-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the brake caliper [1] from the caliper bracket.
[1]
Remove the rear wheel (page 18-6).
Remove the caliper bracket from the swingarm.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the sealing washers with new ones.

• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the brake
caliper pin sliding surface.
• Install the brake hose eyelet stopper against the
caliper body.
• Route the hoses and wire properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and breed the rear
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)
NC700XA/XD/SA/ Check the air gap between the rear wheel speed sensor
SD: and pulser ring (page 20-24).

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the rear brake caliper as following the
illustration.

• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.

• If the caliper pin boot and sleeve boot are hard or
deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:

DUST SEAL PISTON SEAL BLEED VALVE

5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
CALIPER PISTON

CALIPER BODY

CALIPER PIN
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)

STOPPER RING

BRAKE PAD PIN

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS PAD SPRING

SLEEVE
BOOT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-31
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Place a shop towel over the piston.
Do not use high Position the caliper body with the piston facing down
pressure air or bring and apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet
the nozzle too close to remove the piston.
to the inlet.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Replace the piston seal and dust seal with new

ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper piston and new piston
seal.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seal.
• Install the piston with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the boot
inside.

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Measure the caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 38.24 mm (1.506 in)
Check the caliper piston for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Measure the caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 38.09 mm (1.500 in)

PARKING BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XD/

SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the parking brake pads (page 19-19).
[2] [3]
Disconnect the parking brake cable [1] from the brake
arm [2] and remove it from cable stay [3] of the caliper
body.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[1]

19-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the caliper pin bolt [1].

[1]

Remove the following:

[2] [1]
– Caliper bracket [1]
– Pad spring [2]
– Bracket pin boot [3]
– Caliper pin boot [4]
– Sleeve [5]

[3] [5] [4]

Remove the parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut [1]

while holding the brake arm [2].
Remove the brake arm.

[2] [1]

Remove the brake shaft boot [1].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-33
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the adjuster bolt/piston [1] while holding the
[2] [1]
brake shaft [2].
Remove the brake shaft.

Do not disassemble the adjuster bolt/piston.

Remove the dust seal [1].

Clean the caliper cylinder and brake shaft sliding
surface.

[1]

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder [1] and piston [2] for scoring,
[2]
scratches or damage.

[1]

19-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ASSEMBLY

BRACKET
DUST SEAL

ADJUSTER BOLT/PISTON

PAD PIN
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

PAD SPRING SLEEVE

CALIPER PIN BOOT
CALIPER PIN BOOT

CALIPER PIN BOLT

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

LOCK NUT
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS

CALIPER BODY BRAKE ARM

BRACKET PIN BOOT
BRAKE SHAFT BOOT

BRAKE SHAFT

Install a new dust seal [1] into the seal groove in the
caliper.

[1]

Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the

[1] [2]
outer surface of the brake shaft [1].
Position the brake shaft so that the punch mark [2] is [3]
between the index lines [3] (installation range), and
screw the shaft into the caliper.
Make sure that the punch mark is positioned between
the index lines with the shaft fully installed. Installation
range

[3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-35
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the
[2]
adjuster bolt threads and piston sliding surface.
Install the adjuster bolt/piston [1] while holding the
brake shaft [2].

[1]

Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the

[1]
brake shaft boot lips.
Install the brake shaft boot [1] to the caliper groove.

Install the brake arm [1] by aligning with the punch

Align
marks.

[1]

Install the lock nut [1] and tighten it to the specified

torque while holding the brake arm [2].

TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

[2] [1]

19-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease of
[4] [5]
silicone grease to the bracket pin and sleeve sliding
surface.
Install the following:
– Sleeve [1]
– Caliper pin boots [2]
– Bracket pin boot [3]
– Pad spring [4]
– Caliper bracket [5]

[3]

[1] [2]

Apply locking agent to the parking brake caliper pin bolt

threads.
Install the parking brake caliper pin bolt [1] and tighten it
to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

[1]

BRAKE PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the muffler (page 2-32).
[1]
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

[2]

Unhook the brake light switch spring [1] from the brake
[1]
pedal.
Remove and discard the cotter pin [2]. [2]
Remove the joint pin [3] and disconnect the push rod
lower joint from the brake pedal [4].
Remove the snap ring [5], washer [6], return spring [7]
and brake pedal.

[4] [7] [5]/[6] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-37
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply grease to the brake pedal pivot sliding area.

• Replace the cotter pin with a new one.

TORQUE:
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER (NC700XD/

SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
[4] [2]
– Left rearview mirror (page 17-12)
– Parking brake switch (page 22-23)
Loosen the parking brake cable mounting nut [1].
Remove the socket bolts [2], holder [3] and parking
brake lever bracket [4].

[1] [3]

Remove the parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut [1]

while holding the brake arm [2].
Remove the brake arm and release the parking brake
cable [3] from the cable guide [4].

[3]

[2] [1] [4]

Turn the parking brake lever bracket [1] and remove the
[2]
parking brake cable joint [2] from the bracket.
Disconnect the parking brake cable [3].

[1] [3]

19-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Align the parking brake lever bracket locating pin

with the handlebar hole.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 1-
25).
TORQUE:
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut:
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Parking brake cable mounting nut:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24). Align

DISASSEMBLY
Remove the lower holder cap [1].

[1]

Remove the spring pin [1] and release shaft [2].

[2] [1]

Remove the E-clip [1], washer [2] and parking brake

[3]
lever [3].

[1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-39
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the ratchet B [1].
[1]

Remove the ratchet A [1] and springs [2].

[1]

[2]

ASSEMBLY
Apply grease to the ratchet A teeth and sliding surface.
Install the springs [1] and ratchet A [2].

[1] [2]

Apply grease to the ratchet B teeth and sliding surface.

[2] [1]
Install the ratchet B [1] with its tab [2] facing up.

19-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply grease to the parking brake lever sliding surface.
Align
Install the parking brake lever [1].

Align the parking brake lever hole with the ratchet B tab.

[1]

Apply grease to the washer sliding surface.

Install the washer [1] and E-clip [2].

[2] [1]

Install the release shaft [1] and new spring pin [2] while
[1] [2]
aligning the hole of the release shaft, ratchet A and
parking brake lever bracket.

Align

Install the lower holder cap [1].

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

19-41
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

20. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM LOCATION ··························20-2 ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING ······························ 20-12
ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM····························20-3
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING······················ 20-15
SERVICE INFORMATION ···························20-4
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR ························ 20-24
ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ···············20-5
PCV ··························································· 20-28
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION············································20-7 DELAY VALVE·········································· 20-28

ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE ABS MODULATOR ··································· 20-29

INDEX ························································20-10

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-1
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM LOCATION
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

BATTERY

DLC

FUSE BOX

ABS MODULATOR
PCV

DELAY VALVE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

20-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM
FUSE BOX

MAIN CLOCK/TURN
(30 A) (7.5A)
R R/W
FRONT BRAKE
R LIGHT SWITCH

Bl Bl
IGNITION
SWITCH

8P
(BLUE)

ILLUMI/ REAR BRAKE

STOP/HORN LIGHT SWITCH
BRAKE/TAIL LIGHT
(7.5A)
Bl
R/Bl P/Bu

G/Y G
ABS MODULATOR (81)
ABS MAIN
(7.5A) BLS 4 G/R
R/Bl R/Bl 16 IG

Bl (61,62)
ABS
IND 21 O/Bl
INDICATOR

BATTERY ABS M. PUMP MOTOR COMBINATION METER

(30 A) (51,52,53)
Bl V/W 9 MR+B
MOTOR GND 25 G/Bu

GND 24 G/Y

ABS SOL.
(30 A)
Bl Bl/W 8 FSR+B DIAG 10 W

(54) SCS 13 Br
G

DLC

SOLENOID VALVE
(31,32,33,
34,37,38)

W/Y 3 FVW S (-)

(11,12)
Bu/Y 12 FVW B (+)

2P TIRE SIZE
(BLUE) (71)
W Bu

FRONT WHEEL Bu 18 RVW S (-)

(13,14)
SPEED SENSOR W 2 RVW B (+)
(41,42) 2P
(GRAY)

(21) Bu W
FRONT PULSER RING REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR
(43)

(23)
REAR PULSER RING
ABS MODULATOR 25P CONNECTOR (MODULATOR SIDE) Bl : Black
Br : Brown
( ) = ABS Problem code number Bu : Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G : Green
8 9
= Short terminals for reading O : Orange
ABS problem code 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P : Pink
R : Red
24 25 V : Violet
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 W : White
Y : Yellow

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-3
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

The ABS modulator may be damaged if dropped. Also if a connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive voltage
may damage the control unit. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• This section covers service of the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). Refer to information for the combi brake system servicing
(page 19-5).
• Pre-start self-diagnosis starts when the ignition switch is turned ON. The ABS modulator control unit receives signals and
detects whether the ABS system functions normally. Pre-start self-diagnosis starts when the vehicle speed goes above 6 km/h
(4 mph) approximately. The ABS system and the vehicle running condition are monitored constantly after pre-start self-
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• When the ABS modulator control unit detects a problem, the ABS indicator blinks to notify the rider of the problem. To detect the
faulty part, retrieve the problem code by shorting the DLC terminals.
• When the ABS control unit detects a problem, it stops the ABS function and switches back to the combi brake operation, and the
ABS indicator blinks or stays on. Take care during the test ride.
• Read "ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION" carefully, inspect and troubleshoot the ABS system according to the
Diagnostic Troubleshooting flow chart. Observe each step of the procedures one by one. Write down the problem code and
probable faulty part before starting diagnosis and troubleshooting.
• Use a fully charged battery. Do not diagnose with a charger connected to the battery.
• After troubleshooting, erase the problem code and perform the pre-start self-diagnosis to be sure that the ABS indicator is
operating normally.
• Troubles not resulting from a faulty ABS (e.g. brake disc squeak, unevenly worn brake pad) cannot be recognized by the ABS
diagnosis system.
• When the wheel speed sensor and/or pulser ring is replaced, check the clearance (air gap) between both components.
• The ABS control unit (ECU) is mounted on the modulator (the modulator with the built-in ECU). Do not disassemble the ABS
modulator. Replace the ABS modulator as an assembly when the it is faulty.
• Be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensor and pulser ring when removing and installing the wheel.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bl = Black Bu = Blue O = Orange R = Red W = White

Br = Brown G = Green P = Pink V = Violet Y = Yellow

TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Step holder mounting socket bolt 4 8 32 (3.3, 24)
Brake pipe joint nut 14 10 14 (1.4, 10) Apply brake fluid to the threads and
sliding surface.
PCV mounting bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)
Delay valve mounting bolt 2 6 12 (1.2, 9)

20-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14).
NOTE 1: Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-15).

ABS MODULATOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).

ABS MODULATOR 25P CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-5
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

NOTE 3: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

FUSE BOX (NOTE 3)

– ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
– ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.)
– ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN)

DLC
(NOTE 3)

NOTE 4: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14).

NOTE 5: Remove the side cowl (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-13).

NC700XA/XD: NC700SA/SD:

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

NOTE 6: Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)

20-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SUMMARY OF ABS PRE-START SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The ABS pre-start self-diagnosis system diagnoses the electrical system as well as the operating status of the
modulator. When there is any abnormality, the problem and the associated part can be detected by reading the
problem code.
When the motorcycle is running, pulse signals generated at the front/rear wheel speed sensor are sent to the
ABS Control Unit. When the ABS Control Unit detects that vehicle speed reaches 6 km/h (4 mph), the pump
motor is temporarily operated to check if the ABS system functions normally. If the system is normal, pre-start
self-diagnosis is complete by the time the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph) approximately.
If a problem is detected, the ABS indicator blinks or comes on and stays on to notify the rider of the problem.
The self-diagnosis is also made while the motorcycle is running, and the ABS indicator blinks when a problem
is detected.
When the ABS indicator blinks, the cause of the problem can be identified by retrieving the problem code
following the specified retrieval procedure (page 20-8).
If the ABS indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned ON, or the ABS indicator stays on after
the pre-start self-diagnosis procedure is complete, the ABS indicator may be faulty. Follow the troubleshooting
(page 20-12).

Pre-start serf-diagnosis when normal:

IGNITION ON
SWITCH OFF

Running
ENGINE Start
Stop

VEHICLE 6 km/h (4 mph) or above

0
SPEED

PUMP ON
MOTOR OFF

ABS ON
INDICATOR OFF

10 km/h (6 mph) or above, Pre-start

serf-diagnosis completes

PRE-START SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE

1. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
[1]
to " ".
2. Make sure the ABS indicator [1] comes on.
3. Start the engine.
4. Ride the motorcycle and increase the vehicle speed
to approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
5. The ABS is normal if the ABS indicator goes off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-7
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

PROBLEM CODE INDICATION PATTERN

• The ABS indicator denotes the problem codes from 11 to 81. the ABS indicator has two types of blinks, a
long blink and short blink. The long blink lasts for 1.3 seconds, the short blink lasts for 0.3 seconds. When
two long blinks occur, and three short blinks, that problem code is 23 (two long blinks = 20 blinks, three short
blinks = 3 blinks). Then, go to the troubleshooting and see problem code 23.
• When the ABS control unit stores some problem codes, the ABS indicator shows the problem codes in the
order from the lowest number to highest number. For example, when the ABS indicator indicates code 12,
then indicates code 23, two failures have occurred.

IGNITION ON
1.3 sec.
SWITCH OFF
1.3 sec. 1.3 sec.
Pattern repeated
2 sec. 0.3 sec.

ABS ON 3.6 sec.

INDICATOR OFF
Problem code
start signal 0.4 sec. 3.6 sec. 0.5 sec.

Lowest number problem code Highest number problem code

(Example: Code 12) (Example: Code 23)

When the problem code is not stored:

2 sec. 3.6 sec.

ABS ON
INDICATOR OFF

PROBLEM CODE READOUT

• The ABS indicator indicates the problem code by blinking a specified number of times.
• The problem code is not erased by turning the ignition switch to OFF while the problem code is being output.
Note that turning the ignition switch to ON again does not indicate the problem code. To show the problem
code again, repeat the problem code retrieval procedures from the beginning.
• Be sure to make a note of the retrieval problem code(s).
• After diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem code(s) and perform the pre-start self-diagnosis to be
sure that there is no problem in the ABS indicator (indicator is operating normally).
• Do not apply the front or rear brake during retrieval.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch to " ".
Start the engine and test ride the motorcycle above 10 km/h (6 mph).
If the ABS indicator blinks or stays on, follow the step s described below:
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100

[1] [2]

20-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
[1]
to " ".
The ABS indicator [1] should come on 2 seconds
(start signal) (then goes off 3.6 seconds) and starts
problem code indication.
3. The problem code is indicated by the number of the
times of the ABS indicator blinking.
If the problem code is not stored, the ABS indicator
stays on.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the special
tool from the DLC.
Install the DLC to the battery box.
Install the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

ERASING PROBLEM CODE

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " " while squeezing the brake lever. The ABS
indicator should come on 2 seconds and go off.
[1] [2]
3. Release the brake lever immediately after the ABS
indicator is off. The ABS indicator should come on.
4. Squeeze the brake lever immediately after the ABS indicator is on. The ABS indicator should go off.
5. Release the brake lever immediately after the ABS indicator is off.
When code erasure is complete, the ABS indicator blinks 2 times and stays on.
If the ABS indicator does not blink 2 times, the data has not been erased, so try again.
If the ABS indicator blinks 2 times and blinks, faulty ABS system, go to ABS troubleshooting (page 20-10)
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the special tool from the DLC.
Install the DLC to the battery box.
Install the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-9
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE INDEX
• The ABS indicator might blink in the following cases. Correct the faulty part.
– Incorrect tire pressure.
– Tires not recommended for the motorcycle were installed (incorrect tire size).
– Deformation of the wheel or tire.
• The ABS indicator might blink while riding under the following conditions. This is temporary failure. Be sure to erase the problem
code (page 20-9).
Then, test ride the motorcycle above 10 km/h (6 mph) and check the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis system (page
20-8). Ask the rider for the riding conditions in detail when the motorcycle is brought in for inspection.
– The motorcycle has continuously run bumpy roads.
– The front wheel leaves the ground for a long time when riding (wheelie).
– Only either the front or rear wheel rotates.
– The ABS operates continuously.
– The ABS control unit has been disrupted by an extremely powerful radio wave (electromagnetic interference).

Problem Detection Refer

Function failure Symptom/Fail-safe function
Code A B to
• ABS modulator voltage input line • ABS indicator never come
20-12
• Indicator related wires ON at all
– • Speedometer • ABS indicator stays ON at all
• ABS modulator 20-13
• ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN)
Front wheel speed sensor circuit malfunction • Stops ABS operation
11 O O 20-15
• Wheel speed sensor or related wires
Rear wheel speed sensor malfunction
13 O O 20-17
• Wheel speed sensor or related wires
Front wheel speed sensor circuit malfunction • Stops ABS operation
12 • Wheel speed sensor or related wires O 20-15
• Electromagnetic interference
Rear wheel speed sensor malfunction
• Wheel speed sensor, pulser ring or related
14 O 20-17
wires
• Electromagnetic interference
Front pulser ring • Stops ABS operation
21 O 20-15
• Pulser ring or related wires
Rear pulser ring
23 O 20-17
• Pulser ring or related wires
31 Solenoid valve malfunction (ABS modulator) • Stops ABS operation
32
33
O O 20-19
34
37
38
Front wheel lock • Stops ABS operation
41 O
• Riding condition
20-15
Front wheel lock (Wheelie)
42 O
• Riding condition
Rear wheel lock
43 O 20-17
• Riding condition
Motor lock • Stops ABS operation
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
51 O O
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Motor stuck off
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
52 O O 20-20
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Motor stuck on
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
53 O O
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Fail-safe relay malfunction • Stops ABS operation
• Fail-safe relay (ABS modulator) or related
54 O O 20-21
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.)

20-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

Problem Detection Refer
Function failure Symptom/Fail-safe function
Code A B to
Power circuit/Under voltage • Stops ABS operation
61 • Input voltage (too low) O O
• ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) 20-22
Power circuit/Over voltage • Stops ABS operation
62 O O
• Input voltage (too high)
Tire malfunction • Stops ABS operation
71 O 20-24
• Tire size
ABS control unit • Stops ABS operation
81 • ABS control unit malfunction (ABS O O 20-24
modulator)
(A) Pre-start self-diagnosis (page 20-7)
(B) Ordinary self-diagnosis: diagnoses while the motorcycle is running (after pre-start self-diagnosis)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-11
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
ABS INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON
(when the ignition switch turned ON)
1. Combination Meter Power/ground Line
Inspection
Check the combination meter power and ground
lines (page 22-10).
Are the wires normal?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open circuit in related wires
2. Indicator Operation Inspection
Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS
[1]
modulator 25P connector [2].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.
Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

[2]

3. Indicator Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Orange/black – Ground
O/Bl
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Orange/black wire
NO – Faulty combination meter
[1]

20-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS INDICATOR STAYS ON (Indicator
does not go off when the motorcycle is
running, Problem code is not indicated
by the retrieval procedure)
1. Service Check Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
[1]
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Brown – Ground

TOOL: Br
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Brown wire
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

2. Indicator Operation Inspection

With the connector connected, short the
[1]
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] of the
wire harness side and ground with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Orange/black – Ground
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.
O/Bl
Does it go off?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Faulty combination meter

[2]

3. Indicator Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire from the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector.
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1] of the
wire harness side and ground with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Orange/black – Ground O/Bl

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.
[1] [2]
Does it go off?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in Orange/black wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-13
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

4. Logic Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire from the ABS modulator
25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Green/yellow – Ground G/Y

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in Green/yellow wire [1]

5. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) [1] in the
NC700XA/SA shown:
fuse box for blown.
[1]
Is the fuse blown?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – GO TO STEP 7.

6. Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

With the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) removed,
[1]
check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/black – Ground
R/Bl
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Red/black wire. Replace
the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a
new one, and recheck.
NO – Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a new one, and
recheck.

20-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

7. Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
[1]
" ".
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage R/Bl

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator.
NO – Open circuit in Red/black wire between the
ABS modulator 25P connector and ignition
switch

ABS TROUBLESHOOTING
• Perform inspection with the ignition switch OFF,
unless otherwise specified.
• Refer to the ABS connector locations (page 20-5).
• All connector diagrams in the troubleshooting are
viewed from the terminal side.
• Use a fully charged battery. Do not diagnose with a
charger connected to the battery.
• When the ABS modulator assembly is detected to be
faulty, recheck the wire harness and connector
connections closely before replacing it.
• After diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem
code (page 20-9) then test ride the motorcycle
above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check the other
problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis system
(page 20-8).
• Before starting the diagnosis and troubleshooting,
check the ABS indicator circuit (page 20-12).
PROBLEM CODE 11, 12, 21, 41 or 42
(Front Wheel Speed Sensor/Front
Pulser Ring/Front Wheel Lock)

• The ABS indicator might blink under unusual riding

or conditions (page 20-10). This is temporary failure.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9) then test ride
the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check
the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis
system (page 20-8).
• If the problem code 41 is indicated, check the front
brake for drag.
1. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the air gap between the speed sensor and
pulser ring (page 20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-15
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

2. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the speed sensor:
[2]
Check that there is iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring [1] and wheel speed sensor
[2], and the pulser ring slots for obstructions.
Check the installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage (e.g., chipped pulser ring teeth).
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Remove any deposits. Install properly or [1]
replace faulty part.
3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at sensor side)
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
sensor side front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector and ground. Bu W
Connection: Blue – Ground
White – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Faulty front wheel speed sensor
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit

Inspection (at wire harness side)
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
[1]
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
wire harness side front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: Blue/yellow – Ground W/Y Bu/Y
White/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in White/yellow wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

20-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

5. Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1]
[2] Bu/Y [1]
terminals of the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Blue/yellow – White/yellow [3]
W/Y
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Check for continuity between the terminals of the
wire harness side front wheel speed sensor 2P W/Y Bu/Y
(Blue) connector [3].
Connection: Blue/yellow – White/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in Blue/yellow or White/yellow
wire
6. Failure Reproduction with a New Speed Sensor
Replace the front wheel speed sensor with a new
[1]
one (page 20-25).
Connect the ABS modulator 25P and front wheel
speed sensor 2P (Blue) connectors.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Dose the ABS indicator indicate the code "11,
12, 21, 41 or 42"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator.
NO – Faulty removed wheel speed sensor

PROBLEM CODE 13, 14, 23 or 43 (Rear

Wheel Speed Sensor/Rear Pulser Ring/
Rear Wheel Lock)

• The ABS indicator might blink under unusual riding

or conditions (page 20-10). This is temporary failure.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9) then test ride
the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check
the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis
system (page 20-8).
• If the problem code 43 is indicated, check the rear
brake for drag.
1. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the air gap between the speed sensor and
pulser ring (page 20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-17
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

2. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the speed sensor:
[1] [2]
Check that there is iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring [1] and wheel speed sensor
[2], and the pulser ring slots for obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage (e.g., chipped pulser ring teeth).
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.
3. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at sensor side)
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
sensor side rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector and ground. Bu W
Connection: Blue – Ground
White – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Faulty rear wheel speed sensor
NO – GO TO STEP 4.

4. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit

Inspection (at wire harness side)
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
[1]
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
wire harness side rear wheel speed sensor 2P
(Gray) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: Blue – Ground W Bu
White – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in Blue wire
• Short circuit in White wire
NO – GO TO STEP 5.

20-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

5. Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1]
[2] Bu [1]
terminals of the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Blue – White [3]
W
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Check for continuity between the terminals of the
wire harness side rear wheel speed sensor 2P W Bu
(Gray) connector [3].
Connection: Blue – White
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in Blue or White wire
6. Failure Reproduction with a New Speed Sensor
Replace the rear wheel speed sensor with a new
[1]
one (page 20-26).
Connect the ABS modulator 25P and rear wheel
speed sensor 2P (Gray) connectors.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Dose the ABS indicator indicate the code "13,
14, 23 or 43"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Faulty removed wheel speed sensor

PROBLEM CODE 31, 32, 33, 34, 37 or

38 (Solenoid Valve)
1. Failure Reproduction
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
[1]
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "31,
32, 33, 34, 37 or 38"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Solenoid valve is normal (intermittent
failure).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-19
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

PROBLEM CODE 51, 52 or 53 (Pump
Motor)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.) [1] in the fuse
NC700XA/SA shown: [1]
box for blown.
Is the fuse blown?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

2. Motor Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Violet/white – Ground
V/W
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Violet/white wire
NO – Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
30 A (ABS M.) with a new one, and [1]
recheck.
3. Motor Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Violet/white (+) – Ground (–) V/W
Standard: Battery voltage

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in Violet/white or Black wire [1]
between the battery and ABS modulator
25P connector

20-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

4. Failure Reproduction
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
[1]
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "51, 52
or 53"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Pump motor is normal (intermittent failure).

PROBLEM CODE 54 (Fail-safe Relay)

1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.) [1] in the fuse
NC700XA/SA shown: [1]
box for blown.
Is the fuse blown?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

2. Relay Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white – Ground
Bl/W
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Black/white wire
NO – Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
30 A (ABS SOL.) with a new one, and [1]
recheck.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-21
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

3. Relay Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage Bl/W

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in Black/white or Black wire [1]
between the battery and ABS modulator
25P connector
4. Failure Reproduction
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
[1]
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "54"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Fail-safe relay is normal (intermittent
failure)

PROBLEM CODE 61 or 62 (Power

Circuit)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) [1] in the
NC700XA/SA shown:
fuse box for blown.
[1]
Is the fuse blown?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.

20-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

2. Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
With the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) removed,
check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/black – Ground R/Bl

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Red/black wire
NO – Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a new one, and
recheck.
3. Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground. R/Bl
Connection: Red/black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: Battery voltage

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open circuit in Red/black wire between the
ABS modulator 25P connector and ignition
switch
4. Failure Reproduction
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "61 or
62"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Power circuit is normal (intermittent failure)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-23
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

PROBLEM CODE 71 (Tire Size)

• Check the following and correct the faulty part.

– Incorrect tire pressure.
– Tires not recommended for the motorcycle were
installed (incorrect tire size).
– Deformation of the wheel or tire.
1. Failure Reproduction
If the above items are normal, recheck the problem
[1]
code indication:
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "71"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – Tire size is normal (intermittent failure)

PROBLEM CODE 81 (ABS Control

Unit)
1. Failure Reproduction
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
[1]
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "81"?
YES – Faulty ABS modulator
NO – ABS control unit is normal (intermittent
failure)

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

AIR GAP INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle securely using a hoist or
Front shown:
equivalent and raise the wheel off the ground.
Measure the clearance (air gap) between the sensor
and pulser ring at several points by turning the wheel
slowly.
It must be within specification.
STANDARD: 0.54 – 1.14 mm (0.021 – 0.045 in)
The clearance (air gap) cannot be adjusted.
If it is not within specification, check each part for
deformation, looseness or damage.
Check the wheel speed sensor for damage, and
replace if necessary.
Check the pulse ring for deformation or damage, and
replace if necessary.
– Front pulser ring (page 17-22)
– Rear pulser ring (page 18-7)

20-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
REPLACEMENT

Refer to procedure for the pulser ring removal/

installation.
– Front pulser ring (page 17-22)
– Rear pulser ring (page 18-7)
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].
[1] [2]
Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3] SLITS [1] Align

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air

[1] [3]
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

[2]
NC700XA/XD: Remove the shroud/side cover (page 2-14).
NC700XA: NC700XD:
Remove the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
[1]
connector [1] from the frame and disconnect the
connector.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-25
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

NC700SA/SD: Remove the side cowl (page 2-13).
NC700SA/SD:
Remove the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector [1] from the side cover and disconnect the
connector.
Release the sensor wire from the guide [2].

[1] [2]

Release the sensor wire [1] from the clamps [2].

[1] [2] [4] [1]
Remove the bolt [3] and speed sensor wire clamp [4],
then release the speed sensor wire.
Remove the bolt [5] and brake hose clamp [6], then
release the speed sensor wire. [3]

[2]
[5]

[6]

Release the sensor wire [1] from the clamp [2].

[1] [4]
Remove the bolt [3] and front wheel speed sensor wire
guide [4].
Remove the bolts [5] and front wheel speed sensor [6].
Clean around the mounting area of the caliper bracket
thoroughly, and be sure that no foreign material is [2]
allowed to enter the mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Route the wire and hoses properly (page 1-25).

• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down. [3] [5] [6]
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Muffler (page 2-32)
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

[1] [2]

20-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector [1].
Release the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector from the ECM box [2].
Release the clamp [3]. [2]
[1]
[3]

Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].
[2] [4] [3]
Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
sensor wire [4] from the brake hose guide.

[1]

Remove the clamp [1] and release the rear wheel

[4] [1]
speed sensor wire [2].
Remove the bolts [3] and rear wheel speed sensor [4].
Clean around the mounting area of the caliper bracket
thoroughly, and be sure that no foreign material is
allowed to enter the mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire and hoses properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft) [3] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-27
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

PCV
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the lever/pedal brake line
[1]
hydraulic systems (page 19-11).
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipe from the PCV [2].
Remove the PCV mounting bolt (long) [3], PCV
mounting bolt (short) [4] and PCV.

Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding

surface.

[2]

[4] [3]

DELAY VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the lever/pedal brake line
[1]
hydraulic systems (page 19-11).
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Loosen the brake pipe joint nut [1], and disconnect the
brake pipe from the delay valve [2].
Remove the delay valve mounting bolts [3] and delay
valve.

Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
[3] [2]
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding

surface.

20-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS MODULATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XA/
SA)

Be careful not to bend or damage the brake pipes

during assembly or removal.
Remove the following:
NC700XA shown: [1]
– Delay valve (page 20-28)
[3]
– PCV (page 20-28)
Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS
modulator 25P connector [2].
Release the main wire harness clamp(s) [3] from the
ABS modulator stay.

[2] [3] (NC700XA only)

Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipes from the ABS modulator.

[1]

Remove the ABS modulator stay mounting bolts [1],

collars [2] and ABS modulator assembly [3].

Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

[1]/[2] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-29
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

Remove the ABS modulator mounting bolts [1] and
[3] [2]
ABS modulator [2] from the ABS modulator stay [3].

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding

surface.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PIPE JOINT NUT PCV MOUNTING BOLT (LONG)

14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft) 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
PCV MOUNTING BOLT (SHORT)
ABS MODULATOR STAY 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
MOUNTING BOLTS/COLLARS
PCV

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

DELAY VALVE MOUNTING BOLTS

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

DELAY VALVE

ABS MODULATOR/STAY

20-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)

Be careful not to bend or damage the brake pipes

during assembly or removal.
Remove the following:
[1]
– Delay valve (page 20-28)
– PCV (page 20-28)
Remove the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[1] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector
[2] from the ABS modulator stay.

[2]

Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS

NC700XD shown: [1] [3] (NC700XD only)
modulator 25P connector [2].
Release the main wire harness clamps [3] from the ABS
modulator stay.

[3] [2]

Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipes from the ABS modulator.

[1]

Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).

Remove the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
Junction D 24P connector [2] from the ABS modulator
stay.
Remove the ABS modulator assembly [3].

Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

[3] [1] [2]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20-31
 dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

Remove the ABS modulator mounting bolts [1] and
[3] [2]
ABS modulator [2] from the ABS modulator stay [3].

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding

surface.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

JUNCTION D
PCV MOUNTING BOLT (LONG)
TR SENSOR 24P CONNECTOR
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

ABS MODULATOR STAY PCV

MOUNTING BOLTS/COLLARS

PCV MOUNTING BOLT (SHORT)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PIPE JOINT NUT

14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

DELAY VALVE MOUNTING BOLTS

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
DELAY VALVE
ABS MODULATOR/STAY
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

ABS MODULATOR SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

25P CONNECTOR 3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

20-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

21. BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

SYSTEM LOCATION···································21-2 BATTERY ···················································· 21-6

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ····································21-2 CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION ·········· 21-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························21-3 REGULATOR/RECTIFIER ·························· 21-8

TROUBLESHOOTING·································21-5 ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL ·············· 21-9

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21-1
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
SYSTEM LOCATION
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

BATTERY
MAIN FUSE 30 A
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER

ALTERNATOR

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

MAIN FUSE 30 A

G R Y Y Y

BATTERY REGULATOR/RECTIFIER

ALTERNATOR

G: Green
R: Red
Y: Yellow

21-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

• The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when
charging.
• The battery contains sulfuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear protective clothing
and a face shield.
– If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water.
– If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and call a physician immediately.
• Electrolyte is poisonous.
– If swallowed, drink large quantities of water or milk and call your local Poison Control Center or call a physician
immediately.

• Always turn OFF the ignition switch before disconnecting any electrical component.
• Some electrical components may be damaged if terminals or connectors are connected or disconnected while the ignition switch
is ON and current is present.
• For extended storage, remove the battery, give it a full charge, and store it in a cool, dry space. For maximum service life,
charge the stored battery every two weeks.
• For a battery remaining in a stored motorcycle, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery terminal.
• The maintenance free (MF) battery must be replaced when it reaches the end of its service life.
• The battery can be damaged if overcharged or undercharged, or if left to discharge for long period. These same conditions
contribute to shortening the "life span" of the battery. Even under normal use, the performance of the battery deteriorates after 2
– 3 years.
• Battery voltage may recover after battery charging, but under heavy load, the battery voltage will drop quickly and eventually die
out. For this reason, the charging system is often suspected as the problem. Battery overcharge often results from problems in
the battery itself, which may appear to be an overcharging symptom. If one of the battery cells is shorted and battery voltage
does not increase, the regulator/rectifier supplies excess voltage to the battery. Under these conditions, the electrolyte level
goes down quickly.
• Before troubleshooting the charging system, check for proper use and maintenance of the battery. Check if the battery is
frequently under heavy load, such as having the headlight and taillight ON for long periods of time without riding the motorcycle.
• The battery will self-discharge when the motorcycle is not in use. For this reason, charge the battery every two weeks to prevent
sulfation from occurring.
• When checking the charging system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 21-5).
• For alternator service (page 13-13).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

G = Green R = Red Y = Yellow

BATTERY CHARGING
• Turn power ON/OFF at the charger, not at the battery terminal.
• For battery charging, do not exceed the charging current and time specified on the battery. Using excessive current or extending
the charging time may damage the battery.
• Quick charging should only be done in an emergency; slow charging is preferred.

BATTERY TESTING
Refer to the battery tester’s Operation Manual for the recommended battery testing procedure.
The recommended battery tester puts a "load" on the battery so the actual battery condition of the load can be measured.
RECOMMENDED BATTERY TESTER: BM-210 or BATTERY MATE or equivalent

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21-3
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Type YTZ12S
Capacity 12 V – 11 Ah
Current leakage 1.2 mA maximum
Voltage Fully charged 13.0 – 13.2 V
(20°C/68°F) Needs
Below 12.4 V
charging
Charging current Normal 1.1 A/5 – 10 h
Quick 5.5 A/1 h
Alternator Capacity 0.42 kW/5,000 min-1 (rpm)
Charging coil resistance (20°C/68°F) 0.1 – 0.5 Ω

21-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY IS DAMAGED OR WEAK
1. BATTERY TEST
Remove the battery (page 21-6).
Check the battery condition using the recommended battery tester.
RECOMMENDED BATTERY TESTER: BM-210 or BATTERY MATE or equivalent
Is the battery good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Faulty battery
2. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST
Install the battery (page 21-6).
Check the battery current leakage test (page 21-7).
Is the current leakage below 1.2 mA?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – GO TO STEP 6.
3. CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Measure and record the battery voltage using a digital multimeter (page 21-6).
Start the engine.
Measure the charging voltage (page 21-7).
Compare the measurement to result of the following calculation.
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 15.5 V
• BV = Battery Voltage
• CV = Charging Voltage
Is the measured charging voltage within the standard voltage?
YES – Faulty battery
NO – GO TO STEP 4.
4. REGULATOR/RECTIFIER SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check the voltage and resistance at the regulator/rectifier connector (page 21-8).
Are the results of checked voltage and resistance correct?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – • Open circuit in related wire
• Loose or poor contacts of related terminal
• Shorted wire harness
5. ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL INSPECTION
Check the alternator charging coil (page 21-9).
Is the alternator charging coil resistance within 0.1 – 0.5 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES – Faulty regulator/rectifier
NO – Faulty charging coil
6. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST WITHOUT REGULATOR/RECTIFIER CONNECTOR
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector and recheck the battery current leakage.
Is the current leakage below 1.2 mA?
YES – Faulty regulator/rectifier
NO – • Shorted wire harness
• Faulty ignition switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21-5
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
BATTERY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the screws [1] and maintenance lid [2].
Always turn the Remove the battery holder band [3].
ignition switch OFF [1]
Disconnect the battery negative (–) cable [4] first, then
before removing the
disconnect the battery positive (+) cable [5]. [4]
battery.
Remove the battery [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Connect the positive (+) cable first, then connect the

negative (–) cable.
• For digital clock setting procedure (page 22-14).

[6]
[3]
[5]

[2]

VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Measure the battery voltage using a commercially
available digital multimeter.
VOLTAGE (20°C/68°F):
Fully charged: 13.0 – 13.2 V
Needs charging: Below 12.4 V

BATTERY TESTING
Remove the battery (page 21-6).
Refer to the instructions that are appropriate to the
battery testing equipment available to you.
TOOL:
Battery tester BM-210 or
BATTERY MATE
or equivalent

21-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION
CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
[3] [1]
Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative
(–) cable [1] from the battery.
Connect the ammeter (+) probe [2] to the negative (–)
cable and the ammeter (–) probe [3] to the battery (–)
terminal.
With the ignition switch OFF, check for current leakage.

• When measuring current using a tester, set it to a

high range, and then bring the range down to an
appropriate level. Current flow higher than the range
selected may blow the fuse in the tester.
• While measuring current, do not turn the ignition [2]
switch ON. A sudden surge of current may blow the
fuse in the tester.

SPECIFIED CURRENT LEAKAGE: 1.2 mA maximum

If current leakage exceeds the specified value, a
shorted circuit is the probable cause.
Locate the short by disconnecting connections one by
one and measuring the current.

CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION

Make sure the battery is in good condition before

performing this test.
Start the engine and warm it up to the operating
[1] [2]
temperature; then stop the engine.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Connect the multimeter between the positive terminal
[1] and negative terminal [2] of the battery.

• To prevent a short, make absolutely certain which

are the positive and negative terminals or cable.
• Do not disconnect the battery or any cable in the
charging system without first switching off the
ignition switch. Failure to follow this precaution can
damage the tester or electrical components.
With the headlight on high beam, restart the engine.
Measure the voltage on the multimeter when the engine
runs at 5,000 min-1 (rpm).
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 15.5 V
• BV = Battery Voltage (page 21-6)
• CV = Charging Voltage
If the charging voltage reading is out of the
specification, inspect the regulator/rectifier (page 21-8).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21-7
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
[3] [1] [3]
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3]. Align

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[4] [2] [1]
Remove the bolts [2] and regulator/rectifier [3].
Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [4] and
regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-

25).
• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame
tab.

[5] [3]

SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check connectors for loose contact or corroded
terminals.
Inspect the following items:
– Battery charging line (page 21-8)
– Ground line (page 21-9)
– Charging coil (page 21-9)
If all components of the charging system are normal
and there are no loose connections at the regulator/
rectifier connectors, replace the regulator/rectifier.

BATTERY CHARGING LINE

INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector
[1] (page 21-8).
Measure the voltage between the regulator/rectifier 2P
(Black) connector terminal at the wire side and ground.
R
CONNECTION: Red (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD: Battery voltage
There should be battery voltage at all times.

21-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
[1]
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector
[1] (page 21-8).
Check for continuity between the regulator/rectifier 2P
(Black) connector at the wire side and ground.
G
CONNECTION: Green – Ground
There should be continuity at all times.

ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL

CHARGING COIL INSPECTION
It is not necessary Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1]
[1]
to remove the stator (page 21-8).
coil to make this
Measure the resistance between the alternator 3P
test. Y
(Black) connector each terminals at the wire side.
CONNECTION: Yellow – Yellow
STANDARD: 0.1 – 0.5 Ω (20°C/68°F) Y Y

Check for continuity between the alternator 3P (Black)

[1]
connector [1] each terminals at the wire side and
ground.
CONNECTION: Yellow – Ground
STANDARD: No continuity Y Y
Replace the stator if the resistance is out of Y
specification, or if any wire has continuity to ground.
For alternator/starter replacement (page 13-13).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21-9
 dummyhead

MEMO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dummytext

22. LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

SYSTEM LOCATION···································22-2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/EOP

SWITCH····················································· 22-19
SERVICE INFORMATION ···························22-3
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR····························· 22-21
TROUBLESHOOTING·································22-4
PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH
HEADLIGHT ················································22-5 (NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 22-22

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT·································22-6 IGNITION SWITCH···································· 22-24

POSITION LIGHT ········································22-7 HANDLEBAR SWITCHES ························ 22-25

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT ···················22-8 BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ··························· 22-26

COMBINATION METER······························22-8 CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ···· 22-26

SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR··················22-16 NEUTRAL SWITCH ·································· 22-27

TACHOMETER··········································22-18 SIDESTAND SWITCH ······························· 22-28

HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE HORN ························································ 22-29

INDICATOR/ECT SENSOR·······················22-18
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY ············· 22-30

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-1
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
SYSTEM LOCATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
HORN
ECT SENSOR
CLUTCH SWITCH
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD RELAY

EOP SWITCH

NEUTRAL SWITCH

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

VS SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
HORN
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
ECT SENSOR
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD RELAY

EOP SWITCH

NEUTRAL SWITCH

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

VS SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

22-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

• Note the following when replacing the halogen headlight bulb.

– Wear clean gloves while replacing the bulb. Do not put fingerprints on the headlight bulb, as they may create hot spots on the
bulb and cause it to fail.
– If you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol to prevent its early failure.
• Be sure to install the dust cover after replacing the headlight bulb.
• A halogen headlight bulb becomes very hot while the headlight is ON, and remains hot for a while after it is turned OFF. Be sure
to let it cool down before servicing.
• Check the battery condition before performing any inspection that requires proper battery voltage.
• Use an electric heating element to heat the water/coolant mixture for the ECT sensor inspection. Keep flammable materials
away from the electric heating element. Wear protective clothing, insulated gloves and eye protection.
• A continuity test can be made with the switches installed on the motorcycle.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bu = Blue G = Green P = Pink V = Violet Y = Yellow

Bl = Black Gr = Gray R = Red W = White

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Bulbs Headlight 12 V – 60/55 W
Position light 12 V – 5 W
Brake/tail/license light 12 V – 21/5 W
Turn signal light 12 V – 21 W x 4
Instrument light LED
Turn signal indicator LED
High beam indicator LED
Neutral indicator LED
Engine oil pressure indicator LED
High coolant temperature indicator LED
MIL LED
HISS indicator LED
ABS indicator (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) LED
Parking brake indicator (NC700XD/SD) LED
Fuse Main fuse 30 A
PGM-FI fuse 15 A
Sub fuse 15 A x 2, 7.5 A x 4
ABS fuse (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) 30 A x 2, 7.5 A
DCT fuse (NC700XD/SD) 30 A, 7.5 A
ECT sensor resistance 40°C (104°F) 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.1 – 0.2 kΩ
Fuel level sensor resistance Full 4–6Ω
Empty 80 – 83 Ω
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM Q'TY REMARKS
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Turn signal light mounting screw 4 6 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
Combination meter mounting 3 5 1.0 (0.1, 0.7)
screw
Combination meter back cover 4 3 0.3 (0.03, 0.2)
mounting screw (NC700S/SA/SD)
EOP switch 1 PT 1/8 18 (1.8, 13) Apply sealant to the threads.
Ignition switch mounting bolt 2 8 25 (2.5, 18) One way bolt; replace with a new
one.
Neutral switch 1 10 12 (1.2, 9)
Parking brake switch screw 1 4 1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
(NC700XD/SD)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-3
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
TROUBLESHOOTING
SPEED SENSOR/SPEEDOMETER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
The speedometer operation is abnormal
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse or sub fuse.
Is the fuse blown?
YES – Replace the fuse.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Is the battery in good condition?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Charge or replace the battery (page 21-6).
3. VS Sensor Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector terminals with the ignition switch turned ON.
CONNECTION: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD: Battery voltage
Is there Battery Voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Loose or poor contact of related terminals
• Open circuit in Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in Green/red wire
4. VS Sensor Signal Line Inspection
With the ignition switch OFF, check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
CONNECTION: Pink/green – Pink/green
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in Pink/green wire
5. VS Sensor Signal Inspection
Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Support the motorcycle using a hoist or other support to raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Measure the output voltage (sensor signal) at the speedometer with the ignition switch turned ON while
slowly turning the rear wheel by your hand.
CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD: Repeat 0 to 5 V
Is the voltage within specified value?
YES – Faulty combination meter
NO – Faulty VS sensor

22-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT
For headlight unit removal/installation.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 2-26)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 2-27)
BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700X/XA/
XD)
Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [1].
[3] [4]
Remove the dust cover [2].
Unhook the bulb retainer [3] and remove the headlight
[6]
bulb [4].
[5]

Avoid touching halogen headlight bulb. Finger prints

can create hot spots that cause a bulb to break.
Install a new bulb, while aligning its tabs with the slots
of the headlight unit. [2]
Hook the bulb retainer into the headlight unit groove.
Install the dust cover tightly against the headlight unit. [1]

Install the dust cover with its "TOP" mark [5] and arrow
mark [6] facing up.
Connect the headlight 3P (Black) connector.

BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700S/SA/

SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
[2]
Remove the dust cover [1].
Unhook the bulb retainer [2] and remove the headlight
bulb [3]. [5]

Avoid touching halogen headlight bulb. Finger prints

can create hot spots that cause a bulb to break.
[4]
Install a new bulb, while aligning its tabs with the slots
of the headlight unit.
Hook the bulb retainer into the headlight unit groove.
Install the dust cover tightly against the headlight unit.

Install the dust cover with its "TOP" mark [4] and arrow
mark [5] facing up.
Install the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).

[1] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-5
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove the screws [1] and turn signal light lens [2].
[2]
While pushing in the bulb [3], turn it counterclockwise to
remove it.
Replace the bulb with a new one.
Check the packing [4] is installed in position and is in
good condition, replace it with a new one if necessary.
Install the turn signal light lens and screw.
Tighten the screw securely.

[3]

[1] [4]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the front side cowl (page 2-24).
[1]
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [1], setting
plate [2] and turn signal light [3].
Remove the mounting rubber [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wires properly (page 1-25). [3]

TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

[2] [4]

FRONT (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
Disconnect the front turn signal light 3P connector [1].
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [2], setting
plate [3] and turn signal light [4].
Remove the mounting rubber [5]. [4]
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. [2]

Route the wires properly (page 1-25). [5]

TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft) [3] [1]

22-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REAR
Remove the tail light cover (page 2-10).
[4]
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [1], setting
plate [2] and turn signal light [3].
Remove the mounting rubber [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. [3]

Route the wires properly (page 1-25).

TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
[2] [1]

POSITION LIGHT
BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700X/XA/
XD)
Pull out the position light bulb socket [1].
[2]
Remove the bulb [2] from the socket, replace it with a
new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wires properly (page 1-25).

[1]

BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700S/SA/

SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
[1] [2]
Pull out the position light bulb socket [1].
Remove the bulb [2] from the socket, replace it with a
new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-7
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT
For brake/tail/license light removal/installation (page 2-
10).
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove the tail light cover (page 2-10).
[2]
Turn the bulb socket [1] counterclockwise and remove
it.
While pushing in the bulb [2], turn it counterclockwise to
remove it.
Replace the bulb with a new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

COMBINATION METER
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/
SA)

Check for loose or poor contact terminals at the

combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ",
check that the tachometer segment [1] move to full
scale and then tachometer segment go off.
If the tachometer segment does not show initial
function, check the combination meter power input line
(page 22-10).
If the power and ground lines are OK, replace the
combination meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following; [1]
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

22-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)

Check for loose or poor contact terminals at the

combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine
stop switch " ", the combination meter will show the
entire digital display and the tachometer segments [1]
will reduce from full scale to zero.
If the tachometer segment does not show initial
function, check the combination meter power input line
(page 22-10).
If the power and ground lines are OK, replace the
combination meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and [1]
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
[2] [5]
Remove the dust cover [1].
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [2].
Remove the screws [3], washer [4] and combination
meter [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Combination meter mounting screw:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

[3]/[4] [1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
[1] [2]
Remove the combination meter back cover mounting
screws [1] and combination meter back cover [2].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-9
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Remove the dust cover [1].
[1]/[2] [5]
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [2].
Remove the combination meter mounting screws [3],
washer [4] and combination meter [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Combination meter mounting screw:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Combination meter back cover mounting screw:
0.3 N·m (0.03 kgf·m, 0.2 lbf·ft)
[3]/[4]

POWER/GROUND LINE INSPECTION

Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
NC700X/XA/XD: [2] NC700S/SA/XD: [2]
Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2].
Check the following at the wire harness side connector
terminals of the combination meter.

[1] [1]

POWER INPUT LINE

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.

CONNECTION: Pink/blue (+) – Ground (–)

STANDARD: Battery voltage
P/Bu
There should be battery voltage with the ignition switch
turned ON.
If there is no voltage, check the following:
– Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
– Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ILLUMI/STOP/HORN)

BACK-UP VOLTAGE LINE

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
CONNECTION: Red/white (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD: Battery voltage
R/W
There should be battery voltage at all times.
If there is no voltage, check the following:
– Open circuit in the Red/white wire
– Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN)

22-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
GROUND LINE
Check for continuity at the combination meter 16P
[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.

CONNECTION: Green/red – Ground

There should be continuity.
G/R
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Green/
red wire.

TXD/RXD LINE INSPECTION

NC700X/XA/S/SA
If the MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] are
[1] [2]
stay on and tachometer, high coolant temperature
indicator and HISS indicator does not come on with the
ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " ",
check the combination meter TXD/RXD line (page 22-
12).

If the engine stop switch turned " ", the combination

meter indicate same operation.

NC700XD/SD
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop switch
[1] [2]
" " and check the combination meter.
The TXD/RXD line is abnormal if the combination meter
shows following:
– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on.

If the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine stop

switch turned " ", the same condition will occur.
Check the combination meter TXD/RXD line (page 22-
12). [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-11
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
MIL AND ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR ARE
STAY ON, TACHOMETER, HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AND HISS INDICATOR
DOES NOT COME ON AND SHIFT INDICATOR "–"
(NC700XD/SD) IS BLINKING (when the ignition
switch turned ON)

• Check the following items before starting the

inspection:
– Check for loose or poor contact on the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector and
ECM/PCM 33P connector, then recheck the DTC.
– Inspect the sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Combination Meter Serial Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NC700X/XA/XD: [2] NC700S/SA/SD: [2]
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2].

[1] [1]

Remove the following:

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Center cross plate (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-32)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]

[1]

NC700XD/SD:

[2]

22-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Check for continuity between the combination meter
[1]
16P (Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Red/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES – Short circuit in Red/blue wire R/Bu
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

2. Combination Meter Serial Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Check for continuity between the combination meter
[1] [2]
16P (Gray) connector [1] and ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/blue – Red/blue

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
R/Bu
Is there continuity? R/Bu
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in Red/blue wire

3. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage

Inspection
Connect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " while pushing and holding combination meter A
button [1] and B button [2] over 10 seconds.

The combination meter enters the communication

diagnostic mode.

[1] [2]

Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P

[1]
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
R/Bu
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – • Replace the combination meter
assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-13
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
4. ECM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the ECM/PCM 33P connector.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green

TOOL:
SCS connector [2] 070PZ-ZY30100
[1] [2]

Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.

The ECM/PCM enters the communication

diagnostic mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P

[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
Does the standard voltage exist? R/Bu
YES – Inspect the combination meter (page 22-
10).
NO – Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

COMBINATION METER DIGITAL

CLOCK SET PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Push and hold both the combination meter A button [1]
and B button [2] until the minute digits [3] indicate "1",
"2" or "3".

The combination meter enter the back light setting

mode.

[1] [3] [2]

22-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Push the A button, then hour digits [1] start blinking.

The combination meter enter the clock setting mode.

[1]

Push the B button until the desired hour [1] and AM/PM
are displayed.

Push and hold to advance the hour fast.

[1]

Push the A button, then the minute digits [1] start

blinking.

[1]

Push the B button until the desired minute [1] is

displayed.

Push and hold to advance the minute fast.

Push the A button, then digital clock is set.
Push the A button and B button.

The combination meter return to the normal mode.

[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-15
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/
SA)
Perform the combination meter system inspection
NC700X/XA: [2] NC700S/SA: [2]
(page 22-8).
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1].
If the system fails the inspection, shift the transmission
into neutral, the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [2] is connected, then turn the ignition switch
ON.

[1] [1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P

[1]
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD: Repeat 0 to 5 V
Slowly turn the rear wheel by hand.
P/G G/R
There should be 0 to 5 V pulse voltage.
– If pulse voltage appears, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA (page 22-9)
– If pulse voltage does not appear, check for open or
short circuit in Pink/green wire.
If the Pink/green wire is OK, check for the VS sensor
signal line (page 22-17)

SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)

If the speedometer does not operate, check the
NC700XD: [2] NC700SD: [2]
following:
– Combination meter system inspection (page 22-9)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 11, check the VS
sensor system (page 4-51)
– Shift indicator "–" blinking: If the shift indicator "–"
blinks 66, check the VS sensor system (page 12-
89).
If the above items are OK, check the VS sensor line as
follows:
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2]. [1] [1]

22-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop switch
[1]
" ".
Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
P/G G/R
Slowly turn the rear wheel by hand.
There should be 0 to 5 V pulse voltage.
– If pulse voltage appears, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)
– If pulse voltage does not appear, the Pink/green wire
has an open circuit.

VS SENSOR SIGNAL LINE

INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
NC700X/XA: [1] NC700S/SA: [1]
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1].

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between the combination meter

[2] [1]
16P (Gray) connector [1] and VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Pink/green – Pink/green
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Pink/
green wire and loose contact of the wire harness
connectors. P/G P/G

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-17
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
VS SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
[1]
Remove the bolt [2] and VS sensor [3].
Remove the O-ring [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the O-ring with a new one.

• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

[2] [3] [4]

TACHOMETER
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the tachometer does not operate, check the following:
– Combination meter system inspection
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– CKP sensor
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 5-7)
– NC700XD/SD (page 5-8)
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)

HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE

INDICATOR/ECT SENSOR
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the high coolant temperature indicator does not
[1]
operate properly, check the following:
– Combination meter system inspection
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 7, check the ECT
sensor system (page 4-45).
– ECT sensor (page 22-19)
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on,
tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on and shift indicator "–"
(NC700XD/SD) is blinking, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

22-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
ECT SENSOR UNIT INSPECTION
Remove the ECT sensor (page 4-64).
Suspend the ECT sensor [1] in a pan of coolant (50 –
50 mixture) on an electric heating element and measure
the resistance through the sensor as the coolant heats
up.
• Soak the ECT sensor in coolant up to its threads
with at least 40 mm (1.6 in) from the bottom of the
pan to the bottom of the sensor.
• Keep the temperature constant for 3 minutes before
testing. A sudden change of temperature will result
in incorrect readings. Do not let the thermometer or
ECT sensor touch the pan.

[1]

Measure the resistance between the ECT sensor

terminals [1].

Temperature 40°C (104°F) 100°C (212°F)

Resistance 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ 0.1 – 0.2 kΩ
Replace the ECT sensor if it is out of specification.

[1]

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/

EOP SWITCH
SYSTEM INSPECTION
The engine oil pressure indicator [1] comes on when
[1]
the ignition switch is turned ON, then goes off when the
engine starts.
If the engine oil pressure indicator does not come on
with the ignition switch turned ON, check the
combination meter system inspection.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
The engine oil pressure indicator does not go out when
the engine running, check the following:
– Engine oil level (page 3-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 87, check the EOP
switch system (page 4-62)
– Engine oil pressure (page 9-6)
– EOP switch line (page 22-20)
– Replace the EOP switch, and recheck (page 22-20).
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-19
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
EOP SWITCH LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the EOP switch connector
terminal and ground.
CONNECTION: Light green – Ground Lg
– If there is continuity, the Light green wire has a short
circuit.
– If there is no continuity, replace the ECM/PCM with
a known good one, and recheck.

• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:

– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6) [1]
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)

EOP SWITCH REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
[2]
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Remove the EOP switch [2] from the crankcase.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

• Apply sealant to the EOP switch threads.

• Route the wires and hoses properly (page 1-25).
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).

[1]

22-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
Remove the fuel pump unit (page 7-11).
Connect the ohmmeter to the fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [1] terminals.
CONNECTION: Red/black – Black/white
Inspect the resistance of the float [2] at the top and
bottom positions.
FULL EMPTY
Resistance 4–6Ω 80 – 83 Ω

[1] [2]

[1]

Bl/W R/Bl

FUEL METER INSPECTION

If the fuel meter blinks as shown [1] with ignition switch
[1]
is ON, perform the inspection as follow:
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector (page 22-8).
Disconnect the fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector
(page 7-10).
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [2] and fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [3] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Black/green – Black/green
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Black/
green wire and loose contact of the wire harness
connectors. [2] [3]

Bl/G Bl/G

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-21
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH
(NC700XD/SD)
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the parking brake indicator [1] does not operate
[1]
properly, check the combination meter system
inspection (page 22-9).

If the combination meter system inspection is OK,

check the parking brake switch line as follows:
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].
Connect the connector terminals with a jumper wire.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
The parking brake indicator should come on.
If the indicator does not come on, check for open circuit
in the Black, Brown and Green wires.
If the indicator comes on, check the parking brake
switch (page 22-22). [1]

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

INSPECTION
Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors.
Check for continuity between the parking brake switch
terminals [1].
There should be continuity with the parking brake lever
pulled, and no continuity with the lever released.
If the parking brake switch does not operate properly,
replace the switch (page 22-23).

[1]

22-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the parking brake lever holder cover [1].
[1]

Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].

[2] [3]
Remove the parking brake switch screw [2], parking
brake switch [3] and switch spring [4].

[4]
[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply grease to the parking brake switch spring

sliding surface.
• Align the parking brake lever holder cover hole with
the holder boss.

TORQUE:
Parking brake switch screw:
1.2 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.9 lbf·ft)

Align

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-23
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
IGNITION SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
NC700X/XA: NC700S/SA/SD:
2-14).
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
ignition switch connector in each switch position.
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
– NC700X (page 24-2)
– NC700XA (page 24-3)
– NC700XD (page 24-4) [1] [1]
– NC700S (page 24-5)
– NC700SA (page 24-6)
– NC700SD (page 24-7) NC700XD:

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the top bridge (page 17-33).
[1]
Remove the ignition switch mounting bolts [1] and
ignition switch [2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Ignition switch mounting bolt:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

Replace the ignition switch mounting bolts with new

ones.

[2]

22-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
HANDLEBAR SWITCHES
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
NC700X/XA: NC700S/SA:
2-14).
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the following:
– Right handlebar switch 8P (Blue) connector [1]
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [2]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [3]
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
handlebar switch connector in each switch position.
[1] [1]
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
NC700XD: NC700SD: [1]
– NC700X (page 24-2)
[2]
– NC700XA (page 24-3)
– NC700XD (page 24-4)
– NC700S (page 24-5)
– NC700SA (page 24-6)
– NC700SD (page 24-7)

[1] [3]

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES

Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
NC700X/XA: NC700S/SA:
2-14).
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the following:
– Left handlebar switch 10P (Gray) connector [1]
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [2]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [3]
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
handlebar switch connector in each switch position.
[1] [1]
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
NC700XD: NC700SD: [1]
– NC700X (page 24-2)
[1]
– NC700XA (page 24-3)
– NC700XD (page 24-4)
– NC700S (page 24-5)
– NC700SA (page 24-6)
– NC700SD (page 24-7)

[2] [3]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-25
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
FRONT
Disconnect the front brake light switch connectors and
check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity with the brake lever applied,
and there should be no continuity with the brake lever
released.

REAR
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Disconnect the rear brake light switch 3P (Black)
connector [1] and check for continuity between the
terminals.
There should be continuity with the brake pedal applied,
and there should be no continuity with the brake pedal
released.

[1]

CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Disconnect the clutch switch connectors and check for
continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity with the clutch lever applied,
and there should be no continuity with the clutch lever
released.

22-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
NEUTRAL SWITCH
INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Make sure that the neutral indicator [1] come on with
[1]
the ignition switch turned ON and transmission is in
neutral.
If the neutral indicator does not come on, inspect as
follows:

Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).

Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Check for continuity between the switch terminal and
engine ground.
There should be continuity with the transmission is in
neutral, and no continuity when the transmission is into
gear.
If the continuity inspection is normal, open circuit in
Light green wire between the neutral switch connector
and neutral diode or Light green/red wire between the
neutral diode and neutral indicator.
If the continuity inspection is abnormal, replace the [1]
neutral switch (page 22-28).

INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)
Make sure that the neutral indicator [1] comes on when
[1]
the ignition switch is turned ON and transmission is in
neutral and goes off when the transmission is in gear.
If the neutral indicator does not operate properly, check
the shift indicator blinking with the ignition switch ON
and the engine stop switch " ".
If DTC 52 is indicated with the shift indicator, check the
neutral switch system (page 12-78).
If the shift indicator does not indicate any DTC and the
neutral indicator does not light with the transmission in
neutral, check for open circuit in the Light green wire
between the combination meter and neutral switch.
If the Light green wire is OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-27
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
[2]/[3]
Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Remove the neutral switch [2] and sealing washer [3].
Install the neutral switch with a new sealing washer.
Tighten the neutral switch to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).
[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the shift control motor/reduction gears (page
[2] [3]
12-109).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Remove the neutral switch [2] and sealing washer [3]
from the crankcase.
Install the neutral switch with a new sealing washer and
tighten it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Install the reduction gears/shift control motor (page 12-
110).
[1]

SIDESTAND SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the following:
[1] [1]
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector G G/W
[1].
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector switch side.
CONNECTION: Green/white – Green
Continuity should exist only when the sidestand is up.

22-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
[1]
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/XD) (page
2-15)
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector
[1].
Remove the sidestand switch wire clamp [2].

[2]

Remove the wire band [1] and sidestand switch wire

NC700X/XA/S/SA: [1] NC700XD/SD: [1]
clamp [2].

[2] [2]

Remove the sidestand switch mounting bolt [1] and

[2] Align
sidestand switch [2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the sidestand switch mounting bolt with a

new one.
• Align the sidestand switch tab with the sidestand
hole.
• Align the sidestand switch groove with the return
spring holding pin.
• Route the wire properly (page 1-25).
[1]

Align

HORN
INSPECTION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[2]
Disconnect the wire connectors [1] from the horn [2].
Connect the 12 V battery to the horn terminal directly.
The horn is normal if it sounds when the 12 V battery is
connected across the horn terminals.

Battery
[1]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-29
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[4] [2]
Disconnect the wire connectors [1] from the horn [2].
Remove the bolt [3] and horn.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Install the horn against the frame stopper [4].

• Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[3] [1]

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

SYSTEM INSPECTION
Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-
[1]
16).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Release the turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the
luggage box.
Disconnect the turn signal/hazard relay 4P connector
[2] from the turn signal/hazard relay.
Check the following at the wire harness side 4P
connector.

[2]

1. Battery Power Source Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Measure the voltage between the 4P connector [1]
[1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Red/white (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
R/W
NO – • Open circuit in the Red/white wire
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN)

22-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
2. Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the 4P connector [1]
[1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Green – Ground
G
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in the Green wire

3. Turn Signal/hazard Switch Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Connect the 4P connector [1] terminals with a
[1]
jumper wire.
Connection: Red/white – Gray
Operate the turn signal switch or push the hazard
switch.
Gr
Do the turn signal light illuminate?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
R/W
NO – • Open circuit in the Gray wire
• Faulty turn signal switch or hazard
switch (left handlebar switch)
• Faulty turn signal light circuits

4. Ignition Switch Power Source Line Open Circuit

Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON.
[1]
Measure the voltage between the 4P connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Ground (–)
P/Bu
Is there battery voltage?
YES – System is normal, replace the turn signal/
hazard relay.
NO – • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ILLUMI/STOP/
HORN)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22-31
 dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-
[1]
16).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).
Release the turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the
luggage box.
Disconnect the turn signal/hazard relay 4P connector
[2] and remove the turn signal/hazard relay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[2]

22-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

23. IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SYSTEM LOCATION···································23-2 TROUBLESHOOTING ································ 23-8

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ····································23-2 HISS INDICATOR ····································· 23-10

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························23-3 ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/

PCM (NC700XD/SD) ································· 23-11
KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES ·······23-3
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER························ 23-12
DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION ·············23-6

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-1
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SYSTEM LOCATION
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

ENGINE STOP SWITCH

IGNITION SWITCH/
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER MAIN FUSE 30 A

BATTERY

ECM/PCM

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

FUSE BOX

CKP SENSOR

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
CLOCK/TURN
MAIN 30 A 7.5 A
HISS
R R/W
INDICATOR
Bl Bl ENGINE STOP
SWITCH
R
BATTERY W/Y Bl/R
G/R
IGNITION ENG STOP 8P
SWITCH 7.5 A (BLUE)
R/Bl W/Y
CKP
SENSOR

Y W/Y

G/Y P 2P
Bu Y/R (RED)
4P
(BLACK) P G/Y R/Bu G/O
Bl: Black O/Bu Y/R Y/R Bu Bl Y G G/O
Bu: Blue G/O P
G: Green
O: Orange
P: Pink IMMOBILIZER
R: Red RECEIVER ECM/PCM
W: White
Y: Yellow

23-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When checking the immobilizer system (HISS), follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 23-8).
• Keep the immobilizer key away from the other vehicle's immobilizer key when using it. The jamming of the key code signal may
occur and the proper operation of the system will be obstructed.
• The key has built-in electronic part (transponder). Do not drop and strike the key against a hard material object, and do not leave
the key on the dashboard in the car, etc. where the temperature will rise. Do not leave the key in the water for a prolonged time
such as by washing the clothes.
• The ECM/PCM as well as the transponder keys must be replaced if all transponder keys have been lost.
• The system does not function with a duplicated key code is registered into the transponder with the immobilizer system (HISS).
• The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
• Do not modify the immobilizer system as it can cause the system failure. (The engine cannot be started.)
• For ignition system inspection (page 5-6).
• For ignition switch servicing (page 22-24).
• For engine stop switch inspection (page 22-25).
• For bank angle sensor inspection (page 4-65).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.

Bl = Black G = Green P = Pink W = White

Bu = Blue O = Orange R = Red Y = Yellow

KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES

When the key has been lost, or additional spare key is required:
1. Obtain a new transponder key.
2. Grind the key in accordance with the shape of the original key.
3. Apply 12 V battery voltage to the CKP sensor lines of the ECM/PCM using the special tool (page 23-6).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with the original key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code of the original key recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds, then it blinks four times repeatedly.

ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registrations of all key except the original key inserted in the
ignition switch are cancelled. (Registration of the lost key or spare key is cancelled.)
The spare key must be registered again.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON with a new key or the spare key. (Never use the key registered in previous steps.) The indicator
comes on for two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.

ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The new key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.

• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
• Keep the other transponder key away from the immobilizer receiver more than 50 mm (2.0 in).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-3
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

8. Repeat the steps 6 and 7 when you continuously register the other new key.
The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, remove the inspection adaptor and connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
10.Turn the ignition switch ON with the registered key.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
11.Check that the engine can be started using all registered key.

When the ignition switch is faulty:

1. Obtain a new ignition switch assembly.
2. Remove the ignition switch (page 22-24).
3. Apply 12 V battery voltage to the CKP sensor lines of the ECM/PCM using the special tool (page 23-6).
4. Set the original (registered) key near the immobilizer receiver so that the transponder in the key can communicate with the
receiver.
5. Connect a new ignition switch to the wire harness, then turn it to ON with a new transponder key. (keep the ignition switch away
from the receiver) and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code of the original key recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
6. Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.

ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registrations of all key except the original key set near the receiver
are cancelled.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
8. Install the ignition switch (page 22-24).
9. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key. The indicator comes on for two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.

ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The first key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.

• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
10.Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal.
11.Turn the ignition switch ON (with the first key registered in step 9). The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds then it goes off.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
12.Turn the ignition switch OFF and connect the red clip of the inspection adaptor to the battery positive (+) terminal.
13.Turn the ignition switch ON (with the first key registered in step 9). The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code if the first key is recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).

23-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

14.Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registration of the original key used in step 4 is cancelled.
15.Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
16.Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. (Never use the key registered in previous step.) The indicator comes on for
two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The second key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
• Keep the other transponder key away from the immobilizer receiver more than 50 mm (2.0 in).
17.Repeat the steps 15 and 16 when you continuously register the other new key.
The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
18.Turn the ignition switch OFF, remove the inspection adaptor and connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
19.Turn the ignition switch ON with the registered key.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
20.Check that the engine can be started using all registered key.

When all keys have been lost:

1. Obtain a new ECM/PCM and new key set.
2. Replace the ignition switch with a new one (page 22-24).
3. Replace the ECM/PCM with a new one (page 4-67).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then
it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The first key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then it blinks four times
repeatedly.
• The second key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
• The system (ECM/PCM) will not enter the normal mode unless the two keys are registered in ECM/PCM.
• The third new key cannot be continuously registered. When it is necessary to register the third key, follow the procedures "When
the key has been lost, or additional key is required" (page 23-3).
8. Check that the engine can be started using all registered keys.
9. Replace the remaining key set parts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-5
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

When the ECM/PCM is faulty:
1. Obtain a new ECM/PCM and two new transponder keys.
2. Grind the keys in accordance with the shape of the original key (or use the key number plate when all key have been lost).
3. Replace the ECM/PCM with a new one (page 4-67).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then
it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The first key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then it blinks four times
repeatedly.
• The second key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
• The system (ECM/PCM) will not enter the normal mode unless the two keys are registered in ECM/PCM.
• The third new key cannot be continuously registered. When it is necessary to register the third key, follow the procedures "When
the key has been lost, or additional key is required" (page 23-3).
8. Check that the engine can be started using all registered keys.

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION

Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
[2]
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].
Connect the inspection adaptor [2] to the wire side connector.
Connect the Red clip of the adaptor to the 12 V battery [3] positive (+)
terminal and Black clip to the negative (–) terminal.
TOOL:
Inspection adaptor 07XMZ-MBW0101

[1] [3]

Turn the ignition switch ON with the properly registered key and engine stop
[1]
switch " ".
The HISS indicator [1] will come on for approx. ten seconds then it will start
blinking to indicate the diagnostic code if the system is abnormal.
The blinking frequency is repeated.
The HISS indicator remains on when the system is normal. (The system is
in the normal mode and the diagnostic code does not appear.)

23-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

DIAGNOSTIC CODE
When the system (ECM/PCM) enters the diagnostic mode from the normal mode:
BLINKING PATTERN SYMPTOM PROBLEM PROCEDURE
ECM/PCM data is Faulty ECM/PCM Replace the ECM/PCM.
ON abnormal.
OFF
10 sec.

Code signals Faulty immobilizer Follow the troubleshooting (page

cannot send or receiver or wire 23-8).
receive. harness

Identification code Jamming by the Keep the other vehicle's

is disagree. other transponder transponder key away from the
immobilizer receiver more than 50
mm (2.0 in).

Secret code is
disagree.

When the system (ECM/PCM) enters the diagnostic mode from the registration mode:
BLINKING PATTERN SYMPTOM PROBLEM PROCEDURE
Registration is The key is already Use a new key or cancelled key.
ON overlapped. registered
OFF properly.

10 sec.

Code signals Communication Follow the troubleshooting (page

cannot send or fails 23-8).
receive.

Registration is The key is already Use a new key.

impossible. registered on the
other system.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-7
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

TROUBLESHOOTING
The immobilizer indicator comes on for approx. two seconds then it goes off, when the ignition switch is turned
ON with the properly registered key and the HISS functions normally. If there is any problem or the properly
registered key is not used, the indicator will remains on.
Immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned ON
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN) and/or sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP).
Is the fuse blown?
YES – Replace the fuse.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.
2. Combination Meter Inspection
Check that the neutral indicator come on with the ignition switch turned ON.
Is the indicator come on?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. Combination Meter Power Input Line Inspection
Check the power input line (Red/white wire) at the combination meter 16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is the voltage specified value?
YES – Faulty combination meter.
NO – Open circuit in Red/white wire
4. TXD/RXD Line Inspection between The ECM/PCM and Combination Meter
Check the TXD/RXD line (Red/blue wire) between the ECM/PCM 33P connector and combination meter
16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is there continuity?
NO – Open circuit in Red/blue wire
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
5. Power Input Line Inspection at The ECM/PCM Connector
Check the power input line (Black/red and Black wire) at the ECM/PCM 33P connector (page 23-11).
Is the voltage specified value?
YES – GO TO STEP 6.
NO – Open circuit in Black/red and Black wire
6. Ground Line Inspection at The ECM/PCM Connector
Check the ground line (Green/orange and Green wire) at the ECM/PCM 33P connector (page 23-11).
Is there continuity?
YES – • Loose or poor contact of the ECM/PCM 33P connector
• Faulty ECM/PCM
NO – • Open circuit in Green/orange wire
• Open circuit in Green wire

Immobilizer indicator remains on with the ignition switch turned ON

1. Immobilizer Receiver Jamming Inspection
Check that there is any metal obstruction or the other vehicle‘s transponder key near the immobilizer
receiver and key.
Is there any metal obstruction or the other transponder key?
YES – Remove it and recheck.
NO – GO TO STEP 2.

23-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

2. First Transponder Key Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON with the spare transponder key and check the immobilizer indicator.
The indicator should came on for 2 seconds then go off.
Is the indicator go off?
YES – Faulty first transponder key
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. Diagnostic Code Inspection
Perform the diagnostic code indication procedure (page 23-6).
Check that the immobilizer indicator comes on then it starts blinking.
Is the indicator brinks or stay lit?
BRINKS–Read the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
STAY LIT–GO TO STEP 4.
4. TXD/RXD Line Inspection between The ECM/PCM and Combination Meter
Check the TXD/RXD line (Red/blue wire) between the ECM/PCM 33P connector and combination meter
16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 5.
NO – Open circuit in Red/blue wire
5. CKP sensor Line Inspection
Check the CKP sensor lines (Yellow, White/yellow and Green/orange wires) between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector (page 23-11).
Is there continuity?
YES – • Open circuit in Yellow wire
• Open circuit in White/yellow and/or Green/orange wire
NO – Faulty ECM/PCM
Diagnostic code is indicated (Code signals cannot send or receive)
1. Immobilizer Receiver Power Input Line Inspection
Check the power input line (Yellow/red wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
NO – Open or short circuit in Yellow/red wire
2. Immobilizer Receiver Ground Line Inspection
Check the ground line (Green/yellow wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there continuity?
YES – GO TO STEP 3.
NO – Open circuit in Green/yellow wire
3. Immobilizer Receiver Signal Line Inspection 1
Check the signal line (Pink wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES – GO TO STEP 4.
NO – Open or short circuit in Pink wire
4. Immobilizer Receiver Signal Line Inspection 2
Check the signal line (Blue wire) between the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector and ECM/PCM
33P connector (page 23-12).
Is there continuity?
YES – • Short circuit in Blue wire
• Faulty immobilizer receiver.
NO – Open circuit in Blue wire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-9
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

HISS INDICATOR
INSPECTION

If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on

and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on and shift indicator "–"
(NC700XD/SD) is blinking, inspect the TXD/RXD line.
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
NC700X/XA/XD: [2] NC700S/SA/SD: [2]
Perform the following inspections with the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] connected.

[1] [1]

POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION

Measure the voltage between the combination meter
[1]
16P (Gray) connector terminals.
CONNECTION: Red/white (+) – Green/red (–)
There should be battery voltage at all times.

R/W G/R

TXD/RXD LINE INSPECTION

Disconnect the following:
[2] [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA) [1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector. R/Bu
R/Bu
CONNECTION: Red/blue – Red/blue

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
There should be continuity.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire harness.

23-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM
(NC700XD/SD)
INSPECTION
NC700X/XA/S/SA: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
14).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].
Perform the following inspections at the wire harness
side connector of the ECM.

[1]
NC700XD/SD: Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 2-
NC700XD/SD:
19).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Perform the following inspections at the wire harness
side connector of the PCM.

[1]

POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
[1]
Measure the voltage between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] terminal and ground.
CONNECTION: Black (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD: Battery voltage

TOOL: Bl
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
There should be battery voltage.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-11
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
[1]
connector [1] terminals and ground.

CONNECTION: Green/orange – Ground

Green – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
G/O G
There should be continuity at all times.

CKP SENSOR LINE INSPECTION

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1]
[2]
(page 23-6).
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] and CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector G/O
terminals.
CONNECTION: Yellow – Yellow G/O
Green/orange – Green/orange
Y
TOOL: Y
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
There should be continuity between the same color wire
terminals.
[1]

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
INSPECTION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
NC700X/XA: NC700S/SA/SD:
2-14).
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black)
connector [1].

[1] [1]

NC700XD:

[1]

23-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
[1]
Measure the voltage between the immobilizer receiver
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.
CONNECTION: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Y/R
There should be approx. 5 V.

GROUND LINE INSPECTION

Check for continuity between the immobilizer receiver
[1]
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.

CONNECTION: Green/yellow – Ground

There should be continuity at all times. G/Y

SIGNAL LINE INSPECTION

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
[1]
Measure the voltage between the immobilizer receiver
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.
CONNECTION: Pink (+) – Ground (–)
There should be approx. 5 V. P

Disconnect the ECM/PCM 33P connector [1] (page 23-

[2] [1]
11).
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black)
connector [2] terminals at the wire side.
CONNECTION: Blue – Blue
Bu
TOOL:
Bu
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
There should be continuity.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

23-13
 dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
[1]
connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire side.

CONNECTION: Blue – Ground

TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
Bu
There should be no continuity.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the top bridge (page 17-33).
[2]
Remove the screws [1] and the immobilizer receiver [2].
Route the receiver Install a new receiver and tighten the screws.
wire properly (page
Install the top bridge (page 17-38).
1-25).

[1]

REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR PROBLEM

Replacement parts
Ignition
Problem Transponder Immobilizer *Accessory
ECM/PCM switch Key set
Key receiver lock and key
assembly
One Key has been
lost, or additional
spare key is
required
All key has been
lost
ECM/PCM is faulty
Immobilizer
receiver is faulty
Ignition switch is
faulty
*Accessory lock is
faulty

*Accessory lock means the luggage box lid lock and seat lock.

23-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

24. WIRING DIAGRAM

NC700X························································24-2 NC700S ······················································· 24-5

NC700XA ·····················································24-3 NC700SA····················································· 24-6

NC700XD ·····················································24-4 NC700SD····················································· 24-7

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

24-1
 INDEX
dummytext

INDEX
ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ·································20-5 CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY ········································· 14-28
A

ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ···20-12 CRANKCASE BREATHER············································· 3-8

ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE INDEX ··············20-10 CRANKCASE SEPARATION ······································· 14-7
ABS MODULATOR ·····················································20-29 CRANKPIN BEARING ················································ 15-11
ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM ·············································20-3 CRANKSHAFT ····························································· 15-5
ABS SYSTEM LOCATION············································20-2 CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST ····························· 10-5
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING········································20-15 CYLINDER HEAD······················································· 10-16
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION················20-7 CYLINDER HEAD COVER··········································· 10-5
AIR CLEANER ································································3-7 DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ································ 12-8
D

AIR CLEANER HOUSING ············································7-14 DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOCATION ···················· 12-6
AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD) ········································2-13 DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL)····························· 12-118
ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL ································21-9 DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ······················ 12-5
ALTERNATOR COVER ················································13-5 DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM············································· 12-7
AT/MT MODE SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING ·········12-96 DCT TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ············· 12-11
BALANCER·································································14-26 DELAY VALVE ··························································· 20-28
B

BANK ANGLE SENSOR ···············································4-65 DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION ······························ 23-6

BATTERY······································································21-6 DRIVE CHAIN······························································· 3-16
BATTERY BOX ·····························································2-31 DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER················································· 3-20
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700S/SA)·····················2-4 DTC INDEX
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700SD)························2-5 DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700X/XA)·····················2-2 (NC700XD/SD)······················································· 12-15
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700XD)························2-3 PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-15
BRAKE FLUID·······························································3-21 DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700X/S)···································································19-8 (NC700XD/SD)······················································· 12-20
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-21
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ················································19-11 DUAL CLUTCH························································· 12-105
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM (NC700XD/SD)
E

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES·······························22-26 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ···························· 23-11

MAINTENANCE ·······················································3-24 PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-67
BRAKE LOCK OPERATION (NC700XD/SD) ···············3-24 ECT SENSOR ······························································ 4-64
BRAKE PAD/DISC ······················································19-16 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ······························· 1-86
BRAKE PADS WEAR ···················································3-22 ENGINE IDLE SPEED·················································· 3-15
BRAKE PEDAL ···························································19-37 ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ··········· 16-15
BRAKE SYSTEM ··························································3-23 ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)·················· 16-21
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT ·····································22-8 ENGINE OIL ································································· 3-12
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT COVER ···2-10 ENGINE OIL FILTER···················································· 3-13
CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING ···································1-25 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/
C

CAM CHAIN TENSIONER ··········································10-11 EOP SWITCH ····························································· 22-19

CAMSHAFT ································································10-13 ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ····················· 16-5
CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)·····························2-16 ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)···························· 16-9
CENTER CROSS PLATE ·············································2-32 EOT SENSOR ·························································· 12-118
CENTER SEAT COWL ···················································2-8 EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER·········································· 2-32
CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION ····························21-7 FAN CONT. RELAY······················································ 8-15
F

CKP SENSOR·······························································5-11 FLYWHEEL ·································································· 13-7

CLUTCH········································································11-7 FORK·········································································· 17-25
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR···········································12-117 FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700X/S) ····················· 19-26
CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING (PCM) ··················12-120 FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)····· 19-28
CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)·························17-42 FRONT FENDER·························································· 2-28
CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD)··························3-14 FRONT MASTER CYLINDER ···································· 19-20
CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······················22-26 FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD) ······················· 2-24
CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)························3-26 FRONT UNDER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ················· 2-25
COMBINATION METER ···············································22-8 FRONT WHEEL·························································· 17-20
COMPONENT LOCATION FUEL CUT RELAY ······················································· 4-64
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························13-2 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ·············································· 22-21
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE FUEL LINE ····································································· 3-5
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)···················································11-2 FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT·········································· 7-4
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ··········14-2 FUEL PUMP UNIT························································ 7-10
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························15-2 FUEL TANK ···································································· 7-8
25
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ·····································10-2 GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
G

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE

(NC700XD/SD) ·························································12-2 (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ················································ 11-16
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION·······················16-2 DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ···········17-2 (NC700XD/SD)····················································· 12-112
FUEL SYSTEM···························································7-2 GEARSHIFT PEDAL ·················································· 11-19
HYDRAULIC BRAKE················································19-2 GRAB RAIL ···································································· 2-8
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION ·································18-2 GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD) ······································ 2-30
COOLANT REPLACEMENT···········································8-6 HANDLEBAR······························································ 17-10
H

COOLING SYSTEM······················································3-16 HANDLEBAR SWITCHES·········································· 22-25

25-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

INDEX
HEADLIGHT ································································· 22-5 REAR MASTER CYLINDER······································· 19-23
HEADLIGHT AIM·························································· 3-25 REAR WHEEL ······························································ 18-6
HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ······················ 2-27 REGULATOR/RECTIFIER············································ 21-8
HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
(NC700X/XA/XD)·························································· 2-26 CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY (NC700S/SA/SD) ···· 2-27 (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ·················································· 11-5
HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR/ECT DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
SENSOR ···································································· 22-18 (NC700XD/SD) ······················································· 12-97
HISS INDICATOR ······················································ 23-10 RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER (NC700XD/SD) ··········· 2-30
HORN ········································································· 22-29 ROCKER ARM······························································ 10-8
IACV ············································································· 7-22 SEAT COWL··································································· 2-9
I S

IGNITION COIL ···························································· 5-10 SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE INSPECTION··············· 4-17
IGNITION SWITCH ···················································· 22-24 SERVICE INFORMATION
IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION································· 5-6 ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························ 13-4
IGNITION TIMING ·························································· 5-9 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)······················· 20-4
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER········································· 23-12 BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-3
INJECTOR···································································· 7-20 CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
INNER UPPER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ·················· 2-25 (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ·················································· 11-3
KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES ························ 23-3 COOLING SYSTEM ··················································· 8-3
K

LEFT REAR COVER ···················································· 2-29 CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ·········· 14-4

L

LOWER COWL····························································· 2-28 CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························ 15-3

LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS ································· 1-23 CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ····································· 10-3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM······························ 9-2 DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
LUGGAGE BOX ··························································· 2-19 (NC700XD/SD) ························································· 12-3
LUGGAGE BOX LID····················································· 2-17 ELECTRIC STARTER ················································ 6-4
LUGGAGE BOX LID/HINGE ASSEMBLY···················· 2-19 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ······················ 16-4
MAIN JOURNAL BEARING·········································· 15-8 FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM··········· 2-6
M

MAINSHAFT SENSOR············································· 12-115 FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ··········· 17-8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE········································· 3-3 FUEL SYSTEM ·························································· 7-3
METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)·································· 2-24 HYDRAULIC BRAKE ··············································· 19-5
MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING··························· 4-63 IGNITION SYSTEM···················································· 5-4
MIL TROUBLESHOOTING ·········································· 4-43 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-3
MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES ································ 22-3
TROUBLESHOOTING ··············································· 12-95 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ··········································· 9-4
MODEL IDENTIFICATION ············································· 1-3 MAINTENANCE ························································· 3-2
MUD GUARD ······························································· 2-11 PGM-FI SYSTEM ······················································· 4-6
NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ························ 6-12 REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION ································· 18-4
N

NEUTRAL SWITCH···················································· 22-27 SERVICE RULES ··························································· 1-2

NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS ······································ 3-29 SHELTER/SIDE COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ················· 2-15
O2 SENSOR ································································· 4-69 SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION GEARS··· 12-109
O

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION ······································ 9-6 SHIFT INDICATOR TROUBLESHOOTING················ 12-61

OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······································ 9-6 SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR·························· 12-116
OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD)············································· 9-8 SHOCK ABSORBER ·················································· 18-14
OIL STRAINER····························································· 9-11 SHOCK LINKAGE······················································· 18-13
PARKING BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XD/SD) ············ 19-32 SHROUD/SIDE COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ·················· 2-14
P

PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD) ····································· 2-13

(NC700XD/SD) ··························································· 22-22 SIDESTAND ································································· 3-27
PARKING BRAKE LEVER (NC700XD/SD)················ 19-38 SIDESTAND SWITCH ················································ 22-28
PCV ············································································ 20-28 SINGLE SEAT ································································ 2-7
PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ····························· 4-8 SPARK PLUG ································································· 3-8
PGM-FI SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING··················· 4-7 SPECIFICATIONS ·························································· 1-6
PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM ········································· 4-4 SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR ·································· 22-16
PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION········································ 4-2 STARTER CLUTCH···················································· 13-10
PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION·········· 4-11 STARTER MOTOR························································· 6-8
PILLION SEAT ······························································· 2-7 STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD)······························· 6-12
PISTON/CYLINDER ··················································· 15-14 STARTER RELAY SWITCH ········································· 6-10
POSITION LIGHT························································· 22-7 STATOR ····································································· 13-13
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR ROTOR STEERING HEAD BEARINGS ····································· 3-30
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE STEERING STEM······················································· 17-33
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ················································ 11-15 SUSPENSION ······························································ 3-28
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) SWINGARM································································ 18-16
(NC700XD/SD) ···················································· 12-108 SYSTEM DIAGRAM
RADIATOR ····································································· 8-9 BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-2
R

RADIATOR COOLANT················································· 3-15 ELECTRIC STARTER ················································ 6-3

RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ······································ 8-14 IGNITION SYSTEM···················································· 5-3
REAR BRAKE CALIPER ············································ 19-30 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-2
REAR FENDER A ························································ 2-12 SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN ············································ 8-2
REAR FENDER B ························································ 2-12 SYSTEM LOCATION
REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type)······················· 2-10 BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-2

25-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 dummytext

INDEX
ELECTRIC STARTER ················································6-2 ELECTRIC STARTER················································ 6-5
IGNITION SYSTEM ····················································5-2 FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM ·········· 2-6
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)·······························23-2 FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ··········· 17-9
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES·································22-2 HYDRAULIC BRAKE ··············································· 19-7
SYSTEM TESTING·························································8-5 IGNITION SYSTEM ··················································· 5-5
TACHOMETER ···························································22-18 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-8
T

TECHNICAL FEATURES··············································1-87 LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES ································ 22-4

THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT HOUSING····················8-7 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ··········································· 9-5
THROTTLE BODY ························································7-15 REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION································· 18-5
THROTTLE OPERATION ···············································3-5 TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ·················································· 22-6
TORQUE VALUES························································1-15 TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY ······························· 22-30
TR SENSOR ·····························································12-115 VALVE CLEARANCE ··················································· 3-10
V

TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)···························14-8 WATER PUMP ····························································· 8-12

W

TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD) ·······························14-17 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR·········································· 20-24

TROUBLESHOOTING WHEELS/TIRES ··························································· 3-29
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························13-4 WINDSCREEN ····························································· 2-23
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM ·····························21-5 WIRING DIAGRAM
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE NC700S···································································· 24-5
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)···················································11-4 NC700SA ································································· 24-6
COOLING SYSTEM ···················································8-4 NC700SD ································································· 24-7
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ··········14-6 NC700X···································································· 24-2
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························15-4 NC700XA ································································· 24-3
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ·····································10-4 NC700XD ································································· 24-4

25-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine